PANZERFAUST World War 2 Platoon/Company Level Miniatures Wargame Rules

Fourth Edition

By Scott Nicholas and Peter Stone

© Copyright: 2004 Scott Nicholas and Peter Stone

2

Contents 3 Introduction Scales Time Scales Ground Scales Figure Scale Model Scale Scale Clarifications Adjusting these Rules to 1/300th Scale 4 Game Requirements Playing Area Equipment Terrain Pre-Game Setup Battle-Type (determine type of game) 5 Determine Objectives Choose Force Terrain Weather Fortifications Deploy Forces Programmed Orders 6 Sequence of Play

A: Write orders for Artillery & Aircraft - B: Determine Company HQ Movement Pips C: Declare incoming airstrikes – D: Declare Covering Fire Orders - E: Plot BZs for Mortar & Artillery Indirect Fire - F: Move all platoons alternately, starting with the lowest troop class - G: Resolve Infantry Fire & Direct Fire - H: Resolve Indirect Fire for Mortars & Artillery - I: Resolve Airstrikes & AA fire –

7 Command Radius & Movement Pips Command Radius to Parent HQ Company HQ Movement Pips Moving Units and Groups Compulsory Movement 8 Observation Observation Table Target Sizes 9 Muzzle Flashes Camouflage Arc of Vision Weather 10 Weather Effects Wind Night Fighting 11 Infantry Infantry Teams Infantry Squad/Section Cohesion Infantry, Heavy Weapons, Mortars and Guns Basing Table 12 Infantry Transports and Basing Infantry Movement Crew Set-up Times Infantry Point Values & Organisation Mounted Troops/Cavalry 13 Horse Teams Bikes Assault Engineers/Pioneers Ski Troops Prisoners Infantry Weapons Acquiring a Target - 14 Procedure for Firing with Infantry Weapons - Casualties 15 Infantry Teams/Weapons Fire Factors Table Infantry Teams/Weapons Notes 16 Infantry Casualty Table Infantry Weapons Direct Fire Variation Explanations 17 Gun Crews - AFVs Crews and Small Arms Fire Soft-skin Vehicles & Passengers - Speculative Fire (SF) - Covering Fire (CF) - Close Quarter Combat (Melee); 18 CQC Infantry Weapons Table Infantry Casualty Table 19 Fortifications Passengers CQC and Open Rear, Top, or Sides AFVs Infantry Anti-Tank Weapons 20 Infantry AT Weapons Table

No. of Shots Per Turn permitted of ‘One Shot’ weapons: Equipping Squads/Teams with Infantry AT Weapons Infantry AT Weapons Limitations Infantry AT Weapons Table Notes

21 Anti-Tank Magnetic Mines Anti-Personnel Rifle Grenades Molotov Cocktails

Flamethrowers vs AFVs 22 Troop Classes Troop Classes Morale Ratings Troop Class Point Value Modifiers Compulsory National Troop Class/Morale Rating Table 23 Morale Morale Checks Morale Test Procedure 24 Morale Reaction Table Rallying Regrouping 25 AFV & Vehicle Movement Vehicle Movement Restrictions Table 26 Softskin Vehicles Introduction 27 Motorised Guns Introduction Armored Charts Introduction AFV Organisation Turrets 28 Skirt & Spaced Armor AFV Fired Smoke Screens Tank Riders Direct Fire Target Acquisition 29 Anti-Tank Fire Anti-Tank Fire Procedure 30 Determine AFV Hit Location AFV/Gun Crew/Passenger Casualties Table ‘To-Hit’ Table for Direct Anti-Tank and Direct Area Fire Anti-Tank Fire Variations 31 Penetration Effects Table AA/Automatic Cannon Spigot Grenades Canister Rounds Direct Area Fire 32 Direct Area Fire Procedure Direct Area Fire Beaten Zone Radii Direct Area Fire Variations Direct Area Fire and Buildings 33 AFV Crews & Direct Area Fire Direct Area Fire Laid Smoke & White Phosphorous Anti-Tank, Field, & AA/Flak Guns Unlimbering and Limbering 34 Man-handling Limbered Fire Towing Vehicle Restrictions Gun Crews Onboard Gun/Howitzers Organisation Bore Sighting En Portee Gun Charts Introduction 35 Artillery: Indirect Fire Beaten Zones 36 Mortars FAO Forward Artillery Observers Company Commanders Calling Down Artillery Fire Indirect Fire Procedure 37 The Effect of Fire in the Beaten Zone Map Fire Counter-Battery Fire 38 Rockets Indirect Fire Laid Smoke Screen 39 Defenses Mines Fortifications 40 Demolition Charges Bridges and Bridge Laying Amphibious Operations 41 Airborne/Glider Operations 42 Aircraft 44 Army Lists 45 Army List Restrictions 46 Belgian Army Lists 48 British Army Lists 56 Finnish Army Lists 58 French Army Lists 62 German Army Lists 75 Hungarian Army Lists 78 Italian Army Lists 84 Japanese Army Lists 89 Polish Army Lists 92 Rumanian Army Lists 94 Soviet Army Lists 102 USA Europe Army Lists 109 USA Pacific Army Lists 112 Sample Force Lists 113 Miniature World Maker 114 QUICK REFERENCE CHARTS 121 COUNTER SHEET

Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Edition is a WWIIrules developed for use with 1/76th, 1/72nd or 15for two or more players. Panzerfaust has been dewith the strict policy of playability and simplicity wPrevious editions of Panzerfaust admittedly had concepts which were complex and increased plabeneficial results. Readers should therefore bedrawing any similarities with this current 4th Eattempted to streamline the mechanics to allow simpler handling of combat at this level. Significbrutal morale system that forces realistic reactionseffective command control system, and compulsodifferent nationalities. (We have gone back to usinand morale ratings as in our second edition of thesthey are compulsory and vary for each nation). Tclumsy and less effective Soviet formations maneuverable and accurate German forces.

Panzerfaust can appear to be rather daplayer, who may read the book and wonder howpossibly remember all of the rules. But in fact, the rules you need consult (or even read) are those yoa novice, you should begin using only armored vthan memorising rules to begin with, consult theuntil the mechanics have been learned. Once thbeen learnt, novice players can then introduce infand eventually aircraft, fortifications, and so on. We have undertaken two approaches wthe rules; the first was to provide rule mechanicdetail and re-enact WWII combat; the second

* Time Scales - One move represents two minutes. With the avbetween 6-20 moves, this translates approximatelThe perception by players that battles rage fromunits in combat unceasingly is incorrect. Battles exceptions) made up of a string of brief engagefought until demoralised, exhausted or suppcampaigns or large scale historical re-enactments,one move is made to represent twenty minutes. * Ground Scales - 1cm = 10 metres, (that is 1mm = 1 metre). The scale is done to maximize upon playing areas avplaying area would be a table tennis table or 1180cm. (The use of a 1/76th ground scale; where require the use of a tennis court!) The same ground scale is retained if usscale games for the same reasons; ie. no adjustmrefer section on 1/300th adaption. * Figure Scale - All AFVs, vehicles, guns, and infantry heavyrepresented by single models (1:1 scale). Infantry heavy weapon crews and gun/mbe represented on a 1:2 ratio. All infantry are based as teams on a 1:1 three teams per infantry section/squad. On a 1:1be 2 – 4 figures per base. eg a Soviet Rifle Squadan LMG Team and two Rifle Teams. The LMG Tfigures (machine gunner and loader), and the Rifigures each. It is also a good idea to put a small unit tag/label aeach infantry base. eg, a company’s 1st platoon co 1Co. 1Pl. HQ 1Co. 1Pl. 1st Sq (3 teams labelled as such 1Co. 1Pl. 2nd Sq (3 teams labelled as such 1Co. 1Pl. 3rd Sq (3 teams labelled as such * Model Scale - The recommended model scale for these rules isscale. These rules have been written primarily scale with detail & complexity designed to allowplatoons to companies. 15mm scale miniatures can be used without makingame measurements except for smaller base stands. Also, since the models are a little smallethem up, or artillery will have a heyday.

IINNTTRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN

combat simulation mm scale models,

veloped since 1982 ithout loss of detail. many cumbersome ying time with few

cautioned against dition as we have more detailed, yet ant changes are a to troop losses, an ry troop classes for g the troop classes e rules, except that his results in large, taking on smaller,

unting to a novice on Earth they can only sections of the u intend to use. As ehicles, and rather book consistently

e armor rules have antry, then artillery,

ith development of s which accurately was to provide an

accurate reference for all AFVs, vehicles, weapons and unit organisations. This last point is just as important as the first as it will help players not only enjoy the hobby, but also re-enact their battles and games with some historical accuracy. The information provided also lets you know that we have done extensive research into all areas included. All rules are designed to emulate historical tactics and the reasoning behind many will often not be directly apparent to the reader. We are more than open to any constructive criticism, suggestions, or reactions which you may have towards the rules. Many changes in this edition of PANZERFAUST-ARMORED FIST can be traced back to contributions made by players. Email address is: stonefamily@optusnet.com.au Our website address is: http://members.optusnet.com.au/~stonefamily/panzer.htm Special Thanks to Playtesters A special thank you to the following playtesters: Jason Montague, Mitchell Dovey, Damien Kerle, Phil LeHunt, Scott Horan. © Copyright: 2004 Scott Nicholas and Peter Stone No part of these rules may be reproduced, except for the countersheet, in part or whole without written permission from the authors. Printing 1.02.

erage gamy to 25-40 dawn to dwere usuments whlies expi it is sugge

use of thailable. Th80cm x 113mm = 1

ing 1/300ents are

weapons

ortar crew

scale, with scale the has 10 meam shoufle Teams

t the back uld be

) ) )

1/76nd ofor 1/76th use of u

g any altesizes for

r, try not

SSCCAALLEESS

3

e lasting minutes. usk with

ally (with ere units red. For sted that

is ground e perfect 20cm or m, would

th model required,

are all

s should

typically re should en, being ld have 3 3 and 4

or side of

r 1/72nd / 1/72nd nits from

rations to infantry to bunch

See below for a simple conversion to allow players to adapt the rules to using 1/285 or 1/300th scale models. Try to resist the urge to use extra miniatures because they are a smaller scale, otherwise players may find the game mechanics a bit tedious for a fluent game. Models should be fairly accurate representations of the vehicle or weapon they represent. An accurate model is defined as `one which cannot be mis-identified as some other type or variant which it is not!.' Some leniency can be taken with softskin vehicles, since almost no kits exist for them in 1:76th scale. eg you can use any German light truck model to represent one of the light truck types, but must tell your opponent exactly what it represents. For items which remain offboard, such as artillery, boats, or aircraft; models are not required. Many of the vehicles in these rules are not available as model kits, in which case they are often available as resin kits, or, can be converted from an existing kit. Others will require to be scratchbuilt. For details on painting and camouflage techniques on your models, there are sections devoted to these later in the rules. We implore gamers to paint all miniatures used! * Scale Clarifications Please note that ground scale and model scale are two different things. Although a 1:76th infantry model is 20mm high, it actually represents a man who is 1.75mm high according to the ground scale. Players have asked why a 20mm tall man can only throw a grenade 50mm (ie, twice his height), but the reason for this is the ground scale. He is actually throwing the grenade 50 meters. Also note that a 1/76th model tank, although 8cm long, represents a tank which is actually 6mm long according to the ground scale of 1mm = 1 meter. Players have asked why their tank when firing at another tank at a range of 10cm, can miss. The reason is that the range is actually 100 meters. Note however that for observation and movement, models are considered to be their actual size, and not what they represent. * Adjusting These Rules to 1/300th Scale These rules adjust rather easily to allow the gamer to use micro armor, which is either 1/287th or 1/300th scale. To do this, several adjustments must be made. The first adjustment is an option. This involves dividing ALL ranges and movement speeds by two. This includes observation ranges, weapon ranges, etc. The reason for doing this is if you have a smaller playing surface, or, you want to use more units. The second adjustment is compulsory. ALL weapons’ radii and widths, and any other such widths, must be divided by 4. The third adjustment is that infantry base sizes are smaller. See the section on infantry base sizes.

* Playing Area - The recommended ideal playing area for an average game with 2-4 players is 180cm x 120cm, or 180cm x 180cm. Most tables are rectangular in area and should be played across the table for encounter or competition games, down the length for attack/defence games. Table tennis tables are a good size for large games whose total point value of both sides added together exceeds 6,000 points. * Equipment - In addition to these rules you will require (per player) three six sided dice, metric tape measure, pen & paper. An episcope can also aid play. Note; regarding terminology with dice, 1D6 means, roll one six sided dice. 2D6 means, roll two six sided die. 3D6 means roll three six sided dice.

* Terrain - Scenery, like the models, should be of the same scale. HO/OO scale models, (that is, 1:72, 1:76 or 1:87) will be appropriate for 1:76 scale, and micro scenery will be appropriate for 1:285th or 1:300th scale. Scenery layout should be clearly defined, and types of conflicting scenery should be specified before a game begins. eg. treelines & woods need to be declared as thick or thin. Terrain such as towns, country areas, etc, should be laid out realistically, by both players in agreement. For tournaments, all terrain should be laid out by an umpire. Providing your games are not set in the desert or the Ukraine, there should always be a fair amount of ground cover such as buildings, woods, hills, shrubs, etc. The average combat engagement range during WWII for the European battlefield was approximately 800 meters – that is 80cm on the wargames table. Examples where two opponents engaged each other over 1500m was rare. (This still holds true today, even with modern AFV & ATGMs.)

4

Defender sets up anywhere in shaded area Objective/s anywhere in shaded area except for the back 20% of the board

The following issues need to be addressed once the game board has been setup and units placed down, but before actual play begins. BATTLE TYPE - DETERMINE TYPE OF GAME CHOOSE FORCE TERRAIN WEATHER FORTIFICATIONS DEPLOY FORCES PROGRAMED ORDERS See following for detailed descriptions of the above: BATTLE TYPE – Determine Type of Game: For tournaments, all games should be Encounter Battles, with each player having an equal point value force. For friendly games, players can either agree upon what type of battle to play, or can dice on the following table. Battle Type Random Generator Table (Throw 2D6) Dice Throw Result 2 Breakthrough 3 Counter Attack 4, 5 Encounter 6 – 8 Attack/Defense 9, 10 Encounter 11 Counter Attack 12 Breakthrough 1. Attack/Defense The defending player will set up on 80% of the board, with his rear edge being the edge he must leave by if he wishes to retreat. The attacker must attack from the opposite edge. If desired, for the first two turns, the attacker may bring on only bona fide recon units, moving on from the back board edge, but on the third turn, the remainder of his onboard forces must enter the board from the back

board edge. Bona fide recon aircraft are permitted one pass over the playing area also during turns 1 or 2. Return AA Fire can be used by defender. Determine the objective/s of the battle by agreement, or by an umpire’s instructions, or by dice throw (see later). Objectives may include obtaining victory points for taking and holding certain landmarks on the table, or simply destroying a certain percentage of the enemy force. The point value of the attacker’s force should be from 2 to 3 times greater than that of the defender. Recommended point values per side are 1500 for the defender, and 3000 – 4500 points for the attacker. eg.

Attacker Sets up here, at the board edge.

GGAAMMEE RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS

PPRREE--GGAAMMEE SSEETTUUPP

If either player wishes to retreat, he must physically get his pieces to the appropriate game board edge, and then those units are assumed to have successfully retreated. Unless it is a campaign, these pieces are considered lost/destroyed for victory condition purposes. 2. Encounter (Recommended for Tournament Games) Both players been attempting to out manoeuvre the other and have encountered each other while doing so. Determine the objective/s of the battle by agreement, or by an umpire’s instructions, or by dice throw, except that objectives must be situated along the centre line of the wargames board. Both players place all of their units in the back 15cm of their rear board edge during the pre-game setup. Both players’ forces must be the same point value. For friendly games, around 3000 – 5000 points per side gives a good 3 – 4 hour game. For tournaments, we recommend that all players field forces around 2500-3000 points each, and at least 50% of each force’s point value must be AFVs. Programmed Map Fire cannot be used. 3. Counter Attack The attacker has taken a certain objective which the defender wishes to take back. The attacker can set up on 50% of the board. Determine the objective/s of the battle by agreement, or by an umpire’s instructions, or by dice throw, with the objective towards the rear of this area, but not with the back 20% of the board. There are not allowed to be any defenses or dug in AFVs, etc – there has not been enough time! The defender must set up his forces in the back 20% area of the wargames board. The point value of the defender’s force should be from 1.5 to 2 times greater than that of the attacker. 4. Breakthrough The attacker must break through the defenders defences and exit at least half of his initial point value through the defenders rear board

edge. The exit area must be an area 20cm wide, and it's location is determined by 1D6. The point value of the attacker’s force should be from 2 to 3 times greater than that of the defender. Set up as per attack/defense games. Dice Throw Result 1 - 4 Attacker secretly chooses breakthrough area 5 - 6 Defender chooses breakthru area & declares it Both players set up as per typical attack/defense game.

5

Determine Objectives: For Attack/Defense, Encounter, and Counter Attack games, determine the objective/s of the battle by agreement, or by an umpire’s instructions, or by dice throw. If determining by dice throw, use this table: Random Objective (1D6) Table Die Result 1 Take & hold 3 locations on the table worth set points each 2 Take & hold 2 locations on the table worth set points each 3, 4, 5 Take & hold 1 location on the table worth set points each 6 Destroy greater percentage of enemy force than you lose Objectives – declare battlefield locations as the objectives being fought over. The battle type descriptions above instruct you where on the board the objectives should be. Eg for an Encounter Battle Type, each objective must be situated along the centre line of the wargames board. Objectives can include a crossroads, hill top, particular building, bridge, etc. An umpire or the players should agree upon the points each objective is worth, and whether or not players’ losses should be considered as well. For tournament encounter games, players should receive points for taking the objective, plus points of the enemy force destroyed or currently in retreat, minus points of their own force destroyed or currently in retreat. (immobilised or damaged does not count.) Holding An Objective - At the end of the game, each player should receive points for an uncontested objective, that is, he has at least a squad, heavy weapons team, AFV or gun there, and the opponent has no units or undamaged AFVs within 10cm of the centre point of the objective.

CHOOSE FORCE The type of game above has determined what point value of forces each player will use. Each player must consult the army lists at the back of these rules, in conjunction with the armor and gun charts, and determine the exact composition of those forces. Note that players must purchase complete platoons or companies as per the army lists.

ll sepA arately purchased platoons must be formed into ad-hoc co es of 3 to 5 platoons a piece, and you must purchase a

Note that you cannot buy a company and th

mpanicompany HQ for that company, which is related to one of the platoons. eg an AFV platoon and two armored infantry platoons are formed into an ad-hoc company. The HQ you must purchase for this ad-hoc company must be either the HQ that the AFV platoon would have received if you had bought the entire AFV company, or the HQ

d infantry platoon would have received if you had

ach company e same rating.

en split it up to rm ad

g an AFV mpany has 3 platoons plus HQ. If you buy 2 platoons, you can form

there will be 1 platoon left ver to form into an ah-hoc company with 2 other platoons.

that the armorebought the entire armored infantry company. You cannot mix together platoons of different troop class or morale rating into the one company. eg you can’t have 2 x Veteran Platoons and 1 x Conscript Platoon in one company. Emust be th

fo -hoc platoons. Nor can you purchase the complete number of platoons that make up a company, without buying the HQ. ecothem into an ah-hoc company/s, but if you buy 3 platoons, you must buy the HQ. If you buy 4 platoons, you must buy the company HQ to form a co. with the first 3 platoons, plus o Please note that players must have accurate models for all forces deployed onboard, even if initially concealed. Offboard artillery must be purchased in batteries, as per the rmy lists. These do not have to be formed into companies.

ame point value of each force by about one third, since AFVs etc are

conditions, refer to `Weather'. For storical battles use the theatre of operations and season of the year.

y record all coordinates for mine fields, ny

on thnless o e placed on

il observed.

n command radius of their HQs. Als

a Note: for games 1939 – ’41, you should reduce the recommended gso much cheaper during this time period. TERRAIN:Clearly outline types of terrain to all parties involved in the game. Specify whether woods & treelines are thick or thin, what parts of the river are fordable (if any), areas of bog, etc. WEATHER: Dice for weather hi FORTIFICATIONS: Clearl

re-sigbo hting, entrenchments, AT obstacles/ditches, etc. Afortifications which are visible from the attackers edge of the board must be indicated to the player before starting the game and placed

e board. Fortifications not visible to an attacking player's units bserved via aerial reconnaissance) need not b(u

the playing area unt DEPLOY FORCES:

All units must be deployed io, all squads, heavy weapons, guns, mortars, individual

vehicles, must be within 45cm of their platoon HQ when initially deployed. This is only relevant for units with radios.

Encounter Games E ayer draws a map of their deployment zone, and writes down the general deployment location of each platoon, and then players take turns putting down a platoon at a time – if it is a really big game, put down companies at a time.

ach pl

The player who has any troops of the lowest troop rating using conscript Soviets vs a

platoons an his opponent, then he deploys two platoons at a time. If one

re platoons than his opponent, then he

must deploy a unit first. eg. a playerplayer with veteran Germans. The Soviet player puts down a unit first. If both forces are the same rating, then throw 1D6 to determine who deploys first. (Co. HQs go down with any platoon they command.) Note however that if one player has 2 – 2.99 morethplayer has 3 – 3.99 modeploys three platoons at a time. And so on. Attack-Defense/Breakthrough Games The defender writes down on a map the exact location of his forces.

er then deploys his whole army. The defender then deploys The attackhis whole army according to what he wrote on his map. Show your map to your opponent after doing so if anything is queried. Counter Attack Games The ‘attacker’ writes down on a map the exact location of his forces. The ‘defender’ then deploys his whole army. The ‘attacker’ then deploys his whole army according to what he wrote on his map. Counters I don’t particularly like the use of counters replacing units. WW2 wargaming is about using beautifully painted models. When counters are used, the models are not even put on the table! But if both players

ant to use counters, they can only be used in

orce. If a ‘counter’ fires, moves, or is ‘observed’, the counter is replaced by the model it represents. Dummies are removed when within visibility of enemy forces. PROGRAMMED ORDERS: Programmed orders are used for Indirect Map Fire & Pre-planned Air-strikes. These orders must be written prior to commencing a game and should be written without

led s on `Indirect Fire' ircr

wattack/defense/breakthrough games. The defender places down counters that represent each of his squads, vehicles, guns, etc. Each counter must have its size written on it, ie, A, B, C or D. For each legitimate counter placed down, he should also place up to one dummy counter. Then the attacker deploys his entire f

know ge of enemy dispositions. Refer to chapter& `A aft'. Map Fire cannot be used in Encounter Games.

6

: Move all platoons alternately, star

-stationary units.

pl

movement pip dice. Group moves are made only bcompanies. See Moving Units and Groupmove is made, the whole unit being mov

Once all pre-game setup procedures have of game play must follow the below sequOnce I has been completed, begin the next Summary A: Write orders for Artillery & Aircraft. B: Determine Company HQ movemenC: Declare incoming airstrikes. D: Declare Covering Fire orders. E: Plot BZs for Mortar & Artillery IndireF

class. G: Resolve Infantry Fire & Direct Fire. (1) Fire all stationary units,

(2) Fire all non (3) Resolve all Close Quarters ComH: Resolve Indirect Fire for Mortars & I: Resolve Airstrikes & AA fire.

or* M ale checks are carried out as required Ex anations -

A: Write orders for Artillery & AiPlayers write any new orders for Indirect Favailable.) Written orders should describeype of at mmunition, POA coordinates, aircr

: Determine Company HQ MovBPlayers throw 1D6 per Company HQ, modito the company’s troop class, and placmodified number next to the Co. HQ. C: Declare incoming airstrikes - * Players resolve any air-air combat and

strikeair s for this turn. D: Declare Covering Fire OrdersPlayers may declare any units as giving c(eg individual MG-team or tank) or groupgiving covering fire, do the following: • deduct ‘1’ pip from the relevant Co. HQ• place a numbered CF counter ( eg C

fire unit/group and the matching CF the target area.

fantryIn units within these CF target areasmust take a Morale test before attempting(Step G). Remember that units/groups givingor perform any other action that turn. E: Plot BZs for Mortar & ArtilleryPlayers place a POA counter for each platoon at the target location. For all otherdown the target location (see artillery rulehave successfully called down the artilleryPOA counter on the location that was writte* From each POA, measure out thdetermine which units lie within the affectedwhich leave the BZ during their Movemendiced for to determine any damage/casualti F: Move all platoons alternatellowest troop class -

layers P take turns moving platoons. (Note twith any one of its platoons, as thoughmovement purposes.) Each time a platoon moves, the n

movedre from its company HQ movemenplatoon moves by itself, costing 1 pip, whmoves together, costing another pip. Remo

move unless you spend extra pips for aperform a different action, whether to sdifferent move. eg: 1 pip only is given to atherefore either move one individual squadmove in which the entire platoon does thapplies if 1 pip only is thrown for a compan

ove 1 individm ual squad or AFV, or move 1entire company can make the same movleave anything behind (unless due to being

SSEEQQUUEENNCCEE OOFF PPLLAAYY

leted, each turn

ting with the lowest troop

t

s F-I.

ement Pips rding

g fire. For each unit

y individual platoons or s on page 7. If a group ed must make the same

any of its movement pips, those pips pip dice at the

ore platoons ore if required)

thin an

e same FO, the one with a

, players can select to fire at targets during any part of their oing

1/2 of it's turn to do this. An enemy e first half of the turn can e building. It succeeds in

rtars & Artillery - Players with units that end the movement phase within a BZ must test each unit to see if they receive any damage or casualties. This includes any units which have entered a BZ during the movement phase. (Any unit's which have left a BZ during the movement phase

ust be diced for as they leave.)

ft which survived enemy AA fire may now have their ttacks against ground targets resolved.

been compence of play, from A to I. turn at A.

t pips.

ct Fire.

baArtillery.

during step

rcraft - ire or On-call Airstrikes (if which battery or aircraft, aft arrival turn.

fy the dice result accoe the dice showing the

/or declare any incoming

- overin (eg MG platoon) that is

pip dice. F 3) next to the covering

counter (eg CF 3) next to

are declared `pinned' and to move (Step F) or fire

covering fire cannot move

Indirect Fire - direct firing mortar/mortar indirect fire, players write s) and dice to see if they this turn. If yes, place a n down. e Beaten Zone (BZ) and areas. Any of these units t phase (Step F) must be es.

y, starting with the

hat a Company HQ moves part of that platoon for

umber of pips it uses are t pip dice. eg 1 AFV of a ile the rest of the platoon ve 2 pips from the Co. HQ

sub-unit of that group to tay behind, or perform a platoon. That platoon can or AFV, or make a group e same move. The same y. The company can either platoon as above, or, the

e. In which case it cannot out of command radius).

I: Resolve Airstrikes & AA fire - * Any aircraft declared to arrive at the beginning of the turn (Step A)

If the company in the above example uses its 1 pip to move only 1 individual squad or AFV, its pip is expended and the whole company counts as having moved, since no pips are left. For a company to perform a group move with all of its platoons, all of the platoons must be in command radius in order to

ove tom gether. Any platoon out of command radius cannot be included in the company’s group move. Once all desired movement for a company is completed, even if there are pips left on the movement pip dice, remove the dice to show that this company has completed its movement. Also, if all pips on the dice have been used, remove the pip dice to show the company has completed its movement.

The player with the lowest troop class (eg conscript is lower than regular) on the table moves a platoon first. If both player’s troops are the same troop class, then throw 1D6. The player with the lowest dice roll moves a platoon first.

If you decide that you are content with a company’s position, and do not wish to use are forfeited and cannot be used later. Remove the conclusion of the movement phase. Note however that if one player has 2 – 2.99 m

an his opponent, then he moves two platoons (or mthat a time. If one player has 3 – 3.99 more platoons than his opponent, then he moves three platoons (or more if required) at a time. And so on. Note that these are the minimum numbers of platoons you have to move, you can of course move more, and may be forced to do so if moving a whole company on 1 pip for example. Also note that units which start their movement phase wiIndirect Fire BZ and move outside this BZ during the turn must be diced for as they leave, to determine any damage/casualties inflicted prior to leaving the BZ. If disabled/destroyed, the unit cannot move or fire beyond that part of the turn. G: Resolve Infantry Fire & Direct Fire - Players conduct Direct Fire in the following sequence; * All stationary AFVs, guns and infantry units are fired, starting with units of the lowest Fire Order (FO). Any targets which are destroyed annot return fire. If two units have thc

better troop class fires first. eg veterans fire before regulars. If two units with the same troop class and same FO fire at each other, conduct their firing simultaneously, with simultaneous results. * Now all non-stationary AFVs, guns and infantry units are fired, with the units moving the least firing first (eg. an AFV which has moved for 1/4 of the turn fires before an enemy AFV which has for moved 1/2

e turn.th ) For units which have moved the same amount, the lowest FO fires first. Targets which are destroyed before firing cannot return fire. For those which have moved the same amount and have the same FO, better troop class fires first. See above point. * AFVs, guns and infantry units which have expended over half their

aximum movement cannot fire at all. m Although Direct Fire is conducted after all movement has been ompletedc

movement phase by back-tracking the position of the target. In dso, the unit which is firing must also be in a position to observe the target at that part of the turn. If the target is destroyed/disabled, it remains where it was fired upon, not completing it's planned movement. Otherwise it completes it's full movement. (eg. During the movement phase a tank moved from being visible to behind a building. It tookAT gun which observed the target during thfire at the tank before it disappears behind thhitting the tank and destroying it, so the tank model is put back (back-tracked) to where it was when the gun fired at it. After all firing has been completed, resolve all infantry Close Quarters Combat. H: Resolve Indirect Fire for Mo

m

now arrive, and players plot the flight-path of those aircraft and mark the POA for each one with a `POA' counter. * Units with suitable weapons that did not fire during the Direct Fire Phase resolve any AA fire against these incoming aircraft. Those aircra*

a

7

nits outside command radius (either due to distance or the HQ has

ole platoon is outside command radius. of its platoon HQ, then it alone

given platoon to but 1 squad ust be

ther moved separ an extra pip (see later) or it

y fire, one of the sub units can

Ubeen destroyed) incur movement penalties. It also affects morale tests. Measurements for Command Radius are taken from parent HQ to receiving HQ, or from parent HQ to subordinate unit. Note that there are two levels of command radius, company and platoon.* If a platoon HQ is outside command radius of ts company HQ, then that whiIf a squad is outside command radius

ommand is outside c radius. order is eg. an to a platoon HQ for all squads of the

follow, adius. It therefore m is out of command rately at the cost of ei

cannot move. * Even though these rules are designed to be company and platoon level, in big games players may even purchase entire battalions. However, if the battalion HQ is destroyed, this has no effect on gameplay. Its subordinate companies etc remain in command radius providing their own HQs are OK.

or units which lose their HQ to enemFbe designated to become the replacement HQ in the next turn. The whole unit still suffers penalties for unit HQ being destroyed for the remainder of the game but all command/control will pass through

e newly designated HQ. th

ommand Radius to Parent HQ is C no radios * 20cm out of sight or 40cm insight ** radios 100cm for German/Allied or 60cm for

Soviet/Axis/others * Covers communication through the use of voice, mess getelephones, flags and hand signals. ‘In Sight’ means both an

en rs,

ni observa bility

f m e from in s to ons, or uring ran

/bat

ne Company HQ movement pips’ players en modify that dice roll according See below table.

HQ d dra e of sigh thout subordinate unit can w a direct lin t to each other wi

enemy troops interve ng. See the tion rules for visidistances. ** Halve this range i easuring rang fantry platoon HQtheir squads/secti , when meas ge from ‘closed-down’AFVs to their platoon tery HQ AFV Note: Allied refers to US, British and Commonwealth forces only. Also note that a squad can only use its APC’s radio while in it or while in base to base contact with the APC. Company HQ Movement Pips

uring Phase B ‘DetermiDthrow 1D6 per Company HQ, and tho what troop class that company is. t Co. HQ Movement Pips Modification Table (1D6) Ve ran Regular Conscript te

oll of 1 - re-roll * Die roll as is Die roll of 1 as is oll of 2 - re-roll * Die roll as is Die roll of 2 as is

Die rDie r

r f 3 as is r r

ie r is Die roll of 6 – re-roll *

, re-roll the dice. If they roll oll, continue re-rolling until they get a result

eor 2. t that in their case, they are

t p ue to re-roll until they receive a mbe

section (these squad/section

• • move a group under one HQ, which will be either a platoon or a

company (see notes below) It costs +1 pip if: (these are accumulative) the unit is retreating

* Se** egor, if1 pip, Mo1.

2.

3. sepafromthen

squaplatothe rinclu

4. Grou

a)

ove from over half to full movement

wance on every alternate turn to reach it's 4 Tiger I may have 2 tanks rt, and the other 2 moving full

d. eg. enemy is attacking around the flank, so your nits need to redeploy within the position to reat.

You do not have to move units, nor do you have to use all of the movement pips. Unused pips are lost. Units which do not move can of course still fire as usual. Compulsory Movement The only movement that your units may perform without spending company HQ movement pips, is compulsory movement due to receiving a ‘Retreat’ result from a morale test. See the morale rules for more details.

Die oll of 3 as is Die roll as is Die roll oDie oll of 4 as is Die roll as is Die roll of 4 as is Die oll of 5 as is Die roll as is Die roll of 5 – re-roll *

oll of 6 as is Die roll asD * If veterans roll a 1 or 2 for movement pipsanother 1 or 2 with the re-roth r than 1 or 2. In other words, veterans are not allowed to roll a 1

It is the same with conscripts, excepno ermitted to roll a 5 or 6, so continu r between 1 to 4. n

Using Movement Pips It costs one pip on the movement dice to: • move a single infantry squad/weapon section/HQ

squads/sections typically include 1 – 3 teams. If ahas more than one team, they must always remain in unit cohesion. See later) move a single gun, softskin vehicle/base or AFV

•• the unit is outside command radius * or own and/or higher

parent HQ destroyed ** (max of + 1) • if it is at night or raining/snowing

e section on Command Radius. , the penalty applies if a squad’s own platoon HQ is destroyed, the platoon’s Company HQ is destroyed. Maximum penalty is + (ie, not + 2 if both HQs are destroyed.)

ving Units and Groups Although an infantry squad typically comprises three fire teams, (eg 1 x LMG Team, 2 x Rifle Teams) it is treated as a single unit, not a group. However, an infantry squad may perform the Leap-Frog group move – see below. Refer to the sections on Infantry, Cavalry, Softskins, Guns, and

sAFV etc, to see how each of these troop types may move. If you wish to move an individual squad/AFV etc of a platoon

rately (or keep it stationary while the rest of its unit moves) the group move that the rest of the platoon will undertake, move the individual squad/AFV first, paying the appropriate

amount of pips. Since that unit has now moved, when you move the rest of the platoon as a group move, this individual

d/AFV does not move again. (The same can be done with a on of a company. Move a platoon as a group move, then emainder of the company as another group move, but not ding the platoon that’s already moved.) p moves are performed by either individual platoons or

companies, the whole group must perform the same action (except in point (3) above). Permissable actions for a group are:

MOVE - move towards the same objective, such as a terrain feature, a known enemy unit. All squads/vehicles etc in the group must also move up to half movement allowance, or all mallowance.

b) LEAP-FROG – a move option for units is to `leap-frog' where each half of the unit moves over half to full movement alloobjective. eg. a platoon of stationary and firing in suppospeed towards the objective. On the next turn, those two pairs swap roles. See below.

c) DEFEND POSITION – no movement from the position other than that required to directly defend the location is permittedefending ucounter the th

Leap Frog Examples

The above shows the 'Leap Frog' tactic. It involves moving from cover to cover by bounds. The tanks behind give covering fire to those which are advancing forwards to the next cover. Then they swap roles. The leap frog tactic was employed extensively by the Germans in the early stages of the war. Because of the increasing amount of anti-tank guns present on the Eastern Front. their tactics changed and they used the wedge. The Tigers were used to spearhead the wedge because their thick armor and good firepower, but it was soon realised that the Tiger was too slow and cumbersome for this type of work. US armored units used the leap frog method successfully against heavier German tanks. If any opposition such as the Tiger was encountered. the tanks giving the covering fire would blind the enemy vehicle by firing smoke shells in front of it. The advancing tanks would then move round on to its flank and shoot it in the weaker side armor. For shooting smoke the 75mm Shermans were used, as there was no smoke shell produced for the 76mm.

CCoommmmaanndd RRaaddiiuuss aanndd ipsMMoovveemmeenntt PPips

8

ibility asituation aalways be

uence tances

surroundinsee a ws, inf

rocedurehe following procedure is for determining whether a target can be

observed by another unit; 1 The observer must have DLOS (direct line of sight) with the

intended target. An observer can only observe from within his arc of vision. See later. Note that vehicles can block line of sight.

2 Determine what type of terrain (if any) the target is within or behind. Terrain will only conceal a target if it lies across the observers DLOS.

range or the target remains hidden.

wo different types of cover, use the terrain which provides the minimum observation range for the target. Once a target has been spotted by an observer, it remains spotted to that particular observer until it moves out of DLOS or changes terrain location. Intervening smoke blocks all DLOS.

2

Vis nd concealment of units is an important part in any combat

nd critical if they intend to survive. Potential targets may not visible to the observer and there are many factors which

infl a sighting. The following observation ranges are the dis that targets can be spotted, according to their size and the

g terrain. An observer must be within this range to be able to target. (`Observer' refers to all types of troops; tank & gun cre antry, etc.) These rules do not apply to Aircraft.

- PT

3 Refer to the Observation Table, cross reference the terrain type with the target's size (A,B,C or D) and find the observation range.

4 Multiply any of the variations which apply for the target or observer, to the observation range.

5 For an observer to spot and identify the target, it must be within this final

Where a target is within (or behind) t

M1

3

4

5

T ArS

S

SS TOcfWio

OOBBSSEERRVVAATTIIOONN

OBSERVATION TABLE: (all Ranges are in ‘cm’) Terrain That Target is in or behind Target Size A B C D Open terrain or desert 100 160 240 300 Low or Scattered Brush, Long Grass 30 80 200 270 Hedge, Wall, Ruins 20 40 140 200 Thick Woods – in outer 5cm 10 20 60 90 “ “ - over 5cm inside cannot be observed from outside wood “ “ - observer & target inside 10 15 30 40 Thin Woods – in outer 10cm 20 30 100 160 “ “ - over 10cm inside cannot be observed from outside wood “ “ - observer & target inside 15 25 40 80 Orchard – in outer 15cm 30 40 140 180 “ - over 15cm inside cannot be observed from outside orchard “ - observer & target inside 25 30 70 90 Thick Treeline or Bocage 20 40 100 140 Thin Treeline 40 60 180 240 INSIDE Building, House, Shed 10 20 60 80

dge, wo ½

x ½x 2x 2x 1 ½f o ov

Modifiers: x ½ if target is camoflaged, or is prone infantry in the open, brush, hex if target is dug-in or hull-down

if observer is a closed-down AFV /3 if observer is moving over 5cm this turn if target fired or moved over 5cm this turn .5 if obverser has height advantage (3+ floors up)

ods, treeline, orchard

x if target is within/behind artillery BZR I bserver is over 5cm inside a thick wood, over 10cm inside a thin wood, or er 15cm inside an orchard, it cannot see out at all.

di

. concealed by hard cover

ervation range is always increased when moving fter firing its main or secondary armament.

ttesu

o fier Notes; . A `closed-down' AFV is one where the crew has secured all

hatches and relies on viewing ports or cupolas from within the AFV. This also applies to open-topped AFVs which are also considered closed-down for observation unless crew commander or gunner are declared `head-up'. Target is considered hull-down only if at least the lower third of the AFV is

. A target's obsover 5cm or a

. An Observer located three floors up (or higher) in a building has a height advantage for all observation. Also applies to other terrain features of equivalent height (eg. hills, towers.)

. If the DLOS to a target passes through the BZR of an artillery ry (indirect), then visibility for the ba target is reduced by half.

Thi does not apply to mortars or artillery batteries of less than ns. 4 g

arget Sizes; ll AFVs, vehicles and gun/howitzers have their sizes listed in

espective data charts, but in summary: ize A: Infantry, Infantry Heavy Weapons, Light Field Guns/Light

AT Guns, Mortars under 95mm. ize B: Horses, Medium Field Guns/AT Guns, Mortars 95mm and

over, Jeeps, Motorcycles, etc. ize C: Light and Medium Vehicles, Heavy Field Guns/AT Guns ize D: Heavy Vehicles

errain Description & Notes; pen Terrain/Desert; refers to any area where there is no ground over. Can range from rocky desert of N/Africa to bare cultivated ields.

oods; under-growth at the edge of a woods is usually thicker than nside and for this reason, its more difficult to observe a target from utside. The use of thick or thin woods is up to the players. A

milar n apply for tree-lines.

otherwise eated as thick tree-line.) SIDE Buildings/Houses; applies only to units that are inside

lly concealed outside or behind buildings

deciduous forest, for example, could be considered thick during summer/spring and thin during autumn & winter when the leaves have dropped. On the other hand, a thin woods could simply be a

oods with wider dispersion of trees & less undergrowth. Siwreasoning caOrchards; similar to woods, but with less under growth. Trees are usually planted in ordered rows so as to provided less `in-depth' cover. Tree Lines/Bocage; although bocage is technically classed as a hedge, its height often exceeded most vehicles or AFVs and therefore, falls under this category. Hedge lines exceeding `man-height' are classed as thick tree-lines. Scattered Brush/Long Grass; eg. wheat fields, Russian Steppes. Hedges/Wall/Ruins; units partially hidden behind buildings or other structures (not inside) count as being behind a wall. `Hedges' applies nly to those hedge-lines that do not exceed man-height, (o

trINbuildings. Units partiacount as being behind a `Wall'. Units completely behind building are out of DLOS and cannot be observed (& vice-versa.) Buildings. Because infantry base sizes won’t fit exactly into buildings, whereas in reality a squad would spread itself around windows and doors, place the infantry base’s front edge against one wall. But, for visibility purposes, that squad can also ‘observe’ or ‘see’ through other windows or doors up to 4cm away from any base edge. eg place a 4cm x 4cm infantry base against a house’s front wall facing the street, but the squad can also see through any other door or window within 4cm of any edge of the unit’s base. So the normal rules of observation, where you can only see from your front edge, don’t apply within buildings for infantry units.

smoke is usually discharged and any loose debris near the

gnals.

will allow the firer to be pin-pointed'). To

Muzzle-Flashes; A muzzle-flash from a gun is the blast created as a result of the weapon being fired. In addition to a split-second flash appearing, a cloud ofmuzzle is sometimes kicked up into the air, all contributing to what is defined as the `muzzleflash'. To an observer, this muzzleflash often revealed a firer's location well outside the normal ranges for observing it. Muzzle-flashes are not effected by terrain or concealment, except if camouflaged where counter-measure were aken to reduce tell-tale sit The muzzleflash ranges are given according to the gun calibre and applies to any weapon fired from an AFV, vehicle, gun/howitzer or infantry. Two ranges are given for muzzle-flashes, Exact & General. (the latter means only the general location of the firer is revealed while `Exact' be within either will reveal the following details to an observer; Exact Location - t n of the ring weapon n- d he exact positio is pi pointe

e is revealed. targt Speculative

fi& The firer can now be eted with weapon's calibrany sort of direct fi ring zzleflre (using `Fi at Mu ash', noFire). General Location - general prox of th weapon's position

the terrain fe

nly e used against targets anner.

y weapon, the observer must have it lie within its Arc of Vision.

ird of

imity e firingis revealed. On ature where the weapon is located need be identifi er, ie. woods, buildings or group of

lyed to an observ

buildings, hill. Speculative Fire can o brevealed in this m To spot a muzzle-flash from an enemhave DLOS at the time of firing and Mortars have a reduced muzzleflash which is equal to one ththeir equivalent gun calibre. Muzzle-Flash Observation Ranges: (all Ranges are in ‘cm’) Weapon Calibre Exact General Location Location Infantry Weapons 30 60 Bazooka/Pzfst/Pzrschreck 40 80 20mm – 47mm 60 100 50mm – 82mm 90 150 85mm – 122mm 120 200 122mm+ 150 250 Note: a PIAT has no muzzle flash!

amouflage; The purpose of ge at which the enemy will observe a position. Camouflage can be of two forms, it can either blend the position into the surrounding terrain, or alternatively, make the position appear less conspicuous by turning it

something that appears harmless, such as a hay-stack.

e T of te quired to

g ta oves to team videquire

respective of how many teams work on it. Restrictions apply for

um Turns Terrain not permitted

Modifiers: x ½ if observer is in closed-down AFV x ½ if observer is moving over 5cm x 1/3 if firing weapon is a mortar x ½ if target’s position is camouflaged. See camouflage rules. C

camouflage is to reduce the ran

into With camouflage, it is the actual position which is camouflaged, not the occupying weapon. Once an AFV, vehicle, gun or infantry unit moves or evacuates its position, concealment is lost and normal observation rules apply.

Camouflaged positions are either set-up prior to the gamor constructed during. he number am moves recamouflage a position during a game (e kes 1 team 3 mmake size A camoflaged position, or 3 s 1 move) is pro d below along with the minimum turns re d to carry out the task, ircamouflaging positions in certain types of terrain. Unit Size * Team Moves Minim

1 B 6 2 B,O

B,O,L 6 B,O,L,H,T

A 3 B C 12 4 D 18

itted Key

rrying out this work are considered moving for d cannot do any firing

e are arget can acted too. A tar the AOV

ill still be considered unobserved even if within the target's

* that is, the individual unit that is being camouflaged

rrain Not PermTe(B) Buildings; (O) Open; (L) Low/Scattered brush or grass; (H) Hedges, Walls; (T) Thin tree-line Units Size B or greater can only be camouflaged in open terrain if they are dug-in. Camouflaged positions can only be prepared the area is free of nemy fire. Troops cae

observation an . Arc Of Vision (AOV); The AOV for any observer is th a in which an enemy tbe observed and re get which lies outsidewobservation range. OBSERVER ARC OF VISION (degrees) Inside Buildings, Pill Box, Bunker 120º (60º either side) Infantry, Gun crews, vehicles 180º (90º either side) Unbuttoned/Open topped AFV 180º (90º either side) Closed Down AFV 60º (30º either side)

or all un , the AO the front edge of the rom

e direct n the tu s faci . For A eparate V apply for each t an eparate AOV for each of its five turrets.) A `buttoned up' AFV is one

60º 60º 30º 30º (outside AOV) Window Types of terrain to be used in a game should be clearly specified before commencing a game. A woods made up of model trees, and concealing an AFV, might easily visible to the naked but in actual

s adopt one of three

storically chosen weather conditions. ou are recreating the Ardennes offensive, therefore th

n the ground, an 2. Attacker Waassumed to haveg. If the attacki r beginning his attthe beginning of

F its V is always taken frommodel or unit's base. For turreted AFVs, the AOV is also taken fth io rret i ng FVs with multiple turrets,s AO urret (eg. the Soviet T35 will have swhere the crew has closed all hatches and relies on using viewing ports within the tank. Inside AOV Example

fact is surrounded by vegetation which might completely hide it from any on-board observer.

When considering an attack, weather was always an imporbe considered. (eg. the Ardennes offensive of 1944 waovercast weather to rule out Allied aircraft interventionconditions greatly effect the decisions made during battlesaffecting the battles themselves. It is recommended that playerregarding use of weather in a game. Both players need towhich weather approach to use before beginning the game. 1. Historical: players are assumed to be recreating an actconflict, in which case the weather is known. In this case, sithe appropriate weather chart below to determine the ehieg. Yo d it is overcast.

its for Correct Conditions: the attackine waited until the weather co ns w ang player would have waited the r to

nditio ere fo ain

ack, then it would be ridiculous to make we the game, in which case it coul possibl rad y

WWEEAATTHHEERR

9

philosophies

f the

ere is snow

r may operation in which

cast, and tack under those conditions.

be encounter games with often unhistorical match ups. Each player throws 1D6. The weather is taken

layer with the lowest oviet. If the

pe, if the

= Spring,

tant factor to s based on .) Weather , as well as

agree upon

ual historical mply consult ffects o

g player is to be in the country/sphere of operation of the pdice score. eg German Afrika Korps vs Central Ru

ppropriate. stop before

Soviet player rolls lower, then the battle is in Northern EuroGerman player rolls lower, the battle is in the Mediterranean.

ssian S

ather rolls at in. : Random Season Determination

If season needs to be determined randomly, throw 1D6. 1,2

3. Come What May: In many cases, an attacker may not have the option of waiting for good weather - his orders may be to attack at a certain day, and at a certain hour, regardless of what the weathebe. In such a case, simply determine the sphere ofthe battle occurs, and the season in which the engagement is set, and then dice to determine the weather conditions. This approach to weather should be used during encounter games. (See below if you need to randomly determine season and sphere of operation.) eg. The attacking US player may be ordered to attack a German position during the spring in the Northern Europe sphere of operations. The dice are thrown and the result is that it is raining, overmuddy. The US player must then at Random Determination of Sphere of Operation Many tournament or friendly games will

3,4 = Summer, 5 = Autumn, 6 = Winter.

10

Weather Determination Table Roll 2D6, and consult the table below to determine the weather for your already determined sphere and season. Die Northern Europe Mediterranean Northern Russian Tropical Roll Sprg Sum Aut Wint Sprg Sum Aut Wint Sprg Sum Aut Wint All

M,O R R,O M,R,O M,O O R,M M,O R,O M,O M,Mi M,F M,O F R,O R,O M M M,O M,O M,R O F,M M,M M

O C R,O M C M M,R,O C C O S,O C C Mi,O S C C C C C C Mi,O C C C C C C C C C C C C

C C C C C C C C R,O C F C C M C C C Mi,O C O O F,O O

10 M C C Sf R C M O Sf R Mi,O R,O S,Mi R,O R,O R S,O R,M

2 M,R,O R,O F M Mi,O R,O R,O Mi,O Mi,O R,M M M,R M,O 34 R,O i 5 Mi, i,O C 6 C C 7 C C 8 C C C 9

R,O M,O R11 M,R,O M M S,O R,O R 12 S M,R,O M,R,O Sf F,O M,R

R,O S,O R,OOS,O Sf F,

Mi – Mist O - Overcast

lling C - Clear

des France, Belgium, Germany, Poland, and

the game untry terrain. See

ely light form of rain, which reduces all visibility by half.

game. This ws:

duced by half when going cross country. No

astlines, and lake regions. e quarter of normal.

rather damp situation effects both visibility and morale. All

ft cannot be present or called in while there is fog, rain, or nnot be used at all if the weather is overcast.

r, before each game begins, roll 1D6 for wind . (Note: in some cases, the attacker if wind conditions were against him,

s in the above "Historical Weather Conditions". If so, choose the wind storically, and only throw for the wind direction, if it is

Legend: M – Mud F - Fog

S – Snow R - Raining Sf - Snow Fa

Spheres: Northern Europe: incluCentral Russia, etc, Mediterranean: includes southern France, Italy, Greece, South Russia and Tunisia, Balkans, etc Northern Russia: includes Northern Russia, Finland and the Baltic States. Tropical: includes the Pacific Theatre, an sphere which has no significant seasonal change. Desert: is always clear. Weather Effects:

ain prior toMud: the ground has been previously soaked by rbeginning. This produces bog for all cross coMovement Restrictions for infantry and vehicles during bog effects. Note that infantry cannot charge or evade, and guns/howitzers etc cannot be towed off roads except by halftracks or tractors.

an extremMist:The mist will last for 2D6 moves, starting on the first turn.

to theSnow: this is fairly deep snow which has fallen priordoes not effect visibility but will restrict movement as folloa. Tracked vehicles movement is reduced by half. b. Wheeled vehicles cannot go cross country at all.

Infantry movement is rec. charging or evading while going cross country. d. All ponds, lakes, and swamps can be traversed as though it were cross country. Snow Falling: this is the same as snow, (above), but also includes blizzard conditions. Visibility is reduced to 1/3rd of normal. The snow will fall for 2D6 turns, starting on turn one. - 1 to all direct fire by field/AT guns, open topped AFVs. For the Infantry Casualties Table, add a – 1 Variable, whether direct fire or close quarters combat. Fog: this is mostly present in valleys, coLasts for 2D6 turns. Visibility during fog is on Overcast: This has no effect to ground visibility or movement. But no aircraft can be used. Rain: thisvisibility is reduced to 1/2 normal. Rain will last 2D6 turns. - 1 to all direct firing by field/AT guns, open topped AFVs. For the Infantry Casualties Table, add a – 1 Variable, whether direct fire or close quarters combat. Clear: Nice sunny day with no restrictions.

ote: aircraNfalling snow, and they ca WIND: Regardless of the weathestrength and 1D6 for wind directionmay have determined not to attackastrength hiunknown.) Wind Strength Table: Die Roll Wind Strength 1 No wind 2,3 Light Wind 4

Variation: + 1 to die roll if winter, desert, coast, or steppes.

,5 Moderate Wind 6 Gale Force Winds

tion Table: Wind DirecDetermine which direction is north, and roll 1D6. Die Roll Wind Direction 1 North East 2

3 South 4 West 5 Roll in in

AgaRoll Aga

TT FFIIGGHHTTIINNGG:: ight fighting was very much a big gamble during this era. The risks

nly be done in friendly ames or campaigns, and only if both players agree.

sibility from dusk to dawn is 1/10th of normal if there is a moon and no is no moon or it is overcast. To

esult Sky Is

6

NNIIGGHHNinvolved units getting lost, bumping into enemy forces prematurely, and shooting at their own side. Night fighting can og Visibility: Viclouds, or 1/20th of normal if there determine this, roll 1D6. R

no clouds

1 if summer

irect Fire Variation: t fire hit chances.

or the Infantry Casualties Table, add a – 3 Variable, whether direct fire s combat.

ent Restrictions: not charge but ca

ent for all v

Fire Restrictions: fire, only map fir an

AO can sight an enemy target, through use of illumination shells,

ermany: 105mm artillery, 81mm mortars 105mm artillery, 60 & 81mm mortars

Polish/Belgium: 75mm artillery only Hungary/Finland/Rumania: 105mm artillery, 81mm mortars French: 75/105mm artillery, 60/81mm mortars Italian: 75/105mm artillery, 81mm mortars Japanese: 75/105mm artillery, 81/90mm mortars

0 - 2 Moon with3 - 7 Overcast or no moon Variations to die roll: - + 1 if winter Note: visibility for night fighting in deserts is always 1/10th. Spotting ranges for muzzle flashes are doubled at night. D- 3 off all direc Infantry Combat Factor Variation: For close quarter MovemInfantry can n evade Maximum movem ehicles and AFVs is 12cm - 3 from all morale tests. IndirectFor indirect e can be used, except in cases whereFflares, or by sighting muzzle flashes. The FAO can then direct fire onto that enemy position as usual, even if the target is no longer visible. Star Shells: Star shells can only be fired via indirect fire. They can only be fired by guns, howitzers, or mortars, as listed below for each nation. GUS: British: 84/88mm artillery, 50/76mm mortars Soviet: 76mm artillery, 81mm mortars

Star shells have the effect of illuminating the area within their respective BZRs for the move in which they are fired. All enemy troops within the illuminated BZR can be spotted up to half normal visibility ranges. Star shells were a rare commodity among artillery units. Roll 2D6 for each battery and mortar, and subtract the lower number rolled

from the higher. This new number is the number of moves which that mortar or battery can fire star shells for. Flares: Cost 5 points each. They illuminate an area with a radius of 10cm for one move. These were sometimes set up with tripwires.

Often referred to as `cannon-fodder', the infantrymnt' that inhabited the trenches

arine

Bazookas anan cre

fantry movement, infantuarter

our oth

achin

e Rifle Teamelt) Teams have 3 figures (1 machine gunner, 1 riflemarifleman/SMG), and the Rifle Team has 4 riflemen (1 coMG), and one or more of the figures in this team have Pa

eam ha

In uction - Infantry are the currency of war and by definition, always boof the fighting. No matter how prominent tanks, aircrafbecame in a battle, infantry were always assigned the jobup in their dust to hold or seize new ground. (The term `infarules also applies to all weapons crews and any other operate on foot.)

trod

was far from the simple `gruWar. The weapons inventory from 1918 had advanced ibounds and the individual soldier was trained in the use of a dozen different weapons, ranging from grenade discharmachine guns. Mortars were given a new lease of life aweapons were beginning to be taken seriously. INFANTRY TEAMS In our previous editions of Panzerfaust, infantry windividually, but this was tedious and slowed down theM squads in WW2 operated in three fire teams of fouLate war German squads with two LMGs operated ifashion, each LMG fire team providing fire support for advance. Heavy weapons groups such as m ws, mortars and their crews, Soviet Anti-Tank Riflcrews, German MG42 machine guns and crews, etc,referred to as teams, even when acting from within a large Therefore in this edition of Panzerfaust, all infaand sections are based in (fire) teams, whether squsections. This greatly simplifies inq s combat, and casualty resolution. A team represents 2 – 4 men, and on our 1:1means a team should have 2 – 4 figures on the base.FAO/FAC Teams which always have 2 figures, it does ny er fire teams have 3 or 4 figures. It will look goodsquad has 10 figures shared between its three team basenot matter if it only has 9 figures. eg a Soviet 1941 Rifle Squad has 10 men, bei(mag) Team and two Rifle Teams. The LMG Team has m e gunner, 1 rifleman assistant, 1 rifleman), one Rifl3 riflemen, and the second Rifle Team has four Riflemen. eg 2: A German 1944 regular infantry squad hbeing typically two LMG (belt) Teams and on(b1 S eg 3: a German 1944 Panzergrenadier squad wLMG (belt) Teams. The LMG Teams have 4 figures gunner, 1 rifleman assistant, 2 rifleman/SMG, and one or figures in one t ve Panzerfausts..

try, Heavy W apons, Mo rs and Gu

Infan e rta ns

. of Figures unts as Base * o. of Teams

Team/Crew No Co 1/7Type On # n Ba

4 avalry 2 – 4 1 40

m

vy Mortar 150mm+ 6 3 40

m

Infantry Team 2 – 1 40CMMG 2 1 40HMG 4 2 40 Mortar 45-82m 2 1 40Mortar 90-120mm 4 2 40H

tLigh Gun (A) 2 1 40Md Gun (B) 4 2 40Hvy Gun (C) 6 3 40Hvy Gun (D) 8 4 40 Notes: 1. These base sizes are ‘strongly’ recommended, b

important that both players use the same basing sy2. Guns/howitzers base widths also can be increased

including barrel, as well as the crew. 3. Remember that heavy weapons & guns/artillery are

IINNFFAANNTTRRYY

11

an of WWII of the Great

S

d their two-

ry fire, close

t matter if

. The LMG n assistant, uld have an nzerfausts.

on is roken up to ride on 2 or more transport vehicles, that is, the vehicles ust then also remain within an infantry base-width of each other. If

esion is broken, the smallest cut off part of the

tion. If both sections are the same size, the esion

he figures on the team base must accurately represent the type of

S Rifle/Carbine Team ..3 – 4 riflemen/carbine

leman/loader,1-2 rifle/SMG rbine/loader, 1-2 carb/SMG

e/SMG

MG ...............................1 MMG, 2 crew

llery/Aircraft Observer, 1 radio operator

gh the heavy eapons and guns/mortars are represented on a 1:1 scale, the ews should be represented on a 1:2 ratio.

PIAT/One Shot AT Weapons

re the brunt t or artillery of following ntry' in these units which

n leaps and no less than gers to light nd anti-tank

ere based game. Ur men each. n a similar the other to

es and their were also r squad. ntry squads ads or HQ

scale, this Apart from o

if a 10 man s, but does

ng an LMG 3 figures (1 e Team has

as 10 men,

ould be two (1 machine m re of the o

Infantry Squad/Section Cohesion Infantry squads, heavy weapons sections and HQ sections normally have 1 – 3 teams. These must remain in squad cohesion at all times, unless the squad/section is performing a leap-frog move. To remain in cohesion, each team must remain within a base-width of another team of its squad/section. This applies even if the squad/sectibmfor any reason the cohsquad/section must move full speed until it re-unites with the larger part of the squad/secrearward one must move towards the front one. Note that cohhas nothing to do with Command Control radii. It is compulsory. INFANTRY BASING Tteam it is. See below: Rifle Team.................... 3 – 4 riflemen and 0 – 1 SMG figures. UAssault Rifle Team..........3 – 4 riflemen SMG Team .....................3 – 4 SMG men LMG Team (mag) ...........1 LMG man, 1 rifUS LMG Team (mag) ....1 LMG man, 1 caLMG Team (belt) ............1 LMG man, 1 rifleman/loader, 0-2 rifl Platoon HQ Team...........1 Officer, 0–1 radio operator, 1–3 riflemen. Company + HQ Team....1–2 Officer, 0–1 radio operator, 1– 2 riflemen. MHMG............................. 1 HMG, 4 crew Flame Thrower Team ....1 Flamethrower man, 1 – 2 riflemen AT Weapon Team ..........1 man with AT weapon, 1 – 2 loaders/riflemen (this is for Pzrshrck, Bazooka, AT Rifle, not one shot weapons or PIAT) FAO/FAC Team..............1 Arti Some heavy weapon crews and gun crews have large crews, which represent a number of teams on the one base. Althouwcr

or one-shot AT weapons, eg st one model on the team base

e we s is not compulsory.

bl

If any infantry base has any PIAT , AT R at leaPanzerfaust ifle Grenade,

th h could have apon, thoug thi

Basing Ta e

6th Scale 15mm Scale 1/300th Scale se Size Base Size Base Size

mm x 60-80mm 30mm x 45-60mm 15mm x 30-40mm

mm x 60mm 30mm x 30mm 15mm x 20mm

mm x 40mm ** 30mm x 30mm 15mm x 20mm

mm x 40mm 30mm x 30mm 15mm x 20mm mm x 40mm 30mm x 30mm 15mm x 20mm

mm x 40mm 30mm x 30mm 15mm x 20mm mm x 40mm 30mm x 30mm 15mm x 20mm

mm x as req’d 30mm x as req’d 15mm x as req’d mm x as req’d 30mm x as req’d 15mm x as req’d mm x as req’d 30mm x as req’d 15mm x as req’d mm x as req’d 30mm x as req’d 15mm x as req’d

ut no re-basing is required if your figures already based differently. However, it is stem. as necessary, and depth should also be sufficient to hold the entire length of the gun,

represented on a 1:1 basis, but their crews are done 1:2.

12

ssentiallyy take sam c

4. Cavalry (& horse teams) should be based two ranks deep, as it is e5. You will notice some crews count as more than one team. If the

been lost. eg a Hvy Mortar crew counts as 3 teams. If it takes 1 te

fantry

a travelling formation. ualties, use c ca asualty counters to record how many teams have

asualties, put a ‘1’ casualty counter on the base.

In Transports and Basing Most infantry transports carry one or more teams. But in some cases, uch as motorcycles, you may be required tos base two or more

transport one team. For all hicle with their joint carrying

measured from the base’s initial front dge sition. So if a 40 m x 40m base rate ont ed ill end up 1cm

ith restrictions

:

motorcycles on one infantry sized base, tointents and purposes, this counts as one vecapacity, when firing at them. For crews which are larger than one team, you must use a transport large enough to carry that many teams. INFANTRY MOVEMENT - The average infantryman was usually burdened with a considerable amount of clothing, equipment, a few days rations, and ammunition. All this invariably affected the individuals rate of movement. The speed of ny infaa ntry advance was usually restricted to a fast walk with enough

energy for a quick dash in the event of trouble or self-preservation. All infantry movement is

edge position to final front e po m m ge wmakes a 180º turn at a walk of 5cm, the fr

behind the base’s initial rear position. edget rates w Infantry travel at the following movemen

applying to terrain or obstacles; Infantry Movement Rates

Charge/Evade 10cm 5cm Walk

Crawl/Wade 2.5cm Prone Cannot move

No delay

- ½ move building - ½ move

- ½ move -1 move

al

utive o uring

ed but not movement.)

ge/evade movement cannot be used when going uphill.

level cover not hile in a standing position. This does not count as being

p ing `prone' are reduced better concealment against observation.

one' if behind or within: buildings,

in ese

the rtak t (or her than the th n fo n of course

e rew Size ted by # Figs

Movement restrictions; Disembarking/embarking from transport - ½ moveEntering building via door Entering building, other than thru door

scending/Descending one floor of a AScaling obstacle below man-height

ight or above Scaling obstacle man-he `W k' movement (5cm); This is the standard movement rate. `Charge/Evade' movement (10cm); This can only be used - • when moving under threat of enemy fire, • to enter Close Quarter Combat (CQC), ie, charging the enemy, • to disengage or withdraw as a result of bad morale. Infantry can use Charge/Evade movement for up to two consec

ves followed directly by the same number of moves resting (dmwhich firing and CQC is permitt Infantry equipped with heavy weapons (mortars, MMGs & HMG) cannot use Charge/Evade movement without abandoning their equipment.

Char

`Crawl' movement (2.5cm); his is usually carried out to take advantage of any lowT

afforded w`prone'. `Wade' movement (2.5cm); Used when crossing light streams, fordable rivers, etc. `Prone' - For infantry to be considered `prone' they must be stationary for the ntire move. Being `prone' means the infantry ae re lying face down and

making the most of any available cover and presenting the smallest ossible target to the enemy. Advantages of be

casualti infantry fire and• Infantry cannot be considered `pr

es from

walls, structures, dug-outs or entrenchments. • Heavy weapons & gun crews, except Lt mortars, cannot be

`prone' while setting-up or firing their weapon.

Crew/Set-Up Times - The follow g infantry heavy weapons all requir a minimum number of turns for tting up, after which they can be fired. During the setup period crew unde e no movemen action) ot

. (These w,

assembly eir weapo r action eapons cabegin a ga e already set-up.) m

Team/C epresenWeapon Set-Up Tim # R 2 fMMG 2 moves 1 team

HMG 2 moves 2 teams igures

4 figures

Hv M

Lt Mortar 1 move * 1 team 2 figures Md Mortar 2 moves * 2 teams 4 figures

ortar 4 moves * 3 teams 6 figures

Radio setup no penalty - - * +1 move set-up time if crew is conscript

. ansporting the above heavy . So a Hv Mortar

. Heavy Weapons Crews reduced below half strength are no longer e or

..................... 20 points each

e during WWII for those

n dismount at the first sign of combat, harges ere rarely carried out while

did occur, the enemy was rical accounts of cavalry

unted and often left the ey fought mounted. In Poland 1939,

nd on r llywood.)

1. `Setting up' is required each time a heavy weapon is moved by its

crew. (Does not apply for vehicle mounted weapons.) 2. Crew sizes listed are the number of infantrymen required to man

the weapon. Carrying capacity required for tr3weapons & crews is the crew size plus onerequires a transport that can carry 3 + 1 teams = 4 teams. This includes ammunition etc.

4. Man-portable radios must be operated while stationary (not applicable to AFVs.)

5. Heavy weapons capable of being mounted on softskin vehicles are listed under the `Vehicle Notes' for each country.

6capable of transporting the weapon and must ither abandon it be reinforced if they wish to move.

Infantry Point Values & Organisation; See the Infantry Teams/Weapons Fire Factors Table for the point values of the various types of infantry teams available. Note that point values may be further modified according to troop quality. The army lists at the back of the rules provide organisation for each nation, listing which teams make up each squad, HQ section, etc. Infantry man-portable radios cost...... If you wish to use organisations that we have not provided in the army lists, you must have sufficient documentary evidence regarding actual organisation of those units. You cannot make up any units as desired. When following documentary evidence in forming additional units, please ensure that each section/squad has the correct number of teams, as explained above in Infantry Teams and Basing. Each platoon must have a platoon HQ, each company or battalion must have a co. or bat. HQ. Mounted Troops/Cavalry - Cavalry in their traditional role as `shock troops' ceased to be of value as early as the American Civil War, where the romantic `death or glory' charges frequently fell victim to the ever increasing firepower of the infantry. As a result, tactics were changed and the new role of mounted infantry emerged.

Mounted Infantry played a large rol nations which lacked motorisation, and were best employed in terrain inaccessible by motorised vehicles. In battle, mounted units would manoeuvre into position and theand engage the enemy on foot. C wstill mounted. The few occasions where thisusually fleeing or in disorder. (Many histoactions fail to describe that they fought

r t thdismo

reader with the imp ession thaion this misconcept was exploited by German propaganda a

perpetuated later by post-wa Ho Point Value – Cavalry/Mounted Infantry Teams cost 3 points more than their infantry team counterparts. Cavalry Movement Rates:

rse No delay

Trot 10cm Walk 5cm Charge/Evade 20cm

ismounting HoDMounting Horse - ½ move

va s standard v

`Trot' movement (10cm); Ca lry/Mounted Infantry move at a `Trot' (10cm) amo ement except when passing through difficult terrain. `Walk’ movement (5cm); For negotiating difficult terrain such as woods, orchards, rubble, low scrub, fordable river/streams or rocky ground, the `Walk' movement (5cm) is used. `Charge/Evade' movement (20cm); This can only be used - • when moving while under threat of enemy fire, • to enter Close Quarter Combat (CQC), ie, charge • to disengage/withdraw as a result of bad morale. Mounted Infantry can use Charge/Evade movement for up to two consecutive moves followed directly by the same number of moves resting. (Resting troops may fire and CQC but cannot move.) Charge/Evade cannot be used while moving through difficult terrain or when going uphill.

13

be negotiated

ounted Infantry cannot enter buildings or negotiate obstacles over (in which case they become normal

transported by horse teams tr

i n all be fired from horseback by

lry observation. ted infantry are

n

C Yation Year Theatre

Man-height obstacles such as walls, hedge-lines can without penalty or delay. Mman-height without dismountinginfantry.) They cannot remount. MMG, HMG, Med & Hvy mortars must bewith wagons, or by ucks. Pistols, R fles, SMG, assault rifles camounted infantry. All cava /mounted-infantry are Size `B' forCasualties from incoming fire upon cavalry/mouncalculated as per firi g at normal infantry. USE OF AVALR IN WWII N

0 aly 41 - 43 Russia only

44 Balkans & Russia pan

ORSE TEAMS (for towing guns, heavy weapons, etc) s Movement Rates:

Germany 39 - 45 Europe and Russia Russia 39 - 45 Europe and Russia France 39 - 40 Extensive use Belgium 39 - 4 Limited use ItHungary 40 - 45 Balkans & Russia (much use) Rumania 40 -Ja 37 - 45 China only Finland 39 - 44 Limited use HHorse Team Road 10cm

Cross Country 5cm

ovement rate - 10cm on roads. Cannot be ridden offroad.

This y all countries with the

-

uipped

as th

nd at a walking rate of 5cm, as per normal infantry movement.

ied while mounted, sported on bicycles,

SSAho were assigned duties

hich were above that of the regular troops. They were classified as

s rmal

hese troops are also capable of laying mines, clearing mines, using structing

ridges, (blowing up bridges), laying booby traps, and so on. ised differently to regular troops, being

s can be purchased as per the army lists, or, a aximum of one infantry squad (not HQ nor heavy weapons unit) per

ineers:

o be given a special or AT weapon in

can only fire/use one weapon type a turn. eg an s demo charges. It can either fire as a rifle

equipped with smoke grenades can once per game. To use, simply place a 6cm x 2cm

5cm in front of the team’s base (subject to wind effects of e Direct Area Fire Laid Smoke & White Phosphorous).

nland

ungary

me under the control of e capt

tio of guards to prisoners of units

strength

berately pon prisoners following their surrender will receive

q`

a

circumstances and ground cover d firer.

r moves over half

AcqTo e ith infantry fire, the firer must first acquire the

rget under one of the following circumstances. Only then can the

1.

the turn that the firing is to take place, or

peculative

A horse team costs 1/2 the point value of the equivalent vehicle counterpart. All setup/pack up time for horse towed weapons is the same as for vehicles. See the Vehicle Movement Restrictions table for movement restrictions. Bikes - MPoint Value – 3 points per team

form of transport was widely used bexception of the USA, Britain & Commonwealth countries. Nonmotorised infantry units were provided with some degree of mobility andInfantry divisions often contained one or more battalions eqentirely with bicycles as a mobile reserve.

Bicycle equipped units on the Eastern front were not common e most roads were in poor condition.

1. Use of bicycles is limited to roads, and any movement cross-country must be carried out dismounted a

2. Only the rider's personal weapons can be carr3. MMG, HMG, Md & Hv mortars cannot be tran4. No deduction on movement for mounting or dismounting, 5. Infantry cannot fire weapons or use `charge/evade' movement

without dismounting & discarding bicycles. Discarded bicycles can be reclaimed if collected from the same point they were originally discarded.

6. Casualties from incoming fire upon bicycle mounted infantry are calculated as per firing at normal infantry.

RS A ULT ENGINEERS - PIONEEThese are special, trained assault troops wwsupport troops and were most often the toughest within the division or regiment. Their speciality was attacking fortifications. Assault engineers/pioneers are for all purposes the same ano infantry, except they are the only troops permitted to use the following equipment: flamethrowers (US Marines are also permitted to use) demolition charges – see Demolition Charges, page 40 smoke grenades – 5 PV per team mine detectors – 12 PV per team Tmine detectors, and torpedoes. Their other tasks include conb Engineers were organmore heavily equipped, having not only the above mentioned specialist weapons/equipment, but also with AT grenades, bazookas, and so on. Engineermcompany can be converted into engineers. They remain a squad of the platoon that you purchased them with. You must re-calculate the points value of the squad as follows: Point Values for Eng

Engineer teams are purchased as per normal infantry teams + 3 points per team, eg a normal platoon HQ platoon + 3 points, or a normal rifle team + 3 points. Each engineer team can alsaddition to its normal infantry team weapons. The special weapons include flamethrowers, demo charges, smoke grenades, mines, mine detectors. AT weapons include one-shot weapons, AT rifles, Bazookas, PIATs, Panzerschrecks. However, no engineer team can have the same weapon twice. Finally, theyengineer rifle team also hateam, or use the demo charges. It cannot use both in one turn. Engineer Smoke Grenades

per team and can only be used by Smoke grenades cost 5 pointsengineer teamengineers. Each

onlyuse theme cloudsmok

course, se SKI TROOPS: In the frozen terrain of Finland and Northern Russia, ski troops played an important role, and fought a war unique to themselves. Countries that employed mountain/ski troops on the Russian Front were: Germany (Dietl's Gebirgskorps) Fi (Sissi) Russia Italy HRumania Under snow conditions, ie, snow has fallen or is falling, ski troops move at 4cm when going up hill, 8cm per turn on flat ground, or 12cm down hill. A charge/evade move of 12cm is also permitted as for infantry normal movement. Only light small arms may be fired while still on skis, being pistols, rifles, or SMGs. Sledges for carting heavy weapons cost 3 points and can be towed by the infantry at the above movement rates, except that they cannot charge or evade. Prisoners - Infantry or crews which are taken prisoner, coth or and can either be withdrawn off the board or removed from the game altogether. If there is any possibility that prisoners may be retrieved during the course of a game, the original owner can request that they remain on the games board. A ra1:10 should be used for escorting or guarding POWs. Infantrydepleted of teams for escort duties are not considered under for morale tests.

Friendly forces which witness enemy troops deli inflicting casualties uan automatic `+3' on subsequent morale tests. The capture of prisoners and subsequent interegation usually provided the captors with some form of low level intelligence about the enemy. This aspect is best exploited in campaigns with umpire mediation on what information is revealed.

IINNFFAANNTTRRYY WWEEAAPPOONNSS

troduction - InThe following rules are designed to resolve small arms fire in the uickest and most efficient manner without loss of detail. A system of fire-factors' is used to measure the effect that weapons have against

irthe targets. Performance deteriorates with range depending on calibre nd type of weapon. When an enemy unit is fired upon, fire-factors are

accumulated for all weapons firing at it. From this total, variations are applied and casualties are calculated. Combat Variations are used to

ry casualties according to thevarelevant to both the target an • `Infantry weapons' refers to all small arms (except mortars)

employed by infantry or as equipped on vehicles and AFVs (MG's, flame-throwers, etc.)

• `Cover' refers to any sort of terrain which might provide some form of protection and/or reduce visual observation for target or firer.

Infantry weapons may not be fired if the fire• of its movement allowance.

uiring a Target - ngage a target w

taenemy unit, AFV or vehicle be engaged as a target;

Enemy target is visible to the firer (as per Observation Rules) during

2. Enemy target has fired and muzzleflash was observed. A

muzzleflash will either reveal the general location (for S

14

fire only); or the target's exact location (engage as `Firing at

3.

4. ted above

5.

ay from all other bases of that unit. Otherwise, you cannot individually target infantry bases that are at or within one base

6.

7.

acing the street, but the squad can also see through any other door or window within 4cm of any edge of the

you can

ion.

Pro1.

or firing at muzzleflash. (Note that an infantry team that is lined up in base to

. Use the fire factors provided in the Infantry Teams/Weapons Fire

`fire-factors' for the team/weapons.

Add together the fire-factors for all teams/weapons (that have the same variations) being fired against the same target or target

ith the remaining f ors.

t s r d ta

the inpa fira

e Dbtr

1

alntr

As mDirecmovedurinof th ring must also be in a osition to observe the target at that part of the turn. If the target is

it's pl isib my T gun which observed the target during the first half of the turn can

ahittintrack

fantry team/base is wiped out, remove it from the table

muzzleflash'), or

Enemy is not visible but was previously seen entering or near a certain terrain cover. Only Speculative fire may be used on the `cover' that target was last seen entering before visual contact was lost.

Firing at targets in circumstances other than those lisshould not be permitted unless overruled by an umpire.

Shooting at HQ & Heavy Weapons bases: any individual base or unit can itself always shoot back at an individual infantry base (squad/HQ/heavy weapon) that fired at it, or that is over one base width aw

width of another base of their section/platoon. In this case, you must fire at the unit, and the casualties are removed as desired by the player commanding the unit. See casualties below.

The firer’s front base edge must be touching a wall or hedge in order to shoot through/past it. If a stone/brick wall is higher than an infantry model, you can only shoot through windows or door ways. Any unit/s in a building are assumed to be defending windows or doors.

Buildings. Because infantry base sizes won’t fit exactly into buildings, whereas in reality a squad would spread itself around windows and doors, place the infantry base’s front edge against one wall. But, for visibility purposes, that squad can also ‘observe’ or ‘see’ through other windows or doors up to its base width away from any base edge. eg place a 4cm x 4cm infantry base against a house’s front wall f

unit’s base. So the normal rules of observation, whereonly see from your front edge, don’t apply within buildings for infantry units. However, the infantry base can only shoot from its front edge, so if a target appears to the rear or side of your infantry base, and you want to shoot at that, during the firing phase you must rotate your infantry unit and place it against the relevant building wall. This movement is free. Whichever edge it shoots from, rotate the infantry base so that the front edge is now facing the firing direct

cedure for Firing with Infantry Weapons - Determine whether target can be legitimately fired upon and which type of fire is being used, ie. Direct, Speculative

base contact with another team of the same squad, that is front edge lined up with rear edge, and corners lined up too, can shoot through that team without penalty. This represents both teams intermingling.)

2. Measure the range between target and firer. For target vehicles

measurements are taken from the closest edge or corner. For guns, mortars, heavy weapons & infantry, all measurements are taken from the front edge or front corner of the base.

3Factors Table below, and cross reference the team/type of weapon/s being fired with distance to the target. This will give the

entioned previously, (see Turn Segment G: Resolve Infantry Fire & t Fire, page 6) although Direct Fire is conducted after all ment has been completed, players can select to fire at targets g any part of their movement phase by back-tracking the position e target. In doing so, the unit which is fi

4.

group (that have the same variations). See below. If your fire-factors exceed 100, then treat as 2 groups, one firing at/up to 100, the other w ire fact

5. Enemy units being targeted with identical Infan ry Weapon Direct

Fi e Variations for both firer/s an rget/s can all be treated as a single target group. If any of target units have different variations, eg one target squad is hard cover, one in soft cover, then they must be fired upon se rately. Also, if the firing units have different variations, eg one ring squad is moving, one is

must fistationary, then they re sepa tely. 6. Now refer to the Infantry W apons irect Fire Variations below the

Infantry Casualty Table. Add/su ract together any variations othwhich are applicable to b the fire or target. Then roll one (1D6)

die and add or subtract to the total. ,2 = -1, 3,4 = 0, 5,6 = +1. 7. Refer to the Infantry Casu ty Table and cross reference the total

fire-factors with the adjusted Infa ry Fire Variations figure. The result is the number of teams that a e casualties.

pdestroyed/disabled, it remains where it was fired upon, not completing

anned movement. Otherwise it completes it's full movement. (eg. During the movement phase a tank moved from being

le to behind a building. It took 1/2 of it's turn to do this. An enevAfire t the tank before it disappears behind the building. It succeeds in

g the tank and destroying it, so the tank model is put back (back-ed) to where it was when the gun fired at it.

Casualties • When a unit or group of units suffers casualties, entire bases of

teams must be removed if possible, as selected by the player commanding the unit. The exception is that some crews count as more than one team. If they take casualties, use casualty counters to record how many teams have been lost. (eg a Hvy Mortar crew counts as 3 teams. If it takes 1 team casualties, put a '1' casualty counter on the base)

• If several units are fired upon, eg three squads of one platoon are fired upon together, remove casualties as evenly as possible from amongst the three squads. (eg – the platoon suffers 3 team casualties, so one team casualty is removed from each squad). Single-team HQs and single-team heavy weapons do not have to be included when spreading casualties evenly.

• When an inand none of the weapons may be recovered. If it is a gun or mortar, place cotton wool on the model to show that it has been destroyed, rather than removing it. (Note also that weapons are not transferable between units during a game.)

15

Infantry Teams/Weapons Fire Factors Table

y e FInfantr Teams/Weapons Fir actors Table Range in cm

PV Team/Weapon Type CQC 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160

1 1 1 1 - - - 2 2 1 1 - - - -

- - - - - - - - -

- - - -

3 2 1 - - - -

2 - - - - - -

2 9 2 11fantry

3 4

/25mm AA Cannon - 5 7 9 9 8 7

7 Rifle Team 2 1 1 1 1 1 10 US Rifle/Carbine Team 3 2 2 2 2 13 Assault Rifle Team 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 - 10 SMG Team 6 6 3 1 - - - - 23 Platoon HQ Team 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - 34 Compa 5 4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - ny + HQ Team 30 FAO/FAC Team 1 - - - - - - - - - - * Open Topped AFV Crew 1 - - - - - - - - - - 13 LMG Team (mag) 2 3 4 5 4 4 14 US LMG Team (mag) 4 4 5 6 5 5 4 2 1 - - - - 15 LMG Team (belt) ** 2 4 5 7 6 5 4 3 1 1 1 - - 3 + AT Weapon Team *** - - - - - -

6 5 4 2 2 1 10 8 6 5 4 2

Weapons Direct Fire Variations

2 1 - - - - 3 1 1 1 - - 6 5 4 3 2 -

26 MMG 2 8 14 16 14 130 HMG 3 6 10 12 12 160 Quad HMG as above, but with different In 8 AFV LMG (mag) - 3 4 4 4 4 12 AFV LMG (belt) - 4 5 7 6 5 *** 20*

PV Flamethrowers CQC 5 10 15 15 Flame Thrower Team (Man) 16 16 - - Enginee15 Flame Thrower (AFV) - 30 16 - (Soviet/A6 Flame Thrower (AFV) - 50 27 8 (UK

rs onlxis)

/USA)

y

2

to an HQ costs + 20 PV) tops, sides or rear. unted belt fed LMGs.)

amethrower teams, which already include the addition.)

Figures in the above table are fire factors for each team/weapon. (adding a* PV not applicable, cannot be purchased separately. Applies to AFVs with open** LMG Team (belt) on foot cannot fire if it moved. (Does not apply to vehic*** AT Weapon Teams cost 3 points plus the point value of the AT weapon**** Refer to Gun Charts for PV Note: to upgrade any of the above teams to engineer status, + 3 PV. (exc

radio

le mo.

ept for f

oviet Mosin-Nagant. Bolt action

only.

d a practical rate of fire

n/squad support weapons, they

2 rbiners. (One man may have an SMG, eg, the NCO.)

pon on a eavier m either

ick barrel change-outs.

mm-15mm calibre machine guns sed. T viet 2.7mm ese

ir main armament in the Armour Lists, ie. HMG,

l Infantry Teams/Weapons Notes - Rifle Team: 3 – 4 men armed with Bolt Action Rifles, and up to 1 SMG. Covers all rifles which required each round to be manually reloaded, eg. British Lee-Enfield, German Mauser, Srifles were the standard infantry weapon for the majority of countries. Their rate of fire was limited to 6-9 rounds/minute if fired with any accuracy. US Rifle/Carbine Team: 3 – 4 men armed with self loading rifles. Covers the US M1 Garrand & M1 Carbine, German Gew41 & Gew43 and Soviet SVT-40 model rifles. All weapons fired semi-automatic using standard rifle ammunition. The M1 Garrand was the standard US infantry rifle, while German & Soviet models were limited issue Assault Rifle Team: 3 – 4 men armed with Assault Rifles. Covers the German MP43 & MP44. These weapons were characterised by their advanced design and were capable of select or full automatic fire. Using a short cartridge, they were highly effective at close range with the ability to engage targets at distance. Also includes the late war US M2 Carbine which could be fired full automatic (not to be confused with the semi-automatic M1 version). SMG Teams: 3 – 4 men armed with Sub Machine Guns. Also referred to as `Machine Pistols'. These weapons haaround 60-100 rounds/minute and a short effective range due to the `pistol type' cartridges and low velocity bullet. Accuracy was limited to close range when firing on automatic. Platoon HQ Team: 3 – 4 men being 1 Officer & 1 – 2 NCO, 1 – 2 men. The officer would normally have a SMG, the others rifles. PV does not include a radio. If permitted, this is 20 PV extra. Company, Battalion etc HQ Team: 3 – 4 men being 1 Officer & 1 – 3 NCOs. The officer and some NCOs would normally have SMGs, the others rifles. PV does not include a radio. If permitted, this is 20 PV extra. Many company HQ sections have 2 HQ teams. LMG Team (mag): 3 – 4 men being one Light Machine Gun (Magazine Fed), one assistant rifleman, and 1 – 2 men with rifles or SMGs. (Also referred to as Automatic rifle.) Covers examples such as the British Bren, US BAR M1918A2, Soviet DP 1928, French Hotchkiss mle26, Czech ZB vz26, etc. Issued as sectiowere limited to select accurate bursts of fired from magazines holding 20-60 rounds. Also includes German MG34 & MG42 using (drum fed) magazines. Practical rate of fire; 80-120 rounds/minute. These teams

include US Marines during the early part of the war, when they were equipped with the BAR and bolt action rifles. US LMG Team (mag): 3 – 4 men being one Light Machine Gun (US

AR M1918A2 magazine fed) one assistant carbiner, and 1 – Bca LMG Team (Belt): 2 – 4 men being one Light Machine Gun (Belt Fed), one crewman with rifle and perhaps 1 – 2 men with rifles or SMGs. Covers `bipod mounted' German MG34 & MG42, US Browning Air ooled .30 cac l (bipod). These weapons used belt-fed ammunition which

provided a much higher rate of fire than their magazine-fed counterparts. Practical rate of fire; 180-250 rounds/minute. Infantry LMG (belt) Teams on foot cannot move and fire. Does not apply to vehicle mounted belt fed LMGs.

ll AFVA LMGs listed for Italian, Soviet, Finnish, Polish and Japanese AFVs are treated as `magazine-fed'. German, US and British AFVs (except those equipped with Bren LMG) are treated as `belt-fed'. Medium Machine Gun (MMG). Covers both infantry MMGs and their crews, and AFV MMGs. Covers all tripod mounted 6.5mm-8mm calibre machine guns. These include German MG34 & MG42 (tripod), British Vickers .30" cal, French Hotchkiss mle1914, US Browning .Water Cooled 30" cal (tripod), Soviet Maxim M1910, Japanese Type 92, etc. Medium machine guns were used in `sustained fire' roles for medium to long range. Accuracy was achieved by stabilising the wea

ounting (ie. tripod). Over-heating was reduced byhheavily designed barrels (water cooled) or quLarger crews were necessary to maintain the weapon and to carry ammunition supplies. Practical rate of fire; 300-500 rounds/minute. Heavy Machine Gun (HMG). Covers both infantry HMGs and their rews, ac nd AFV HMGs. Covers all 12

u hese include US Browning .50" Cal, British 15mm Besa, So DshK1938, French 13.2mm Hotchkiss mle 30, Japan1

13mm Type 93, Italian 12.7mm Breda m31, etc. The rate of fire for heavy machine guns was not high, but the large calibre rounds gave better accuracy at longer ranges. HMG ammunition usually had AT rounds (tungsten cored) slotted into every four or five normal rounds, therefore permitting them to be used against light AFVs. When firing an HMG at an AFV, treat as a 7.9mm wz35 AT Rifle. Can also achieve multiple hits in the same way as a 20mm autocannon. See later. AFV Mounted Machine Guns - Machine Guns equipped on AFVs are listed along with the

16

MG or LMG. Most AFV MGs have been classified `light'(LMG) ecause they were operated by only a single crew member. Medium Gs are those which are served by at least two or more crew and were pable of sustained fire role. Heavy MGs are determined by calibre.

. M

n

tV

b

A flamethrower may only be fired if the operator does not ment allowance.

See later section on Flamethrowers and AFVs.

n try heavy weapons platoons or

teams listed, but normally not. In ry heavy weapons platoons or companies

G), or, G Platoons, with 3 x MMG in each)

heavy weapons platoon you must also ection, with a platoon HQ team and 0 – 2 evant are an additional + 20, as per for

y, you must purchase 1 – 2 company HQ any HQ team/s and 0 – 2 rifle teams, plus latoon and company HQs can be mounted weapons are horse-drawn, or given cars or

MbMca Infantry Heavy Weapons Organisatio

y lists, infan h to use,

In some cases in the armcompanies will have their command Flamethrowers - Flamethrowers were terrifying weapons, bot

t .and especially to be confron ed by Although a close range weapon, eva y

most cases, these infanttheir d stating effect was used mainl against fortifications and may simply be listed as follows:

MMhouses MG Platoon (4 x an-portable flame throwers are limited to use by engineer MG Company, (2 x Mteams. All flamethrowers can be used up to very short ranges or in Close Quarters Combat. They have an arc of fire of 30º from the centre In these cases, for eachof the firi g base/vehicle, ie their Fire Factors or CQC Factors can only purchase a platoon HQ saffect infantry/softskin etc targets within range and within 30º. Note that

erifle teams. Radios if rel

if a targ is even partly overlapped by the 30º arc, it is affected. infantry. ehicle mounted flamethrowers have been divided into two For each compancategories; UK/USA and Axis/Soviet. Allied flamethrowers were more sections, with 1 - 2 compefficient and had a greater range than their Axis and Soviet radios if relevant. These p

y counterparts. on horseback if the heavSee the Infantry Weapons Table or CQC Infantry trucks if motorised.

Weapons Table and relevant procedures to attack an infantry target. This includes all softskins, heavy weapons and gun crews. As per those rules, you do not attack fortifications or houses directly, ut simply attack the infantry in them.

move over half its allocated move

fantry Casualty Table In

iati + 15+ 20+ 0+ 0+ 80+ 100+ Final Fire Factors Var on 1+ 3+ 5+ 7+ 10 3 40+ 50+ 60+ 7

9 12 18 24 30 35 41 47 59 6 8 11 16 21 27 32 37 42 53 5 7 10 14 19 23 28 33 37 46

+7 2 2 3 5 4

6 +6 1 2 3 +5 1 2 3 4 +4 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 40 +3 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 11 14 17 21 24 28 34 +2 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 9 12 15 18 21 23 29

1 0 1 1 2 2 3 4 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 7 8 10

+ 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 0 5 7 8 10 12 13 16

12 13 16 -1-2 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 13 -3 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 -4 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 8

2 3 3 2 2 3

0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3

-5 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 26 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

4 4 5 3 3 4 2

--7 0 0 0 0 0 -8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 -9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

are casualties. Variables over +7 treat as +7. Variables under –9 treat as –9. Cross reference Final Variation total with fire factors to find out how many Infantry Weapons Direct Fire Variations: (row shifts, ie, up or down) Target Unit/s Variations

teams

Firing Unit/s Variations up to

d Cover -2 Firer under coveri+2 Firer is veteran

cript peculzzleflaarrel

-3 for each ‘team’ firing crew lties firing

ver: ain;

oods, orchards, hedges, or wooden fences or structures including T/field guns, tank riders. Softskin vehicles

s with only partial cover for their crews are also cluded here when fired at from certain arcs. See AFVs Crews and

Target behind Hard cover: are behind or within the following terrain;

s Crews and Small Arms Fire below.

applies if enemy target is moving over 5cm and up to 10cm.

10cm during the turn.

th

pt status.

-5 Uapploca

-2 Target behind soft/partial cover -3 Firer moved Target behind Har

half ng fire -6

-8 Target in fortifications -1 Target moving over 5cm -2 Firer is cons-2 Target moving over 10cm -5 Firer doing s-2 Target is prone infantry -3 Firing at mu

1 Target is in softskin vehicle +2 Each extra b

ative or covering fire sh firing

has lost as casua+ -3 Firer is AFV Chance Factor: Throw 1D6 1,2 = -1 3,4 = 0 5,6 = +1

from a One Man Turret

Infantry Weapons Direct Fire Variation Explanations - -2 Target behind Soft/Partial coapplies if enemy target/s are behind or within the following terrwwooden buildings, shielded Aor horses do not provide any cover to their passengers or riders. AT/field guns with shields provide only partial cover for crews, not hard cover. Many AFVinSmall Arms Fire below. -6this applies if enemy target/sbrick or stone buildings, stone or earth walls, bocage, armored APCs, dug-in, or entrenched. See AFV -8 Target in fortifications this applies if enemy target is within fortifications such as a pill box, bunker or fortified building. Refer to the rules on Fortifications for more details. -1 Target moving over 5cm:

-2 Target moving over 10cm: pplies if enemy target is moving in excess of a

-2 Target is Prone Infantry: applies if enemy target (infantry only) are in a Prone position. Infantry can count as `prone' while in/behind the open, brush, hedge, woods, treeline, orchard +1 Target is in softskin vehicle/s: applies to all unarmored vehicles and their passengers -3 Firer moved up to half; nits thau t expends up to half movement during any phase of the turn

incurs is penalty on firing. +2 Veteran, -2 Conscriapplies too all units which have been up or down graded in Allows for variation in small-arms training and experience for various qualities of units.

sing Speculative or covering Fire; lies if firing at a enemy position without knowledge of target's exact tion.

17

theral location.

+

o

sf

F m a One Man Turret one man turrets.

-3 Firing at Muzzleflash: this applies if the exact position of a muzzleflash has been observed by

e firer. If only the general location of the muzzleflash has been lative fire against that genrevealed, then used Specu

2 Each extra barrel firing;

this applies to any multi-barrelled weapon. Add +2 for each extra barrel ab ve one, eg. +6 for 20mm Quad, +2 for twin mounted HMGs. Multi-barrelled weapons are defined as having all the barrels coaxially mounted (eg. dual turret MGs on PzIII A-D, US M16 AASP). -3 for each ‘team’ firing crew has lost as casualties thi only applies to crews which are larger than one team, and that have suf ered casualties.

irer is AFV firing fro-3refer to the AFV notes to see which AFVs have Gun Crews - Gun crews for guns with shields receive soft/partial cover, unless fired at from behind, in which case they receive no cover. Guns without gun-shields provide no cover for crews. AFVs Crews and Small Arms Fire Crews of AFVs are considered to be one team. Crews of AFVs with open flanks, rear or tops can be subjected to small arms fire, and receive either `hard cover', `partial cover' or `no cover' depending on the AFV and direction from where it is fired upon. It must be remembered that in combat, most SP guns required the crew to operate outside the rotection of cramped crew compartments, especially when handling p

bulky ammunition and shells. See the section on CQC regarding close assaulting an open topped (and or sides and rear) AFV. Unless specified otherwise in the AFV notes, use the following rules:

ully EnF closed AFVs • buttoned-up - cannot be affected by small arms • commander ‘head-up’ - commander counts as being in hard cover.

If he is ‘killed’ by receiving one ‘team’ or more worth of casualties, the AFV becomes ‘closed-down’ for the rest of the game, and suffers morale & firing penalties. Also, if it is a one-man-turret AFV, the remaining crew bail out, and the AFV is considered destroyed.

Open Topped AFVs • AFV crew count as being in hard cover for small arms fire, • unless fired at within º45 from above, eg from a building’s 2nd+

story, in which case AFV crew receive no cover Open Topped and Rear AFV cr• ew count as being in hard cover for small arms fire from the

f

a

ront arc • AFV crew count as being in partial cover for small arms fire from the

side arcs A• FV crew count as having no cover for small arms fire from the rear rc

Open Topped, Sides and Rear A• FV crew count as being in hard cover for small arms fire from the ront arc f

ll una

better red to being dismo ftskin ehicle) s per

are ile either

e truck model.

Swphin

and is

C enemy units or positions (buildings, woods,

`keeping enemy

their passengers.

Weapon Target Width

• AFV crew count as having no cover for small arms fire from the sides and rear arcs

oft-skin Vehicles & Passengers - S

A rmored vehicles are categorised as `softskin.' Passengers are cover while riding ovide afforded no protective in softskin vehicles and pr

compaa target unted (eg. +1 Target is Sov . Passengers within softskin vehicles take casualties anormal Infantry Fire.

Softskin vehicles themselves destroyed if wh carrying passengers or empty, the vehicle receives casualties that equal or exceed half the vehicle’s passenger carrying capacity. Refer to Softskin Vehicles for capacity. eg a truck that can carry 2 teams receives 1 team worth of casualties, and therefore is destroyed. All surviving passengers (if the truck was carrying 2 teams) must

mediately disembark, ie, be placed next to thim

peculative Fire (SF) - Speculative Fire is for use against suspected enemy occupied positions

here no immediate visual contact has been established, but an enemy resence is suspected. To use SF against a position, the firing unit must ave some cause for action; ie. spotted enemy muzzle-flash, movement to the area, etc.

SF can be carried out during any part of the turncalculated as per normal Infantry Fire taking into account any variations applicable to both the firer and target. Units cannot be engaged with SF if the occupied position is not in a clear DLOS with the firer (eg. a unit behind a house cannot be

bjesu cted to SF, but a unit within the house can.)

overing Fire (CF) - overing Fire is directed atC

etc) with the intention of suppressing enemy fire & movement (heads down'.) CF can be used against identified or suspectedositions. p

• Only the following automatic infantry teams/weapons can use CF -

Assault Rifles Teams, SMG Teams, LMG teams or AFV LMGs, MMGs, HMGs, 20/25mm AA cannons.

• Units using CF must be stationary for the entire turn. • The target area for CF must be declared prior to the movement

phase of the turn. • CF has no effective against AFVs or vehicles, or Weapons participating in CF each have an Target Width which is the maximum width that the weapon can place Covering Fire onto a target area. These Target Widths are applicable for all ranges;

width

T

uu

•

•

•

•

C

nge assaults were d-to-hand combat was a rare occurrence

ain such as buildings. The infantryman's ally everything but what it was intended for.

s one.

bases or groups) touch bases with each other, unless there is an intervening

e of a friendly unit that is in front edge contact with an enemy infantry base will also participate.

ts are both inside the

y may, however, be fired upon prior

movement

t are in CQC cannot use them.

SMG,A/Rifle half a team base LMG one team base width

MMG, 20/25mm (3-4 barrels) three team base widths HMG,20/25mm (1-2 barrels) two team base widths

he maximum area that can be subjected to CF by a firing unit, is determined by adding all the Target Widths for the weapons being sed. All enemy units which fall inside this width are considered to be nder CF. eg. a Platoon with 3xLMG Teams & 1xMMG can place CF aon target area six team base widths wide.

Units subjected to CF are considered `pinned' from the start of the turn. They do not take any casualties.

• If a unit under covering fire wants to either move or fire, it must first take casualties from the covering fire as per normal infantry fire. Whether it received any casualties or not, it then must take a morale test and get an OK result. If it gets an OK result, it can move or fire as desired. Units subjected to CF suffer penalties in morale and firing • Enemy units engaged in CQC with friendly forces at the start of

the turn cannot be subjected to Covering Fire. For CF against buildings, each weapon can only be used against

neo floor, it cannot cover two stories in the same turn. No units, friendly or enemy, which were outside the covering fire,

anc move into or through CF unless they also receive casualties as though the CF was directed at them. Friendly units cannot enter friendly covering fire to enter into close quarters combat with enemy units under covering fire.

CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT (Melee); lose Quarter Combat (CQC) covers all `infantry vs infantry' skirmishes at occur when hostile infath ntry bases touch each other. Also referred to

as `melee', the lethality of automatic weapons and fragmentation renades at short range meant that close rag

extremely bloody affairs. Hanexcept in the most confined terr

d for virtubayonet was useRates of fire became more important than accuracy. CQC is used when two opposing infantry bases or groups of bases close to touch bases with each other, or occupy the same building. All short range infantry fire, grenade tossing and hand-to-hand fighting are

mbined and resolved aco • CQC is calculated after all Direct fire is completed. • CQC occurs when enemy infantry units (individual

wall or hedge, in which case, both units must touch the intervening wall or hedge. (Note if it is a brick/stone wall over figure height, and has no doors or windows, CQC cannot occur.)

• A second rank whose front base edge is lined up with and touching the rear base edg

• Infantry in a building always receive the hard cover bonus, except for the turn in which they enter a building already inhabited by enemy infantry, that is, they are fighting their way in.

• CQC occurs when opposing infantry unisame building. Refer to following section on Buildings under CQC. The facing of infantry units’ within a building are irrelevant in CQC. They are assumed to have men watching all directions.

• Units engaged in CQC cannot be fired upon (except by indirect fire, which affects both sides!) Theto entering into CQC, during the firing phase.

• Units which enter CQC during a turn are still permitted to use their Infantry weapons prior to entering, as long as theirallowance permits. Infantry equipped with AT weapons tha•

18

the base of the enemy infantry

e, which have clos quarters comba orked out

CQC into eve l smaller C ch side ic ully!)

s erent variables then ut apply the

ch sid u de. **

e Infantry Weapon

o

d

e

e

m

s ch to CQC against two stationary iet te e e.

ta ams, one of which is g-in, t open. s e Soviet teams have

fferent variables (-5 for the team that is dug-in), the Germans must duct s. Perhaps tw teams against the one that g-in er.

3. l ady engaged in CQC with a Soviet s turn. Ano moves 4cm

t be broken m ments, so both he worse var , 1 for Unit moved

p to half to enter CQC.

are listed below

ntry Weapons Table

• All cavalry/mounted troops are treated as normal infantry when in CQC.

• Gun/howitzer/mortar crews are treated as Rifle Teams when engaged in CQC. They cannot operate their weapons if engaged in CQC.

• Infantry units can enter CQC if still embarked on a vehicle or AFV. Simply move the AFV model to touchunit, or, to be the second rank as above. See the variable for Unit riding vehicle or AFV,

• AFV mounted MG's and flamethrowers are not included in CQC. Their fire is calculated as per normal Infantry fire.

QC Procedure - C

) All units of both sides which are part of the same mele1

same variables applicable, have their e t w. Otherwise, separate the s ra CQtogether

combats if possible. * Ea will infl t CQC casualties (hopefupon the other.

f it is k a multi-ba QC with diff2) I not possible to brea e C , into smaller CQC combats resolve as one combat, b

worse case variables for ea e, to all nits of that si 3) Ref r to the s Table. In the first column labelled `CQC', the CQ pes of small arms are listed. C fire factors for all the tyTotal up these CQC according to what y ur infantry units are equipped with. (Don’t forget, weapons are per man not per figure.) Each side does this for their own unit/s. 4) Refer to the CQC Variations, add & subtract all variations which are applicab to both your unit and that of the enemy. Roll one die (1D6) leand ad or subtract one level (variation). The other player does the same, but obviously variations will be opposite. 5) Cross reference this variation figure on the Infantry Casualty Table along with the total CQC factors for your unit. The resulting value from

lthis tab will be the enemy casualties suffered in teams. The other player does the same for his units. 6) CQC casualties are simultaneous and are applied as per the Casualti s section in the Infantry Weapons section above. 6) Do a orale check for both units involved.

* eg 1. Four German team arge inSov ams. Resolve this as on CQC meleeg 2. Three German teams at ck two Soviet tedu he other next to it in the A thdicon two separate melee o is du , and one on one for the oth ** eg One German team is a reteam from the previou ther German team nowinto CQC. This can’ into s aller engageGerman teams get t iables which are – u The CQC factors again for convenience. CQC Infa PV Weapon CQC

Rifle Team 2 710 US Rifle/Carbine Team 3 13 Assault Rifle Team 6 10 SMG Team 6 23 Platoon HQ Team 3

Q Team 5 1 1

2 ) 4

2 2

2 3

am (Man) 16

34 Company + H30 FAO/FAC Team

V Crew - Open Topped AF 13 LMG Team (mag)14 US LMG Team (mag

15 LMG Team (belt)3 + AT Weapon Team * 26 MMG 30 HMG 15 Flame Thrower Te

st 3 points plus the point value of the AT

le are CGC factors for each team/weapon.

* AT Weapon Teams coweapon. Figures in the above tabNote that hand grenades are already included in the above factors.

le is listed below again for convenience. Note pletely different, however.

The Infantry Casualty Tabthat the variations are com

Infantry Casualty Table Final Fire Factors

10+ 15+ 20+ 30+ Variation 1+ 3+ 5+ 7+ 40+ 50+ 60+ 70+ 80+ 100+ +7 2 2 3 5 6 9 24 30 35 41 47 59

4 6 8 12 18 11 16 21 27 32 37 42 53

7 10 14 19 23 28 33 37 46 +6 1 2 3+5 1 2 3 4 5 +4 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 40 + 14 17 21 3 1 1 2 24 3 4 5 7 11 28 34 + 12 15 18 21 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 9 23 29

1 0 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 + 8 10 12 14 16 20 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 16 -1 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 16 -2 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 13 -3 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 -4 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 2 3 3 3 2 3

5 6 8 4 4 5 3 3 4 2 3

-5 0 0 0 0 1 -6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 -7 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 -8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 -9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

are casualties. Variables over +7 treat as +7. Variables under –9 treat as –9.

ross reference Final Variation total with CGC factors to find out how many teamC s Close Quarters Combat Variations: (row shifts, ie, up or down) Target Unit/s Variations Your Unit/s Variations

nemy from entirely-1 Enemy unit in/behind Soft-cover +4 if unit a-5 Enemy unit in/behind hardcover/buildings -3 if unit pi7 Enemy in fortifications

ttacks behind its rear edge nned

-2 if unit riding Ahis turn +2 if unit is Vete

Consine

+1 unit is mount-3 for each ‘team

oft-cover; this applies if opposing enemy unit/s are behind (or within) the following terrain; woods, orchards, hedges or wooden structures (not buildings).

eor covered in smoke

- FV or vehicle ran

ipt -1 Enemy charged into CQC t+1 Enemy unit disengaging -2 if unit is +1 unit is Eng

crer

ed/cavalry ’ attacking crew has lost as casualties

Chance Factor: Throw 1D6 1,2 = -1 3,4 = 0 5,6 = +1 Variations Explanations: -1 Enemy unit in/behind S

Can be applied to unit/s either moving or stationary. Cavalry & softskin ehicles do not count as soft-cover. v

, dug-in/entrenched, bocage, or passengers in rmored APCs. Applies to opposing units if inside the same building,

at move into CQC.

ithin a fortified position such as a unker, pill-box, or `fortified' building.

pplies if opposing enemy unit engaged disengages, either by their own enemy unit gets a Retreat result,

+aAq

-

ended half or less of it's movement allowance

the

aFe vered with smoke.

le or AFV;

to +

ot apply to horse-teams. Variations for movement still apply and soft-cover does not apply. +1 Engineers; this addition accounts for the specialised equipment used by combat ngineer units in comparison to their infantry counterparts; ie. bundle

•sault

no

•un turrets cannot be assault with CQC. Such installations can

0) or

snit/s as passengers can enter into CQC if the vehicle or

ing touches an enemy infantry base, an intervening etc that the enemy unit is defending (as per above rules),

ly cover afforded to passengers in CQC is if they are in an armou

ecause of the disparity in firepower. Another factor which affects the level of casualties is the terrain which CQC is fought in. Woods, buildings and other close cover impair the ability of infantry to engage their opponent effectively. House fighting might last 3-4 moves until one side has lost. The same action may last a

larger (but s.

idely issued but their number

ing the earls an

ampe

`in

te 1ry wat t

Soviets, age

ollsoldi

fancy,

-5 Enemy unit in/behind hardcover/buildings; this applies if opposing enemy unit/s are within (or behind) the following terrain; buildings, wallsabut not to units th -7 Enemy in fortifications; this applies if an enemy unit is wb +1 Enemy unit disengaging; ahand or bad morale result. Note if the

surrit enders! If both sides surrender, reduce result to disengaging.

2 Veteran, -2 Conscript pplies too all units which have been up or down graded in status. llows for variation in melee training and experience for various ualities of units.

+4 if unit attacks enemy from entirely behind its rear edge * applies if your unit/s move into CQC with enemy unit/s rear edge. Does not apply if opponent is in a building or fortification.

1 Unit moved under half to enter CQC; pplies if your unit/s exp a

to enter into CQC. -3 Unit moved over half to enter CQC;

is applies if your unit/s expended over half it's movement allowance to nter CQC. This also applies to AFV or vehicle mounted infantry.

-2 Unit pinned or covered in smoke; pplies if unit/s pinned this turn prior to CQC due to Covering or Indirect ire, and have not been able to break the pin as a result of a morale st; or position is cot

-2 Unit riding vehicapplies if entering CQC as passengers in a vehicle or AFV. Also applies

units riding on AFVs, ie. tank riders.

1 Cavalry/Mounted Unit; s to any unit which enters CQC while mounted on a horse. Does

All infantry units inside a building, friend & foe, claim `hardcover' if on the same floor. If a unit attempts to move (up or down) and as

applien

egrenades, incendiary bombs, etc. -3 for each ‘team’ attacking crew has lost as casualties only applies to multi-team bases such as gun crews House-to-house Fighting - • To eliminate the complexity of house-to-house fighting, all infantry

units that have entered the same building are assumed to be in CQC. If a building is above average in size, it may be divided into sections and the CQC resolved into separate actions if desired. However, if units on different levels attempt to move up or down, the CQC must be resolved separately. See next point.

• In the turn that an infantry unit enters a building, it counts as receiving no cover. That is, they are fighting their way in.

a ther level in the building, only the unit defending the attacked level can claim `hardcover'.

Fortifications - Concrete fortifications with enclosed gun/howitzer casements or fixed gonly be tackled by engineers with demolition charges (page 4fired at using Direct Area Fire.

• With other fortifications, such as infantry bunkers or pill boxes (whether concrete or field constructed), occupants are engaged as per normal CQC with the `-7 Enemy in fortifications ' on the attackers CQC variables.

Pa sengers - Infantry u•AFV they are ridwall/hedge or touches the rear edge of a friendly unit in base to base contact with an enemy base. CQC is calculated the same except for the negative `-2 if unit riding AFV or vehicle' variation for being a passenger.

• The onred personnel carrier (hardcover). For softskin vehicles or tank

riders, no cover is afforded at all. • Variations for movement must also be taken into account

according to whatever the vehicle or AFV has expended to enter CQC.

CQC and Open Rear, Top or Sides AFVs - • For AFV's with open rear, top or sides, crews can be engaged in

CQC if attacking infantry units move into base contact with the AFV. This represents throwing hand grenades at the open top, as well as shooting firearms at exposed crew members.

• For open top AFVs, crews have hardcover. • For an AFV engaged on an open flank/s or rear, no cover applies

to the crew. Tactics - The effectiveness of infantry units in CQC is directly proportional to the equipment they use. For eg; a three rifle team squad would be slaughtered by a two team SMG squad b

single turn if fought in the open. The approach for units entering CQC is critical as well. Units

hich ch

The need for infantry to defendeglected by all armies prior to

w arge into CQC can hardly be expected to engage a stationary enemy, which will most likely also shoot at them on the way in. The best method is to work your way up cautiously if you wish to reduce casualties. Casualties suffered in CQC are approximately 2-3 times higher than what might be suffered in a fire fight at greater ranges. Units defending from buildings or hard cover will have casualties greatly reduced compared to if there was no cover at all. The trick to achieving good results is to provide plenty of support such as covering fire or smoke screens to approach the target position safely, and to use troops equipped with large amounts of

MGs. Plenty of fire power means smaller units can engageSinferior equipped) units on equal term

nwlight AFVs. In theory, enemy arm

nd the infantryor AT guns a wremained true dur y dtanks or made breakthrough

ex (The first real lesin 1939 where Soviet armor d and were successfully fought

nicknamed petrol bombs Moweather and wooded terra con

sn't until la It wa 94Eastern Front that infant er

AT-rifles enemy tanks. hiseveryone except the

as given urAT weapons w nt p

ion of the hThe introduct owgave the individual foot er

their invery much in th

IINNFFAANNTTRRYY AANNTTII--TTAANNKK WWEEAAPPOONNSS

19

s were small and effect was limited to uld to be tackled by friendly tanks

d e

nd t

cc eapons were difficult to fire while prone and If the operator missed, he often became a prime target himself. Magnetic mines were probably the most harrowing. If the user

nk, e would slap the device on the s in 5 seconds to avoid injury

required some sort of last minute ion prior t zooka and Panzerschreck for example

e ways c and only loaded & primed just before firing. at they ioned carefully or their backblast could

asily in members of the unit. AT rifles were heavy, because of their fearsome `kick'. The user had

nly set d, but brace himself before firing.

y AT W rocedure; Infantry AT Weapons use the same procedure and variables as

t' chances & Penetration for each n are p e Infantry AT Weapons Table below.

an infan m has infantry and AT weapons, they can only fire

themselves against tanks was virtually the start of WWII. Anti-tank rifles were

or woould be spared the fight. This concept managed to reach an enemy ta h

n 20 metreays of the Blitzkrieg where tanks fought th

side, pull the pin and then ru infantry were left to mop up. from the blast himself.

Most ns of infantry dealing with tanks occurred AT weapopreparat o firing. The Baunits crossed the Russo-Finnish border

off by Finnish infantry using primitive w re al arried emptyIn comb had to be positlotov Cocktails'. Admittedly the arctic

tributed much to their success.) quite e jure felloward and unpopular1 during the defensive battles on the awkw

e finally forced to hold ground against to not o up the bipo stage had been discarded by nearly

he need for more effective infantry Infantr eapons Priority. •

per Direct Fire. See later. `To-Hirovided in th charge (HEAT) infantry AT weapons weapo

a way to kill the heaviest of tanks. Still • If try teae operator required a lot of nerve to one type per turn, not both.

su essfully hit a moving target. Rocket propelled w

20

Weapons

• All Infantry AT weapons have a Fire Order of `1'. Infantry AT Table Range in Cm Crew Sz Country

Rifles PV Anti-Tank 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 In Team Of Origin s

HMGs)

(1 ) (1 (8) (7)

8 7.9mm wz35 (%) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) 1 Poland (Includes Pen 3 3 3 2 2 2 13 7.9mm PzB 38/39/40 (%) (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) 1 Germany Pen 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 16 14.5mm PTRD 41 (%) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 1 Soviet Pen 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 20 20mm S18-1000 (%) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (10) (8) (7) 1 Various Pen 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 18 20mm Type 97 (%) (13) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (9) (8) 1 Japan Pen 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2

(11) (1 ( ( ( 13 20mm Lathl (%) (12) 0) (10) (9) 9) 8) 7) 1 Finland Pen 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 10 13.9mm Boys (%) (12) 2 1) (10) (9) 1 UK Pen 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

obably rme w bolt armed rifles.

As mentioned previously the AT Rifle teams would consist of one figure with the AT rifle, and 1 or 2 loaders, pra d ith

z s

Range in Cm Crew S Country PV HEAT (Hollow Charge) 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 In Team Of Origin

6 a erschreck RP54

6 PIAT (%) (11) (7) ** UK Pen 8 8 (Apr ‘43+)

oka 17 2.36” Bazo (%) (12) (10) (8) 1 USA Pen 10 10 10 (Nov ‘42+) 3 P nz (%) (12) (11) (9) (7) 1 Germany

+) Pen 16 16 16 16 (1944 8 Panzerfau (%) 0) * Germast 30/60 (1 ny

1(

4 a erfaust 150 ermany an ‘45+)

Pen 8 (Aug ‘43+) 16 Panzerfaust 100 (%) 10) (7) * Germany Pen 18 18 (June ‘44+) 2 P nz (%) (10) (9) (7) * G Pen 18 18 18 (J AT Grenade (E (%) (9) Hand Thrown * Vario3 arly) us

Use Penetration Table as 75mm HE

Pen 3 6 AT Grenade (Late) (%) (9) Hand Thrown * Various Pen 8

* Various 3 AT-HE Grenade (%) (9) Hand Thrown

must contact AFV * Germany 8 AT Magnetic Mine (%) (10) Range is 0cm. Base Pen 12 Engineers only 4 AT Rifle Grnde (Early) (%) (9) (7) * Various

Pen 3 3 (‘40+) AT Rifle Grnde (Late) (%) (10) (9) (7) * Various

(‘43+) *

9 Pen 7 7 7 6 AP Rifle Grnde (%) (10) (8) (6)

Use Direct HE Fire rules: BZR = 3cm Various

(per lists) HN a 75

ote: Panzerschreck, Panzerfaust, Bazooka, PIAT, ATMM, AT-HE all have

mm E equivalent.

C Range in Cm

V Flame Weapons 5 rew Sz Country

In Teams Of Origin P *3

Molotov Cocktail (%) (9) Hand Thrown

pen See Molotov Cocktail Rules blow Soviet/Finnish

* Various # Flamethrower See Flamethrower Rules below

# Flamethrower PVs are given in the Infantry Weapons Table.

s. They are purchased for individual teams. Tevera

* N ot’ weapons:

* These items are ‘one-shot’ weapon he point value represents each man in the team having at least one of ounthe purchased weapons, or only one man having the weapon, but having s

* PIATs are added to teams in the same way as one-shot weapons are.

o. of Shots Per Turn permitted of ‘One Sh

l r ds of ammunition, such as a Rifle Grenade Launcher.

eapon

Each team equipped with ‘One-Shot’ weapons may fire the one shot wattention, or close enough to the target, or has any ammunition remaining.

once a turn. This represents that perhaps only one man was paying

Equipping Squads/Teams with Infantry AT Weapons

AT Rifles, Panze• rschrecks, Bazookas, and PIATs can only be as given in the army lists’

•

purchased for infantry teams rO ganisation charts. The only exception is engineers if not already

mentioned in the army lists. See the rules on engineers. Panzerfausts, Molotov Cocktails, Grenades and Rifle

Grenades can be purchased for up to two teams per infantry squad (unless specified differently in the Army Lists’ Organisation charts), not HQ or heavy weapon teams, and only those weapons listed in that nation’s Equipment Lists can be used. Be sure to o serve dates of use.

b

Infantry AT Weapons Limitations • Panzerfaust, Panzerschreck & Bazooka cannot be used from

inside AFVs, vehicles, pill-box/bunkers or buildings due to their backblast from firing. They can however be used from inside large factories or the tops of buildings (ie. roofs). Panzerschreck, Panzerfaust 100/150 and PIAT are considered to have the equivalent HE effect of 75mm rounds for use against buildings at ranges over

•

5cm. Use Direct Area Fire rules.

•

In•

•

•

operator.

AT rifles are not capable of immobilising AFVs with hits in the tracks.

fantry AT Weapons Table Notes; 7.9mm wz35 - was Polish by design and manufacture. Captured stocks were used by Germany and Finland with large numbers being handed over to the Italians in 1941-42.

• 7.9mm PzB 38/39/40 – 38 was only used during the Polish campaign before being replaced by the PzB 39 prior to the invasion of France. Both were identical in performance. 14.5mm PTRD & PTRS - models were both identical in performance except the latter proved too complex and was eventually phased out. These AT rifles remained in service for the entire war.

• 20mm Solothurn 18-1000 - was manufactured under licence and employed by Italy, Hungary, Rumania. A fully automatic version S18-1100 existed but was rarely encountered. 20mm Type 97 - like most Japanese designs, it was copied from the Swiss S18-1000 and Hispano 20mm. Firing was either fully or semi-automatic. An optional shield could be fitted providing partial cover for the

21

•

•

Rocket Launcher - various improved models

me penetration with a distinction is made between the two.

ts the weapon still in its infancy as used in 1940 No.68. AT Grenade (late)

user because it relied entirely on target. Special oversized grenades

re with the weapon, and 1 or 2 loaders,

k, Pzfaust, Bazooka, PIAT, ATMM & `AT-HE' n equivalent gun calibre of 75mm for Direct Area

oses, equivalent to a single demolition charge. The Japanese ersion was commonly referred to as the `Lunge Mine' and was used

by all branches of the Imperial Force, not just engineers. It has identical results to the ATMM except the using team is always removed as a

sualty when an attack is made, whether successful or not.

nese `Lunge Mine' is calculated as per ATMMs above ser ,

ntio asualty, rega

cular it ot AFV

ed AFVs.

AP rifle grenades use the Direct Area Fire rules for calculating and have an equivalent calibre of 57mm.

etration and relied on the xplosive effect to damage an AFV. To-Hit procedures are the same as

apon except u Penetralent gun

he effect of these weapons was no where equal to that of rs, but they are a flame weapon with the intention of

ures are the same as per normal Infantry AT Weapons

Their effect against AFVs and softskins is the same as at of a flamethrower, except for a - 1 modifier. Misses have no

hrowers below the Infantry Weapons Table nder Infantry Weapons for using flamethrowers against infantry,

n gun crew targets. To use FVs, see below.

• 20mm Lathi - was Finnish by design and manufacture. Was not used outside Finland. 13.9mm Boys - the only effective AT weapon available to British infantry until mid-1943 being replaced by the PIAT. PIAT - (Projector, Infantry Anti-tank) was a spigot bomb launcher. No muzzleflash or back-blast when fired.

• Bazooka, 2.36" were introduced throughout the war, all having identical performance. In 1945, a Smoke (WP) round was introduced.

• 88mm Panzerschreck - represents two versions, RP54 & the earlier model RP43. The RP43 had the saslightly reduced range. No

• Panzerfaust - there were five versions introduced. The PzF 30k, 30 & 60 have been combined due to their limited range. PzF 60 was the most common to be used followed by the PzF 100. The PzF 150 was introduced very late in the war and only employed in small numbers compared to other models. The model number roughly equates to the weapons effective range.

• Anti-Tank Grenades (early & late) - All models have been categorised into two types, `early' and `late'. This has been done due to the large number employed by numerous countries. AT Grenade (early) represenonwards, example: British Grenaderepresents improved models which were introduced as the war progressed. They were distinguished mainly by their increased armor penetration, examples: German Panzerwurfmine (L), Japanese Type 3 & Soviet RPG-43.

• Anti-Tank Magnetic Mine - represents the German HEAT charge which used magnets for attaching them to the sides of AFVs. Used only by combat engineer units, were introduced late 1943 and proved extremely effective. The Japanese version was the `Lunge' mine. It did not require magnets as the user himself held it against the side of the tank before detonation (see below). Can only be used on AFVs which are stationary or moving 5cm or less.

• Anti-Tank Rifle Grenades (late & early) - as with hand-thrown AT grenades, they have been categorised into two types; AT Rifle Grenades (early) eg: Soviet VPGS-1940 & German P-40; and AT Grenade (late): US M9, British No.85, German/Japanese PzGr 46 & 61. The latter were more effective being a progressive development of the former.

• Anti-Tank `High Explosive' Grenade - this type of AT grenade was often more dangerous to theexplosive force to damage the were originally developed; eg. Soviet RPG-1940, Italian Breda Mod.42 & British No.75, the most well known version being the improvised German `bundle' grenade made up of seven or more stick grenades.

Crew Size in Teams; As mentioned previously the AT Rifle. Piat, Bazooka and Panzershreck eams would consist of one figutprobably armed with bolt armed rifles or SMGs. Equivalent HE Effect; Although the explosive force from hollow charged weapons was below that of normal HE, their effectiveness against soft targets & personnel could still be devastating.

Pzschrec Grenades all have aFire & calculating casualties. Note however that Direct Area Fire for these weapons can only be used against infantry within buildings or fortifications (not in the open or in soft-cover.)

nti-TankA Magnetic Mines (ATMM); This weapon was exclusively used by German and Japanese forces. The German ATMM is limited to used by engineer units only and is for ll purpa

v

ca The German ATMM can only be used if the engineer team has moved half or less and made base to base contact the intended AFV target, either stationary or moving. The chance dice roll (with Direct AT Fire variations) is then made to determine if the ATMM was successfully placed and detonated. If the target is a medium or heavy AFV, the ATMM may only be attached to the hull (ie the turret is too high toreach!) The Japaexcept the u can use `full' movement prior to contacting AFV targetand as me ned, the infantry base doing the assault is removed as ac rdless of the result. Anti-Personnel Rifle Grenades; This parti em has been included for convenience and is nconsidered an AT weapon unless used against exposed c gers, such as open topped or backrews/passen

their effect on soft targets Refer to Direct Area Fire rules. Anti-Tank (High-Explosive) Grenade; This type of grenade has no armor peneper normal Infantry AT We s se tion Table with HE variables to determine the effect on the AFV target. Use equivacalibre is 75mm. Molotov Cocktails Tflamethrowesetting objects alight. They have no effect against live targets. To-Hit procedusing normal Direct AT Fire variations. theffect. Flamethrowers vs AFVs See section on Flametusoftskin, heavy weapo and flamethrowers against A Flamethrowers vs AFVs

ype Range Arc of FireT Infantry Manpack 5cm 30º Soviet/Axis Vehicle Mounted 10cm 30º UK/USA Vehicle Mounted 15cm 30º Procedure: A maximum of one AFV within the flamethrower’s arc of fire can be affected. T 6, add or subtract the following variations, and consult the table:

hrow 1D

ariations: 2 if AFV is open topped or + 1 if target is light tank

AFV is hit (not accumulative) - 1 if Molotov cocktail. Result Effect

V++ 1 if second or subsequent time

1,2,3,4 No effect 5 Immobilised 6 Destroyed A flamethrower may only be fired if the team or vehicle does not move over half its allotted movement allowance. Countries that employed 'vehicle mounted' flamethrowers were the Soviets, Germans, British, and US. All variants have been included in the Armor Charts, except for one US version. This was issued in kit form in the field and replaced the bow MG on M4 Sherman or M3/M5 light tanks. You can have a maximum of one flamethrower AFV per platoon, but take note of Frequency Ratings.

22

classified into oneality of equip

ll units/troops in Panzerfaust are A

according to training, experience, and quthree morale ratings, which reflects their motivation tothe troop classes and morale ratings that we used in oof these rules, which worked better than the rigid ones

roop ClassesT Veteran: troops who have had plenty of combat e good quality equipment, and normally g eg US Marines, most German, British a

t: troops adleader adsuch a Sovcounts

orale Ratings

frontline units Regular: well trained troops, such as US infantry the majority of the French army.

niConscrip with insufficient/in equate trai

ship, and/or with b ly maintaine s the bulk of the iet army – w ! M

lite: highly s wh plethe ca ting vieJapan o op

eliable troops ly co do not th ets US in uc vi

oor troops tion, dsuch a

E motivated troop o are com

use they are figh for. eg So ese, German SS, m st paratro

who are normal nsistent in bR retreat as soon as e going g

fantry in Europe, m h of the So P who lack convic having no s most Italians and French.

ompulsory Na Cl C tional Troop ass/Mora

ee the army lists fo re (S r more information garding the

s Unit/s Troop Claselgium y

B Offboard Artiller Conscript All Other Units Conscript

B Offboard Artillery Veteran ritain Paratrp/Roy Veteran al Eng. Guards Veteran All Other Units Veteran

F Offboard Artillery Veteran inland All Other Units Veteran

France Offboard Artillery Regular Colonial Forces Regular All Other Units Regular

Germany Offboard Artillery As unit class

nits

SS/Paratroops Veteran Volksgrenadiers Conscript All Other U Veteran

H Offboard Artillery Conscript ungary All Other Units Conscript It Offboard Artiller Regular aly y Onboard Artillery Regular Bersaglieri Regular All Other Units Conscript

Japan Offboard Artillery Veteran Offboard Artillery Regular All Other Un Veteran its All Oth Regular er Units

Poland Offboard Artillery Conscript All Other Units Conscript

Rumania Offboard Artillery Conscript All Other Units Conscript

oviet Offboard Artillery As unit classSiberians Regular

S Pre-1941 Winter Conscript Guards Conscript All Other Units Conscript

TTrroooopp CCllaasssseess

of three classes ment, and one of fight. These are

ur Second Edition in the Third Ed.

xperience, with ood officers. nd Japanese

and pd equipmho qualify

in Europe,

ng oor ent, in all

tely devot Guard,ers.

le, that tough, set army.

esire to fi

ven though many nations would have different qualities of troop asses and morale ratings within their armies, in order to create the rrect historical flavor for each nation, the following troop classes and orale ratings are compulsory. This greatly enhances the feel of the ame. g a small, expensive elite-veteran German SS force will outshoot and utmanoeuvre a larger reliable-conscript Soviet force, which must rely n numbers and brute force to win.

Troop Class Point Value Modifiers

ted to

att is, theyuch as

ght,

Eclcomgeoo

The base point value of all AFVs, vehicles, guns, troops and their

equipment, etc purchased must be modified according to ir troop class and morale rating, as outlined in the Compulsory

eg s 1 Armor Charts, but if youinclu Reliable-Conscript company, it will cost 188 x 0.75 = 14 You illery has different point value modification fact troops, since their performance rarely affected by mor rd.

le Ratin

weapons andtheNational Troop Class/Morale Rating Table below.

a Soviet T-34/76de it in a Soviet

m1940 i 88 PV in the

1 points.

will note that offboard artors that onboardale, being offboa

g Table below cla ratings.)

sses and

ating ion Notes Morale R Point Value Modificat Reliable - 15% or x 0.85 Reliable - 25% or x 0.75

As unit ra no modification to PV ting Elite +50% or x 1.5 Elite +50% or x 1.5 Reliab +25% o x 1.25 le

Elite no modification to PV Elite +50% or x 1.5

As unit rat no modification to ing PV Reliable no modification to PV (whole force must be Colonial) Poor -25% or x 0.75

As uni Conscript –15% t rating or x 0.85, Veteran no modification to PV

le

Elite +50% or x 1.5 Reliable - 25% or x 0.75 Reliab +25% or x 1.25

Reliab -15% or x 0.85 le Reliable -25% or x 0.75 Reliable no modification to PV

o PV ot support unit guns; AA; or AT guns le PV

Reliable no modification t nReliab no modification to Poor -50% or x 0.50

1939-42 Elite no modification to PV Elite no modification to PV 1943-45 Elite +50% or x 1.5 1939-42 Elite +25% or x 1.25 1943-45

Reliable - 15% or x 0.85 Reliable - 25% or x 0.75

Poor -15% or x 0.85 Poor -50% or x 0.50

As unit rating Conscript –15% or x 0.85, Regular no modification to PV Elite +25% or x 1.25 officers escaped Stalin’s purges Poor -50% or x 0.50 does not include Siberians Elite no modification to PV Reliable - 25% or x 0.75

23

US Europe Offboard Artillery As unit class As unit rating +25% or x 1.25 Paratroopers Veteran Elite +50% or x 1.5 Armor ’44 – ’45 Regular or Veteran Reliable no m for Vets odification to PV for Regs, +25% or x 1.25 All Other Units Regular Reliable no modification to PV

US Pacific Offboard Artillery As unit class As unit rat Marines Veteran Elite Army Conscript Reliable

ing +25+50-25%

% or x 1.25 % or x 1.5

or x 0.75

to fight. These morale rules simulate the fe at

and hem to function at their

n make rash decisions based

moorale also accounts for the fragility of command structures. As combat

ted. In the last two cases, the unit could have expected to be n from the front for a period of reinforcement and rebuilding.

me casualties are suffered or AFV damage is received, Each turn under indirect fire or air attack,

is destroyed this turn

(Do

lo

Plareq

Radius

comComalrereta Refof t

larg its within their platoons or

Exa

ng AFVs within command/control of the Platoon HQ.

re - orale test are only relevant to r weapons crew/or platoon or

bat ng that individual unit. eg one squad of a plat ee rifle teams, has lost one team due to dire squad only initially. However, if the circumstances requiring the morale test are identical

Morale reflects the psychological condition of troops, their nerve, conviction and willingness

MMOORRAA

ef cts that different circumstances will have on units under combconditions. The importance of maintaining command communication between units is critical for tpeak. Units cut-off from their HQs will ofteon their own limited knowledge of the battle. Nothing erodes troop

rale more than the thought of becoming isolated by enemy forces. Msituations deteriorate and the casualties mount up, unit HQs can lose confidence in their orders, hesitate, lose cohesion or outright disobey. In the real world, combat units which suffered 10% loses in battle were considered to have taken heavy casualties, a loss of 30% rendered the unit ineffective and 50%+ casualties meant the unit was destroyed or decima

ithdrawwObviously some armies (German, Soviet and Italian) drove many of their units into the ground because they simply couldn't relieve them at the front. The exact amount of punishment a unit could accept in battle varied considerably with quality and nationality. And of course, there were always the odd exceptions to the rule. Morale Checks: Individual infantry squads or HQ/heavy weapon sections, gun/mortar crews and AFVs are required to take a morale check when any of the following conditions apply; • Each ti•• Unit's HQ• After CQC has occurred, after Flame attack has occurred, or while

trying break from being pinned,

not test morale for infantry teams, but for the squad or crew they ng to.) be

toon HQs, Company HQs, (and if relevant - higher HQs) are all uired to test morale if one or more sub-units under their command ers from poor morale or is destroyed, whether in Commandsuff

or not. When a unit HQ tests morale, the result applies to all units under the

mand of that HQ (and the HQ itself too of course), whether in mand Radius or not. The only exceptions to this rule is if a sub-unit

ady has a worse morale status than the parent HQ, in which case it ins its worse status.

erence to `sub-units' refers to subordinate units under the command he HQ, ie; a platoon HQ has `sections (includes squads and hvy

weapons sections)', a company HQ has `platoons'. AFVs and Field/AT guns (and heavy weapons teams if not specified as being part of a

er section) are all considered sub-unbatteries.

mples; • An infantry section receives a poor morale test result, so its platoon

HQ must now also test morale. If the Platoon HQ also gets a bad result, then all sections commanded by that HQ are affected and a now a morale test at company level will be required.

• A tank platoon has had one AFV destroyed and a second disabled as a result of enemy fire. The entire platoon is tested for morale with individual tanks counting as sub-units. The result affects all survivi

Morale Test Procedu1. If the circumstances requiring the m

an individual section, squad, AFV otery, then start by testioon, comprising of thrct fire, so test this

to an entire

plat pany. eg t r a company lost its HQ. Roll Add hich are appCon result of the modified

stances have completed their

the parent HQ

e following;

-6 -1

eather or in smoke

of parent HQ. (unless Recon

ted to rec Mortars)

e. m) and have no

s HQ is De ing. nding hill or woods nding is dug-in or within buildings

being tested,

d on

c

tank to

oon, or an entire company, then test the platoon or comhe whole platoon is under indirect fire, o

morale. 2. 2D6 for each such unit testing3. or subtract any Morale Test Variations to the dice roll w

licable to the unit's circumstances. . sult the Morale Reaction Table to see the4

dice roll. 5. The morale result is effective immediately. If required, the unit is

given a Shaken or Retreat counter. 6. If a poor morale result of `2 or below' is achieved, the unit's parent

HQ must now test for the entire formation (make sure all sub-units with different morale test circummorale checks before testing the parent HQ.)

7. For a morale test on parent HQs, repeat Steps 1-6. The result from this test will affect all its sub-units whether in command radius or not (unless the sub-unit has a worse morale status than

.) Morale Test Variations:

oll 2D6 and add/subtract thR +2 Unit is "Elite" status 2 Unit is "Poor" status -

-3 for each ‘team’ of a squad/section/crew lost as casualties (only used when testing the morale of a squad/section/crew)

For each-1 sub-unit * Shaken result -2 For each sub-unit * disabled/destroyed or Retreating.

AFV Crew/Unit ** +1-2 AFV’s head-up commander has been killed.

AFV disabled or damaged (including tracked, NOT stunned) AFV/s in a `built up' area (that is, actually amongst buildings). Visibility is low due to poor w-1

-3 Unit outside Command Radius Platoon out of CR of parent HQ) ***

l irc -2 Unit under f ame or a raft attack.ubjec indi t fire (-1 for -2 Unit s

-2 Unit is pinned or has lost CQC this mov-2 Infantry Unit faced with AFVs (within 20c

ctive AT . effe weapons Unit' stroyed or Retreat-2

+1 Unit defe1 Unit defe+

+2 Unit defending from Pill box or Bunkers * ‘each sub-unit’ refers only to those directly under the HQthat is, squads & sections are the sub-units of a platoon HQ and platoons (not the squads in the platoons) are the sub-units of a

a squacompany HQ. So a co. HQ does not get a negative modifier ifin e of its platoons gets a bad result.

If y** ou have an ad-hoc (mixed) company, that is, a company a player put together including AFV and non-AFV platoons, then test the ompany as being non-AFV.

However, test each platoon for what is actually is. eg a Soviet ad-hoc company has a platoon of tank riders and two platoons of tanks. If testing the company, it counts as non-AFV, if

stin sting thete g the tank rider platoon, it tests as non-AFV, but if tela ons, they test as AFV. p

*** ‘(unless Recon Platoon out of Command Radius of parent HQ)’ this applies only to units specified as ‘Recon’ in the army lists.

he above variables are only applicable to a unit if the whole unit is Tsubjected to the same threat or condition; eg.

F• or a company to count as dug-in, all platoons plus the HQ must be entrenched.

LLEE

24

•der indirect fire but not the

w•

t affects one team affects the whole squad. eg one team o

If only two squads of a platoon are subjected to indirect fire, the squads will test individually as being un

hole platoon. (See next point regarding teams.) Remember that an infantry section or squad is considered a single

unit. Whaf a squad is under indirect fire. This means the entire squad is

counted as being effected.

orale Reaction Table; M Modified Dice Roll Result

3 or higher OK ++2 S

haken

+1 Shaken 0 or below Retreat

rale Status;

Unit morale good. Continue to follow orders.

ken; Give the unit a Shaken counter. Its affects are: Duration: 1D6 turns. Elite troops re-roll any 5 or 6, Poor re-roll

y 1 or 2. (same as Vets and Conscripts do for movement pips). The unit will defend the position it currently occupies, or The unit has the option to withdraw from its defended position at

y time. If enemy AFVs are within or approach to within 40cm of the

it's position (or 20cm if enemy infantry), on its next turn the unit ust evacuate the position and withdraw towards a safer location. o movement pips are required.

Any withdrawal by the unit must be conducted away from enemy

Mo OK; Sha•

an• •

an•

unmN

•

`Reene`Sa

mes

s own HQ, even if this rd. If it leaves the board, it is considered lost as

end up being cancelled as a result of a sult. In fact, the unit’s move may end up being in the

gets a retreat result. The other 9 AFVs of the French company now also perform a retreat movement instead of their planned 12cm forward movement.

• Note that in many cases company HQs are not just individual infantry teams or AFVs, but have other sections, heavy weapons, AFVs, etc attached to them. In these cases the HQ performs the

he bad

lt from a morale check.

u r destroyed HQ and `-3' Unit outside Command termine if a unit is under Command Radius

section `on Command Radius.

FVs

•

•

ReUnit

req10c duri

ack into one letion, they re-enter the game with

much more pronounced, which is more realistic. Poor morale units are fairly useless if used in any sort of

offensive or mobile nature. They will typically react badly when subjected to enemy fire. Performance is even worse when they start taking casualties. Elite troops are much more effective at seizing an objective. Bonuses in morale for supporting units have not been included

ons each will function far better ptimum number of units for a HQ to

ur. This has been proven y.

forces with return fire only until a new safe position is reached. • Movement towards enemy forces is not permitted.

turn fire only' - means the effected unit is restricted to firing upon my forces which have directly fire upon the unit itself! fe Position' - refers to any position which a unit can occupy

without threat of being observed or subjected to fire from enemy units. Retreat; Give the unit a Retreat counter. Its affects are: • Unit evacuates its current position immediately (during the

ovement phase, however, see Morale Test Notes below) and moves directly towards its own rear board edge if no enemy forcintervening, or otherwise, directly away from threatening enemy forces. Movement pips are not required.

es to retreat unless rallied by it• Unit continutakes it off the boacasualties.

• If a unit with this morale result is within, or comes within, 20cm of enemy forces, it will surrender immediately. If it takes further casualties from enemy forces within 60cm, it also surrenders immediately. Remove surrendered forces from the board.

• No firing is permitted by unit while retreating. • Gun crews with guns too heavy to be manhandled are simply

removed as casualties upon receiving a retreat result.

orale M Test Notes: • If this morale result is received during the “Movement Phase”, it

immediately effects movement. If it occurs during the “Resolve Infantry Fire & Direct Fire” Phase, where units can be ‘backtracked’ to where they were moving when fired upon, it may occur that a move may

sts remorale teopposite direction as originally planned! eg a company of 12 French AFVs may emerge from a treeline and move 12cm forward in the movement phase. During the direct fire phase, 3 German AT guns, with a lower fire order than the French AFVs, destroy 2 AFVs in one platoon of the company as soon as the French AFVs emerge from the treeline. The French platoon takes a morale test and gets a retreat result. The surviving AFV of that platoon no longer completes its 12cm move forward, but performs a retreat movement instead. The entire AFV company is now also tested. It

adquarters -

dual role of being an HQ plus also is treated as a platoon in itself with sub-units. Remember that only the infantry base containing the commanding officer, or the actual HQ tank, are the HQ base/AFV.

• Infantry AT weapons are considered ineffective if they are incapable of penetrating an AFVs' front or side armor at any range.

• Crews of immobilised AFVs will abandon on any result except `OK'. They will abandon the AFV immediately upon receiving tresult.

• Disabled AFVs are defined as having hull or turret/gun damage. • Units which are pinned by indirect or covering fire can break the

`pin' with an OK resu

HeIf a unit’s HQ has been destroyed this turn, the remaining sub-units

st test as with `-2' fomRadius of parent HQ.. To deof parent HQ., refer to For units which lose their HQ to enemy fire, one of the sub units can be designated to become the replacement HQ in the next turn. The whole unit still suffers -2 `for unit HQ destroyed' for the remainder of the game but all Command Radius will be measured to the newly designated HQ. Note that if a company HQ contains two Company HQ Teams (as indicated by the army lists) or two AFVs upgraded as command A (see AFV Organisation paragraph under Armor Charts: Introduction), both teams/AFVs must be destroyed to count as the HQ destroyed. Rallying - • Units issued with a "Retreat" result can only re-enter combat if

rallied by a higher level HQ of the same company which is not already affected by poor morale itself. HQs must be moved to within 5cm of the unit/s that they are attempting to rally. Those units then cease moving while being tested.

• Each unit (up to platoon size) being rallied can retest morale once per move for three moves using all variations which are applicable to its current circumstances. If any of the tests provide a result which is “OK”", the unit can move and fire as normal. No more than two units (up to platoon size) can be rallied per move by the same HQ.

grouping - s (squads of a platoon, platoons of a company, etc) which have

suffered 50% casualties or greater and are not affected by poor morale can regroup with one or more units of the same company. Regrouping

uires all units taking part to assemble within an area of radius of m for a total of two moves.

Units regrouping must be free from enemy fire, stationary ng the procedure with no firing permitted.

Units regrouping are combined and reorganised b or more full strength unit/s. On compno penalties for casualties on future morale tests. Morale Test - Examples; . An `1 elite' Tank platoon (five tanks) is defending a hill. After a vicious

`fire fight', three of the tanks are KO'd. The morale test for the platoon would consist of the following variables; -2 for each destroyed tank (sub-unit), +1 for defending hill, +2 for elite status & +1 for AFV crew. The dice roll is `4' , so 4 – 6 +1 +2 +1 = 2 result) The test gives a `Shaken' result.

2. An Infantry Company (Poor status) is advancing up either side of a road towards an objective. It's two lead platoons come under enemy fire and takes casualties. The first platoon gets a `Shaken' result while the other gets a `Retreat” result. The company now has two sub-units with bad morale and must now carry out a morale check for itself. The following variations apply; -1 for sub-unit with `Shaken', -2 for sub-unit retreating, -2 for Poor status. The die roll for the whole company is a `5' (5 die roll - 5 variation = 0 result) which gives a `Retreat' result. The whole company as of the next turn must undertake a withdrawal.

3. Three Tiger I are fired upon by 3 Soviet 57mm ATG with a lower fire order, which did not move. One Tiger is knocked out. They take a morale test, and pass. The Tigers now shoot at another target. A platoon of T-34/85 which are moving up to half now shoot at the Tigers. They destroy another Tiger. The remaining Tiger takes another morale test. This time it gets a retreat result.

Tactics/Designer's Notes; These morale rules are different from our previous edition. The consequences of mishandling units and the impact of casualties uffered ares

because they did not justifiably increase the morale of the units they supported. Units such as armour or AT guns may improve the survival of other units in the battle but they won't incite these units to undertake orders their morale wouldn't permit. Organisation is also important. The level of competence displayed by HQ units will depend on the number of units they are required to command and coordinate. Assigning too many will over stretch the unit commanders ability and logistics to control them while under fire. Two HQs with three platothan one HQ controlling five. The ocommand varies between three to foextensively in battle, even to this da

d e necessary training or conviction to carry out aggressive manoeuvres

ordination and cohesion within minutes of coming under enemy fire. a large advantage in numbers in order to succeed when

a

ach AFV and vehicle has an as

pply for mof th

trucks, tract

icse the

& ve distcle in

ment Res

One of the main differences between well trained, experienced troops when compared with poor quality units was the difference in their ability to carry out a combat mission. Poor morale units generally lackethrequired in attacking effectively. Inexperienced units often lost

coThey needed att cking.

E(Rd) and Cross Country (C/C) m

ce that amaximum distan n AFV oper turn and a vement a

The use o veh e word ` icle' ors andSPs), horse-te

ROADS (Rd);

nt Moveme rates for travelling aloAFV & Veh le Charts. * To u ir Rd speed vehicsingle column, not two or three a

h aswide, suc a major highway.) hic* AFVs les travelling alo

must have a ance equal to thnd the vehi front. a

* Road movement rates applyoving across them perpendicularm

Vehicle Move trictions

Terrain Fully Trac

Thick Woods x2/3

Towing Off-Road x1

Thin Woods x1

Orchards x1 Low brush/Scrub x1 Mud/Sand * x2/3 Rubble x1/3 Marsh * x1/3 * Bogging (1D6) 7+ Add to bogging die roll: +1 if +1 if -1 if -1 cr # For T-34, KV, IS, Panther, and P

pecial Note: types which enter terra

ud ally present after heavelds or crops. All river fords are trand - coastal beaches. Desert re

- t a vehicle

vehicles are immobil

S* Vehicle • Horse teams are treated as 4 Vehicle Movement Restri Towing Off-road - movement re

hve icles when limbered with guns/towing vehicle is a size larger thanspecified, the reduction in movemis used instead of a medium truck

- usuMfiSloose sand. Rubble - all destroyed buildingstreated as rubble for vehicle moveMarsh - flooded low lands foun

tcca hment regions. Also includes fpaddies.

ogging BFor each move thamarshy terrain, 1D6 is rolled forbecome bogged. If the die roll (plus variations)listed for Bogging in the Movemtuck. s

Boggedwith assistance from another vehvehicles if one size smaller.) It taktowing.

AAFFVV && VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMOOVVEEMMEENNTT

25

signed movement rate for both Road ent. Movement rates are the

CROSS-COUNTRY (C/C); Cross-country movement is any movement that occurs off-road and movement rates are listed under `C/C' in the AFV & Vehicle Charts.

ified before the game begins.

/C mo rates apply for travelling through open terrain only. g woods, orchards, scrub, brush, mud,

is reduced according to the `Vehicle le. These reductions in movement apply

enters or begins the turn in one of the listed

the reduction factor provided in the ough thick woods 16cm x 1/4 = 4cm

closest `cm'.) s are accumulative; eg. a 4x4 truck towing its movement reduced x1/8.

ovemr vehicle can be moved by a player Note; All types of terrain should be speccross clear terrain only. ereafte s to all (ie. ta

h r refer AFVs nks, The C vementams unless otherwise stated. If a vehicle is towing or traversin

rubble or sand, movement Movement Restrictions' tab

r ng roads are listed under `Rd' in the when eve the vehicleterrain types.

les must always travel on roads in a breast (unless the road is extremely Procedure;

ement by* Multiply the C/C movoving thrng a road in column at 26cm or over, table; eg. 4x4 truck m

eir own hull length between themself (round up distances to the* Movement reduction

only for moving along roads, not ly.

through a thick woods has

Table Vehicle Type

Semi 6 & 8 4 x 4 4 x 2 Motor ked Tracked Wheeled Wheeled Wheeled Cycle

x1/2 x1/4 - x1/2 x1/3 x1/4 - -

x1/2 /4 x1/4 x2/3

x1 x2/3

x1 x2/3 x3/4 x2/3

x1x1/2 x1/3 x1/2 x1/3 x1 x1 x2/3

x1/2 x1/3 x1/4 x1/4 - - - - -

x1/5 x1/5 - - - -

6+ 5+ 4+ 3+ 2+

Size D AFVs or vehicles # traversing Marsh amphibious AFV or vehicle ossing fordable river

z VI chasis vehicles, if a 7+ is thrown, throw 1 6 a ed.

in marked as "-" (not traversable) become au

y or prolonged rain, freshly ploughed eated as mud. gions were interspersed with areas of

traverses mud, sand, river fords or

ction Table, the vehicle is

e until towed clear from their position

treated as hills.) ent across hills for infantry, cavalry & horse teams are not

t.

o turn inside its minimum radius, it is

D gain. If 1, 2 or 3 is thrown, the vehicle is not bogg

tomatically bogged. x2 vehicles.

ctions Table Notes: ductions for towing off-road apply to howitzers and trailers. However, if the the required minimum towing vehicle ent does not apply (eg. a heavy truck for towing.)

and demolished AT obstacles are ment across them. d either adjacent to rivers or water looded agricultural areas such as rice

the vehicle to determine whether it

is equal or greater than the number ent Restri

icle of equal or greater size (or two es two turns to rig up the vehicles for

Hills - (x1/2) All vehicle movement over hills for both road and cross-country is reduced by half, unless the vehicle is moving straight down the slope.

d surfaces are(All incline Movemaffected, except for going uphill where charge/evade movement cannot be used. Reversing - (x1/3) Vehicle/AFVs travelling in reverse have their movement rate reduced to one third, with the exception of AFVs with rearward steering; Sdkfz 231, 232 & 234 series, AB40 series, Daimler A/C (refer AFV Notes.) Reverse movement is not available to horse teams. Turning - All vehicles have a minimum turning radius equal to their own length (taken from the inside of the vehicle.) Vehicles carrying out a turn have

eith r movement measured around the radius as normal movemen If a stationary vehicle wishes tpermitted to ‘turn on the spot’ as follows: Light AFVs & vehicles (Size A & B): Max turn is 180º per game turn Medium AFVs & vehicles (Size C) : Max turn is 90º per game turn Heavy AFVs & vehicles (Size D): Max turn is 45º per game turn

26

nce an vehicle has cross a hedge or treeline, other vehicles can pass ithout movement penalty.

-25% for Low Walls (man-height or below) -50% for High Walls (above man-height) Once a breach has been made, all other vehicles can pass through the gap without penalty. Bocage -

interwoven hedgeline which grows along a a very difficult obstacle for both vehicles and

an

nses. itc

ossing ditches that have been bridged using bridging tanks

n crossing an AT ditch, and ceive hard cover from any incoming fire. Cavalry are treated as 4x2

s (eg.

Wire - Fully tracked `C & D' size vehicles can pass through barbed-wire without delay or damage. For fully tracked `B' size vehicles or any semi-tracked vehicles roll 1D6 when passing through each line of barbed-wire. A result of `6' and the vehicle is immobilized (de-tracked or snagged). Fully wheeled vehicles cannot pass through barbed-wire without becoming immobilised.

an only pass through barb-wire were a gap has been forced or

rced in a line of barb-wire no longer present any obstacle to

rmy List.

cupation,

Each country is listed with its vehicles starting from the lightest pe (motorcycles) to heaviest (tractors). Each individual entry in the

the same or

pes not mentioned are lis le no

passengers have reat a driver, unless e

s. This driver cann ply ose passenger te disembar

which case the motorcycle cannot move again unless the team/s re-embark. APCs, and all softskin transport vehicles, are an integral part of the squad/section/gun crew they carry. If they have their own crew

the vehicle after the passengers disembark, they

, speed and towing ability.

upto 2 ton

d tractors, Light (1-4 ton), Medium (4-8

how many you need to base on an infantry team sized base. These bases carry one infantry team, unless noted otherwise. Eg Motorcycle x 3. This means you base 3 motorcycle models on a 40mm x 40mm base, if using 20mm scale.

ts is ntaining 2 – 3ir joint carrying

f on the base, youehicle.

"Dri - re to the vehicles level of traction for traversing rough terrain; 4x2, 4, 6x4, , ht (haltracked) & trk (fully tracked). eg. vehicles wi x4' have six wheels of ich four are driven. Refeto "Movement Restrictions" for details. "Size" - vehicles size for observation purposes. "Rd" (Road) - vehicle's movement rate per turn for travelling along roads (unobstructed.)

ntry cle's movement rate per turn for ment Restrictions for reductions

roug to ing pen in Team ams capable of being

vetowed gun the vehicle is

This represents tanks pivoting (turning) on one track or a vehicle doing a `3 point' turn in a narrow street. Thick Treelines & Hedges - Vehicles suffer the following movement penalties for crossing hedges & thick tree-lines; -25% for Fully & Semi-tracked vehicles & -50% for all 8, 6 & 4x4 Wheeled vehicles. -Impassable to motorcycles and 4x2 wheeled vehicles. Othrough the gap wThin tree-lines do not affect movement. Walls/Fences - Only fully tracked `C or D' size AFVs are capable of passing through walls. Movement penalties for breaching a wall apply as follows;

AT ditches are impassible to all vehicles until filled in by either fascine or engineers, refer section on Defe

Bocage is a large heavilymound of dirt, proving AFVs. The defensive quality of bocage first came to light during the bloody hedgerow fighting around Normandy in Northern France. Only fully tracked `C or D' size vehicles can attempt to breach a gap in bocage. For each attempt roll 1D6. A result of 4,5,6 and the vehicle will force a gap, taking a full move to clear the breach. Once a gap has been forced, other tracked & semi-tracked vehicles can pass through at the same point without delay. U.S. AFVs equipped with Cullins Hedgerow Cutters can breach bocage losing only a half move delay (no dice roll required). Cullins Hedgerow Cutters add 10 points to an AFV’s base PV. Cavalry can only pass through gaps (otherwise impassable.) T k Obstacles/AT Ditches -

D hes filled with fascines allow only tracked vehicles to pass at normal C/C movement. Ditches `filled in' by either a bulldozer or engineers allows passage for tracked and semi-tracked vehicles only. Vehicles cr(eg. AVRE, Arc) use normal cross-country movement. Infantry are delayed one full move irevehicles when attempting to cross AT ditches. AT obstacles (such as concrete teeth, iron poles, etc) are impassable to all vehicles until removed or demolished. Permanent AT obstacles (eg. dragons teeth) that have had gaps blasted through them are considered `rubble' for all movement. Temporary AT obstacleSpanish dancers) do not impair movement once removed. Barbed

Infantry, on reaching each line of barbed-wire, require one full move to cross, and three moves to create a breach or gap in the barbed-wire.

avalry c

logistics or supply units) seeing limited action. Combat units & echelons were more often issued with the cream of the available military transport.

Ccut-away.

Gaps fo movement for troops passing through it. Rivers – Before commencing a game, parts of the river or stream which are fordable for vehicles must be declared. The length and width of the rivers is up to the players' choice. Note: certain areas of a river's two embankments may be declared as mud, from 5 to 10cm in width. For movement, river and stream fords are treated as `mud' and ehiv cles must test for bogging for each move they spend attempting to

cross.

INTRODUCTION The Softskin Vehicles charts are found in their relevant army lists at the back of the rules. eg the German softskin vehicle chart is in the German A The vehicles are categorised under their country of origin and the types covered are limited to those mainly employed by combat units of each army. Although many captured and requisitioned types were operated by Axis forces, their use was limited to secondary roles (oc

tytables can represent a variety of vehicle types with

teristics, hence more that onsimilar charac e name is provided for For all inten and purposes, th base co nts as h the most. Additional ty ted in the vehic tes. motorcycles cou one softskin vehicle wit

capacity. So you ire at individual motorcycle Af

don’t s simply fire at the base, as though it contains just one v ter a vehicle’s disembarked, t the

vehicle as still having stated otherwis th ve" ferse invehicle or army list not ot disembark. Does n 4x 6x6e otap to motorcycles wh am/s can k, in th `6 wh r

who remain in are "C/C" (Cross Cou ) - vehi-road. still subject to all command radius rules and penalties. They are

affected by all morale results that affect their passengers. T he only time an APC would be tested separately from its

squad/passengers, would be when it has suffered damage, as opposed to being destroyed, eg, gun or hull damaged. In this case, test the APC and its crew (not passengers) as an AFV. If anything

but OK result received, the crew and any passengers abandon the vehicle. LEGEND: "PV" (Point Value) - game points for the vehicle based on its size, cargo capacity, mobility"Description" - generalised name provided for each entry in the table. The distinction between light, medium & heavy trucks (for example) are based on a vehicle's load capacity. Trucksare listed as "Light", upto 4 ton "Medium" and over 4 ton are "Heavy". For half-tracks anton) & Heavy (8+ ton). Motorcycles list

travelling off Refer Movessing w alties. when cro h terrain types and

"Capacity s" - the number of tecarried within the hicle.

s of "Tow" (Towing) - the largest clascapable of hauling.

EXAMPLE SOFTSKIN VEHICLE CHART

Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams

PV JAPAN Description Drive

Size

44 15 1 - 7 Type 97 Sankyo Motorcycle x 3 - A 8 Type 97 Iwasaki M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - 8 Type 95 Kurogane Light Car 4x4

A B

40 11 1 - 44 16 1 -

SSOOFFTTSSKKIINN VVEEHHIICCLLEESS IINNTTRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN

27

tions.

Vs by blly armored. This applied to many Ger

hin armor

p p period is require rised llowing any movement. This setup is the crew preparing the gun

for action and must be stationary throughout. The weapons cannot be fired until setup is complete; Set-up Time Gun Calibre

The Motorised Guns charts are found in their relevant army lists at the back of the rules. Motorised guns were built to provide a higher degree of mobility for

e weapon and were intended for use with mechanised formathThe advantage of motorised guns was there ability to be brought into action more swiftly than there towed counterparts. The disadvantage

as that the gun and crew were a much larger target and therefore wmuch harder to conceal.

guns are distinguished Motorised from AF eing unarmored or only partia man armored trucks and halftracks which had only the drivers cab and front engine were retrofitted with t plate.

etu & Firing - A setu d for all moto guns Sfo

Guns upto 77mm

- stabilising legs were used on numerous types when 's chassis proved unstable for firing the weapon. Gun

Gun Shields - these provide hard cover from all infantry weapons if the firer is within the guns own arc of fire (30º). If the firer lies outside this arc, the gun crew is unprotected with no cover. All

on their guns are listed within the

uns list the notes ashav arm from all infantry weapons withthe ptio AT nd all HMG reat as normal softskinvehicles.) Does not include gun crews which are exposed unless within the protection of a gun shield if present. See above. Organisation – You must purchase complete platoons or companies of motorised guns as per the army lists if mentioned (not many are mentioned!) Otherwise, organise motorised guns into platoons of 3 – 4

hicles with Co HQs being 1 – 2 vehicles. Each platoon/company must

n

0 move; 1 move; Guns 80mm to 110mm 2 moves; Guns above 110mm +1 move if stabilisers are required. Note: Motorised guns with 0 moves for setup, and no stabilisers required, need only to be stationary for the turn in which they wish to fire. EXAMPLE MOTORISED GUN CHART

Stabiliserse vehicle

MMOOTTOORRIISSEEDD GGUUNNSSthcrews were therefore obliged to extend out the legs onto the ground before engaging targets. All motorised guns requiring the used of stabilisers are listed under their individual notes.

vehicles equipped shields div otes. in idual n

Arm d V cles d within ore ehi - motorised g e

cteding or plating are prote exce n of weapons a (t

vebe all of the same vehicle. LEGEND: "PV", "Description", "Drive", "Size", "Rd", "C/C" as per SoftskiVehicles. "Arm" (Armament) - lists the weapons equipped on the vehicle.

Size

P BRITAIN / USA Description Drive

V Speed Armament Rd C/C 42 17 40mm L48 AA 58 SP, 4x4 Bofors 40mm AA 30cwt truck 4x4 C

46 37mm M6 GMC Light AT SP 4x4 B 50 20 37mm L54

The Armor charts are found in their relevant army lists at the back of thru

e les.

have been categorised under the nationality which r used them exclusively. Other AFVs which are not

, Side and Rear Armor effective or has ll front

d. The Fire the gun, number of crew, and

if you want your vehicle

ANKS

– Hull Front, Side, & Rear Armor Thickness in cm F, TS, TR – Turret Front, Side, & Rear Armor Thickness in cm

s Country Speed that the vehicle can move in

) are treated as

urchase complete

ized units.

he vehicle, even in just by the

early Soviet tank Battalion HQ has 3 io. This model only

All AFVseither produced olisted, but were used by that nation, are listed in the nation’s army list at the back of the rules. Each AFV has its Frontthickness listed in cm. This is its armor factor. Sloped armbeen taken into account. eg a T-34/76 1940 has 30º huarmor, which doubles its effective thickness. 4.5cm becomes 9cm. Mobility is given for both Road and Cross Country terrain. The vehicle’s size for visibility purposes is also listeOrder takes into account the size of turret, etc. Armament is given in basic calibre and calibre length, along with any secondary armament, such as any MGs. If a weapon such as a roof mounted HMG that was only occasionally used, and it is not listed, then you need to pay extra for itto have it. eg IS-II occasionally had a 13.2mm MG. The charts also list all vehicles which have radios, smoke dischargers, and one man turrets. Under each chart are extensive notes on all vehicles. Abbreviations:

V’ – Point value ‘P‘T ’, ‘SELF PROPELLED GUNS’ or ‘APC/RECONNAISSANCE’ – type of vehicle ‘ARMAMENT’ – vehicle’s weapons HF, HS, HRTRd, C/C – Road and Croscm per game turn. (Also happens to be their mph speed.) ‘Sz’ - Size of vehicle ‘FO’ - Fire Order of vehicle’s main gun ‘CAP’ – capacity, ie, number of teams that the vehicle can carry. Unless stated otherwise in vehicle notes or army lists, each APC includes an integral driver/crew, allowing the vehicle to move and fire (fixed

eaponw s only) after passengers disembark. AFV Mounted Machine Guns - Machine Guns equipped on AFVs are listed along with their main armament in the Armour Lists, ie. HMG, MMG or LMG. Most AFV MGs have been classified `light'(LMG) because they were operated by only a single crew member. Medium MGs are those which are served by at least two or more crew and were capable of sustained fire role. Heavy MGs are determined by calibre. All AFV LMGs listed for Italian, Soviet, Finnish, Polish and Japanese AFVs are treated as `magazine-fed', while German, US and

British AFVs (except those equipped with Bren LMG`belt-fed'. AFV Organisation

s mentioned at the start of the rules, you must pAplatoons or companies of AFVs, as per the army lists. If you cannot find mention of a particular vehicle in the army lists, find a similar vehicle in

at nation’s army lists, and organise the vehicle into same sthOr, use platoons of 3 – 4 AFVs with Co HQs being 1 – 2 AFVs, and in this case, each platoon/company must be all of the same vehicle. Command vehicles must be marked in some way that is

bvious to the player using toidentification numbers on the vehicle. eg a platoon of 5 x Pz IV have markings on their turrets, being 01, 02, 03, 04, 05. The player has recorded that vehicle ‘01’ in each platoon is the HQ vehicle. This information need not be revealed to the opponent. The exception of course being if the command vehicle is physically different to the

ther AFVs in its unit. eg anotanks, with only the actual HQ tank having a radtherefore should have an aerial. HQ AFV Additional Point Values You will need to increase the base point value of the command AFVs as follows: • Each AFV platoon must have a Platoon HQ AFV @ + 10 PV • Each AFV company HQ must have one or two company HQ AFVs, @ + 20 PV each. Any other vehicles in the HQ do not count as HQ vehicles, just normal vehicles, as in the platoons. • If only the command vehicle has a radio, + 20 PV.

pecial Note: Some AFV HQs have moS torcycles or jeeps etc , as messengers or recon. If these are destroyed,

ax traverse is 90º per turn x traverse is 45º per turn

attached to themthis has no effect on the AFV unit’s morale. No morale test is needed. TURRETS & SELF PROPELLED GUNS As mentioned later, all guns have a fire arc of 30 degrees. They can engage any target within this arc without traversing hull or turret. Turreted AFVs can traverse their turrets as follows: Light AFVs: Max traverse is 180º per turn Medium AFVs: MHeavy AFVs: Ma For AFVs firing while traversing, the following deduction applies to their hit chances: - 1 if turret/hull traversed over half max.

IINNTTRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN

AARRMMOORR CCHHAARRTTSS IINNTTRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN

Self propelled guns must pivot on one track to bring the gun to bear on an enemy, count this as traversing as above. They must remain stationary in the turn they pivot. One Man Turrets: (see AFV notes to determine which AFVs this

pplies to), double ALL firing deductions and count 'closed down'

w charge as

shell or weapon hits the part of

ont, and turret sides. A hit is achieved, so 1D6 is thrown to 4 hrown on the

nt. But as there are sandbags

ed to the AFVs . re facing, and for

h d by spaced arm , he AFV.

So a StuG IIIG with side skirts covering its superstructure (turret) sides and its upper and lower hull sides, on both sides of the vehicle will have to pay 18 extra points for the skirts, ie 6 facings (3 per side) x 3 PV equals 18 PV. A Panzer IV with turret skirts also

as its turret rear facing covered, so would be 21 PV extra. A front only would have to

, although the US ent as far as welding special cages all around the turret and hull in

as done only from 1944-45.

Smoke dischargers on an AFV can only be used once and produce a wide enough smoke screen to conceal the front (or back) of the AFV.

een 5cm in front of or behind the AFV, which takes affect at the beginning of the next turn.

les re s in Direct aid Ph

nk Ridersl self-propelled guns,

nk ri

awhen firing. eg for a French Somua to fire at a target which just came into sight, the deduction is - 2, not - 1. SKIRT AND SPACED ARMOR ETC: Bazooka skirts, spaced armor, sandbags and concrete, when attached to an AFV's armor plating, reduces all hollo(HEAT) infantry weapons, all AT rifles and all shells up to 30mm,ineffective. This applies only if thatthe AFV which is protected by this spaced armor.

eg an infantry figure armed with a Panzerfaust fires at a Sherman with sandbag armor, covering the upper hull sides, hull

Skirt armor was used exclusively by German AFVs. German AFVs also more rarely used concrete, but only from 1943 to 1945. Sandbag armor was employed by several nations

frdetermine th is t You do not need to dice, simply place down the scre hit position on the AFV. ASherman, being the upper hull fro

e Panzerfaust has no effect. there, then th All other ru garding the smoke screen are the same a Area Fire L Smoke & White osphorous (WP). Point Values: Cost for spaced armor is add original Point Value Ta For each turret or superstructu each upper hull and

ing, that is covere irts, sandbagsSize C or D AFVs, but not open-topped turret ess

lower ull fac or, sketc, it costs 3 points. This is added to the base PV of t

can carry ta ders, that is, infantry hitch a ride on

28

hSherman with sandbags on its upper hullpay 3 PV extra. Historical Use:

worder to hold the sandbags. This wSoviet AFVs, T-34/85s in particular, in 1945 welded old wire-sprung bed frames to their hull and turret sides. These caused the hollow charged rounds to literally bounce off. Game Restrictions

e onlTh y vehicles allowed to use these armor ‘enhancements’ are those mentioned as having it in the Armor Notes, or, if you can find historical photographic evidence of such use for that exact type of tank, and for the year and theatre of use of that tank. eg photos of Shermans with concrete or sandbags in France in 1944. Your models must show this skirt, sandbag or concrete armor. AFV Fired Smoke Screens

the They can carry maximum of 4 teams. While carrying tan

back of the AFV. a k riders, the

AFV cannot move faster than its cross country speed, even when on road. (These rules do not apply to bona fide APCs & their passengers) With the exception of Soviet SMG Sections, no other tank riders can fire their weapons while riding the AFV. Also with the exception of Soviet SMG Sections, if tank riders are fired upon by direct

ntthe netakes AFV. The AFV must

stadisem

ARMAMENT HF HS H

infa ry weapons fire or direct area fire, or if the tank is hit by AT fire, in xt turn, the AFV must stop and the tank riders must disembark. It ½ a move to embark or disembark from an

be tionary (for at least ½ a move ) while troops are embarking or barking.

EXAMPLE ARMOR CHART PV TANKS

R TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 7 7 5 6 33 25 188 T-34/76 m1940 76 L30,2LMG 9 C 8 6

224 T-34/76 m1941 76 L41,2LMG 222 T-34/76 m1942 76 L41,2LMG

9 9

6 7 8 6 7 33 25 C 8 6 7 7 7 7 33 25 C 8

re. Guns can fire up to one shot per turn at one ch ‘soft’ target within Beaten Zone is diced for.

uire only

s ithin

s n

be fired upon. To engage

Direct fire has been divided into two areas; 1) Anti-Tank Fiindividual target.2) Area Fire. Ea Anti-Tank Fire is used for engaging pin-point targets which reqdirect hits to inflict any damage, such as AFVs. And although one shot is fired per gun per turn at such a target, this representthe firing of an unspecified quantity of rounds by each gun wthe two-minute time span. Area Fire is used against soft targets such as infantry, softskinvehicles and guns, and each such target that lies within the gun’beaten zone is diced for. Again, this represents the firing of aunspecified quantity of rounds during the turn. Each gun has a base `to-hit' chance when it fires. This is the probability of a shell striking its target. Guns with higher rates of fire have an higher `to-hit' probability, with automatic (AA) guns capable of multiple hits (see later). Base ‘to-hit’ chances for guns also takes into account their ballistic performance (ie. velocity, effective range.)

rc of Fire; A

All guns have an arc of fire of 30 degrees as shown in the above diagram. The centre of this arc is taken from the direction faced by the model AFV turret or Field/AT gun on completion of the movement phase. For both AT Fire & Area Fire, the target/POA

ust lie within this arc before it canmtargets outside this arc the must firer must traverse either turret, gun or hull until it lies within. Target Aquisition - To engage an enemy target/s, the firer must first acquire it under one of the following circumstances;

or Anti-Tank Fire; F • Observe target as per Observation Rules, • Observe target's muzzleflash (exact location only, not general

location.) For Area Fire; • Observe target/s as per `Observation Rules', • Observe target/s muzzleflash,

Observe target entering cover, or detected around cover• .

y positions (see above point) if they are in com

s other than those listed above are

Only the `cover' that the target was last seen entering before visual contact was lost can be fired upon.

• Units of the same platoon or company can also communicate suspected enem

mand control radius with their HQ and the other units. • Positions can be targeted without prior knowledge of enemy

activity if precise orders (co-ordinates) are written prior to starting the game. (eg SP Battery A to shell edge of Woods 10cm right of bridge.) Such orders maybe cancelled during the game, but not reinstated.

Firing at targets in circumstancenot permitted. In brief, AT Fire can only be used against targets that can be observed, directly or by muzzleflash. Area Fire can be used against both observed or suspected target/s.

DDIIRREECCTT IIRREEFF

29

Anti-Tank Fire;

introduce the PzGr40, a . It had a poor weight:

lack of carrying power at y Armor Piercing)

H Usin

This type of fire is used primarily against armored targets & vehicles. AFVs are impervious to near misses and require direct hits before any damage is inflicted. Soft-skin vehicles and field/AT guns may also be targeted with Direct Fire, however, Area Fire is normally more effective against them. For AT Fire, four different types of ammunition can be used; Armor Piercing (AP), Armor Piercing Composite Rigid, High Velocity Armor Piercing & Discarding Sabot (APCR/HVAP/APDS), High Explosive Anti-Tank (HEAT) and High Explosive (HE). Most AFVs or guns were only capable of firing two or three of these types, while a few have only one. Ammunition availability for each weapon is listed in the Gun Charts, and in some cases, in the AFV charts; Armor Piercing (AP); all standard Anti-tank ammunition used by any ordinance has been grouped under this category (except APCR, HVAP & APDS which are listed separately.) The standard AP round came in a number of versions (APCBC, APBC, APHE, Squeeze Velocity, etc.) all differing in ballistic performance only. AP rounds were either solid shot or steel cased with a small bursting charge for fragmentation effect after penetrating the AFVs armor. APCR/APDS/HVAP; as the war progressed, standard AP rounds became increasingly ineffective against thicker armor and specialised ammunition was developed for dealing with those awkward encounters. Improved armor penetration was achieved by firing a high density shot (tungsten core) at an extremely high velocity. This high velocity was achieved by using more propellant than the gun could safely cope with (one reason why such ammunition normally was not standard issue.) As the standard AP rounds usually shattered at such high velocities, tungsten was the only available metal that could be used. Being a metal in short supply, it made this type of ammunition limited issue only. The Germans were first to tungsten core surrounded by a light alloydiameter ratio which gave it a

ng/extreme range. The US HVAP (High Velocitlooperated on exactly the same principal as did the Soviet version. The German PzGr40 appeared in 1941 and became very rare after 1942. Soviet APCR rounds were introduced late 1942+. US VAP and British APDS first saw action in 1944.

g APCR/APDS/HVAP in the game: These special types of unition were usually in short supply, and AFVs and guns often amm

of thshotammfor e

m

GMC

Cha

thus y or

only.) HEAT rounds, were 30-50% lower than uracy.

wed it's ally with a lot of assistance. nce and didn't bother

H T ammunition have the s

normall lus the date of introduction. Any gun which has HEAT ammunition may fire it as standard issue from

e listed date of introduction.

un & howitzers were expected to engage armored targets as a op gap AT guns. (Being hit by a 150mm HE shell could literally smantle a light AFV or seriously damage a larger one.) All guns re assumed capable of firing HE unless other wise it is stated

had only a handful. If an ammo is listed as ‘pp’, ie ‘per platoon’, the ammo is purchased for the whole platoon, and only one AFV or gun

at platoon may fire that ammunition per turn. Too bad if that one per turn misses while another standard ammo shot hits! If an unition is listed as ‘pg’ ie ‘per gun’, the ammunition is purchased ach gun/AFV, and then each gun/AFV in the platoon may fire that

am o each turn. There will be some exceptions to the above, such as the M36

Jackson, for which the HVAP ammunition was equipped as standard. See the notes for each AFV or gun for such exceptions.

APCR/APDS rounds are listed separately in the Gun rts for each nationality with their date of introduction. Only major

types have been listed and the PV for their use is payed in addition to at of the AFV or gun. Each has its own revised to-hit chance

penetration pl figure listed under the gun’s normally accuracammunition. High Explosive Anti-Tank (HEAT); still very much in its infancy, this type of ammunition was a way of providing an AT capability for low velocity guns & howitzers. It involved a shaped (high explosive) charge being detonated at a set distance from the target's surface. This resulted in the explosion being channelled to a narrow point

and melting its way through the armor, very similar to a blow torch. The effect inside AFVs was less than that of AP rounds, but the molten metal and gases still proved effective against any crew. HEAT rounds were not reliant on kinetic energy as were AP rounds, its armor penetration was constant for all ranges (being directly dependent on the diameter of the shell as with HE, were fired at velocities which that of AP rounds which meant reduced acc HEAT ammunition was introduced in 1942 by Germany, Italy, Soviet and US, with Japan in 1944. Both German and US policy provided HEAT ammunition for virtually every ordinance piece capable of firing it. Britain however used it for their 95mm

.7") howitzers only. Italy follo(3Japan placed little emphasis on AT performauntil late.

All guns capable of firing revised to-hit chance plus penetration

EA figure listed under the gun’

y accuracy or ammunition, p

th High Explosive (HE); the use of HE ammunition against AFVs was not uncommon as many guns & howitzers were not supplied with

ny other type of round. During the early stages of the war, many agstdiaotherwise in the Gun or Armor Charts. Anti-Tank Fire Procedure; 1. Specify which target is to be fired upon and what guns are

. Measure range between firer and target. For vehicles & AFVs, measurements are taken from the closest edge or corner of

itzers, f its

ce b the

o the next highest level (ie. 32cm becomes

ons appl both firer and target. The final total is

ual or below rget has been successfully

t damage (if any) is

the target is was fired upon, not completing

put back (back-

AFV Facing Diagram

firing at it. 2

the model. For infantry, heavy weapons and gun/howmeasurements are taken from the closest edge or corner obase.

3. Find the gun's Base To-Hit Chan y referring to the `To-Hit' chance of the firing gun: this is number in brackets eg (11).

See the gun charts. The gun charts are in the army lists at thees. For ranges lying between those given in Gunback of the rul

Charts, round up t40cm, 95cm becomes 100cm)

4. To the Base To-Hit Chance add or deduct all relevant AT Fire Variati icable to the Adjusted To-Hit Chance.

5. Roll 3D6 and add them together. If this total is eqthe Adjusted To-Hit Chance, the tahit. All misses are ineffective.

6. Once a targe has been successfully hit, theaccessed;

As mentioned earlier, although Direct Fire is conducted after all movement has been completed, players can select to fire at targets during any part of their movement phase by back-tracking the position of the target. In doing so, the unit which is firing must also be in a position to observe the target at that part of the turn. Ifdestroyed/disabled, it remains where it it's planned movement. Otherwise it completes it's full movement. (eg. During the movement phase a tank moved from being visible to behind a building. It took 1/2 of its turn to do this. An enemy AT gun which observed the target during the first half of the turn can fire at the tank before it disappears behind the building. It succeeds in hitting the tank and destroying it, so the tank model is tracked) to where it was when the gun fired at it. For Armored Fighting Vehicles The amount of armor on an AFV usually varied between the front, side, hull or turret, so a specific hit location must therefore be found. The following diagram is used to determine which face (front, flank or rear) of the AFV was hit;

Side Hit

Front Rear Hit Hit Side Hit

Note - For turrets; calculate the front/side/rear according to the direction faced by the turret.

30

Determine AFV Hit Location

5 6 5 6

1 1

tions take account the extra protection afforded to target. Hull-down or partially concealed AFVs are hit on their exposed portion, eg. hull down AFVs will turret. In m y cases for concealed targets, it won’t be

ion. And if only tracks and lower ll ‘1’ or ‘2’ Hit Location rolls.

etermine AFV Armor Thickness

tions take account the extra protection afforded to target. Hull-down or partially concealed AFVs are hit on their exposed portion, eg. hull down AFVs will turret. In m y cases for concealed targets, it won’t be

ion. And if only tracks and lower ll ‘1’ or ‘2’ Hit Location rolls.

etermine AFV Armor Thickness

3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2

For each successful hit on the target, roll 1D6 and refer to table below; Dice Roll Position 1 Tracks

For each successful hit on the target, roll 1D6 and refer to table below; Dice Roll Position 1 Tracks 2 Lower Hull 2 Lower Hull 3,4 Upper Hull

Tur perstructure 3,4 Upper Hull

Tur perstructure 5,6 ret/Su5,6 ret/Su AT Fire varia into AT Fire varia into a concealeda concealedautomaticallyautomaticallybe hit in the anbe hit in the annecessary to roll for any hit locatnecessary to roll for any hit locathull are covered, re-ro anyhull are covered, re-ro any DD

ining the Hit Location upon the target AFV, eg upper target's corresponding Armor thickness from its

rmor Charts provide Armor F, HS, &

After determhull front, find the listing in the Armor Charts. The Athickness in cm for six locations on all AFVs; TF, TS, TR, H

R. (H=Hull, T=Turret, F=Front, S=Side & R=Rear) H AP, APCR, HVAP, APDS or HEAT ammunition

using AP, APCR, APDS or HEAT ammunition, compare tIf he enetration value in the Gun Charts with the Armor thickness of the

or level of the AFV target, the etration Effects

P,

HE a

Ptarget. If this value exceeds the armAFVs armor has been penetrated. Use the Pen

able to determine the damage, using only the ‘Variations for ATAPCR, APDS & HEAT.’

or mmunitionF For HE ammunition, the target’s armor thickness is irrelevant.

t only t t tion o

s on A

Consult the Penetration Effects Table for the damage result, buiuse he ‘Variations for HE Ammunition.’ This applies for any h

loca n an AFV, including the tracks. Hit FV `tracks' by AP, APCR, HVAP, APDS or HEAT

ks' have an equivalent armor thickness equal to thAFV `trac at an her

etratio

AFV’s thinnest hull armor. So in order for a gun to damageAFV’s tracks and render the AFV immobilised, it must have a hig

en n value at that rangep , than the AFV’s thinnest hull armor. ther not use Penetration Effect table!)

V, Sof n/Howitzers and Crews -

No o damage occurs (Do AF tskin Vehicle & Gu

n AFVIf a is destroyed (not damaged) by Direct AT Fire using AP, are also

sing HE unitio

APCR, HVAP, APDS or HEAT ammunition, its crewconsidered casualties. Dice on the AFV/Gun Crew/Passenger

for any passengers. Casualties Table below onlyIf an AFV is destroyed by Direct AT Fire u

amm n, all crew and passengers are casualties.

Successful hits on guns/howitzers will automatically destroy them

s

and their crews, regardless of ammunition used.

leSuccessful hits on softskin vehic will automatically destroy them anyth all

unition was used, w 2D AFV/2 Gun Crew/Passenger Casualties le belo

r the adjusted number, the crew or passenger base

and ing they may have been towing. If HE fire was used,crew/passengers are also casualties.

If AP, APCR, APDS or HEAT ammthro 6 and consult the

bTa w. For each crew/passenger base being tested, add or subtract the variables to the number listed in the table, then roll 2D6. If you roll

qual or undeehas been destroyed.

FV/Gun Crew/Passenger CasualtA ies Table Gun Size Firing 2D6

4 - 115mm 10 65 - 76mm 8 45 – 57mm 7 30 – 42mm 6 0 – 28mm, grenades 5 PzFaust, Pzschreck 7 PIAT, Bazooka 6

18

22mm+ 11

if firer using APCR,HVAP or APDS if firer using HEAT (does not apply to infantry weapons)

assengers & crew are tested immediately after the AFV/vehicle rale test if relevant.

Variables: -1 if target is AFV -1-2 Phas been destroyed, and take a mo Anti-Tank Fire Variations Add to or deduct from the gu

n's base to-hit chance;

to or from firer, OR

er wn or concealed 66%+ by hard cover

st if firer moves or changes target.

2 Second & subsequent shots at stationary target ) Lost if firer moves, engages

onal barrel of a AA/automatic cannon r has been killed

as expended over half its movement r

the Ger BGr

AT Fire Variations

-1 Target just came into sight. -1 Target seen for less than half of turn 1 Target moving over 15cm -

-1 Target moving upto 15cm across LOS (line of sight), OR -2 Target moving 15cm+ across LOS, Turreted guns only

(ie all guns capable of traversing 360º) OR -3 Target moving 15cm+ across LOS, Non-turreted guns

(ie. SPs, AT guns, field guns, howitzers, infantry guns) --42 Target is partially concealed (33-66%) by hard cov

Target is hull-do +1 Target is Size `D' -1 Target is Size `B' -2 Target is Size `A' +1 Second & subsequent shots at moving target

(accumulative, max of +3) Lo +

(accumulative, max of + 6another target.

+1 If firing a HEAT shell (fixes an error in HEAT to-hit chances)* -1 Firer's turret/hull traversed over half maximum this turn -4 Firing at a Muzzle-flash -2 Firer moved over 5cm +1 For each additi n-2 If AFV’s commande

n +1 Firer is Vetera-1 Firer is Conscript Note – nothing can fire if it hduring a tu n. * Except for man 80mm L37 PAW 600 and 88mm RPzguns, which don’t include the error.

Notes; Target moving across LOS; the target is across the firer's line of sight if moving moving with a

rection that lies within the shaded area on the diagram below;

limited traverse are ric ving perpendicular to

eir line of fire (an advantage with turret mounted weapons.)

cealed if 33-65% covered by hard cover, 6%+ by hard cover. Applies only to targets gs, walls, bocage, dug-in, partially behind a trenched.

sho & subsequent shots at ed accuracy from

r nto the target.

r'Refer sing Limits' for maximums on AFVs & guns.

di

Turreted vs Non-Turreted Guns;

Non-turreted AFVs and field/AT guns withest ted in their ability to track targets mor

th Concealed Targets; Target is partially conhulldown is concealed 6behind (or within) buildinhill relevant to firer, or en

ent ts; Second Second & subsequmoving/stationary target; represents the improv

the correction of fire oobse ving `fall of shot' and Fire s turret/hull traversed over half maximum this turn;

to `Traver

31

; pplies only if the target muzzle-flash reveals exact position, not eneral location. Refer to `Observation' rules.

Firing at Muzzle-flashAg For each additional barrel of an AA/automatic cannon; Applies to multi-barrelled AA/Auto-cannons (eg. +3 for 20mm Quad FlaKvierling when firing at any range.) Penetration Effects Table; When AFV target has been penetrated by AP, APCR, APDS, HVAP, HEAT or been hit with an HE round, roll 3D6, add/deduct the relevant below variations according to calibre, ammunition type, target type and refer to table for a damage result;

Penetration Effects Table; Result Effect On Target 14 or more Destroyed 11-13 Hull/Gun Damaged 9-10 Stunned 2 Moves 7-8 Stunned 1 Move 6 or less No Effect

moves

sult Received Second Time in the Same or Subsequent

Destroyed - AFV is completely knocked out of action. Hull/Gun Damaged - if hull is hit, AFV is immobilized. - if turret/superstructure is hit, all main

armament (and traversing) is disabled. Stunned 2 Moves - AFV cannot move, fire or observe for 2Stunned 1 Move - AFV cannot move, fire or observe for 1 moves No Effect - shell inflicts negligible damage Same ReTurn – take the next result up.

ad, which is Hull/Gun Damaged) (eg if you get a Stunned 2 Moves result a second time in the same turn, take the next result up inste Penetration Effects Table Variations for AP, APCR, APDS, HVAP, HEAT ammunition

n (except HEAT)

6mm gun (except HEAT) 50-57mm gun (except HEAT)

+6 140-155mm gu+5 122-130mm gun (except HEAT) +3 94-115 gun (except HEAT) +2 84-90mm gun (except HEAT) +0 65-7-1-3 37-47mm gun (except HEAT) -4 0-35mm gun (except HEAT) -4 HEAT ammunition & all Infantry AT weapons +3 penetrated 3-5 over target's armor level +6 penetrated 6+ over target's armor level

enetratiP on Effects Table Variations for High Explosive (HE) rounds +2 160mm+ gun +0 140-155mm gun -1 122-130mm gun

94-115 gun -3-5 84-90mm gun

which are

the drive l tank, etc. Gun turrets could be rendered

crew is incapacitated for the lt from the hit & are accumulative.

of anti-aircraft & automatic 20mm to 40mm and designated by

se gun types were magazine fed and capable of automatic fire.

achieved and the number rolled on the 3D6 is less an the Adjusted Hit Chance needed, then an extra hit is achieved

ow. For each additional hit on the cation and damage if required.

ctive gun charts. or AFVs as stated in the

CAThisonly

in tamm

prev

and be d

1D6

-7 65-76mm gun Guns below 65mm calibre have no effect. +2 Target is Light AFV +2 Target AFV has Open Top, Sides or Rear (PLUS below +1 if

relevant) +1 Target AFV has open Sides or Rear and firing at it from its open side or rear arc The use HE rounds against an AFV relied entirely on the explosive impact to damage an target rather than penetrating the armor. While less effective than AT ammunition, large calibre guns were often employed against armor with results.

Passengers within AFVs or vehicles `destroyed' by HE fire are all casualties. AFVs can be immobilised in a variety ways ranging from

amaging the external running gear, an internal hit ondtrain, engine, fueinoperative by hits on the gun, optical gun sights or turret traversing gear. Once an AFV is damaged, it remains disabled for the

`stunned' remainder of the game. Aumber of moves as a resun

AA/Automatic Cannon -

arietyThe Gun Charts include a vannon ranging in calibre fromc

`AA' next to their calibre. All the

These guns can only engage one target per move but are capable of multiple hits. Use the normal procedure for Direct AT Fire. If a hit isthfor each extra `pip' on the dice beltarget, roll for separate hit lo

Example: Let us assume that a 20mm AA guns needs 11 on 3 dice to hit an AFV. The firer rolls '9' on 3 dice. This is two below the needed figure, therefore the target is hit by three shells, not one. Maximum number of hits achievable on a single target from an AA/Autocannon are as follows; 20-25mm 3 Hits maximum 37-40mm 2 Hits maximum +1 per additional barrel (Eg. Triple 20mm MG151; 5 hits maximum on target.) Due to their high rate of fire, 20 & 25mm AA/Autocannon are also included under `Infantry Weapons' and can be against soft-targets and infantry (37mm & 40mm AA guns use Area Fire only against infantry.) SPIGOT GRENADES Spigot Grenades were a stop gap measure taken by the Germans on the Russian Front where there was a distinct lack of effective AT guns. It involved using a large spigot bomb and placing it down the barrel of a small calibre AT gun. Although effective, the range was incredibly small. Spigot Grenades have their To-Hit chances listed

their respein They can only be used by guns

un Charts and AFV Charts. GNote: Each round is muzzle loaded by the crew (who

receive no cover while loading) and requires half move to load. Towed guns cannot be loaded until unlimbered.

NISTER ROUNDS was a type of shell employed by the US forces in the Pacific . It involves a shotgun type of fire, each shell spraying out upto

400 metal balls with devastating effect. It can be fired by both AFVs and towed guns, as stated in the Gun Charts. (ie, those guns listed

he Gun Charts as having the ammunition, can fire that unition, whether AFV or towed.)

Canister rounds were excellent for clearing the brush found in the Pacific. A position fired upon must have had some

ious signs of enemy occupation, be in a commanding or suspect position, or about to be assaulted. Canister rounds spread in a 10 arc in the direction they are fired. Any infantry in this arc

the range of the shell (as listed in the Gun Charts notes) must iced for to determine whether or not they were hit.

Roll 1D6 die per infantry, heavy weapon or gun/howitzer/mortar base, or softskin and subtract all the relevant variations:

Result Infantry/gun/howitzer etc base is removed as casualties. 3+

- 1 if

For sepa

ThisunareffecAT fi not require pin-point accuracy to successfully

eutralise a target. Hits within close proximity were often sufficient hicle/s, crews or infantry. Such targets roup rather than targeted individually and

unition was cities n nds. Th due to the larger size of the asis on cy.

w es are designed to resolve direct HE fire d st realis ner. When firing direct HE, the et is called the Point Of Aim (POA). A beaten zone

to determine the

su ed that an of a ingle turn (two at its POA. y will hit in

e BZR. Hence, all targets within

All equipment is destroyed. 1,2 No Effect

Variations - 2 if firer moving

target is prone or in soft cover - 3 if target behind hard cover.

any softskins in the arc, dice for them as above, and dice rately for passengers in them. If the softskin is hit, it is

immobilized.

Direct Area Fire type of fire is intended for use against soft-targets (ie. mored vehicles, personnel, guns or howitzers) and cannot t fully enclosed AFVs (even if commander is head up). Unlike re, HE rounds did

nto damage or destroy ve

ere often engaged as a gware therefore treated as `area' targets. HE amm

t v o ere half or a third less thagenerally fired a el which wstandard anti-tank rou is wasrounds and less emph accura

follo The ing rulin the quickest an mo tic mancentre of the targradius (BZR) is then measured out from this POAaffected area. It is as m during the sp sminutes), each gun will fire a quantity of HE rounds

hile most shells will not land on the POA itself, theWproximity of the centre and within th

32

re

this BZR must be diced for. As ranges increase, the reduced accuracy of shell fire decreases and so does the damage inflicted on target/s. Direct Area Fire Procedu

be legitimately red i on page 28.)

O ter at the Radius

of all ed for

. For base, dge or

Cros pe of gun/howitzer being fired with the distance to the target on the relevant gun chart. This will prov Chance, eg (10). For ual vehicle, gun crew, infantry base) withi e Base To-Hit Chance and add/deduct any and ChaRoll s equa it and e them ce cotton wool on them, and all crewAlso ped AFV nd Direct Area Fire sectiFor the BZR, variations may vary

g on circumstances. eg one target en.

Play

If you will not sequent turn, remove the POA counter. uent turns firing at the same POA ->

gh the BZR during the move

he BZR, throw 1D6. If you roll 1 – 3, it his turn. If 4 – 6 , it is in the BZR

Beaten Zone Radius *

Determine whether enemy unit or position can1. fi upon (refer to Target Acquisit on

2. Select the Point of Aim (POA) by placing a P A Coundesired location, and measure out the Beaten Zone(BZR). All units within this circle on completion movement, are considered targets and must be dicindividually. Backtracking rules also apply. Meas b tween the POA and firer3. ure the range egun/howitzers measure from the edge or corner of theirwith AFVs, measurements are taken from the closest ecorner of the hull.

4. s reference the ty

ide the Base To-Hit 5. each target (individ

n the BZR, take thArea Fire Variations which are applicable to both the firer

Adjusted To-Hitthe individual target. This provides the nce.

6. et target in the BZR. If the total i3D6 for each soft-targl or less than the Adjusted To-Hit Chance, the target is h

d/wiped out. For infantry bases, simply removdestroye. For guns or softskins, plas/passengers are casualties.

f each open top7. roll 3D6 for the crews/passengers o in the BZR. See the AFV Crews aon below for the effect.

8. multiple targets withininbetween each one depend

may be dug-in, another in the op9. ers using Area Fire for second & subsequent turns at the

same POA must declare their intention to an opponent by not removing the POA counter at the end of the turn.fire for a second or sub

0. For second & subseq1targets which exit or pass throuare diced for as a target prior to leaving the BZR.

11. For any Vehicles, gun/howitzers & infantry bases which are not completely covered by tis considered out of the BZR tthis turn. If only touched by the BZR, and not covered, it is not inside the BZR.

Beaten Zone Radii Gun/Howitzer Calibre

8cm

156mm+ Gun 12cm 140-155mm Gun 10cm

22-130mm Gun 9cm 194-115 Gun 84-90mm Gun 7cm

5-76mm Gun 6cm 657mm Gun 5cm45-50mm Gun 4cm 30-42mm Gun 3cm

Note this is the radius* , so the diameter is double this. Direct Area Fire Minimum Range No gun can fire Direct Area Fire at targets within its Beaten Zone

adius. (ieR , it could shell itself that way!) This represents the guns low enough to shoot at infantry targets that are inability to depress

too close.

irect Area Fire VariationsD Add to or deduct from the gun's base to-hit chance;

Gun firing

g

Firer is Conscript +2 Target is Size `D' +1 Target is Size `C' -2 Target is within Partial or Soft cover (includes AFVs with

open sides, back & top, and ‘tank riders’) -4 Target is within/behind Hard-cover (includes AFVs with

open back & top only -5 Target is Dug-in/Entrenched (includes AFVs with open

top only -6 Target is in Fortifications -1 Target moving upto 10cm across LOS or over 10cm -1 Target observed for half turn or less -2 Speculative Fire; Target unobserved -2 Firer moved over 5cm -1 Firing Smoke -2 Firing White Phosphorous +1 2nd & subsequent turns firing at same POA (max +3) and are lost if firer moves or engages another target POA Area Fire Explanations - Target is Size `C/D' applies to all targets with C or D size classification. The bigger the target, the easier they're hit. Target behind Soft/Partial cover

pplies if enemy target/s are behind or within the following terrainrds, hedges or wooden structures or buildings. with shields provide only partial cover for crews, not

arget is

pplies if /over 10cm in any direction to e firer.

peculative Fire pplies to all targets within the BZR that cannot be observed by the er. Does not apply to targets only partially covered by smoke/WP.

moved over 5cm FVs that move over 5cm during the turn, and in which case the cm is not more than half their full movement, incur this penalty on ing. Remember, nothing cannot fire if it has expended over half its ovement.

sing White Phosphorous epresents limited anti-personal effect of WP ammunition.

+5 156mm+ Gun firing +4 140-155mm Gun firing +3 122-130mm Gun firing

2 94-115 ++1 84-90mm Gun firing+0 65-76mm Gun firing

57mm Gun firing -1-2 45-50mm Gun firin-3 30-42mm Gun firing

1 Firer is Veteran +-1

a ; woods, orchaAT/field guns hard cover. Target behind Hard cover this applies if enemy target/s are behind or within brick or stone buildings and/or walls or bocage. See below for notes on buildings. Target is dug-in/Entrenched applies if target is occupying dug-in or entrenched position. T Fortified emplacement refers to bunkers, pill boxes type defences which required pinpoint accuracy to knock out. Target moving upto & over 10cm

enemy target is moving uptoath Safir Firer A5firm UR Firer is Veteran/Conscript applies to AFVs & gun/howitzers etc which have been up or down graded in status.

Buildings All targets within a building that are within the BZR of the firing gun, are diced for as above. This represents shelling around the building and shelling the building itself. In order to keep things simple, the building itself is not fired at, only the targets inside it. However, if you fire a big gun at a building from a close range, the targets inside are going to get destroyed/wiped out rather quickly. Keeping track of buildings damage in order to render them rubble is extremely tedious and slows down the game, hence it is done as above.

can ly targe

;

rer

hi•

and nd

V

are a Open topped & backed AFbehind Hard cover.

• Open topped, backed and sIf a crew/passengers is succeassumed disabled, and all pcasualties. The AFV is howeve

r having suffered damage.

To place a POA counter when firing at a building, it must be placed at the outer edge of the building (not inside). You on t one floor at a time, the firer must declare which floor is being fired at. Also, the BZR that covers the building or building floor is doubled in size.

Refer to following diagram Fi

The selected POA must be in Dwit n twice the BZR are treated

`Behind Hard Cover' for Sto• `Behind Soft/Partial Cover'

are diced for as targets u

Crews & Direct AreAFAlthough Area Fire cannot be us

couple of exceptions wereOpen topped AFV crews ca•

•

foFully enclosed AFV

cannot be affected under Area F Direct Area Fire Laid Sm

P) (WThe following rules for Smoke &All guns/howitzers capable of flisted in the Gun Charts along w

w Smoke ammunition HE shell except filled with a sm

hon eo

unition and was e Br

wea an cendiary/anti-personal effect on any soft targets within its burst

bursting charge for dispersion. producing a dense cloud whic

tipresent. The dura of smoknd a successful sm ke screena

of shells to maintain it. White Phosphorus (Wmoke amms

Japanese guns & AFVs. Theuse with a limited number guns

In comparison to conventional smoke, WP produces a ker smoke screen but with the advantage of having

inarea (eg. infantry, cavalry, trucks.) Procedure; The procedure for firing Smoke/WP is identical to that used for Area

l or below the Adjusted To-Hit Chance means R is covered with Smoke. For WP, any targets within

Sele a POA the intea PO

2. Measure the range betw3. Cross reference the type of gun/howitzer being fired with the

Fire. A 3D6 roll equathe gun’s BZBZR must dice for damage as

well.

1. ct for nded target/target position by placing A counter there.

een the POA and firer.

All guns and howitzccording to their size (A, B, C &

nes set-up time

The following rules apply to allguns and howitzers (that are nMobility for these guns is providome cases, can be carried or ms

aGun size determi Gun Size Crew

' - Light `A Guns: 1 teams `B' - Medium Guns: 2 teams `C' - Heavy Guns: 3 teams `D' - Heavy Guns; 4 teams

ing & Limbering;

See the section on infantry basitheir crews. Unlimber

ransporting or unlimbAt the start of a game, guns cvehicle for t

A

BZR

2 x BZR

PO

er normal Direct Area Fire.

rget'. V crew can be treated as a target

ides AFV crew receive soft cover ssfully hit, the main armament is assengers & exposed crew are r, still mobile and must test morale

LOS with the firer. All targets that lie as being; ne/Brick buildings & for Light/Wooden Buildings,

a Fire - ed against most AFV targets, there

crews may be targeted; n be treated as a `dug-in ta

commanders which are `head-up' ire.

oke & White Phosphorous

WP apply only to Direct Area Fire. iring Smoke & WP ammunition are ith date of introduction if applicable. as similar in design to the standard

eoke producing agent and a small

On shell e w if s from each shell wa ally brie

usu ed a continual stream

mployed extensively with US and itish introduced WP in mid 1944 for

impact, th would explodwind waould then drift any

s usu f ally requir

P) was a substitute for normal

in addition their smoke rounds.

distaBase Hit Chance.

Hit Chance and add/deduct any Direct Area ve, which are applicable to the firer, but

ves hance. . Roll ess

than the Adjusted To-H covered with smoke.

. The c

. Smoke only effects visibility & observation of targets. If an

must also dice to determine casualties as per normal Direct Area Fire (with `-2 Firing White Phosphorous.')

9. On subsequent moves after laying Smoke/WP, the same POA can be continually targeted to maintain the smoke screen.

Height;

nce to the target on the To-Hit Table. This will provide the

4. Take the Base Fire Variations as abonot t is gihe target. Th the Adjusted To-Hit C

5 3D6 for each gun firing at POA. If the total is equal or lit Chance, the BZR for the gun is

6 smoke cloud is pla ed down at the start of the following move after being fired.

7observer's DLOS passes through this smoke covered BZR, target cannot be observed. Muzzle flashes are also concealed.

8. For WP, in addition to producing smoke, all targets within the BZR

Smoke screens have a height of 5cm. Duration; The duration of smoke once laid on board varies with wind strength; For Smoke

No Wind 3 moves (No drift) spreads 5cm the wind)

) without

effect.

Sm

nthe

Light Wind 2 moves (smoke cloud per move in the direction of

Moderate Wind 1 move (smoke cloud spreads 10cm per move in the direction of the wind

Gale Force Wind Smoke disperses completely

For White Phosphorous No Wind 2 moves (No drift) Light Wind 1 moves (smoke cloud spreads 5cm per move in the direction of the

wind) Mod / Gale Force Smoke disperses completely without effect.

oke will start to spread, that is, the smoke cloud elongates, on the second move after being laid and will drift in the direction the wi d (if present). Refer to section on Wind in the Weather section of

rules.

Building

AANNTTII--TTAANNKK,, FFIIEELLDD,, && AAAA//FFLLAAKK GGUNSUNS

33

ers are classed under categories D) as provided in the Gun Charts.

s, crew and ability to man-handling;

on-board field guns, AT guns, AA ot self-propelled or AFV mounted.) ed by vehicles, horse teams, or in anhandled.

Limber/Unlimber Man-Handle 1/2 move 5cm/turn. 1 moves 2.5cm/turn. 2 moves --- 3 moves ---

ng regarding how to base guns and

ered and ready for firing.

yed while the ered, both are considered destroyed.

an either be limbered up behind a

The number of moves required to unlimber & prepare a towed gun for firing, or limber for towing, is listed in the above table and varies according to the size of the gun. It represents the set-up time taken by the crew to debark, unhook the gun and unload sufficient ammunition, or load everything back into the vehicles, etc.

The towing vehicle must be stationary throughout the limber/unlimber period and can only move off once completed. Remember that when being towed, the gun, crew & vehicle are all considered a single unit for movement purposes. If

ther the towing vehicle or limbered gun are destroeigun is still limb Man-handling; In firing mode, guns can only be man-handled by their crews upto 5cm/move for `A' size guns and 2.5cm/move for `B' size guns. Size C & D guns are effectively too heavy to be man-handled by their crews and must be positioned before set-up by their towing vehicle/s. Their crews can only traverse them on the spot, they cannot move them otherwise.

34

snow, mud, woods, rubble, thi

uns can be ‘traversed’ on the spot to engage new rgets.

rsed to be engaged,

Guns cannot be fired and man-handled in the same move. Guns cannot be man-handled through

ck tree-lines, brush, walls or hedges. All gtaTargets within 30º do not need to be traveotherwise: Size A Guns: Max traverse is 180º per turn

Size B Guns: Max traverse is 90º per turn Size C or D Guns: Max traverse is 45º per turn

For guns firing while traversing, the following deduction applies to their hit chances. - 2 if gun traversed over half max Limbered Fire; Certain AA guns were capable of being fired while still limbered to their towing vehicle. This allowed their crews to prepare them for action far quicker than normal. All guns capable of being fired while still limbered are listed in the Gun Chart Notes. • Guns capable of being fired while limbered require only one (1)

move set-up, and one (1) move for pack-up. Although the gun is still limbered, once set-up it cannot be transported again until

ded in packing-up and re-embarking the

Tow

one move is expencrew. The towing vehicle must be stationary throughout setting up and firing.

• For all AT-Fire & Area Fire, the variation; `Second & Sub. turns firing at same target' does not apply! This is the penalty for firing from an unstable platform. To un• limber and set-up the gun from the towing vehicle for normal Direct Fire, the balance of moves required for set-up of the gun must be carried out. eg. an 88mm FlaK 36 is set up for limbered fire in one move. To unlimber & set-up the gun, a further 2 moves are required.

ing Vehicles Restrictions;

ts list what size item each vehicle can towThe softskin char . In most cases, one vehicle will be suffice for both towing and transportation of the crew. Certain guns will require more than vehicle to transport both, ie, one for the crew and one for the gun.

Special cases (listed in the Gun Notes) exist were guns were transported by vehicles smaller than the minimum requirement (eg. US airborne 57mm M1 being towed by a jeep.) For these

ses, only the gun was towed while the crew travelled on foot or vehicle. For these situations, if the crew is

r

carode in a secondseparated from the gun, then it cannot set-up or fire.

un CG ews; If a gun crew suffers over 50 % casualties, then the weapon can no longer be fired. Set-up/Pack-up time are increased by one move for each 25% reduction in crew strength. Gun crew casualties can only be replaced by personnel from other crews within the same unit or similar, not from infantry units. While most guns had shields for protection against incoming enemy fire, the crews were generally too large to consistently benefit from the shields. If the enemy fire originates

within 45º of either side of the barrel, (ie a total arc of 90º) then crew are provided with partial cover only from the gun-shield. crew otherwise receives no cover from behind the gun itself plies to all Infantry fire & Direc

fromtheThe

p

any On

u earmdire ying guns/howitzers

ba

List

a plat

fant e 1 – 2 company if relevant. These platoon and company HQs

en

(he

one target area; 10cm by 10cm. The

ed gun or AFV moves from its original starting location, or engages a target outside the target area, then the ability to use the bore-sighting is lost for the remainder of the game.

• Enemy AFVs or vehicles passing through the target area can be fired upon using normal Direct AT Fire procedure with a bonus `+3' variation to the base to-hit chance.

EN PORTEE Light AT guns often suffered damage when being towed over poor

in th

is also considered destroyed.

om

INTTherule gun

Gun

n•

under `Indirect Fire'. Each nationality has guns listed which either originated from that

ployed by that country. They do not employed by that country: refer to

the `Equipment Lists' for a more comprehensive listing. Many

their Armor Penetration factors listed at set ranges up to 250cm.

fact

ng.)

ven for each gun include both the weapon and crew (transport is additional.) Guns mounted only in AFVs are

(a t Area fire.) Guns without shields provide no cover to their crews from

direction.

board Gun/Howitzers Organisation

See Indirect Fire rules regarding offboard artillery. All guns/howitzers s d onboard must be organised in batteries or platoons as per the

y lists, and cannot perform Indirect Fire, but only direct fire or ct area fire, as per the Direct Fire rules. If bu

to e used onboard, you must use the point values listed in these Gun Ch rts, do not use the offboard artillery point values.

If the guns you wish to use are not mentioned in the Army s, use platoons/batteries of 3 – 4 guns, each platoon/battery must

be ll of the same gun. Also, for each battery or platoon you must also purchase a

oon HQ team. Radios if relevant are an additional + 20, as per for ry. For each gun company, you must purchasin

HQ teams, plus radios can be mounted on horseback if horse-drawn guns/artillery, or given cars or light trucks if motorised guns/artillery. BORE SIGHTING Bore Sighting is only available to defending players in an attack-defence scenario. Units in defensive positions used bore-sighting when there was sufficient time to study the local terrain and analyse probable approach avenues for enemy attacks. Their guns would th be zeroed on particular pieces of ground. The bore Sighting was carried out by firing a few sample rounds onto the target area or sighting through the gun's open bore

nce the name.) Once range and direction had been established, any AFV or vehicle passing through the target area could be fired upon with a higher chance of being hit. • Bore-sighting can be used by all 20mm+ calibre guns (including

AFVs) and is limited to within 2/3rds maximum range. Each gun is allowed• location of this target area must be set down in written orders prior to starting the game with coordinates taken from the edges of the board or from a fixed terrain feature.

• If the bore-sight

roads or rough terrain and to overcome this problem, they were transported `en portee' on the back of trucks. Carrying guns in this manner increased the time required to unload and get them into action. Many crews therefore resorted to firing the gun while still loaded on the vehicle and it soon became standard practice within certain armies. • Guns that were historically capable of being `Portee' are listed

e Gun Notes along the minimum size vehicle required. • Gun & vehicle are treated as a single target. If the vehicle is

destroyed from direct/indirect fire or infantry fire, the gun

• Guns being fired from their carrying vehicle do not receive `Second & Subsequent Shot' bonuses for Direct Fire.

• Takes an extra move to load or unload an en portee gun frthe back of the truck

Guns being carried `en portee' are considered separate from purpose-built motorised guns which are covered separately under Motorised Guns.

RODUCTION Gun Charts are included in the Army Lists at the back of the s.

The Gun Charts are divided into separate countries with each being identified by calibre, calibre length and official designation,

eg. 75mmL40 M3. All ranges are given in `cm'. For the major countries, the guns have been categorised under AT/Tank Guns,

s/Howitzers, and AA/Automatic Guns, for easy reference. The figure listed at the various ranges in cm are the gun’s

pe etration in cm at that range. Many large calibre artillery pieces used for indirect fire have not been included in the Gun Charts because of their inability to engage ground targets using direct fire (eg. US 155mm M1 Gun & 8' M1 Howitzers). Guns excluded for this reason are only covered

•country, or were primarily emnecessarily represent all guns

guns were used by two or more countries who either imported or manufactured the item under license, eg. 75mm L15 vz 15 Mountain Gun is listed under Poland but was extensively used by Italy and Germany.

• All guns capable of firing armor piercing (AP) ammunition have

These AP factors represent the best performance of standard AP ammunition fired by these guns. Guns equipped with specialised APCR, APDS & HVAP rounds have an additional set of AP

ors listed for their use. (Only APCR, APDS & HVAP types which provided considerably better performance in comparison to standard AP have been included. Those not included gave only marginally better performance or were too rare to warrant a separate listi

• Guns not equipped with any AP ammunition have `-' listed instead of an AP factor up to their maximum effective ranges. These guns could only fire HE ammunition at targets.

• PV; Point Values gi

GGUUNNSS CCHHAARRTTSS IINN IIOONN TTRROODDUUCCTT

35

int values

xplanations of Abbreviations

V - point value of gun. In some cases special ammunition will be PDS ammo. This means it costs 10 ery) to equip the

n. This is added to the base cosodifiers etc are applied.. You w

AF may fire this spec, unless the AFV or gun no .

If th ammo was standard issue onl1 ints per gun or AFV,

ire this ammo ea

e of rapt targ it

ey are treated as `Turret mounted guns' for direct fire.

o HE - denotes gun not equipped or supplied to fire HE ammunition e. they cannot do Area Fire with HE ammunition). For various guns, E ammunition was introduced after a certain year and cannot used

prior to that date eg. (HE 1944+). All other guns can fire HE. Smk or WP - guns capable of firing White Phosphorous (WP) or Smoke (Smk) ammunition have the abbreviations `WP' or `Smk'

he year of introduction for WP or Smk will also be provided if it

ractor: refer to Horse-Teams.

nst nemy fire. Guns equipped with shields provide `Partial cover' for

their crews against Direct Fire or Infantry Fire, not Area Fire. See the section under AT guns above. HEAT - denotes gun was equipped as standard, or from a certain

e n of that HEATe

he HEATo to use it. Fo

le th e m 28 7 PV. But to purchase the m 2 costs +32pg, that is, an extra 32

T ammunition, this nd, the cost of the

n in the PV of any

APCR, APDS, HVAP Ammunition - Short Supply Rules These special types of ammunition were usually in short supply, and AFVs and guns often had only a handful. As mentioned above under ‘PV’, if an ammo is listed as ‘pp’, ie ‘per platoon’, then only one AFV or gun of a platoon may fire that ammunition per turn. Too bad if that one shot per turn misses while another standard ammo shot hits! If an ammunition is listed as ‘pg’ ie ‘per gun’ then each gun/AFV in the platoon may fire that ammo each turn. There will be some exceptions to the above, such as the M36

HV u d as

denoted by `*' in the FO column. Note that these poMUST be used when using the gun on-table. When using any of these guns as offboard artillery, use the offboard artillery point values.

Horse Drawn - denotes the gun/howitzer can only towed by horse team, it cannot be towed by vehicle or t

E Plisted like this: +10pp -> 6 pdr A

points latoon (or battextra per p platoon with this special unitio t of the platoon,

date, to fir HEAT ammunition. The armor penetratio round is th same for all ranges, as you will see. amm

before troop class ll note below that In almost m ionly one V or gun ial ammunition per

all cases you have to purchase t ammuniti n in addition to the cost of the gun if you wish r per platoon

turn specified otherwise in tes examp e G rman 105 m L costs 6 e special y, the PV will be HEAT am unition for it to from 194listed as + 0pg ie 10 extra po and in this case

latoon can fPV per gun.

for the HEAeach gun or AFV in the p ch turn.

If there is no date listedmeans the gun can always use that

AA - denotes anti-aircraft cannon capabl id automatic fire ammunition, a

ammunitio is included in both the guns PV, plusagains ets, refer AA/Automatic Cannons. W h 360º traverse, AFVs using that gun.) th N(iH

listed. Tdiffers from that of the gun.

No Gun Shield - applies only to AT or Field guns (not AFVs) and indicates that the gun provides no protection for the crew agaie

GMC Jackson, for which the AP amm nition was equippe standard. See the notes for each AFV or gun for such exceptions.

XAMPLE GUN CHART E

80

GERMAN PV Guns Size 20 40 60

100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

) (107

APCR PzGr40 (11) (11) (9) (8) (7) ance 4 9

(Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 18

62 50mm L60 PaK 38 B (11) (11) (10 9 8 8 +18pp

) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 3 6 5 5 4

(6) to-hit ch 14 12 11+10pp StGt 42 (HEAT) 1942+ (10) (9) (6)

8 6 penetration in cm 7

Ao

rtillery has the advantage of being able to harass and soften up the pponent without committing your own forces. It is an integral part of oth attack and defense; and during real combat situations roughly 50% f all casualties were a result of indirect fire.

ored Fist, indirect fire can be carried out by offboard oard mortars.

intoatteries (as per the army lists) of 2 - 8 guns each. Because of the

gun/h er to lo ir indirect carried m offb This is e the normal e for art w kilo s behind the

ortars can be used individually or in platoons/batteries when used ons es w the range

Offboard weapons are normally controlled by a Forward nly

UNS-HOWITZERS TABLE bo In Panzerfaust-Armguns/howitzers or by on or offb Guns/Howitzers are grouped into pairs and these pairs are formed bminimum ranges required for a owitz b a shell, thefire can only be out fro oard. becausperational rang illery units as 3 - 12 metreo

front line. Monboard, or in plato /batteri hen used offboard, ifpermits. The effect for the above weapons firing indirect is given by a Beaten Zone Radius (BZR), within which the shells fired will land. Any enemy units inside this circle are diced for to determine whether they have been hit. Artillery Observer, who directs the indirect fire onto the target. The o exception to this are company commanders. See below.

BEATEN ZONES G

PV per Size BZR 2 Guns * Range Light: 60-80mm 7cm 80 800cm 85-90mm 9cm 120 950cm

M 1200cm

H

edium: 95-120mm 12cm 180 1000cm

122-135mm 14cm 240

eavy: 140-155mm 16cm 300 1400cm 160-199mm 18cm 350 2100cm 200mm+ 20cm 400 2800cm

* PV includes any form of offboard artillery, whether armored SP guns, otorised, vehicle drawn, or horse drawn. (No distinction in theim r

witzers/SPs are used performance when used offboard.) When guns/honboardo , use gun/armor charts PV

MORTARS TABLE PV per Range Size BZR mortar Min Max Crew

2 teams

45 - 60mm # 3cm 15 15cm 55cm 1 team 76 - 82mm # 6cm 45 30cm 150cm 1 team 90 - 107mm 9cm 70 60cm 250cm 2 teams 20mm 15cm 100 120cm 350cm1

150 - 160mm 18cm 180 160cm 300cm 3 teams Note: point values of mortars includes the crews. See section on infantry basing regarding how to base them.

ARTILLERY: INDIRECT FIRE

36

ther Points Values:

l * .............................................. 30 PV

!

r + Battery Fire Control @ 30PV , 2 FAO

gun 75mm battery, ontrol @ 30PV ,

Radioloyed as a company must

ith 1 - 2 company HQ team/s

When used onboard, mortars can be directed by an FAO, or e crew acts as

et in sight of that crew and in range can well as suspected target positions - see

also has Battery Fire Control, it can whole mortar

t

ward ho is part of their

om the artillery/mortar unit to the front line, with the task

1,

e at es. You can give the FAO or

s assistant

fb . s must havs ortars can then b rected by eith

e FAO teams, or by the Infantry Company Commander, since both infantry and mortars are part of the same Infantry Regiment.

te that there are significant delays when using company

rs which cannot see the target, or whether an onboard can see the target.

# Cannot be used off board The ranges given for the guns/howitzers and mortars are average effective ranges for combat, with those for guns and howitzers being listed for comparison and campaign purposes only. OFAO Team with radio or telephone & operator...... 30 PV Battery Fire Contro* includes radio/telephone GUNS/HOWITZERS OFFBOARD BATTERIES Guns/howitzers are used in batteries of 2 - 8 guns. See the army lists for exact battery sizes. A single battery is directed onto one target at a time and cannot be split up to engage individual targets. You must purchase a Battery Fire Control and 1 to 4 FAOs for each battery. Having more FAOs means you can see more possible targets, but don’t deploy them all in one place Examples: 4 gun 205mm battery: costs 2 pairs of guns at 400 PV per pai+ s @ 30 PV ea = 890 PV 8costs 4 pairs of guns at 80 PV per pair + Battery Fire C+ 2 FAOs @ 30 PV ea = 410 PV MORTARS Onboard mortars would often be allocated individually to platoons, as a heavy weapons section of that platoon. Or would also be deployed in complete platoons/batteries or companies. See the army lists for details. • Each onboard mortar platoon deployed as a platoon must purchase

a platoon HQ section, with a platoon HQ team and 0 – 2 rifle teams. s if relevant are an additional + 20.

• Each onboard mortar company deppurchase 1 – 2 company HQ section, wand 0 – 2 rifle teams, plus radios if relevant.

• These platoon and company HQs can be mounted on horseback if horse-drawn mortars, or given cars or trucks if motorised mortars.

Mortars must be purchased as per the army lists. can fire by Direct Line of Sight (DLOS), in which case, thits own observer. This means that onboard mortars can fire at individual targets, with crew directing fire. Any targe fired upon by that mortar, asb

below. If a mortar platoon/companybe directed by an FAO/s. In this case the pla oon/company must fired at the same location. Offboard mortars must be used in at least platoon sizes, since the minimum sized unit you can purchase is a platoon/battery. A single mortar platoon is directed onto one target at a time and cannot be split up to engage individual targets. Note that the smallest mortar size that can be deployed as offboard artillery is 90mm. If Mortars are used ffboard, they can only fire under the direction of a FAO (Foro

Artillery Observer), or by a company commander wregiment. Each offboard mortar platoon or company must have a Battery Fire Control and from 1 – 4 FAO teams.

hen fiW ring, mortars have a muzzle flash which is 1/4 that of a gun with the same calibre. FAO - Forward Artillery Observers FAO's are specially trained personal, of either Officer or NCO rank, who re detached fra

of directing the incoming indirect fire. They are equipped to communicate with the battery either by radio or telephone. They can operate from special command AFVs, such as Sdkfz 250/1, 251/Dingo, T8, etc, or from softskin vehicles. FAOs can only direct the fire wh n they are stationary for the whole turn.

In combat, 2-4 FAOs would normally be assigned to each tery. Each FAO is represented by 2 figurb

his assistant a radio for appearances if desired, since hiwould use either a radio or telephone. FAOs must use observation rules when calling down fire. They can’t direct fire at a position they can’t see. Company Commanders Calling Down Artillery Fire The only exception to calling down offboard artillery fire by an FAO, is that a company commander who is part of the same regiment which the uns/howitzers/mortars are part of, can also call down fire. g

eg. you purchase a 1939 German Infantry Company. You also n Infantry Battalion Mortar platoon, whi has 6 x 81mm purchase a ch

rdmortars, which you deploy of oa Thi e 1 – 4 FAO teams nd Battery Fire Control. The e m e di er a

th

Nocommanders for calling down artillery fire. INDIRECT FIRE PROCEDURE The intended target position must be in Direct Line of Sight (DLOS) to whoever is directing the guns/mortars about to fire, whether the FAO/company commander is directing offboard mortars or guns, or onboard mortamortar team itself which 1. Plotting an Artillery Point of Arm (POA) Location During game-turn phase A:Write orders for Artillery & Aircraft players place down a POA counter at the base line of their table to show that they are calling down artillery. They then secretly write down: • the number printed on the POA counter eg POA 1 whic• h artillery battery/s are firing at this POA counter • the location that this POA counter will be placed upon when

successfully called down. This location is written down in terms of either a terrain feature, eg POA 1 -> exact centre of bridge; front gate of farm structure; or, written down as a distance from a terrain feature, eg POA 2 -> 20cm south-east from centre of bridge; 40cm south of ford’s centre. 2. Calling Down Artillery onto the POA Counter During game-turn phase E:Plot BZs for Mortar & Artillery Indirect Fire players then throw 3D6 and consult the following table, to see if they ave succh essfully called down artillery on the POA.

ely. Show your written co-ordinates to your opponent if in

If successful, the POA Counter is then placed at the exact position written down secretly, and the artillery fire comes down immediatdoubt. See below regarding dicing for units within an artillery Beaten Zone (BZ). The listed artillery battery/s will continue to fire at that location until the player either • removes that POA Counter to cease firing at that location, or, • places that POA Counter back at the base line of his table, (which

ceases fire at that location) to indicate that new co-ordinates have been written down for that battery/s.

Successfully Calling Down Artillery Upon POA Counter Cons ssfully call d o hit units

) Add the ers listed in the table, to get the adjusted

ult the table below to see what number is required to succeown artillery upon a POA Counter. (This is NOT dicing t

e beaten zone, just dicing to see if the artillery fire arrives.in thvariable if relevant to the numb‘call down number’, and then roll 3D6. If number rolled is equal to or under the adjusted ‘call down number’, the artillery has been successfully called down upon the POA Counter this turn: US Vet/Reg Conscript Using FAO 10 9 8

o. Commander (with radio) 8 7 6 C Variation: + 1 if new artillery POA counter location is within 20cm of the previous successfully hit POA location. (ie, a creeping barrage) Note: this means that when using an FAO it takes on average it 2 turns for US to successfully call down artillery, 3 turns for Vet/Reg or 4 turns for Conscript. 3. Mortars with DLOS For situations where a mortar is to fire

ou do not need to wat a target which the model’s rite down the location that this

y activity in the area, or the

friendly assault upon that position. int of Aim

ortar to fire during

ls

e if they are casualties, etc. ee it's intended target area,

ish it to be, and that is the Beaten Zone are then diced for

IRE IN THE BEATEN

l affects). If a unit is

base has DLOS to, yPOA counter will be placed upon. Instead, the target location MUST be in sight for the WHOLE move. Suspect positions may only be fired upon if the crew has spotted possible enemarea is obviously a key location, or if the mortar has been ordered previously in writing to bombard a suspect position for a set number of

rns, preceding atu As no orders or co-ordinates are written down, the Po(POA) Counter is simply placed where you wish the mgame phase E, within the above restrictions. Make sure that you writeown or state which mortar/s are firing at that POA Counter. The sheld

will come down during that same move. You do not need to dice to call down the mortar fire onto the POA Counter. Instead, all units within the BZ that turn are diced for to se eg to fire a mortar which can ssimply place the POA Counter where you w

ntre of the BZ. All enemy unit's in that cethat turn. THE EFFECT OF INDIRECT FZONE Once indirect fire has successfully been called down, or is a DLOS firing mortar/s, all units in the Beaten Zone of that artillery/mortar battery, or DLOS firing individual mortar, must be diced for to determine whether

ey have been hit (includes direct hits and shrapneth

within the Beaten Zone of two artillery batteries, or two DLOS firing mortars not of the same battery/platoon, it is diced for twice, and so on.

37

is assumed that the indirect fire weapons fire multiple rounds roughout the move, not just one.

All enemy and friendly infantry squads or sections, individual s, and AFVs that either: irect Beaten Zone (BZ)

an indirect BZ any time during the turn

, and then roll 3D6. If number rolled is equal to or rget has been hit.

Itth heavy weapon bases, vehicles, gun

1. spend the turn within an ind2. end their movement within3. move out of an indirect BZ at

must be diced for individually. For the first two cases, they are diced for during game-turn phase H:Resolve Indirect Fire for Mortars & Artillery; for units which move out of an indirect BZ during the turn, must be diced for as soon as hey cross the edge of the BZ. If they are hit, the result is applied timmediately. DICING FOR UNITS WITHIN A BEATEN ZONE The base chance for an artillery/mortar battery or individual mortar to hit a target within a Beaten Zone is ‘8’. Subtract the relevant variations to the base to-hit chance to get the djusted to-hit chancea

under the adjusted number’, the ta Indirect Fire To-Hit Variations:

base of 8, minus these variations: A- 2 if target is AFV - 1 if target was within BZR for less than whole move, due to it moving; or target is not completely within BZR - 1 if firer is mortar firing at target first time - 1 if target in hard cover * or wooden building (does not count if firing gun is 122mm+) +1 if battery/platoon has 2 pairs of guns, or 2 mortars

2 if battery/platoon has 3 pairs of guns, or 3 mortars ++3 if battery/platoon has 4 or more pairs of guns, or 4 or more mortars

n/mortar is 140mm+ iring gun/mortar is 85mm – 135mm

ing gun/mortar is 80mm or below

If target or is entrenched, dug-in, or in fox hole, or in a brick/stone building, then - 1 if firing gun/mortar is 122mm+ - 2 if firing gun/mortar is 85mm – 120mm - 3 if firing gun/mortar is 80mm or below If target is in a pillbox, bunker, dugout, then

2 and if firing gu- - 3 if fNo effect! if fir * Hard cover is defined here as being sandbags, gully, ditch, wooden buildings, infantry/guns in woods, etc. and provides some form of all round (or almost all round) protection. Note as per Direct Area Fire, you don’t dice to hit buildings or fortifications etc, only for the units in them. This speeds up game play.

irect Fire Effects: Ind 1. Infantry hit by Indirect Fire

that you dice for infantry squads and sections, NOT individual s that make

Noteam up squads and sections. (Note that in some cases, an

y in buildings. d APC) of an AFV u would dice once

tank.

teinfantry section would comprise just one team, such as a Bazooka team in an M20 armored car. This will be specified in the army lists.) Heavy weapon crews, that is mortars, MMGs, HMGs, are diced for individually. If hit, the infantry squad/section or heavy weapon base (regardless of how many teams are in it) is wiped out, including weapons. This ncludes infantri Infantry on the back (ie, not inside an armoreeceive no cover against indirect fire. In their case, yor

for the tank riders, and once for the If in softskin vehicles, dice for the vehicles, not the infantry bases. See below. 2. Softskins hit by indirect fire Softskin vehicles, if hit, are destroyed. All crew, passengers, and items being carried or towed, are also destroyed. 3. Enclosed AFV's Hit by Indirect Artillery Fire If an enclosed AFV (whether closed-down or commander head-up) is hit, consult the Penetration Effects Table using the Penetration Effects Table Variations for High Explosive (HE) rounds and dice for result. Treat a 'Gun/hull damaged' result as an immobilised result. This represents a direct hit upon an AFV. Mortars have NO effect against

nclose

d AFV's hit by Indirect Artillery Fire

e d AFVs. (Note: tank riders are normally diced for separately, however, if any AFV is destroyed, they are also removed as casualties.) 4. Open Toppe

an open topped AFV is hit, roll 1D6, with a 5 or 6 indicating a hit within troying the AFV. Otherwise, dice for the

If the open compartment, desAFV on the Penetration Effects Table using the Penetration Effects Table Variations for High Explosive (HE) rounds as above. Mortars can only affect an open topped AFV if hitting it in the open compartment, in which case the AFV is destroyed, as above. (Note: tank riders are diced for separately, however, if any AFV is destroyed, they are also removed as casualties)

Map Fire

teries and tars can be used for pre-determined shOffboard bat or m elling tions or m es. This is where orders are written the game ences, and allows artillery to fire at ut the use having DLOS to that position. rocedure i iting do n the co-ordinates each

xplained abov as listing in which turn each round of

co-mber of turns delay while changing targets, MUST be

kes a single mortar or pair of guns/howitzers two moves of on the same POA to fill the BZ with smoke. If there is

e blasts. Mortars cannot be subject to Counter

of enemy posi ap featurdown before commpositions witho of a FAO

e p Th nvolves wr w ofrget, as e e, as well ta

artillery fire will come down at which set of co-ordinates. However, there is a delay for each time you change targets. The delays are: 2 turns for US, 3 turns for Vet/Reg, or 4 turns for Conscript. eg. . Ge1 rman Battery No.3 (Veteran): performs Map Fire for turns 1, 2,

3 using centre of crossroads as centre of POA. 2. delay of 3 turns for changing target location 3. German Battery No.3 (Veteran): performs Map Fire for turns 6 and

7 using 20cm north of Church Bell tower’s centre as centre of POA.

Please note that ALL details for map fire, such as co-ordinates, game

ove the fire comes down, number of moves fire remains at this mordinate, nuwritten down before the game commences, and before the enemy puts any pieces on the table, though after known fixed defenses have been placed down. Map fire cannot be postponed, but can be cancelled. Indirect Fire Laid Smoke Smoke or WP can only be fired by indirect fire by those guns/mortars listed in the gun charts or gun charts notes as being able to fire smoke ammunition. Indirect fire laid smoke is laid in the same way as normal indirect fire. However instead of HE shells coming down, smoke shells are fired into the BZ.

It ta constant fire double the amount of the appropriate weapons, then it takes only one move. In the second case, at the beginning of the turn after the artillery fires upon the BZ with smoke shells for the first time, that BZ is filled with smoke. (Cotton wool does the best job to depict this!) All other rules regarding the smoke or WP are the same as in Direct Area Fire Laid Smoke & White Phosphorous (WP). Except that for WP, dice for all units in the indirect fire BZR with a `-1 Firing White Phosphorous.' Counter Battery Fire This is the art of destroying or disrupting your opponent's artillery units through counter bombardment. A Listening post (60 PV) is required to

cate thlo e approximate position of the enemy artillery. This unit remains offboard and monitors enemy artillery by attempting to observe their gun

shes and smokflaBattery Fire (CBF). Only Medium and Heavy Gun/Howitzers can participate in counterbattery fire. (Mortars cannot be used for CBF). These batteries must be assigned to CBF fire before the game commences. They

38

e move delay. cannot be assigned to CBF during the game. To reassign counterbattery fire guns to normal indirect fire has a fiv Firing Counterbattery Fire upon an Enemy Battery The Listening Post homes in on an enemy battery’s position through

nstan

The base chance on 2D6 dice to hit a target battery with CBF is 2. dd or subtract the relevant variations to the base to-hit chance to get e adjusted to-hit chance, and then roll 2D6. If number rolled is equal to

sted number’, the target has been hit.

ire To-H s:

co t observation of its firing. The Listening Post then directs its own CBF batteries to fire upon the suspected enemy position.

Athor under the adju Counterbattery F it Variation

move listening post observed an enemy rocket battery fire. emy t fire n

ry fire get, th acd a hit

o e

+ 1 for each move listening post observed the enemy battery fire + 3 for each- 1 for each move en battery does no after it has bee firing. If the Counterbatte has hit its tar row 1D6 for e h pair of guns in each CBF battery which obtaine :

att. ed TCalibre of Firing B Die Roll Need Cause Damag 5 - 120mm 6 9

122 - 140mm 5,6

m

145 - 155mm 4,5,6 160 - 200m 3,4,5,6 201mm + 2,3,4,5,6 the above die ro ieved, then a pa emy guns out of If ll is ach ir of en is put

or the rest of the game. This does not necessarily mean that the

s as t a good chance of hitting the

nt to stop firing means '-1' from the applies each time he does not fire. This

e pertwo nt them moving to avoid the counterbattery fire.

Ro

wercon

ffensiv

ojectiles which re capable of carrying a higher proportion of high explosive when

onventional shells, but their shell casings are thinner.

Procedure:

action fguns are destroyed. It could mean that the crew or ammunition wereaffected. For your CBF units to achieve be t results, wait long aspossible before firing CBF so as to geenemy batteries. For your opponeBase Chance. This deductioncould be due to him moving his guns to new positions. g - if you use CBF fire as soon as the enemy battery fires, then it is

missable and likely for that player to stop firing those guns for one or turns, to represe

ckets 1941 both Germany and Russia were emBy ploying large numbers of

artillery rockets at the front line for delivering indirect fire. These rockets e a replacement for mass artillery when there was not enough ventional artillery to do the job. Rockets can provide a heavy

o e load very quickly, but over a wide area. It is this surprise capability that would catch the enemy off guard (ie, out of his trenches, deployed in the open, etc). Rockets are low velocity pracompared to cTheir effect on impact was not as effective or devastating as conventional shells, but the effect on the enemy troops morale was significant.

Rocket artillery is used in the same manner as normal Indirect Fire, with a BZR issued to each type of rocket size and launcher. Rockets can

ey CANNOT be directed by FAOs. o ne of set bombardment due to their large dispersion of

re were two types of rockets. Fin-stabilised and spin-stabilised. The latter was used by the German 5cm, 21cm, and 30cm versions. Spin stabilised rockets were far more curate greater density of fire.

hance when dicing to hit a target in a rocket battery's . Or for German 15cm, 21cm and 30cm models, it is

All va nd effects are as under normal Indirect Fire. ired from offboard only, and cannot be fired if

brought on board.

xplanations

only be used with Map Fire. ThTheir r le was orockets upon a target area. The

1ac allowing The base to-hit cBZR, on 3D6, is 67. riations a Rockets can be f

Rockets Table E

e foll ble lists the most common rockets used by WW2 ations. launchers are used individually like mortars, while

ground lau s are used in pairs like artillery guns, and Rack Launchers are used in threes (also like pairs of artillery guns). The

s in t low table are already listed as such. o require longer periods to reload, and the time

uired or each launcher. eg. the NbW41 15cm can fire once every 7 moves.

iven its equivalent gun/howitzer

campaign purposes only.

Th owing tan Mobile

ncher

rocket he be Rockets alsreq is given f

Each rocket launcher is also gcalibre for effect against AFVs, buildings, infantry, etc, as they were less powerful than their actual calibre. For 80-82mm rockets, treat their effectiveness as the same as mortar rounds of the same calibre. Note that firing ranges for rockets are effective ranges, given for Organization Rocket batteries can include from one to four rocket launching sets, (eg, 1 mobile launcher, 2 ground launchers, or 3 rack launchers are all ‘one ‘set’ each )and must all be of the same type.

ockets Table

R LAUNCHERS Rockets BZR PV Equivalent Reload Range Calibre Time German: 2 x 15cmNbW41 12 x 150mm 40cm 220 90mm 6 600cm 1 x 15cmpzW42 10 x 150mm 35cm 110 90mm 12 600cm

x 21cmNbW42 10 x 210mm 60cm 400 105mm 6 800cm bW41 12 x 300mm 70cm 450 150mm 7

- 200cm 14 450cm

cm

11

2 2 x 30cmN 550cm 3 x 28/32cmsWG41 12 x 280/320mm 60cm 150 128mm 1 x 8cmR-VfW 48 x 80mm 35cm 90 * SOVIET: 1 x M-8 36 x 82mm 30cm 70 * 10

x M-13 75mm 1 500cm

0 800cm 1 16 x 132m 50cm 140 1 x M-31 12 x 310mm 65cm 180 105mm 12 450

m - 3 x 30cmRacks 12 x 300mm 55cm 70 105m 280cm USA: 1 x T34(Calliope) 60 x 114mm 60cm 160 75mm 1 x M17(Whiz-Bang) 20 x 182mm 45cm 130 90mm

6 400cm 4 300cm

* Treat effectiveness same as mortars. ROCKETS TABLE NOTES: • The German 15cmNbW41, 21cmNbW42 and 30cmNbW41 were

towed launchers. The 28/32cm sWG41 were simple rack launchers, each firing 4 rockets. These were also single shot weapons only.

• The PzW42 and 8cmR-Vielfachwerfer were mobile launchers based on Maultier or Somua halftracks, the latter used exclusively by the Waffen-SS. Both were armored.

• The Soviet M-8, M-13, M-31 were truck or tank mounted launchers, also called Stalin-Organs or Katyushas. The 30cm Racks were identical to the German sWG41 version, and so can only be fired

ckets and ttery

once. • The US T34 and M17 were mounted above M4A1 tanks.

Ro Counterba fire: o t be used f er baR ckets canno or count ttery fire. For mobile launchers

cted to CBF, - 2 for each move that the launcher does not red rocket launchers, ie AFV mounted, treat them as

d AFVs.

being subjefire. Also, for armoeing open toppeb

Rocket Launchers & Smoke: It will take one 'set' of launchers 2 moves to fill the BZR with smoke, or because of the reload time, it will take two 'sets' of launchers one move.

set is

A as specified in the section on Rockets. eg, 1 mobile launcher, 2 ground launchers, or 3 rack launchers are all ‘one ‘set’ each.

MINES Mines are surprise weapons. They are usually laid with thprotecting a flank or and important tactical route. They channelling the enemy into areas of more concentrateddisrupting enemy attacks. Mine Density & PV for each 5cm x 5c Sparse Light Medium Thick DAT Mine PV 10 20 30 40 5AP Mine PV 6 12 18 24 32D6 To-Trip-Off (4) (6) (7) (8) (9

s te. If you n this nuously, de l more e

e nemy will ect the presence of mines

The first two rows of the above table list the PV to purchaeach 5cm x 5cm square of minefield. The density of thefrom Sparse to Dense. For each enemy vehicle, AFV, or gun etc or which passes through this square, they must dice to detera mine was triggered off, and if so, what damage was in2D6 per base or vehicle which goes through each 5c

inefield. The ‘To-Trip-Off’ number in the above table imsetting of a min roll equal to or lower tha

inefie re a lotgoes off. Obvi nse m ds as.sparse one

Th e not det taking precautions such as those given in the 'Mine Removtrips one off. Effect of AP Mines: AP mines have a Burst Radius (BR) of 3cm. An infantriggers an AP mine is removed as casualties. Any other even partly within the BR are removed as casualties on a 1 If a softskin sets off an AP mine, it is destrpassengers/crew are removed as casualties. If a softskmines BR, it is immobilized in the middle of the minef

AFV sets off an AP mine spassengers are safe. If aneffect. Effect of AT Mines: AT mines cannot be set off bydestroyed. Passeng

infantry. Softskins whices on a 1

ip

Md/Hv AFV

ers are removed as casualtiAT mines have no BR. For AFVs that tr an AP or AT mine, roll 1D6 for damage. Die Roll Lt AFV

ed ked

Tracked Tracked

1 Var

6 Destroyed Destroy5 Destroyed Trac4 3 Tracked No effect 2 No effect No effect

No effect No effect

iation: for AP mines.

ping Track of Mines

- 3 Kee There is no need to keep track of how many mines are i

ever, minefields must hahow ve their locations accurately r

squ oththislaid Lay

can be done either through giving the exact co-ordinates oares, or by recording their locations on a detailed map.

The 5 x 5cm minefield squares can be put aloer to form a belt, and they can be laid in any arrangeme is recorded accurately. Mines can be laid before a ga during the game by engineers.

ing Mines Mines can only be laid by Engineers. It takes six mn ineer team to lay one mine 5cm square. Or it takes thr

engineer teams to lay one mine 5cm square. Enipped with mines must be designated before theineer team can carry up to one mine 5cm square. On not recoverable for further use.

e gtwoequengare Removing Mines Th s is one of the more difficult aspects of mine warfare. Ii

ve through

th s can follow that same route at norm wide enough for infantry, not vehicle

a bayonet, can crawl at a rate of 1 cm per moInfantry do NOT clear mines this way - they simply locatearound them. Once this path through the minefield has be

er infantry baseorates. This path is only To clear a path for vehicles, it will take eteam/moves to clear 5 x 5cm of mines. That means aengineer teams can clear 5 x 5cm of mines in 4 moves. Tin 4 team/moves if they are equipped with mine detectioThis costs 12 points per team. The Sherman Crab, or other such AFV mine clearmounted on the front, or specially designed rollers (co

DDEEFFEENNSSEESS

39

e intention of are useful for fire; and in

m ense 0 0 )

he chance of mber, a mine ffective than

unless he is

se mines for mines varies

infantry base mine whether flicted. Throw m square of

al' section; or

try base who infantry base D6 roll of 5+.

oyed and all in is in a AP ield, and the ee below for

h do so are D6 roll of 5+.

n a minefield, ecorded. This f the 5 x 5cm

ngside each nt - providing me or can be

oves for one ee moves for gineer teams game. An ce laid mines

nfantry, using a mine field.

al movement s.

extrturr

s uDire

Z.

n

them and go en navigated,

ngineers 12 squad of 3 hey can do it n equipment.

ers with a flail sts 40 points

a) will clear a vehicle width path at a rate of 2.5cm per move. The et must be traversed to the rear while doing so.

Guns/howitzers can also clear minefields. If a 5cm x 5cm q are of minefield is totally in a guns/howitzers BZ, whether Indirect or

ct Area Fire, throw 1D6 to see if that square area of mines has been detonated. Dice for each turn the minefield is in the B Gu /Howitzer AP Mines AT Mines

35mm 5,6 6 mm + 4,5,6 5,6

ou roll the above number, the 5cm x 5cm section of minefield is troyed.

RTIFICATIONS e the end of

95-1140 If ydes FOSinc WWI, the importance of fortifications declined in the

with the Maginot Line and Atlantic Wall, a fenses would render them useless. The

wire, trenches, pillboxes, dugouts, and shelters.

S/BU conta s. There

face of mobile warfare. Assingle breach within the defollowing sections will cover all types of emplacements: AT ditches and obstacles, barbed PILLBOXE NKERS These can in anything from infantry to the largest AT gunare two types: concrete constructed and field constructed. Field Constructed Constructed with wood, log and earth materials. PV = 1 x Occupants PV Counts as: Hard Cover vs Infantry Fire Dug-in/Entrenched vs Direct Area & Indirect Fire Concrete Constructed PV = 1.5 x Occupants PV Counts as: Fortifications Notes The occupants PV is the total point value of all men and equipment

intended to be used in it. For exampl•

e, a concrete pillbox built to

PV Squad in the pillbox. illboxes/bunkers cannot be subjected to covering fire

Note that in order to reduce record keeping and simplify game play,

’ of fortress, it applies only if the charge was placed in a slit,

rges have no effect if placed

w a 60 arc of fire.

• Pillbo

ug in.

ches, there were often dug-outs vided extra prote . See the Indirect t Area Fire va

as tren in terms of cover. nfantry weapons teams can dig-in during a

simple slit trenches. (AFVs or guns i during the game, it would take too long.

These must be purchased as defenses before the game.) You

house a 60 point gun will cost 90 points, while a field constructed pillbox to house the same gun would cost 60 points. However, please note that shortcuts cannot be taken. You can't say that the pillbox is intended to be used by a 40 PV Infantry Squad, and then put a 120

• Occupants of por speculative fire.

• you do not target a fortification directly when using Direct Area Fire or Indirect Fire, but instead, dice for each infantry base/gun etc that is in them. However, if all the defenders of a pillbox, bunker, or ‘section’ of fortress are killed in one turn by Area Fire and firing guns are 85mm calibre or greater, or killed in one turn by Indirect Fire and firing guns are 140mm+ calibre, treat the pillbox, bunker or ‘section’ as being destroyed and rubble.

• Demolition charges are treated as being 160mm+ guns with a 3cm BZR as is explained below, but to affect a pillbox, bunker, or ‘sectionaperture, or entrance., which means the engineer’s infantry base must touch this location. These chaanywhere else.

• Slit or apertures in a pillbox allo• Pillboxes are one 'size' larger that their occupants. eg if it contains

a size C gun, then it is size D. xes/bunkers can be camouflaged.

• All fortifications must have been set up before the game commences.

ENTRENCHMENTS Digging-in is one of the most instinctive habits of the infantryman. Although not as elaborate as in WWI, trenches did pop up when a front stabilised at any point. Everything from AFVs, artillery, to infantry can be dug in.

Point Values: Entrenchment = 1/2 x Total PV of intended occupants, AFVs, and guns. Dugouts cost 2/3 of Total PV of intended occupants. eg: To entrench an infantry platoon of 50 men that is worth 200 points, it will cost 100 points. • AFVs and field/AT guns count as hull down when d• Infantry and soft targets count as being in hard cover when under

infantry weapon fire, or as being dug-in when under Direct Area & Indirect Fire

• Dug-outs. Attached to the trenwhich pro ction from artillery fireand Direc riations.

• Foxholes ch count es• Infantry and i heavy

game, making fox holes or cannot be dug-in dur ng

40

, and counts as moving. A whole he same time.

ug-in' next to the

hed by using demolition charges. Hedgehogs and spikes ragged out re oved manually. To do this, it will take

w s to clear a vehicle path. If two t will 8 moves, three vehicles takes 4 moves.

i ca be used to clear a vehicle width path.) der n if not under fire.

ditches can be breached by using a fascine carrying AFV, quipm All bu bulldozer are nder B

h. Bulldozers require 18 moves to fill ditch. A max of three bulldozers can

work on one section of 5cm x 5cm, in which case it will take 6 moves.

BARBED WIRE

ed-wire ithac

in a line of barb-wire no longer present any obstacle to

ineer team one move to lay three charges.

ell 1D6, if a 6 is rolled, there was a misfire. Try again next

f bridges, more than one charge will be e following table shows how many charges are needed for

ach type of bridge.

cannot dig-in on roads, in buildings, in rubble, or on any other concrete surface. It takes 1 team 3 turns to dig itself in. It cannot doing anything else while doing sosquad or heavy weapons section must dig-in at tOnce dug-in, just place a counter that says 'dteam/squad.

ANTI-TANK OBSTACLES These include Dragons Teeth, girder constructed Hedgehogs or spikes, and AT ditches. Point Values: AT ditch = 15 pts per 5cm x 5cm square Dragon Teeth = 30 pts per 5cm

es/Hedgehogs = 20 pts per 5cm Spik All of these obstacles prevent AFV and vehicle movement across or through them, unless a breach has been made. Dragon’s Teeth can nly be breaco

can only be d and me 12 moveone fully tracked AFV and cr

d, ivehicles are use takes(No more than three veh cle n

his clearing can only be un takeT• Regarding demolition charges, see article below to see how they

are used. AT•

bridging e ent, or by a bull dozer. t the u es and Bridging. covered ridg

• Bulldozers cost 10 points eacin a breach 5cm x 5cm of AT

10cm x 2cm belt = 10 PV Fully tracked `C & D' size vehicles can pass through barbw out delay or damage. For fully tracked `B' size vehicles or any semi-

ked vehicles roll 1D6 when passing through each line of barbed-trwire. A result of `6' and the vehicle is immobilized (de-tracked or snagged). Fully wheeled vehicles cannot pass through barbed-wire without becoming immobilised. Infantry, on reaching each line of barbed-wire, require one full move to cross, and three moves to create a breach or gap in the barbed-wire. Cavalry can only pass through barb-wire were a gap has been forced or ut-away. c

Gaps forced movement for troops passing through it. DEMOLITION CHARGES Demolition Charges cost 5 PV per charge. Only engineers can use demolition charges, with a max of 3 per team.

The primary use of demolition charges is to destroy tactically important positions such as bridges, buildings, defenses, etc. Charges can be set off by using a timer detonator or an electrical detonator using a cable and plunger.

It takes one eng They can then be set to detonate automatically one move later; or the engineer team can run a cable from the charge to a plunger. Its cable can be laid at a rate of 5cm per move, with it taking one extra move to attach th cable to the plunger. When setting off a charge using a

unger, roplmove etc until the charge goes off. If the charge goes off, treat Demolition charges as normal Direct Area Fire with a base to-hit of (11) on 3D6. Treat them as 160mm+ Direct Area Fire HE shells with a 3cm BZR.

To knock out various types oneeded. The Bridge Type No. of Charges Needed Stone Bridge 12 Steel Bridge 9 Tank Laid Bridge 3

e used, the bridge is rendered tally impassable. If half the stated number of charges is used, the

or vehicles only.

to damage. The Damage Points of the various bridges are

Bridge Type DP

Wooden/Pontoon Bridge 2 If the number of charges listed above artobridge is impassable f BRIDGES AND BRIDGELAYING During a game, you can either lay a bridge, or destroy/blow-up one. The time scale required to build a light or pontoon bridge is outside the

e limit iftim any game, and will therefore not be included. Laying a bridge during a game may only be carried out by

special AFVs. Destroying bridges with demolition charges is covered in the section on demolition charges. Another to way to destroy a bridge is to use guns or howitzers by either direct or indirect fire. Bridges have Damage Points (DP) allocated to them in relation to their esistancer

listed below:

Stone/Steel Bridge 30 AFV Laid Bridge 15 Wooden/Pontoon Br. 5 A shell will destroy a certain amount of DPs in relation to the size of the shell. Shell Calibre DP destroyed per shell 60-90mm 1 95-135mm 2 140(c)155mm 5 160mm + 10

nce a bO ridge has lost half its maximum DP value, it is no longer useable by vehicles. For example, if a AFV Laid Bridge has only 7 DPs

ft, vehicles can no longer cross it. When the DP is 0 or below,le the

rect and indirect fire, due to the bridge being such a large target. effect on bridges at all.

s: la al , since they are too wide. ed al streams, AT ditches, and

in generlayi id he bridge must be able to

verlap the edges reasonably well. of e most common types of these AFV Bridge

VRE Brid ill/Sherman bridge, fz 251/7. (Mounted on the sault b oves to

of eng nd Ark ce they are at the edge of the river or

co

Amphibious AFVs and vehicles, unpowered boats - 5cm per move. The rules in this section cover everything from river crossing to beach landings. Amphibious AFVs and vehicles are listed under each ationality's equipment listings. Landing craft are steel barge type essels carrying anything from 1 to 5 tanks or 20 to 120 men. Assault oats are much smaller open vessels for infantry only. They are either otorised or paddled (unmotorised.)

bridge is totally unuseable. Nothing can cross it. Note: When determining a hit on a bridge, there is a '+ 1' modifier, for oth dib

Mortars have no AFV Laid Bridge

ot beThese cann id across actu rivershey were intendT to bridge can s, deep

fortifications al. When ng an AFV La Bridge, t

o Three thLayers are the Churchill A ge Layer, the Church'Ark', and the German assault the Sdk

ashalftrack.) The German ridge requires 8 full mmplace, and requires a squad ineers. The AVRE ae

require two full moves to set up ontch etc. di

V Bridge Point Value: An AF sts 50 points extra.

The following classes of vehicles can traverse a river or water at the following speeds:

Landing craft and powered assault boats - 10cm per move.

nvbm

Assault Boats: Assault boats, once placed in the water, require a full move to load/unload passengers. Once loaded, they move at the speed given above. To determine what sized transport is needed to carry an assault boat, follow these rules:

powered boats take up the ck or as per their own capacity.

an unpowered assault boat takes up half the room that a powered one would. When fired upon, either by direct or indirect fire, an assault boat is to be treated as a softskin vehicle.

Assault boats can be manhandled at a rate of 5cm per move on land. Amphibious AFVs and Vehicles:

same room in a tru halftrack

Amphibious AFVs and vehicles can be fired upon while in the water by

ct f ing

to

dire ire, except they are to be treated as be hull down. If a softskin or DD Sherman is hit, it is immediately sinks and is lost. For an armored AFV, use the normal penetration and damage tables determine the result. If 'stunned', then it cannot move for those turns, if 'immobilized', the vehicle is adrift, if 'destroyed', the vehicle will sink.

AAMMPPHHIIBBIIOOUUSS OOPPEERRAATTIIOO NNSS

Landing Craft: For landing craft, treat them as amphibious AFVs and vehicles, except that they do not count as being hull down. Landing craft do, however, take more damage. For each 20 figures or 1 tank capacity, the vessel requires one extra hit before the result takes effect. eg. A LCT which can carry 5 tanks requires six 'destroyed' results before it is sunk, or six 'immobilized' before it is adrift.

Landing craft and amphibious AFVs can fire their weapons while still

seaborne. Landing craft armaments are to be engaged itself. Landing craft have an all round armor

t as being a heavy AFV.

each AFV, vehicle or gun, eg. 5 moves to unload 5

separately from the vessel thickness of 2 and coun Once reaching the riverbank or beach, amphibious vessels resume cross country speeds with all penalties applying as normal. For landing craft, it takes one move to unload 10 infantry figures, or one move to unload

nks. ta Point Values:

Assault Boats: unpowered 2 team boat 6 PV 4 team boat 10 PV powered 2 team boat 12 PV 4 team boat 20 PV Landing Craft; each 6 teams capacity 25 PV each AFV, vehicle, gun cap . 40 PV each built in weapon/gun As per Gun Charts etc. Examples of US Landing Craft: LCA (Landing Craft Assault) 11 teams capacity, 1 x LMG weapon 56 PV LCI (L)(Land. Craft Infantry) 30 teams capacity 1 x 40mmAA, 4 x 20mmAA, 382 PV LCM (Landing Craft Mech.) 30 teams, or one tank or truck.

2 x HMG. 190 PV

gg d hces

ap taly and Italian

anes

peration planned for takin

LCT (Landing Craft Tank) 5 AFVs or 10 trucks capacity. 2 x 40mmAA. 288 PV

Airborne assaults during thdeveloped form of attackparatroops in a campaign a position until the 'cavalryarmored support meant ths Arnhem, was an extra

successful only in seizing bridges, di ing in, an ol Airborne for wRussia, J an, Ioperationally. The sThe Soviet and Jap ewere unsuccessful. Japancommando operations, c

aratroops made their debPand were used up until 194in 1944 during the Ardenneairborne forces were dep1945. They took part inocalled for! US paratroops wtheatre. Two Types Landings Airborne landings have bOffboard Landings, wherethen enter the board onLandings, where the forcgliders and all. It is recommendeonly in campaigns and fshould be encounter game Offboard Landing This type of landing is wheassemble offboard, and prrecommended strategy aenemy fire. The type of trspecified, as the casualtieetc. Procedure: Orders for which turn you

dge and part ofrior to the g

er uni esesitions are st

am, gun and

which e thdown p ame. Osized or larg t. Thor enemy podetermine wind rength. Tte vehicle, to the chart below to determin Weather Teams HNo Wind - 6t Wind L 6 5

Mod Wind 5,6 4Hvy Wind 4,5,6 3Note: if the above numberis dead/destroyed/lost.

AAIIRRBBOORRNNEE//GGLLIIDDEE PPEERRAARR OO TT SSIIOONN

41

ore often, they were d sitions, such as n s arrived.

re posse by Germany, Britain, USA, Hungary. The last two were never used

tw s to use against Malta. we ly once, and both

in Holland, Belgium and Norway in 1940,

g Berlin with the 82nd and 101st was never

e Second World War were the most rapidly to come out of the conflict. The role of was, in fact, not that of attacks, but of holding ' arrived. Their lack of heavy weapons and

at the taking of an enemy held position, such emely difficult task. Munoccupie or lightly held poding out u til their ground force e ssed

formed o division forces re both used onese could have used paratroops in small onsisting of 10-30 man units. German ut 1 Crete. Their further use after this was only s, which was an unsuccessful mission. Allied loyed from Algiers 1942 upto the Rhine in all major operations. A rather audacious

ere also used extensively used in the Pacific

een divided into two types of approaches. paratroops and gliders land offboard and

foot from any chosen edge; or Onboard es actually land on the wargames table -

that these airborne/glider rules are used d riendly games, not in tournaments, which s only.

re the airborne forces are dropped offboard, oceed on foot to the objective. This was the nd avoided assembly being disrupted by ansport for this type of landing need not be s are diced for individually - not per aircraft

r airborne forces will enter the table, and for will come on, must be written

ritten down for each platoon orders must be written before wind strength determined. Once this has been done,

en roll 1D6 for each team, heavy weapon

at edge theyrders must be w

hsee if they were lost in the landing. Refer to e the casualties.

vy Wpn Guns/Transport 5,6 ,6 4,5,6 ,5,6 3,4,5,6 ,4,5,6 2,3,4,5,6 /s is thrown, then that team, gun or transport

eavy Weapon Teams clude LM M s, milar teams, etc.

elays:

H in Gs, G mortars, bazooka or MsiGuns/Transport includes AT guns, howitzers, jeeps, motorcycles, etc. D

among paradrops and glider landings, by

any turns they will be late. This delay is to accommodate for the

Wind often created havocblowing them off course. If there is any wind at all, roll one die per platoon. Multiply result by 1, 2 or 3, for Light, Moderate, or Heavy Wind respectively. This is the number of moves delay that the unit has added to the turn number during which they were supposed to arrive, ie, this is how mextra delay for the unit to assemble,. Onboard Landings/Drops This is where paratroops actually bail out over the game board, or

here the gliders actually land on the table. w Paradrop

here the troops bail ou sticks. A stick of ries on th of transpo 3 – 7 teams) and they

line fr irst to th to jump, the line being in

The spacing between each team as it lands will be 3cm for No

ermine

team members are injured (and equipment destroyed.)

asualty Die Throw

This is w t of their transport inmen va e type rt used, (ie from

l land in a om the f e last team althe direction of the aircraft’s flight pattern. Wind, 5, 8, or 12cm for Light, Moderate, or Heavy Winds. Also, for windy conditions, a die must be rolled for each team to detwhether it is to be removed as casualties. If the number below is thrown, the Wind C

eavy Wind 5,6

Light Wind – Mod. Wind 6 H

can fire at em ignoring terrain. They may only fire if no over head cover or

in 'AA/Flak' section in the Aircraft rules. Ranges are taken

ch.

nister. It must be previously designated which nisters have what equipment.

For troops which land offboard by accident, dice for them as an

s casualties. If they land in scrub, bush, nhitch. The same applies to

ter take double time to set up, but only on the first occasion.

Canisters may also be dropped during the stick. These are either released from the under carriage or pushed out the door. The land in the same way as teams. The canister/s which carries a teams weapons should obviously be dropped after the team it carries equipment for. Paratroops, once jumped, take one move to descend. Within this turn, all infantry small arms, AA MGs and 20/25mm Flak thobstruction as flat along the table and count target as 'moving over 10cm'. Once they have landed, it takes one move for them to unhitWhile doing so they cannot move or fire. It takes one whole move to unload all the weapons from a canister once a team is in base to base contact with that caca Offboard Landing. Troops (not canisters) which land on trees, woods, rivers, buildings, are removed aor hedges, it requires an extra move to uretrieving canisters. Dismantled guns which are stored in more than one canis Gliders: Gliders require a landing strip of 50cm in length to land. (Preferably a clear landing strip!) Only one glider can attempt to land on one strip per move. Co-ordinates for the beginning of the intended landing strip plus

42

n before the game. A 1/76th uired in enacting the

r, as the glider may veer off course. The second die

the turn in which the glider will make the landing, plus the intended direction of the strip, MUST be written dowscale cardboard or paper cut out of the glider is reqlanding. When a glider attempts to land, roll 2D6. The first will give the direction of the glidewill reveal if the glider went over or under the required landing amount of 50cm. Direction Die Roll: Over/Under Die Roll: Veers Die Roll Die Roll Result 30° Left 1 1 Overshoots 30cm 30° Right 2 2 Overshoots 20cm Straight Ahead 3,4,5, 6 3 Overshoots 10cm 4,5 Just Right

6 Undershoots 10cm

-

r Strikes an Object

Note: The veer of 30° is pivoted from the original landing strip coordinates. If Glide

tract

ildings, houses, pillboxes, stone fences, woods, gully, ditch,

IGHT- wooden fences, stumps, single trees, softskin vehicles, etc.

Glider Occupants Damage Table:

If within the course of its landing, the glider strikes any objects, sub10cm off the 50cm landing movement. (This is subtracted for each object struck.) Then dice for all occupants and equipment to determine what damage was done. The two types of objects which can be struck re: a

HEAVY - butc. e

L

Object Teams Equipment

eavy 3,4,5,6 2,3,4,5.6 ght 5,6 4,5,6

HLi

R ABOVE TABLE EACH TIME GLIDER STRIKES AN

Variations: - 1 from die throw if only glider wing colided. Note - if the above number is thrown, then that team or equipment is destroyed. Throw for each team and piece of heavy equipment.

HROW AS PETOBJECT. Unloading A Glider It takes one full move for teams and two for all guns and vehicles to nload from a glider. u

AIRBORNE/GLIDER EQUIPMENT The following is a list of all the weapons employed by airborne orces. Equipment was either dropped with the paratrooper himself, f

or in a canister which was released from an aircraft. The value item

uld only land with, at the most, a pistol or SMG,

he following; pistol or rifle,

Mortar (1); 81mm Mortar (2); and Bazooka ).

itish paratrooper jumped with his personal weapon plus a kitbag hich was suspended beneath him. On landing, he would have

immediate access to this kitbag as it would still be attached to him by rope. Rules for canisters apply to the kitbags, the only difference being that the kitbag lands with the paratrooper. Weapons carried on the British paratrooper were: SMG or rifle, 50mm Mortar, and grenades. Weapons carried in the kitbags were: LMG (I), MMG (2), 76mm Mortar (2); and PlAT (1). The British can also use canisters as do the US, but this was not common. It was used mainly for resupplying the troops. TRANSPORTS & GLIDERS Only the most common types used by each country will be listed. Each will be given a load capacity in terms of team spaces. Canisters could be carried and released from under the aircraft from racks, or could be pushed out the door. 4 canisters count as one team space if dropped in this fashion. For gliders, heavy weapons take up half a team space each, except for 76-81mm Mortars which take up one team space.

NY: Ju 52: 4 team spaces plus 4 canisters carried underneath. DFS 230: (Glider) 3 team spaces with pilot. USA: C-47/Dakota: 7 team paces plus six canisters carried underneath. Waco CG-4A: (Glider) 5 team spaces with pilot, or jeep and passengers, or 57mmL45 AT gun with crew, or 75mm Pack How. with crew.

given in ( ) indicates how much space of the canister that thetakes up. For example, a rifle takes (1/4) space, therefore you can fit four rifles in a canister. A 28mmspzB takes up (2) spaces, which means that it is dismantled and dropped in two canisters.

ERMANY: GThe Fallschirmjager coand grenades. All his other weapons must be dropped in canisters. These are; rifles (1/4); LMG (1); 50mm Mortar (1); MMG (1); flamethrower (1); 81mm Mortar (2); AT Rifle (1); Radio (1); 75mmLG40 (4); 28mmspzB (2). USA:

The paratrooper could jump with any one of tcarbine, SMG; plus grenades. The following were dropped in canisters: LMG (1/2); MMG (1); 60mm(1 BRITAIN: The Brw

GERMA

BRITISH: Horsa: (Glider) as for Waco CG-4A. Hamilcar: (Glider) one light tank, ie Tetrarch, Locust. Or 25pdr (88mmL28) , or 6pdr (57 mmL45) and jeep; or 2 carriers or scout cars. Did not carry any infantry. TRANSPORT & GLIDER POINT VALUES Transports and Gliders cost 10 points per team, gun, or vehicle they carry.

During WWII, aircraft were one of the most rapmachines. When employed in numbers, th

idly develoey could w

tegorised into one of two catego

beyond belief. In the ground support role, aircraft can be recruited to one of attack runs. 1. Prepared Strike; where the target is preselected beforand 2. Oncall Strike; where available aircraft are directed byAircraft Controller Team, (FAC). Attack aircraft are caBombers, eg Me109/G-2, and Divebombers, eg Ju87Bstrikes are resolved at the end of the move in which they en Height of Operation: Aircraft must operate at one of two heights during an attack

AAIIRRCCRRAAFFTT

ped fighting reak havoc

ries. Fighter

of two types

e the game,

a Forward

. All aircraft ter the table.

run;

1. LOW AL E: 200-800 m s, all types o cks can TITUD etre f atta be made l, ie. n mbs.

ALTIT 0 ly bombi cks can be is hei

men

from this leve rockets, MG/can on or botta2. MEDIUM UDE: 800-200 metres, on ng a

made from th ght. Aircraft Mov t: e Aircraft move t is assumed o fast tha e wil osmen s t a plan l cr s the

plete its attack in one move. Therefore, for

roaching aircraft one move in advance, knowing only its ck. Once aircraft have completed an attack

wargames board and comthe move in which the aircraft's attack occurs, only its movement direction and target need be given. Enemy ground forces will be alerted of the appaltitude and direction of attarun, it takes another 3 moves before they can return for a subsequent attack pass. PREPARED STRIKES

43

out in a similar fashion to Map Fire with

: in

ature or table edge.

and/or rockets can be used by an aircraft during a

n/MG armament.

ot be postponed or changed, but they can be d.

aircraft directed by FAC Team – Forward Aircraft ller and his radio man.

For the FAC to direct an ck, he must f able to see the observa rules. Orde questing Oncall

hen written down at the beginning of t n, ich include get , aircraft

mb/rocket load that particular aircraft has, and the

s are written down to when by throwing 1D6 + 3. This is how many

rns delay there will be. Each time an aircraft on Oncall Strike is

ter a

ed its load of bombs on it

ust be

ircraft e time, and not upon the individual bombs carried. For the

tal amount dropped onto a target by a single aircraft, there is a BZR, ay as in artillery indirect fire.

ropped and succeeds in getting a hit upon an FV, bu

A Prepared Strike is workedartillery. All orders must be written out before the game begins. These will include1. Target's location, estimated in terms of distance in cm from a terrafe2. Aircraft's direction of approach/movement. 3. Aircraft's altitude and bomb/rocket load. 4, Turn in which aircraft will carry out strike. Only bombs Prepared Strike. A plane which is used in a Prepared Strike can also be used in an Oncall Strike later on, providing it still has any bomb/rocket loads left, or any canno Prepared Strikes canncancelle ONCALL STRIKES Oncall are a aContro atta irst betarget, as per normal tion rs reaircraft are t he tur whthe co-ordinates of the tar /target position the type of requested, what bodirection and altitude of the aircraft. The delay from the turn the orderthe aircraft arrives, is calculatedtuassigned to a NEW target, the delay must be diced for. When writing orders, take into account when the target is not a position, eg vehicle, convoy. etc. When this is the case, make sure the orders describe the target as well as the terrain features which the target was occupying at the time. If this target is not present or visible from the air when the-aircraft arrives to make its attack, and no other target is present in the same location, then the aircraft may attempt to find that target again, af 3 move delay needed to turn around. No renewal of orders is needed to be able to do this. Likewise, an aircraft called in as such may make several passes on the one target if it so wishes, making sure it pays the 3 turn delay to turn around. BOMBS Once an aircraft has made an attack run, and droppup s target or target POA as given in its orders, the effect and damage m worked out. A bomb loads will cause damage according the total weight dropped at ontoin the same w The below table lists the BZRs caused by the various bombs loads, plus the equivalent gun calibre to that bomb load. That is, if a 125kg bomb load is dA ilding or infantry, they must be diced for as though they were hit by a 75mm artillery shell.

Equivalent PV Total Bomb BZR* Load Dropped Gun Calibre

51 16cm/14cm 78-500kg 18cm/l5cm 105mm 01-750kg 20cm/17cm 150mm 90 51-1000kg 24cm/20cm 150mm 120

50-125kg 10cm/8cm 75mm 15 26-250kg 14cm/12cm 1 75mm 30

105mm2 45 60

-375kg357 Note: 1kg = 0.12 PV. * The first BZR is for fighter bombers, while the second is for dive bombers. Procedure to Obtain Hit: The Base Chance to hit a target within the BZR is 8 on 3D6. plus or minus the following variations:

ivebomber medium altitude rd cover, or V, pillbox, bunker, dugout, or is entrenched, dug-in, or

he effect upon targets that have been hit in the above table) for

Indirect Art

+ 1 if plane is d- 1 if plane is at - 1 if target in ha- 2 if target is AFin foxhole - 1 if target was within BZR for less than whole turn, due to it moving Aircraft can drop their bomb loads separately if they are carried as two( or more) separate loads , eg. Ju 878 carried 1 x 250 kg and 4 x 50 kg bombs , of which the latter could be released independently of the main 250 kg load. As mentioned above, tis the same as its equivalent calibre (given

illery Fire. MG/CANNON/GUNS Table:

nce Armor PV on 3D6 Penetration

Weapon Hit Cha

G - HMG 2 10 20mm 3 15 30mm 20 37-40mm 8 6 5mm 7 10 40

MM 8 5 8 8 8 4

30 7

it VarTo-H iations: + h extra gun g 1 for eac of same calibre firin

1 if targe an a full move. 2 if targe

rectangular BZ is used as in with Aircraft Rockets. All targets within mu d for individually usingt calibre. The dice are thrown only once for all the guns of the

cali ere are four MMGs arget is diced for only nce, but -Hit Chance will ha extra due to the three

t has more than of gun, eg MMG and 0mm, the dice separately for the 20mm

If the score thrown on two dice is less than or equal to the odified Base To-Hit Chance, then the target has been hit. Penetration as been given for heavy MGs and guns. If an AFV is hit, compare the ar armor factor divided by 2, rounded up, with the above penetration

V has been penetrated, consult Penetration Table as

d for air-to-air attacks on eavy bombers only.

Direction Of Aircraft

are fired.

oint Values:

- t in BZ for less th- t dugin/entrenched. Athe BZ st be dice the hit chance given for each differename s bre, eg. if th , each t

o the Base To ve + 3 extra MMGs. If the aircraf one type2 n m and MMG. mhrefactor. If the AFusual. If a softskin has been hit, it is immediately destroyed, all passengers/crew are killed. Dice for infantry in their squads/sections. If they are hit, that section is removed as casualties. An enclosed fortification and its occupants will not be effected by a hit. Aircraft guns of 75mm have no HE shells and so have no effect against infantry. All aircraft MG/cannon/gun ammunition is expended after three attack runs. ROCKETS Rockets for aircraft ground attack were primarily used by the Allied and Soviet airforces. German rockets were useh Rockets must be fired in either fours or eights. Like artillery they are also given a BZ, except that it is rectangular, 15cm x 40cm, going in the direction of the aircraft. 40cm

15cm Direction All targets within this area must be diced for as with Aircraft Bombs, except that there is a Base To-Hit Chance of 8 on 3D6 with four rockets or a Base To-Hit Chance of 9 on 3D6 when eight rockets

When the aircraft is firing its rockets according to a target POA given by orders, place the centre of the rectangle over the target or target POA.

Rockets have the same effect as a 105mm gun or howitzer when a hit is made. P

NT V UES the point lues of a raft shou sed on historical using the below Bas oint Valu e type of aircraft,

ent p values. ot given troop asses or morale ratings, hence their point values are not modified by

and morale as are all other units. )

Dive-Bomber = 80 points

er Base.

x 250kg PV 4 x 50kg ( 200kg) 30 PV

TOTAL = 150 points

60 PV for Fghtr/bomber Base x MMG 10 PV

m 30 PV x 500kg (Bought as 1000kg) 120 PV

TOTAL = 220 points

4 rockets = 20 8 rockets = 30

AIRCRAFT POI ALCalculating va irc ld be bareferences, e P e for thplus all armam oint (Note that aircraft are ncltroop classes Aircraft Base Point Values:

Fighter-Bomber = 60 points. Aircraft Armored Against Flak = 40 points Then add all weapons. eg Ju87D 80 PV for Divebomb

2 x MMG 10 PV 1 30

Payed for as

Eg Me410A 2 2 x 20m 2

44

2 x 20mm 30 PV 75mm gun 40 PV TOTAL = 140 points

IR COMBAT

d

be that of its target

Crews may nly engage aircraft if the situation on the ground does not pose a direct

threat to themselves. AA weapons cannot be fired while moving. AA/Flak Table

eg Hs129 60 PV for Fghtr/Bomber Base 2 x MMG 10 PV

applies to weapons which would seek to fire at paratroops on their descending move. If the firer is obstructed, he cannot fire.

AThe concept of having air to air combat occurring over a wargames board representing two kilometres square or less is a complex one. Not only that, ground attack aircraft would only be used once that nation had achieved air superiority in that particular area. For these reasons, we have included no rules for air to air combat. This should be restricted to campaign games, and we suggest that you use another set of rules to resolve this combat. We suggest that before you begin a game, it will be

tablises hed that one side has complete air superiority over the battlefield. This should be decided largely by historical circumstances. FORWARD AIRCRAFT CONTROLLER (FAC Team)

oint Value: 30 pts. Includes Officer and a radio operator. CommanPvehicle, such as a jeep or halftrack, is extra. Similar to the FAO, the FAC was always up the front ready to call in air support when a situation or position became difficult. They most often operated from a command vehicle. Most armies had about 2 - 8 FACs at divisional level. Therefore your wargames force can have 2 – 4 FAC Teams if you have any aircraft.

An FAC is fully trained in directing aircraft and cannot be replaced once lost by any other officer etc. Most often, this officer was actually in the airforce, and not the army.

A/FLAA K FIRE As aircraft are not always present onboard for any length of time, all AA/Flak fire will be directed at them when they are at their POA, during their attack run. In other words, when an aircraft makes an attack run,

fire at it, will assume its position toall weapons whichOA. TP his is also where the aircraft is most vulnerable.

The AA/Flak weapon must be in a position which has no overhead cover, and it cannot be in a 45° arc of any building. This also

o

Weapon Hit Chance(2D6) Range LOW MEDIUM AA LMG/MMG 3 - 30cm AA HMG 4 - 45cm 20mm AA 5 2 60cm 37-40mm AA 4 5 100cm

ations: Vari for each additional barrel firing (eg, a quad AA will get + 3). if target is divebomber

e modified number or below is thrown, the aircraft has been hit.

weapons may only engage one target per move. A

+ 1 + 1 If th AA A fire is assumed

o If an

to ccur before the aircraft completes its attack run.

aircraft is hit, throw one die, and refer to the below table.

ROLL Result DIE Destroyed 5 +

2,3,4 Damaged 0,1 No effect Variations: - 2 if LMG/MMG - 1 if HMG + 1 if 37/40mm - 2 if aircraft is armored Destroyed aircraft will crash offboard without completing their attack run.

ne damO age result allows an aircraft to continue through with the s and make no more attack

ying

want to fielifferent types of AFVs in a game as possible. Also

ntire company of Tiger II, fo

s

attack, but must return to base afterwardruns. Two damage results will force the aircraft to abort its attack and return home. Three damage results will destroy the aircraft.

Tr to find a system to force players to use ‘balanhas been quite a challenge. Some rules require play

ntire companies or battalions, which can create two degames, since so many WW2 players dprobably never field an edue to their high point value. Therefore in Panzerfaust players must purchaplatoons or companies as per the army lists.

ve more than 5 platoons plus

d bought the entire AFV

one company. eg you can Conscript Platoon in one

s.

en rm ad-hoc platoons. Nor can you purchase the

ns that make up a compa

the company1 plato

No company can ever ha All separately purchased platoons must be formed companies of 3 to 5 platoons a piece, and you must company HQ for that company, which is related to platoons. eg an AFV platoon and two armored infantry pformed into an ad-hoc company. The HQ you must pthis ad-hoc company must be either the HQ that the Awould have received if you haor the HQ that the armored infantry platoon would haveyou had bought the entire armored infantry company. You cannot mix together platoons of different or morale rating into the Veteran Platoons and 1 xEach company must be the same troop clas Note that you cannot buy a company and thfonumber of ‘-‘ standard platoobuying the HQ and support units. eg an AFV compplatoons plus HQ. If you buy 2 platoons, you can forman ah-hoc company/s, but if you buy 3 platoons, you m

Q. If you buy 4 platoons, you must buyHa co. with the first 3 platoons, plus there will be

her pto form into an ah-hoc company with 2 ot latoons. Please note that players must have accurateall

the com

forces deployed onboard, even if initially concealed. Offboard artillery must be purchased in batte

army lists. These do not have to be formed into

AArrmmyy LLiissttss

ld al

d as many , you could r example,

e complete

ced’ forces ers to fieimension

HQ.

of the

company,

’t have 2 x company.

split it up to complete ny, without

HQ to form on left over

into ad-hoc purchase a one

latoons are urchase for FV platoon

received if

troop class

any has 3 them into

ust buy the

models for

panies.

to game type, t, or tou

e the Y erma Eastern 1942. C e a r are only using vailabl t ye he as being 39-41

‘Dates’ e c ce. RCHAS OO O S

se pla co list being to follow ven hemselves,

of service of all items/equipment, as well as limits

ries, as per

To choose your force, follow these steps. 1. POINT VALUE

etermine Point Value of your force, accordingDagreement with opponen rnament guidelines. 2. NATION

r n t eg S t Choose you a ion, ovie3. YEAR, THEATRE Choos ear and Theatre of Operations, eg G n,Front, heck th rmy lists to make e you suunits a e in tha ar. eg t Pz I is listed under therefor ould not be used in a 1942 for4. PU E PLAT NS OR C MPANIE Purcha toons or mpanies etc as per the army s,

reful all restrictions gi in the army lists t caregarding year regarding support units, etc. Note that ALL Point Values (PV) given in the army lists are BASE Point Values. If relevant, these MUST be modified according to troop class and morale rating, as outlined in the Compulsory National Troop Class/Morale Rating Table listed again with each army list.

RATING 5. FREQUENCY bserve the FrequencyO Rating Limitations

ORTARS 6. AIRCRAFT & GUNS/ARTILLERY/MObserve the Aircraft and Gun/Artillery Restrictions Aircraft Restrictions: You are permitted to field one aircraft per onboard company in

e, in which case your force, unless you are fielding an US Forcyou can have two aircraft per company. Guns/Artillery/Mortars Restrictions • You can have up to one offboard battery/platoon of guns,

in your force. Guns, Mortars, or s.

AA Guns, Mortars, or guns/howitzers (includes artillery used onboard), you can

howitzers, or mortars per onboard company • You can purchase onboard AT Guns, AA

guns/howitzers, as per the ‘support unit’ rule• For any other types of onboard AT Guns,

45

force. ich are

ncy Rating Limitations

have up to one platoon/battery per company in yourThis includes dedicated SP guns such as Wespes whonly listed in Germany’s Artillery army list section. Does not include duel role SP guns such as Soviet SU-152 etc, which although are only listed in a Self Propelled Artillery Regiment, their notes state the SPs had a duel AT role.

• Note that in order to purchase infantry divisional artillery, you must have at least an infantry company of that division. In order to purchase armored/armored infantry divisional artillery, you must have at least an armored/armored infantry platoon of that division.

requeF

F

All units in the following army lists are given a Frequency Rating (FR). This indicates the relative frequency in which that item appeared on the battlefront. It ranges from ‘0’ which is very common, to ‘7’ which means very rare. This figure has been determined according to the amount of that item which was employed over what ever period it was used. For nations which lacked armor in general, their overall RF will be higher than a nation which had armor in abundance, such as the US or Soviet Union.

requency Ratings and Army Lists ach platoon you use must be given a E Frequency Rating. This

rating is taken from the rarest item in the platoon. (eg a Hungarian fantry platoon in is equipped with a selection of small arm

range in Frequency Ratings from 0 - 2. You also gs, which

th

ored Fist, you are limited in the amount of rare

llowing Frequency Rating Table:

ive it some Rifle Grenade 43, which are FR = 5. The platoon’s Frequency Rating is

erefore 5.) When you make up your force for any game of

anzerfaust ArmPplatoons (which are given a rating as above) that you can take. Also, the number of platoons with FR 0 - 4 must equal or exceed the number of platoons with FR from 5 - 7. Regarding HQs of ad-hoc companies, they are not effected by these restrictions, as they simply must be a HQ that one of the platoons in the ad-hoc company would have had. Consult the fo Frequency Rating Table Frequency Rating PV of Force 0 - 4 5 6 7

0010 no limit Up to 1 NA NA 2000 no limit Up to 1 NA NA 000 no limit Up to 2 Up to 1 NA 3

400 no limit Up to 3 Up to 1 up to 1 5000 no limit Up to 4 Up to 1 up to 1

+ no limit Up to 5 Up to 2 up to 1

0

7500

lanations Exp

mitno li : no limit to number of platoons in your force that can have s/equipment of these Frequency Ratings. Remember, the item

umber of platoons with FR 0 - 4 must equal or exceed the

up to

nnumber of platoons with FR from 5 - 7.

1 etc: this is the maximum number of platoons in your total that can have any equipment/items of this rarity. force

NA:

Campaigns

not allowed. Frequency Ratings and

the FR in these rules is only relevant if n which case the PV of all items must be

cing items in the campaign.

The second application of playing in a campaign, i

odified by the FR if produm Campaign Production RF PV Modification Table Frequency Factor 0 ..................-10% ie x 0.90 Frequency Factor 1 ................ No modification Frequency Factor 2 ...................+10% ie x 1.1 Frequency Factor 3 .................+21% ie x 1.21

requency Factor 4 .................+33% ie x 1.33 FFrequency Factor 5 .................+46% Frequency Factor 6 .................+61% ie x 1

or 7 ..........

ie x 1.46 .61

my t Restric x an ion all ted as ‘-‘ ar its

atoons of a as ‘-‘. When you te com pu

all s ‘-‘ sly s e o f a

pa ou cannot then puriden ou must purchas h

ing ther idewit panies

ades. Y a w e battalion bef

regicomfollo•

on

all of its

Frequency Fact .......+77% ie x 1.77 Ar Lis tions E pl at s ‘-‘ - units lis e the standard un of parent units, eg, the standard pl company are listed

chas omple alwpur e a c pany, you must , ll ppor nit

ays rchase the HQ items marked a and a su t u . However, if you purchase on om

yf the platoons o

com ny, ie, 2 out of 3, che

ase 2 out of 3 from an tical company. Y e t com te compaple ny

ntical one. before you can start buy parts of anos The same goe h buying com

ig ou must buy hol out o attalions or f bore taking parts of br

another.

ment (brigade) support unit - this unit is a regiment support pany or platoon. You can take regiment support units in the wing ways: To take a regimental support unit, you must have at least

e ‘-‘ standard company from that regiment. • You can take a whole regiment support company and field it

intact as a company itself, OR • Platoons of the regiment support company, or regiment

support platoons, can be allocated to ‘-‘ standard companies of that regiment. (eg take two platoons and give one each to two standard companies of that regiment.)

• Regiment support units cannot be broken down further than platoon size.

• You cannot use them in ad-hoc companies. • You cannot purchase more than one regiment support

company or its equivalent, that is, 3-5 regiment support platoons (which can be from the same or different regiments) in your force in total.

eg you can take one infantry regiment’s support gun company and field as a whole company, or take one its platoons and allocate to one of the standard infantry companies, plus take a platoon from that same infantry regiment’s support mortar company to give to another standard infantry company, while also taking a tank regiment support platoon and allocating to a tank standard ompany. c

battalion support unit - this unit is a battalion support unit. You can take battalion support units in the following ways: if you field a whole battalion, you can include any to•support units as is.

• Otherwise, all support units taken from a particular battalion can be broken down in one only of the following two ways:

1. if you field a whole standard company (listed as ‘-‘ in the

army lists) from that battalion, up to two battalion support

that is, you don’t have to purchase the whole n support unit sections se support sections can

heavy weapons, engineers, infantry AT ns, AFVs or vehicles) eg a support

unit. If

platoons/batteries can be allocated to that company, as platoons of that company (during an attack, battalion support units were often allocated to the lead attack company). Remember, companies cannot have more than five platoons OR

2. for each standard platoon from that battalion, listed as ‘-‘ in

the army lists (company) up to two different battaliocan be allocated to that platoon. Theonly include infantryweapons, (but not gusection would normally be an individual MMG Team, individual Mortar Team, a Bazooka Team, AT Rifle Section, etc) This was common practice during the defense.

company support unit - this unit is a company supportyou purchase the company that this company support unit belongs to, you must also purchase this support unit. The support unit may either be deployed as is, as a part of the company, normally as a platoon of the company, or, if relevant, you may

reak it db own into sections and allocate one section to each of the mpany’s standard platoons. (a maximum of two different such mpany or battalion support sections as permitted per standard

platoon, if relevant.) Please note that if you only purchase one platoon of a company, you may still also purchase for it up to two different company/battalion support unit sections. eg you purchase a Belgian (Infantry Regiment’s) Company. It includes a MG Platoon. Whether you attach the MG Platoon to the

.

pe rc imum of in . If co have t

st o of its pl

x=/ ans that r an o co is stipulated),

e a ximu hese com s r on r more of its platoons king han the com p itte n

r

that if you take one, n

i

coco

company HQ as an additional whole platoon, or break it up into three sections, attaching one of each to the Infantry Company’s three Infantry Platoons, as an additional squad of that platoon, is up to you. As you are permitted to purchase just a platoon if desired, you may include the one detached MMG section with the platoon without buying the rest of the MG platoon

max =/< 1 r fo e - means a max 1 of these unitsny,your force a mpa you don’t o take the whole

ju .company, but can take ne or more atoons =/> 1 inf co., ma < 1 per force - me if you take one, ogreater th ne infantry mpany (or whatever unit you can also hav ma m of 1 of t panie (o e o

if ta less t pany) erm d iyour fo ce =/> 1 inf co., max=/< 1 per Inf Bat - means or greater than o e infantry company (or whatever unit is

also have a maximum of 1 of these unit per stipulated), y u co an nfantry battalion (or whatever unit is stipulated.) 1 per inf co. - this means 1 of these units is compulsory if you take the ot unit. her

46

bi y case ted ig only a om or at a

Eg: See these British Motorised Infantry sections: Infantry Section 1940-’42 (1 LMG Team, 1 Rifle Team, 1 light truck)Infantry Section 1943 (1 LMG Team, 1 Rifle Team with a PIAT, lt truck or M3 Scout Car)

ection 1944-’45 T , 2 Rifle s, one with PIAT, M3)

al thiefore

ey engaged the Germans in combat, the army put up an initial vigorous defence which even surprised the enemy. Yet they tactically outfought an eeks

n equipment was both locall ced, plus p s on y out, yet theres st ion of horse-drawn cati s was very po hic d not help co-ordination.

IPMENT LISTS

N/A - Not applicable for this game scale! FR – Frequency Rating

Team Dates lity – In man s units are lis n Italics.

Infantry S (1 LMG eam Halftrackof Availa

These are always due to bein vailable fr certain date.

Belgium In 1940, the Belgian army was still thinking in the trenches. Its tactic nking was purely defensive which was why no large armored units were formed and motorisation of two divisions took place only just b the invasion. When th were technically and d within two w on the point of collapse. Belgia y produ urchased from the British and French. Cavalry wa the wa wa ill a large proport units. Communi on or w h di BELGIAN EQU PV AFV DATES PROD FR 67 T-13 I 39-40 58 5

T-13 II 39-40 100 3 T-15 39-40 42 6 AGC I 39-40 12 7

73 44 97

V P GUNS DATES PROD FR 47mm L15 FRC 39-40 ? 3

39-40 ? 3

40 ? 4 A 39-40 ? 3

L -

1633 47mm L32 SA-FRC 40 75mm L24 m1934 39-40 ? 5 51 75mm L30 TR/GP 39-40 ? 1 61 75mm L37 GP I/II 39-40 ? 4 31 76mm L9 FRC 39-40 ? 2 84 105mm L22 GP 39-23 20mm L60 Madsen A

44 40mm 56 Bofors AA 39 40 ? 4

ARTILLEPV RY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair180 105/120mm (pe300 150mm (per pa

) r pair) 39-ir)

15 50mm Mortar 39-45 81mm Mortar 39-

39-40 - 1 40 - 4 40 - 39- 6

40 ? 1 40 ? 5

PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Field Car 39-40 ? 5

car 39-40 ? 5

soft Light Truck 39-40 ? 3 skin Medium Truck 39-40 ? 5 chart Motorcycle 39-40 ? 4 Motorcycle Side Tractor 39-40 ? 3 PV lNFANTRY DATES PR FR OD

7 Team 39-40 ? 1 m ? 3

? 3

Rifle13 LMG Tea (Mag fed) 39-40 26 39-40 MMG Team 13 13.9 Boys ATR Team 40 ? 4 30 FAO Team 39-40 ? 3 20 Radio 39-40 ? 5 5ea Demolition Charge 39-40 ? 5 page 39 AP Mines 39-40 ? 3 Belgian Equipment List Notes - 40mm L48 Bofors AA is a Swedish gun. See British gun chart.

- All artillery and 81mm mortars can fire smoke rounds .

ian orale Rating

- No SMG or flamethrower was available. - 13.9mm Boys AT Rifle was purchased from Britain in small numbers.

indirectly

Belg Troop Class and M Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes

cript Reliable - 15% or x 0.85 Reliable - 25% or x 0.75

Offboard Artillery ConsAll Other Units Conscript

odify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop ss

BELWithmec ry units, the Belgium army made little use of

otorised forces and relied solely on cavalry (or mounted troops) as

ir

were ither British or French origin.

you need to m• Cla and Morale Rating modifiers

GIAN SOFTSKINS

the exception of a few motorcycle companies and various hanised artille

m

the bile reserve. All available civilian transport was requisitioned and employed for supply and transport units. These civilian vehicles

entirely 4x4 types of e

mo

Size

PV BELGUIM Description Drive Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 FNH M12 Motorcycle x 3 - 50 17 A 1 - 25 FN63C ruck 4x2 D 35 9 9 C Heavy T21 FN63C ruck 4x4 D 30 13 6 D Heavy T14 Vickers-Armst ctor trk A 16 10 2 A rong Lt Tra

FNH M12 andard heavy 3x2 motorc c aMG (ma fed) could be mounted over the sidecar

nge sed which had ade car transporting

balan e MMG crew (total; 4.) 63C ( rcial truck.

63C The vehicle had large wheels and an anti-ditching drum at

nder licence in Belgium. m acked vehicle was used to tow light guns or heavy weapons l

GIANBelgium lthough small with 2

elled gu e most unique equip nmonth ar. Divided up amongst the div

was the , ia rew o .

TAN AR Rd

M/cycle sidecar - st ycle ombin tion. An FN 63C/4RM (4x4) - heavy wheeled 5 ton gun tractor based on the L gazine and operated by the commercial truck.passe r. A variant of this model was u n MMG mounted on the si car with a second m/cycle side the ammunition and

the front. Vickers-Armstrong Tractor - small gun tractor built u

the ce of th This di inutive tr FN 4x2) - heavy 5 ton comme with fo d-down bench seats in the rear for the crew. BEL ARThe arm 00 tanks & self- support, they had little impact on the

MOR ored force, a

prop ns, had some of th me t seen in the German invasion. While there

little in way of tank duels Belg n c s f ught well until overrunearly s of the w isions for infantry

TS TR C/C Sz FO CAP PV KS MAMENT HF HS HR TF T-1 4767 3 I L32,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 - 40 18 C 5

73 3 II 32,LMG 3 1 1 1 1 - 37T-1 47-1 HM

L 17 C 5 44 T 5 G 1 1 1 1 1 1 40 16 C 4 97 A C I L32,HMG 3 1 1 3 2 2 25 13 C 6 G 47 Smoke Dischargers;Radios; No AFVs equ

ne Man Turrets; T-

No AFVs equipped. ipped

15

B lg

O

ian AFV Notese

T-13 I - built as a tank destroyer, this AFV mounted a 47mm L32 gun in a `half' turret which faced to the rear of the vehicle. The turret had 180º

r of the turret

AGC I - French AMC-35 with the modified turret mounting a 47mm L32 and coaxial HMG.

traverse (90º left & 90º right) with the crew exposed from the rea(partial cover.)

T-13 II - this version was similar to the Mk I except the gun was mounted in a fully rotating `half' turret. The turret was open backed.

T-15 - British Vickers Light tank purchased in late 30's. They werepurchased with conical turrets and rearmed by their new owners with a 12.7mm Hotchkiss HMG in the turret.

gun

47

ELGIAN GUNS ith a variety of weapons from e artillery was composed of s with various French and British

pieces imported in the '30s. Some native designs were also used in limited numbers.

BThe Belgian army was equipped wseveral sources. The bulk of th

odernised WWI German reparationm

Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO OTES

Be ium lgPV Guns N

A (11) (9) (7) (5) to-hit 3 o Gun Shield 3 3 2 2 penet

16 47mm L15 chance Nration

FRC 33 47mm L32 SA-FRC A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 40 75mm L24 m1934 B (10) 7) (6) (5) (10) (9) (9) (8) ( 5 Smk

- - - - - - - - 51 75mm L30 TR/Gp B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk, Horse drawn 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 2 61 75mm L37 GP I/II B (11) (10) (10) (9) 8) (7) (6) (5)

8 7 7 6 6 5 4 3 (8) ( 5 Smk, Horse drawn

5 31 76mm L9 FRC A (9) (9) (8) (8 6) ) (7) ( 5 Smk, No gun shield - - - - - - 84 105mm L22 GP 7) (7) (6) (5) C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) ( 7 Smk, Horse drawn

- - - - - - - - - 23 20mm L60 AA Madsen NA (12) (11) (10) (7) 1 o Gun Shield 3 2 2 2 Belgian Gun Notes

75mm L35 & L37 GP I,IIreparations & modified wi

47mm L32 SA-FRC - AT gun manufactured in Belgium. we y a wn. Usually to d b

carriages and interchangeable barrels. No gun shield. Towed by a Lt.truck yd tankette.

received under th guns can only be horse-drawn.

- ex-German guns received under WWI th lengthened rebored barrels. Can only be horse-

dra L22 GP - ex-German howitzer supplied under WWI reparations

y modernised. In German service, it was referred to as leFH 16.

20mm L60 AA Madsen - licensed built version of the Danish Madsen mm AA gun. No gun shield.

ation

Vickers Light tractor. 47mm L15 & 76mm L9 FRC - light infantry support guns with identical

105mmand completel

or Vickers Cardon-Lo 75mm L24 m1934 - mountain gun manufactured in Belgium. - the `TR' was a license built version of the Krupp

2075mm L30 TR/Gp M1905 gun and the `Gp' were modified ex-German guns WWI reparations. Bo

Belgian Organis

t not lower.

INFANTRY REGIMENT • Radios can be issued to regimental HQ, bu BELGIAN INFANTRY REGIMENT Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Belgian Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a

- s) regiment support company

3 Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry AT Company (2 platoons of 3 x 47mm AT gunBelgian Infantry Battalion

ttalion HQ (1 Battalion HQ Team with radio, 5 Rifle Teams) 1 per inf bat. ny -

battalion support unit ach with 2 x MMG)

latoon (3 x 75mm/76mm infantry/mountain guns.)

1 Infantry Ba3 Infantry Compa1 Hvy Wpns Company 3 x MMG Platoon (2 sections, e1 Infantry Battalion Gun P battalion support unit Belgian Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (1 Comp 1 per inf co. any HQ Team with radio, 5 Rifle Teams)

Infantry Company MG platoon (2 - 3 MMG) company support unit 3 Infantry Platoon - 1Belgian Infantry Platoon

on HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team, 1 – 3 50mm mortars) 1 per inf. pl. d (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) -

1 Infantry Plato3 Infantry Squa

istorical DataH (do not use in gameplay)

ery regiment supporting its three infantry regiments. 120mm and 155mm batteries were held at Corps l l

Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 - 3 NCO, 3 - 4 men, with 3 pistol, 4 - 5 rifles and 1 - 3 x 50mm mortars) Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 10 men with 1 LMG, 10 rifles) Infantry Reg/Bat/Company HQ Section - (1 Off & 5-8 NCO with pistols, 8-12 men with rifles) BELGIAN ARTILLERY Each infantry division had an artill•• eve

BELGIAN ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Belg Artilleian ry Regiment

lery Battalion se iller tric3 Artil e art y res tions Bel Artillerygian Battalion

Battery e iller tric3 Artillery s e art y res tions Bel Artillery Battergian y

ry Battery (4 x se iller tricy (4 x se iller tric

1 Artille 105mm guns) e art y res tions 2 Artiller 75mm guns) y Batter e art y res tions BEL N ARMORGIA

quipped. divi a tan mp

wo divisi tank c pan ch

• No AFVs Radi o e• Some Belgian infa sions had k contry• T Belgian cavalry ons had 3 om

any attached to them. ies ea .

48

BELG N ARMOIA R

e No. Your FQty Unit Typ orce Can Have: Belg Infantry k Company ian Division Tan

mpany HQ ( -13 1 p Tank Platoon (3 x T-13) =/> f c ax= rce

1 Tank Co 3 x T ) er Inf Div Tank Co. 3 1 in o., m /<1 co.per foBelgi Cavalry k Company an Division Tan

mpany HQ ( 1 p av Tanktoon (3 x T- ma < 1

1 Tank Co 3 x T-13) er C Div Co. 3 Tank Pla 13 or T-15) x=/ co. per force

Brit d fo to b 19 e BEF was motoris ired ians h est ed p i e g s of d its n lem ar t ed r exibl en up to c s so m t thi the b e ca d ou h l r tiati o nfantry tended re each r

l 194 e y t a tille as th d y ngin

ITI MENT

Britain

echaThe ish Army was one of the most m niseas a

rces e engaged. During 40, the entires, stee

ed, even if some of th s was acqu fromu ei

civil . The British army w lso one of t e bry and

train and most professional armi n they we

lorie tradition. This, of co rse, cr ate owvel. The profesprob s. The infant mor were so a tach to thei own units that th re very infl e, ev orp le ionalism al ean

e. Arm r and i to igno otheevery ng was done by ook and orders wer rrie t by the letter, whic eft little oom for ini vunti 2.

orn Overall the British were a stubb nemre unriv co

o fa nd extremely good shots. Their ar ry wce one of e best managed a the Ro al E eers nwe alled by any other untry.

BR SH EQUIP LISTS

ROD PV AFV DATES P FR

5

39 Crusader I CS 40-43 4 44 Crusader II 41-43 5500 1 48 Crusader II CS 41-43 5

2

80 45 45

ell VII 45 4000l VIII

E 44-45 750 5 odile 44-45 800 5

44-45 ? 5 2-43 130 6 655 4

2150 3 175 6

122 6 5

5 507 6 2500 4

3-45 6 300 7 7

ar 0 C 4x4

Car 6

rring I-III

ing IIIa IIIb

00

tar

5 ar

/Recce

85 Buffalo Mk IV 43-45 ? 4

95 A9 39-41 125 4 76 A9 CS 39-41 7 99 A10 39-41 14 3 81 A10 CS 39-41 30 7 91 A13 I 39-41 65 6 115 A13 II 39-41 590 3 96 A13 II CS 39-41 6 71 Matilda I 39-40 140 5 167 Matilda II 39-43 2987 3 171 Matilda II CS 41-43 6 156 Matilda II Frog 41-45 6 42 Mk I-V 39-41 160 6 78 Mk VI-VIC 39-42 ? 0 68 Mk VI AA 39-42 ? 5 97 Tetrarch 41-45 167 4 102 Tetrarch CS 41-45 10 7 135 Crusader I 40-43 1 111180 Crusader III 42-43

Grant Early/La ? 240/258 te 42-43 4 45197 Centaur IV 44- 6

226 Cromwell IV 44- 1 204 Cromwell VI 44- 1 240 Cromw 44- 4 216 Cromwel 44-45 6 273 Firefly 44-45 655 4 272 Challenger 44-45 200 6 266 Comet 45 500 5 151 Valentine I-VII 41-42 5 191 Valentine IX-X 42-43 9700 3 209 Valentine XI 43-44 4 214 Churchill I 42-43 500 6 216 Churchill III-IV 42-44 2297 4

2 21 Churchill V 42-45 241 6 235 Churchill NA75 & VI 43-45 120 5 287 Churchill VII 44-45 ? 3

l VIII 44-45 ? 7 263 Churchil 246 Churchill ARV

hill Croc277 Churc 259 Achilles 144 Bishop 4 214 Archer 44-45

43-45 135 Sexton 98 Deacon 42 127 AEC I 42-45 166 AEC II 43 -45184 AEx: III 44-4 103 Staghound I 43-45 108 Staghound II 4 174 Staghound III 44-45

AA 44-4586 Staghound

73 Humber II- 41-45 50 1 Ill 00 95 Humber IV 44-45 4 45 Humber Scout C 43-45 430 1

LR44 Humber/Otter 40-45 ? 1 7 ut 5 Daimler Sco 39-45 662 0

-III 98 Daimler I 42-45 2690 2 57 Lynx Scout Car 42-45 3200 2

Cs9/LAC 0 52 Morris 39-41 10 6 55 Marmon He 40-43 ? 4 63 Marmon Herr 40-43 ? 4 65 Marmon Herring 40-43 ? 4 0 4 Carrier ATR 39-45 880 0

38 Carrier LMG 39-45 0 MG 49 Carrier M 39-45 2

45 Carrier 2” Mor 39-45 2 55 Carrier Wasp 44-45 ? 3

-45 542 IP Carrier 40 46 2 r 3” Mort81 IP Carrie 40-45 4

86 Stuar Kangaroo 44-45 ? 5 112 Priest Kangaroo 44-45 ? 5

114 Ram Kangaroo 44-45 ? 6 82 Buffalo Mk II 42-45 ? 4

PV LEND/LEASE AFV DATES PROD FR 132 M3 Stuart 41- ? 4

M5 ? 3 8 M3 ? 6

M4 ? 3 M4 ? 5

226/225 M4 42-45 ? 0 262 M4 44- ? 4

erine

ar

hound

A1 44A1 45136 Stuart 43-

240/25 Grant Early/Late 42-43 223 (75) 42-45230 42-45A1 (75)

A2 (75), M4A4 (75)A1 (76) 45105) 45227 M4( 44- ? 5

189 M7HMC Priest 42-45 ? 5 241 MI0 GMC Wolv123 M3 GMC 60 M3A1 SCout C70 M2 Half track 71 M3A1 Half track 94 M8 Grey

43-45 ? 5 42-44 ? 5 42-45 ? 4

42-45 ? 6 44-45 ? 3 44-45 ? 5 DATES PROD FR PV GUNS 39-43 ? 1 36 40mm L50 / 2pdr

57mm L

mm Lmm L

L - / 25pd 40- ? / 25pd ort ?-4 ?

94mm L 7" 39- ? m .5" 39- ? L /D 39- ? L s 39- ?

73 45 / 6pdr 42-45 ? 1 4551 75 16 M1A1 Pack 43- 5000 4

3 76 r -4515 58 / 17pd 43 ? 3 57 29 / 18pdr 39 40 ? 4 84mm63 88 28 r 45 0 mm L44 88mm L15 r sh 5 6 50 13 / 3. 42 3 63 114m L16 / 4 43 3 25/33 20mm 85 AA ual 45 6 44 40mm 48Bofor AA 45 3

DATES PROPV TRANSPORT D FR 39- ? 39- ?

39- ? 39- ?

see Field Car 45 3 soft Light Truck 45 3 skin Medium Truck 45 3 charts Heavy Truck 45 5

Motorcycle 39-45 ? 2

OD PV LEND/LEASE DATES PR FR

43-45 ? 6

see Jeep 42-45 ? 3 ar soft Field C 42-45 ? 5

skin Light Truck 41-45 ? 3 harts Medium Truck 41-45 ? 3 c

Heavy Truck DUKW 43-45 ? 6

PV TRUCK/SP DATES PROD FR 58 SP, Bofors 40mm AA 39-45 ? 3 46 37mm M6 GMC ? ? 5 PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75/76mm (per pair) 39-41 - 4 120 84/88mm (per pair) 39-45 - 0 180 114mm (per pair) 39-45 - 5 300 140/155mm (per pair) 41-45 - 4 350 183mm (per pair) 41-45 - 6 400 203mm (per pair) 39-40 - 6 PV MORTARS DATES PROD FR 15 50mm 39-45 ? 1 45 76mm 40-45 ? 1 70 107mm 42-45 ? 4

PV NTRY DATES PROD FR INFA 7 Rifle Team 39-45 ? 1 10 SMG Team 39-45 ? 2 13 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-45 ? 1 26 MMG Team 39-45 ? 2

AT Rifle Grenade arly 40-42 ? 5 AT Rifle Grenade Late 44-45 ? 3

13 13.9 Boys ATR Team 39-42 ? 1

30 ? 1 20 ? 1 0 -45 ? 3

E4

9

6 PlAT 43-45 ? 1 15 Flamethrower Team 44-45 ? 4 5ea Demolition Charge 39-45 ? 1 page39 AP Mine 39-45 ? 1 page39 AT Mine 40-45 ? 2 5 Smoke Grenade 42-45 ? 3 12 Mine Detectors 41-45 ? 1

FAO Team 39-4539-45 Radio

3 FAC Team 41 B Equipment Li Notesritish st - L -lease AFVs listed in US armor charts. - L -lease transp are US vehicles. - 75mm L16 M1A1 P was the US gun, which was als ed by British A rne Troops - all artillery and m ars can fire smoke rounds in ctly - tish forces c ot have horse teams or ca y. - uns therefore must be towed by vehicles or tra .

end areend orts

acko us irbo

ortdireBri annvalr

All gctors

British Troop Class and Morale Rating

ion Notes Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modificat Offboard Artillery Veteran As unit rating no modificat

atrp/Royal Eng. Veteran Elite +50% or xion to PV

Par 1.5

49

1.5 All O 1.25 Guards Veteran Elite +50% or x

ther Units Veteran Reliable +25% o x * yo op Cla an

BRIn vehtheveheva

sHow

stan the the

men

u need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Tro ss d Morale Rating modifiers

ITISH & COMMONWEALTH SOFTSKINS 1940, the BEF was sent to France equipped with over 65,000 icles of all types. This expeditionary force of twelve divisions earn distinction by being the first fully motorised army in the world. Of the icles deployed in resisting the German attack, only 5,000 were to be cuated from Dunkirk constituting a massive loss in equipment. This left the army scrambling for any transport available and

re ulted in large numbers of civilian vehicles being requisitioned. ever, the situation was quickly rectified with a large influx of US and

Canadian vehicles. By late 1941, vehicle production had become dardised with many purpose built military vehicles entering service. Both Canada and Australia produced a large range of vehicles with latter using many imported chassis combined with local bodies. In categorisation of vehicles, the British types have been listed

foremost with equivalent Canadian, Australian and other models tioned in the text.

PV BRITAIN Description Drive

Siz

e Speed Capacity Tow

Rd C/C in teams 55 19 1 - 7 A Matchless, Velocette Motorcycle x 3 -

8 A 6 B

Norton CS8, BSA M20 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - Humber Sniper, Morris 10HP Light Car 4x2

50 13 1 - 46 14 1 -

11 Morris PU Light 8cwt Truck 4x4 Morris CS8, Bedford MW Light 15cwt Truck 4x2

B 10 C

50 20 2 A 46 14 2 B

12 C C

Quad-Ant, Morris C8/GS Light 15cwt Truck 4x4 42 18 2 B 45 14 4 B 14 Bedford OX, Austin K30 Light 30cwt Truck 4x2

14 Morris C8, Chevrolet C30 Light 30cwt Truck 4x4 C B 6 Morris CD, CDF, CD/SW Medium 30cwt Trck 6x4 C 37 14 4 B

42 17 4 126 Bedford OY, Austin K3 28 Bedford QL, AEC Matador

Medium 3ton Truck 4x2 C 40 12 10 C ton Truck C Medium 3 4x4 C 38 15 10

13 uad FAT Medium Truc 4x4 C 42 1 2 Recover ruck

Q 8 k C y/Tractor D 21 Scammell Heavy T 6x4 D 36 17 5

19 Terrapin Mk1 Amphib. Truc 8x8 D 18 12 5 k - B 17 Loyd/Windsor Carrier Tractor trk B 30 18 2

Matchless, Norton 16H - standard army motorcycles. These bikes

accommodated the rider only, no passenger. Norton 633, BSA M20 - m/cycle-sidecars built in limited numbers. The Norton 633 sidecar can have a Bren LMG fitted on the sidecar for use by the passenger (at additional PV cost.) Humber Snipe, Morris 10 HP (4x2) - light militarised civili

an cars. Three main types of utilities were supplied; the Austion 10 HP, Hillman 10 HP and Morris 10 HP. The Humber Snipe series were used extensively through 1940-45 as command/liason vehicles.

- light truck produced in large numbers before and

W series were built wi a variety of variations, n WOT2 which were

hi r manufactured in (Ch , Dodge D15.) There w e betw constructed to roug requ ions. All 4x2 models we e 4x4 mpletely superseded by Qua cwt (4x4) - these off-ro y simil ts in appearance. Thes y

pl he same capacity. ed t (4x2) - light 1« to d

OX ommon models in s this r Q2, Fordson WOT3 ercial

pre-war designs wh til upe or heavy models. T re rog 3 ton trucks. The lia

rolet 1500 and Mor wt (4x4) - light 1« t ucks. The or 4x4 30 cwt tru e

Bedford OY, Austin K3 3 ton (4x2) - medium cargo/troop carriers. The Bedford QY series truck was the most numerous 4x2 vehicle followed by the Austin K3 and the Commer Q4 which were militarised commercial designs. Bed

er i fron nd. AT ld em exclusively

ng li by varioues w c bot ; Morris C8 MkIII, Guy

nt, K FG T (the last two being an).

ll R rte eled tractor with semi sed f a ain and recovery. Another was un Mk x w d rrier. The vehicle was

ed as th considered inferior by a sm a kward driving position. ropelle t a ide o oat.

inds r lly carrier, similar in ance h n l c f longer chassis. The /Loy r pabl o armor plating but the

n was e Th as a personnel carrier, carrie

TI UNS

Chevrolet C30 was the Canadian equivalent using an identical chassis with modified front end. Morris Commercial CD 30cwt (6x4) - the CD series of 6x4 trucks were built for numerous roles ranging from cargo/troop carriers, vehicle recovery to gun tractors (eg. the 6x4 Morris CD/SW was standard gun tractor for the 40mm AA Bofors.) All 6x4 models were slowly phased out of service in favour of the Morris 4x4 trucks.

Morris PU 8cwt (4x2)during the early years of the war. Slowly replaced in service by the 15 cwt trucks. Canadian equivalents include the Ford WOC1, Chevrolet C8 and Ford F8 vehicles.

Morris CS8, Bedford MW 15cwt (4x2) - light infantry truck which was the most common vehicle employed by British and commonwealth forces. Both the Morris CS* and Bedford M th u g a -eng ne t eas were the Guy Ant and Fordso just as common. Similar ve cles were assembled and/o Canada and Australia

Quad F (4x4) - wheeled fie artillery tractors (FAT) ployed for towi ght artillery and AT guns. The tractors were produced s

evrolet C15, Ford 15 as marginal differenc compani ith differen es in h chassis and bodieseen types, all being hly the same military

atQuad-A arrier KT4, Ford T and Chevrolet CG

irements and specific re slowly replaced by thversions although not 1945.

Canadi - heavy wheco

d-Ant, Morris C8/GS 1 ad light trucks were verScamme ecovery/Transpo r (6x4)trailer u or vehicle nd m ly AFV transportation5

ar to their 4x2 counterpar e 4x4 versions effectivel version sed as a heavy gun tractor for artillery. re aced all the 6x4 trucks of tB

Terrapi 1 (8 8) - heele amphibious cargo cac ford OX, Austin K30 30cw n cargo trucks. The Be

and Austin were the most c ervice. Other vehicles inprodu an alternative to e US DUKW. It washaving aller cargo rea, no suspension and an aw

category are the Comme and Morris Comm Two p rs at he re r prov d pr pulsion while aflCS11. The majority were ich continued on un Loyd/W or Carrie - fu tracked unarmored s rseded by improved 4x4 he 30 cwt trucks we

raappear to t e U iversa arrier except or a

p ressively replaced by 2 ton & most numerous Austand Canadian vehicles were the Chev Ford 01T series.

Windsor d car ier was ca e of having b lt-onadditio extr mely rare. e vehicle was used

ris C8, Chevrolet C30 30c on off-road cargo tr mortar r and gun tractor. Morris C8 was the only maj ck to be employed. Th

ford QL, AEC Matador 3 ton (4x4) - the use of medium 4x4 off-road trucks were completely neglected by the British until 1941 when mass production of the type was undertaken. The most numerous models were the Bedford QL series, the AEC "Matador" Field Artillery Tractor, Canadian Ford F60L & C60L, Austin K5, Albion FT11N and the Fordson WOT6, the majority of these types tilisin cab-ov

BRI SH MOTORISED G

Des ve d t C/C

PV BRITAIN / USA cription Dri Size Spee Armamen Rd

AA 30c 4 17 58 SP, 4x4 Bofors 40mm wt truck 4x C 42 40mm L48 AA 46 37mm M6 GMC t AT SP 4x B 50 37mm L5 Ligh 4 20 4

P - this AASP used the Morris Commercial CS9/B 4 d to mount a 40mm o

av the side and rear were . front of the weapon. A s

so L 3 ton 4x4 truck t ith Canadians on the Fo

M6 G - l n s a tank destroyer and on th d s C ounted 37mm AT gun stalled r rov eld for crew protection. amped crew eapon to have a limited avers h r, al erated 360º traverse if

se w « move for crew to re-or

TIg was divided into Infa d ly armored) and Cruiser Tanks (fast and light e

really perfected and ar

ritish t al d, and at times they e peculiar early war

e ent w ho had the sole task oke H

CAP

S 4x4, Bofors 40mm AA 37mm MC very ight gu carriage conceived a

4x truck chassis specially fitte Bofors AA gun with 360 based e Do ge Weapon arrier. A pedestal mtr erse. Three outriggers on used to provide stability was in in the rea and p ided with a large shiA gun-shield was fitted at the n Australian version wa The cr area around the gun allowed the wal built based on the Ford F60 with similar arrangemen(w four outriggers) as did the rd F60B.

180º tr e towards t e rea though it could be opthe crew rviced the weapon hile dismounted (ie. embark bef e moving again.)

BRI SH ARMOR Durin the war, British armor ntry Tanks (slow an B anks were also ways under gunneheavi ly armored). The us

even lacked HE and smok ammunition. A

of these two types was never in no way came ne.

dev lopm as the CS (Close Support) Tanks, wthe German tank successes of firing sm and E shells. PV TANK TYPE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO 95 A9 40 L50,3LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 15 C 5 76 A9 CS 94 L15,3LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 15 C 9

50

99 A10 40 L50,2LMG 3 1 1 3 1 1 16 8 C 5 81 A10 CS 94 L15,2LMG 3 1 1 3 1 1 16 8 C 9 91 A13 I Cruiser 40 L50,2LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 18 C 5 115 A13 II 40 L5 3 1 1 3 3 1 30 14 C 5 Cruiser 0,2LMG 96 A13 II CS Cruiser 94 L15,2LMG 3 1 1 3 3 1 30 14 C 9 71 A11 Matilda I MMG 7 3 3 4 2 2 9 6 B 4

167 A12 Matilda II 40 L50,LMG 9 7 7 8 7 7 15 8 C 5 171 A12 Matilda II CS 76 L25,LMG 9 7 7 8 7 7 15 8 C 7

156 A12 Matilda II FROG F/thr,LMG 9 7 7 8 7 7 15 8 C 7 42 Light Tank Mk I-V MMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 33 18 C 4

Tank Mk VI-VIC LMG 78 Light HMG, 2 1 1 2 1 1 36 20 C 3 68 Light Tank Mk VI AA 4*LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 36 20 C 4 97 Tetrach 40 L50,LMG 1 1 1 3 3 1 40 26 C 7 102 Tetrach CS 76 L25,LMG 1 1 1 3 3 1 40 26 C 9 135 Crusader I 40 L50,2LMG 6 5 3 4 2 2 27 17 C 5 139 Crusader I CS 76 L25,2LMG 6 5 3 4 2 2 27 17 C 7 144 Crusader II 40 L50,LMG 7 5 3 5 4 2 27 17 C 5 148 Crusader II CS 76 L25,LMG 7 5 3 5 4 2 27 17 C 7 180 Crusader III 57 L45,LMG 7 5 3 5 4 2 27 17 C 7 197 Centaur IV 95 L22,2LMG 8 4 2 8 7 7 27 16 C 9

226 Cromwell IV 75 L40,2LMG 8 4 2 8 7 7 32 20 C 7 204 Cromwell VI 95 L22,2LMG 8 4 2 8 7 7 32 20 C 9

240 Cromwell VII 75 L40,2LMG 10 5 2 10 7 7 32 18 C 7 216 Cromwell VIII 95 L22,2LMG 10 5 2 10 7 7 32 18 C 9

273 Firefly 76 L55,LMG 7 4 4 9 5 5 26 16 C 7 272 Challenger 76 L55,LMG 9 4 2 8 6 3 30 15 C 6

266 Comet 77 L49,2LMG 8 4 3 10 8 7 33 18 C 7 151 Valentine I-VII 40 L50,LMG 7 6 6 7 6 6 15 8 C 6

191 Valentine IX-X 57 L45,LMG 7 6 6 7 6 6 15 8 C 7 209 Valentine XI 75 L40,LMG 7 6 6 7 6 6 15 8 C 8

G 214 Churchill I 40 L50,76L25,LM 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 5 216 Churchill III-IV 57 L45,2LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 6

212 Churchill V 95 L22,2LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 9 235 Churchill NA75 & VI 75 L40,2*LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 7

287 Churchill VII 75 L40,2*LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 7 263 Churchill VIII 95 L22,2*LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 9

246 Churchill AVRE 290 L4,2*LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 12 277 Churchill Crocodile 75 L40,F/Thr,LM 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 7 G

P PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CA

259 Achilles 76 L55,HMG 6 3 3 8 3 3 30 20 C 6 144 Bishop 88 L28 7 6 6 5 3 3 15 8 C 7

214 Archer 76 L55 7 5 5 2 2 2 20 10 C 6 135 Sexto 88 L2 7 4 4 3 2 1 28 18 C 6 n 8

1 1 1 1 1 0 30 12 C 5 98 Deacon 4x4 57 L45

ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP

V APC/RECONNAISSANCE

P 40 L50,LMG 4 127 AEC I 4x4 4 2 7 6 6 40 15 C 6

166 AEC 4

II 4x4 57 L45,LMG 5 5

5 5 4 4 39 14 C 7 5 3 5 4 4 38 14 C 8

3 18 AEC III 4x4 75 L40,LMG 103 3 2 108 3

Staghound I 4x4 37 L54,LMG Staghound II 4x4 76 L25,LMG

1 3 3 3 55 18 C 5 1 2 3 3 3 55 18 C 7

174 4 4 2

Staghound III 4x4 75 L40,LMG 2 1 5 4 4 55 18 C 8 1 2 2 2 55 20 C 4 86 Staghound AA 4x4 2*HMG

73 1 1 95 2

Humber II-III 4x4 HMG,LMG Humber IV 4x4 37 L54,LMG

1 2 2 2 48 16 C 3 1 1 3 3 3 45 15 C 5

45 1 44 1

Humber Scout Car 4x4 LMG (Bren) Humber/Otter LRC 4x4 LMG (Bren)

1 1 1 1 1 55 18 B 2 1 1 1 1 1 47 14 C 3

57 Daimler Scout Car 4x4 LMG (Bren) Daimler I-III 4x4 40 L50,LMG

3 1 98 3

1 3 1 1 57 18 B 2 1 1 3 3 1 50 16 C 7

57 Lynx Scout Car 4x4 LMG (Bren) Morris Cs9/LAC 4x2 Boys ATR,LMG(Bren)

3 52 1 1

1 1 3 1 1 52 18 B 2 1 1 1 1 45 10 C 2

52 1 1 55 1 1

Rolls Royce 1924 4x2 Boys ATR,LMG(Bren) Marmon Herr'ton I-III 4x4 Boys ATR,LMG(Bren)

1 1 1 1 45 10 C 2 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 2

63 1 1 1

Marmon Herr'ton IIIa 4x4 20 L65 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 3 65 Marmon Herr'ton IIIb 4x4 47 L32 1 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 5 40 1 1 38 1 1

Carrier `ATR' Boys AT Rifle Carrier `LMG' LMG (Bren)

1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 1

49 1 1 1

Carrier `MMG' MMG Carrier 2" Mortar

1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 1 1 1 1 31 18 B - 1 1

45 2" Mortar 55 Carrier Wasp F/Thr

IP Carrier LMG (Bren) 1 1

42 2 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 1 2 1 1 54 17 C 2 1

81 2 1 5

IP Carrier 3" Mortar 3" mortar 1 2 1 1 54 17 C - 86 Stuart Kangaroo/Recce LMG 3 3 5 3 3 40 22 B 2 1 11 Priest Kangaroo HMG 114 Ram Kangaroo LMG

Buffalo Mk II 20 L85,2*LMG

2 7 8

82 1

2 6 2 2 30 20 C 2 6 4 4 8 4 4 30 20 C 3 4

2

1 1 1 1 1 20 14 D 3 4 85 Buffalo Mk IV 20 L85,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 12 D 3 6

o, Bishop, Sexton, Marmon Herrington AC, IP Carrier and AA AFVs.

e Dischargers; All AFVs, except AEC Deacon, Achilles, Stuart Recce, Ram/Prs; All AFVs, except AEC Deacon, Matilda I, Light Tank MkI-V and all Carriers.

Man Turrets; Light Tank MkI-V, Matilda I.

Smok iest KangaroRadioOne

51

tishBri AFV Notes:

TYPES TANK

A9 & A9 CS - designed as a Cruiser tank to replace the Medium Mk II built in the late 20's, the A9 had two similar forward sub-turrets housing a Vickers MG each. Produced on a thin budget, armor protection was minimal.

e A9 CS (Close Support) version mounted a 94mm howitzer replacing the 2 pdr and was limited to firing smoke shells only.

A10 & A10 CS - the thin armor and unreliability of the A9 prompted a redesign which lead to the A10. Modified with extra armor plate and given a slower speed to improve reliability, the hull was modified with a single bow mounted MG replacing the unpopular cramped sub-turrets. Because of its slow speed, it was reclassified as an Infantry tank. A10 CS version mounted

Th

nks impressed the British

nreliable tank because it was rushed into service. Riveted

smoke. Crusader II & Crusader II CS - an uparmored Crusader I with the hull

used for storage..

e higher speed). The rst British tank built that was on par with the M4

Mk III & V (used only in Tunis) had a new turret which allowed for a third crew member (the Fire Order is reduced by -1.) The Mk I was used entirely for training in England. The Mk VI & VII were Canadian variants equivalent to the Mk II and were all shipped

an upgunned variant of the Mk V with the 6pdr replacing

recked M4 Shermans. The Churchill IV NA75 were so

SELF

a 94mm howitzer in the same turret and fired only smoke shells. A13 Mk I - the speed of the Soviet BT ta

enough to design their own Christie version, the A13. Thin armor was used as a price cutting measure.

A13 Mk II & A13 Mk II CS Cruiser - the Mk II series quickly replaced the Mk I in production and differed by having additional armor bolted on to the hull & turret. The added turret armor was spaced (which gave the impression of a larger turret) for better resistance to AT rifles. Counts as having spaced armor on turret sides and rear. The A13 Mk II CS tanks had a 94mm howitzer which fired smoke rounds only..

A11 Matilda I - first `Infantry' tank to enter service, it was small, well armored, slow and cheap. While impervious to most AT guns in 1940, it lacked firepower mounting only one water-cooled MMG. Standard armament fowe

r the A11 was the .30 cal Vickers MG although small numbers re equipped with a Vickers .50 cal HMG. The tank was nicknamed

`Matilda' from it duck like appearance. A12 Matilda II & II CS - like the A11, this infantry tank was still slow and

extremely well armored for its day. The 2pdr gun proved a match for most Axis tanks but the inability to be upgunned was its downfall. The A12 CS mounted the 76mm howitzer instead of a 2pdr and fired both HE & smoke.

A12 Matilda II FROG - Australian conversion of a Matilda II with a flame projector replacing the 2 pdr gun.

Light Tank Mk I-V - these light tanks were designed for colonial use (keeping down the natives) rather than European warfare. Standard armament for the Mk III-V was a .30 cal water-cooled Vickers MG with small numbers being equipped with the Vickers .50 cal MG.

Light Tank Mk VI-VIC - the chassis was identical to previous marks with a larger two man turret mounting both an LMG & HMG. Intended for reconnaissance, they were more often employed as main battle tanks. The Mk VIC was distinct from other Mk VIs by the air-cooled 15mm Besa main armament.

Light Tank Mk VI AA - standard Mk VI with turret replaced by an armored open-topped twin .50 cal MG turret.

Tetrarch & Tetrarch CS - entered production prior to making the decision that armored cars would completely replace Light tanks. The tanks that were produced were retained for airborne units or exported to Soviet Union. The Tetrarch CS mounted the 76mm howitzer and fired both HE & smoke.

A15 Crusader I & Crusader I CS - developed from the A13, the Crusader was an uarmor was used extensively and the hull MG was mounted in a cramped turret opposite the driver. The Crusader CS mounted the 76mm howitzer in place of the 2pdr and fired both HE &

MG turret removed and Crusader III - consisted of an upgunned Crusader II with the 2pdr being

replaced by a 6pdr gun. As a result, the turret crew was reduced from three to two. Hull and turret armor were marginally increased.

Crusader AA Mk III - consisted of a Crusader III chassis and hull with a new turret mounting twin 20mm cannon. With a lack of enemy aerial targets after the Normandy landings, these AA tanks were retained for infantry support engaging ground targets. The Crusader AA Mk I was similar with a larger open-topped turret mounting a 40mm Bofors AA cannon. They were used during the Normandy landings but were quickly withdrawn seeing very little action.

Centaur IV - the predecessor of the Cromwell, 940 were built with a small number being converted for use in close support by mounting the 95mm howitzer. The Centaur differed from the Cromwell by having an inferior engine. The majority of Centaurs were later upgraded to Cromwells.

Cromwell IV - replaced the Crusader as the main battle tank. Speed on initial production tanks was 40mph and was deliberately dropped to 32 mph to improve reliability and reduce crew injuries (the transmission governor was sometimes removed by crews to obtain thCromwell was the fiSherman.

Cromwell VII - this was a Cromwell IV with applique armor added to the hull and turret fronts.

Cromwell VI & VIII - the close support variants of the Cromwell IV & VII mounting the 95mm howitzer in place of the 75mm L40.

Firefly - with the Challenger program suffering design problems, the Sherman M4A1 & M4A4 (being identical in performance) was hastily upgunned with the 17pdr prior to D-Day. It was originally thoturr

ught that the M4 et would suffer from the powerful 17 pdr recoil, however it was not the

case and proved a highly successful stopgap. Challenger - suffering design problems which led to a long delay before

entering service, it was based on an extended Cromwell chassis and mounted a very high turret with a 17pdr gun.

Comet - intended to be an upgraded Cromwell, the Comet ended up being a complete redesign. Due to the 17pdr's vicious recoil, the 77mm gun was developed & mounted in the new turret.

Valentine I-VII - this infantry tank proved to be one of the most reliable AFVs to enter British service. All variants from Mk I-VII were identical except for engine detail and minor turret layout. The

to the Soviet Union. Valentine IX-X -

the 2pdr. Turret crew was reduced back to two. Valentine XI - last production variant to see combat, it consisted of an

upgunned Mk X with 6pdr replaced by 75mm L40.

Churchill I - fearing trench warfare would return to Europe in 1939, the Churchill design was instigated. The 76mm L25 howitzer was mounted in the hull and the 2pdr in the turret. The Fire Order given for the Mk I relates to the 2pdr; For 76mm L25, use `FO=9'. The Churchill Mk II was identical to the Mk I except for the 76mm L25 being replaced with an LMG. All Mk IIs were rebuilt as Mk III & IV with many being shipped to the Soviet Union.

Churchill III-IV - two new turrets were developed for mounting the 6pdr in the Churchill. The Mk III used a welded turret while the Mk IV had a cast turret, the latter being favored more by crews. Characteristics for both were identical.

Churchill V - close support variant of the Mk IV, it mounted the 95mm L22 howitzer in place of the 6pdr.

Churchill NA75 & VI - during the campaign in Tunisia, quantities of Mk IVs were upgunned in the field by installing 75mm L40 guns (& mantlets) salvaged from wsuccessful that the introduction of the official variant, Mk VI, was accelerated. The Mk VI consisted of a Mk IV mounting the British 75mm L40 in place of 6pdr.

Churchill VII - the Churchill underwent a redesign in 1943 to produce an uparmored Mk VII variant. Still similar in appearance to earlier models, it had a new turret and increased armor on the hull. Speed dropped with the increase in weight.

Churchill VIII - close support variant of the Mk VII with 95mm L22 howitzer replacing the 75mm L40.

Churchill AVRE (Armo - based on the red Vehicle Royal Engineers) Mk IV with added applique armor. The main armament is a 290mm Petard Spigot Mortar which was loaded from outside the turret by the hull MG gunner. The normal roof hatch was enlarged to enable the 40lb projectile to be man-handled up to the muzzle. Once fired, the Petard mortar requires a full move to reload and can only be carried out if the turret is facing 12 o'clock. While reloadingas

, the hull MG gunner is exposed and can be fired at if within `hardcover'. The Churchill AVRE was capable of various tasks;

Fascine carrier, Bridge layer, Demolitions, etc. The crew were trained engineers and sappers and were capable of carrying out engineering tasks outside the AFV.

Churchill Crocodile - field kits were provided for installing a flame projector in place of the hull MG on Mk VIII tanks. Fuel was carried is a towed pressurised armored trailer.

PROPELLED GUNS Achilles - a US M10 Tank Destroyer rearmed with 17 pdr. Bishop - an SP version of the Valentine, consisted of the chassis with a

fixed crude superstructure fulAF

completely armored with an open backed

APC/

ly enclosing a 25 pdr in limited traverse. This V was not well liked by it's crew because of its slow speed, large size and

cramped interior. Archer - modified Valentine chassis mounting a 17 pdr which faced to

the rear. This AFV cannot move and fire in the same turn as the driver's position was directly behind the gun breech and had to be evacuated prior to firing to avoid the recoiling breech.

Sexton - as the Canadian Ram tank was considered obsolete by 1942, it was redesigned and manufactured into an SPA to replace the US M7 `Priest' in British service. Using a layout similar to the M7, the sides of the Ram were extended up and a 25 pdr gun mounted in an open-topped compartment with limited traversed.

Deacon - based on the Matador MAT (Medium Artillery Tractor), the chassis and drivers cab wereturret mounted at the rear. This turret had 320º traverse and gun crew were completely exposed from the rear to small arms fire.

RECONNAISSANCE AEC Mk I,II & III - based on the Matador Medium (4x4) artillery tractor,

this AC was slow and very heavily armored

hound had an

Daimler I-III - with the Daimler SC being so successful, a larger armored car version was developed with similar characteristics. It was the first British AC to mount a 2pdr gun having the turret that was used on the Tetrarch Light tank. Rear facing steering was available for use by the commander in emergencies.

for it's time. The Mk I was built with a Valentine II turret and armament. The Mk II had a more powerful engine and featured a new turret mounting a 6pdr. The Mk III was essentially the same as the Mk III except a 75mm L40 was installed in place of the 6 pdr. By all standards, this AC constituted the most potent AC to enter service in WWII, being the wheeled equivalent to a tank.

Staghound I & II - supplied under Lend-Lease, the Stagunreliable and noisy transmission which proved undesirable for a vehicle intended for reconnaissance work. It was a popular command & liaison vehicle due to it's spacious interior. The Staghound II was the close support version of the Mk I and mounted a 76mm L25 howitzer in place of the 37mm L54.

Stagho - the original MkI turret was replaced by an ex-Crusaderund III turret mounting a 75mm L40 gun (surplus from Crusader AA conversions.) Hull and chassis remained unmodified.

Staghound AA - standard Staghound hull & chassis with a small open-topped turret mounting twin .50 cal HMGs.

Humber II-III - based on the Quad (4x4) Field Artillery Tractor, the MkII was an the intermediate step to more sophisticated AC designs which followed. The Mk III differed from the Mk II by having a larger three man turret.

Humber IV - as per Mk III except the 15mm Besa HMG was replaced with the 2 pdr gun & coaxial LMG.

Humber Scout Car - this SC was cheaper to version of its Daimler & Lynx counterparts, having less armor and a more spacious interior. An additional passenger could be carried to the crew of two, making it a useful AOP vehicle.

Humber III/Otter LRC - Light Reconnaissance Car (LRC). The Humber III was rushed into production in 1940, built on a 8cwt 4x4 truck with a thinly armored body. The Otter was a Canadian version of the same design. Both designs were unsophisticated and chetop

ap, mounting a Bren LMG in an open ped turret.

Daimler Scout Car - nicknamed `Dingo', they were developed for a scouting and liaison role. Carrying a two man crew,

Lynx Scout Car - with the Daimler SC being so successful, Canada commenced production of a copy using different automotive components which lead to the Lynx SC.

52

odified open top turrets. Original mount AT rifle & Bren LMG. The actual vehicl

1924 Mar - manufactured in S.A

comme ith a light armored bod h larmed, histicated but very reliable. Both the AT

ere m topped turret. A mrsion dr gun but none en

combatMar IIIb - compared to Germ

Herringt under gunned and betwith captured enemy galian 20mm AA and 4

e n crews were exposedar (pa

Carr veloped to prprotectio e Bren LMG and Boys AT rifle. The Uni

ferred er') was employed iOP, g arrier, etc. All var

ame arriers consisted of either a Bren LMG oont gu optional Bren LMG in the rmpart mament can be remov

use out FV. The PIAT can also be fired from withls crew/passenge dba f team they are, or

e carri em, then they disembark aam, a of carrier it is. The carrieess thCarr ns existed, each mountie A had the Vickers built in

osition ow MMG with limited traverse, while thee MM rear with all round traver

cre mbark as a MMG Teamove o ess the team re-embarks.

Carr tar was speciallythe gunn fired from the Afired se y from the AFV as a 2” mortar team. The or fire unless the team re-embarks.

Carr dified with a Rith fuel ssenger compart

Car ern' - light 4x4 open tor built sed in a similar role to

ith spa A Boys AT rifle coounte e team can disembar

er cannot move or fire unless the team re-

r erted to carry and fireo the rear. Cannot beone turn prior to an

fM3A1 US

ght t Th ce the t o its speed. A pintle mounted LMG was added wi ers i the ll. cce and Kangaroo

ons ere tuall denti l, th tte in ainly in an APC role r to a Carrier.

Pr o a dian xt ore numerous, to A . ification carried

a r and p e over the gap. Rows of

th m tank was used in it's a ench turret it

u or LVT4 mounting s the hull. Refer US

) s Speed across water; 8cm/move.)

Morris Cs9/LAC - based on the Morris Cs9 4x2 15 cwt trucks with a light armored body. Stopgap measure until improved designs became available.

Rolls e 1924 - dating back to 1914, these W

Carrier LMG above. The carriembarks.

Royc WI AC were still in se ut with m ing an MMG, it was

Ca rier, Wheeled`Indian Pattern' 3" Mortar - conv a 3" m rtar from within the vehicle. The mortar faced t rvice b

replaced with an es used were 1920 o

dismounted. The vehicle is required to be stationary y & Pattern cars.

fri lt hfiring or the weapon to be calibrated.

Stu Kan mon Herrington I-III ca and bui on t e rcial Ford 4x4 chassis w y. T ey were poor y

art garoo/Recce - field modification of the Stuart M3 & Li ank. e turrets were removed by British Recon units to redu

unsop rifle and Bren LMG heigh f the tank and increaseong seats for ew ounted together in the open uch improved MkIV

ve was produced mounting a 2p tere service or saw al th pass ng n hu Both Reve w vir y i ca e la r be g used md

. rsi

simila mon Herrington IIIa & an ACs, the Marmon

s considerably eiest Kangar o - as the C na Se on became mer PCs The only modon wa en 1942-43, many

eplace uns. The two most numb s of Priests were convertedout w s to remove the 105mm hocrews r d the small turret w

common field modifications were It 7mm L34 gun, both mount limited traverse. Gu

witze latbench seats were installed inside.

ll of e Canadian Rad with from the sides and Ram Kangaroo - the hunre rtial protection only.)

ier`LMG' & Carrier`ATR' - de ovided mobility and origi l form as an APC. Removing the turret, the hull was gutted and bseats installed for passengers. The LMG mounted in the small forward

n for th versal Carrier (often oppos e the driver was retained. - L ere incorrectly to as `Bren Carri n many roles, such

A un tractor (6pdr), mortar c ied in minor detail. B ffalo MkII & MkIV US end L ase LVT(A)2

20mm Polsten Cannon and two MMG on either side Arm nt for C r Boys AT rifle in the LVT(A 2 & LVT4. (Amphibioufr nners location with an ear passenger co ment as an AA LMG. Ar ed by passengers for

side A in this AFV. Earlier mode seated 3, later 4 crew. If the rs isembark, they disem s either whatever type o erk a , if th y wish to take

er’s a s a LMG or AT Rifle th rmament with thte ccording to which type r cannot move or fire unl m re-embarks. e tea

ier `M ng a Vickers MMG. MG' - two versioSom ustralian built Carriers to the front gunners p as a b British version had th G on a pedestal at the se (crew exposed). The w and weapon can dise . The carrier cannot m r fire unl

ou a dier 2" Mortar - the light 2" mor m nted longsi e ompartment and could be diers c FV or smounted &

paratel carrier cannot move

ier Wasp - standard Carrier mo onson flame projector w tanks installed in the rear pa ment.

rier, Wheeled`Indian Patt pped armored scout ca a. Intended to be u in Indi the Universal carrier w ce for four passengers. uld replace the hull m d Bren LMG @ +2 PV. Th k as per the notes for

BRIT GUNS ISH

start r, the British arsenal was in the nising n

Th ent of , 4.5", ns which did not en

e. lack of firepower

in the early years. So much so, that s oke capability of the larger guns to

power. Lend-lease equipment helped q

At the of wa process of either om

heavy price on the battlefieldctic ickly relied on the smmoder their stocks of old WWI guns or adopti g c pletely new

ns. ter involved the developmtheir ta qu

desig e lat the 6pdr, 17pdr, 25pdr and 5 ter production for

make up for this lack of fireoffset the ality with quantity.5" combinatio

sometim This delay and the cost the British a u .

nk Guns S 1 S BRITAIN Range in cm PV AT/Ta ize 20 40 60 80 100 25 150 175 200 250 FO NOTE 36 40mm L50 2 pdr A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) to-hit base 3 HE 1943+

t. E 6 6 5 5 4 4 penetration +9pg -> 2 pdr Lt John Adap (11) (10) (8) (6) (5) 3 no H 9 8 7 6 4 73 57mm L45 6 pdr B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 HE 1943+ 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 5 5 +10pp APDS ammunition (11) (11) (10) (9) (7) (6) (6) (5) 4 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 90 75mm

L40 Mk V-VA * (11) (11) (10) (10) (9)

10 9 9 8(9) (8) (8) (7) (5) * Smk, WP 1944+

8 8 7 7 6 6 40 76mm L25 3” MI-IIA * (10) (10) (9) (9 () 8) (7) (6) (5) * Smk - - -

76mm L55 17 pdr B (11) (12) (11 15 14 14

pp APDS ammunition (11) (12) (11 23 22 21

- 143 ) (1 (1 13 1+58 ) (1 ( 20 1

- - - - 0) 0) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5

3 12 12 11 11 10 0) 9) (7) (7) (6)

9 18 17 17 119 ) (1 (1 77mm L49 Mk II * (11) (12) (11 0) 0) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) * 13 12 12

94mm L15 3.7” * (10) (9) (9 - - -

11 118 ) (8 ( -

1 10 10 9 9 7 ) 7) * Fires Smk ONLY -

69 ) (9 (95mm L22 Mk I * (10) (10) (9 ) 8) (8) (7) (6) * Smk,WP - - - - - - - - ) (8) (6) -> 95mm L22 Mk I HEAT (9) (9) (8 (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

00 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60PV 80 1 9) (8) (8) (7) (7) 6 Smk, WP 5 5 4 4 3

57 ) (9) ( 6

84mm L29 18 pdr B (10) (10) (10 7 7 663 B (10) (10) (10) (9 (88mm L28 25 pdr ) 9) (8) (8) (7) (7) 6 Smk 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 4

53

4 ) (8) ( 6 Smk, No Gun Shield - - - - - - -

4 88mm L15 25 pdr short B (10) (9) (9 7) (6) (5) 50 94mm L13 3.7” B (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk, WP - - - - - - - +0pg -> 94mm L13 3.7” HEAT 1943+ (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 6 6 6 6 6

(10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 8 Smk,WP - - - - - -

63 114mm L16 4.5” C - 54 290mm L4 Petard * (10) (8) (6) * - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOT ES 25 20mm L85 AA A (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 20mm L85 AA Dual * (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) * 3 3 3 2 2 2

B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9)

4 (7) 2 4 40mm L56 AA Bofors 6 5 5 4 4 3 B un Notesritish G AT/Tank Guns

40mThis

dard until 1942. Gun can be carried & fired `en 5cwt truck (or heavier) with 360º traverse. Gun can be fired

squGer

s also copied by the was introduced in June 1944. ntil March 1943. Gun can be

s we mounted on 25pdr carriages as a stop-gap until production of the carriages

eptember 1944. Not

m L50 2 pdr - light AT gun mounted on a tripod with 360º traverse. gun is treated as a `turret mounted' gun for AT Fire deductions with its

all-roissued to units as stan

und traverse. HE ammunition was available in early 1941, it was not

portee' on a 1by crew without unlimbering. The optional `Little John' adaptor was a

eeze bore attachment developed using the same principle as the man squeeze bore guns. All 2 pdr with this attachment can fire it every

ing AFVs. turn, but can’t fire HE. Can be used on any 2 pdr, includ57mm L45 6 pdr - replacement gun for the 2 pdr, it wa US and called 57mm M1. APDS ammunitionHE ammunition did not become available ucarried & fired `en portee' on a 30cwt truck (or heavier) with the gun facing either forward or to the rear.

75mm L40 QF - this gun used the same mounting as the 6pdr which meant ng A s.) QF AFVs armed with 6pdr's were easily be upgunned (includi C

stood for `quick firing' which meant the ammunition was one piece. Smoke n 1943, with WP rounds only becoming ammunition was developed i

available in June 1944. 76mm L55 17 pdr - when originally rushed into service, the barrel re

caught up. APDS ammunition was introduced in Sequipped with HE prior to June 1944.

77mm L49 - shortened version of the 17pdr designed for mounting on tanks only and using the same ammunition. Howitzers/Field Guns

weight howitzer developed for use in AFVs only.

84mm L29 18 pdr - ex-WWI artillery gun on a modernised carriage. 88mm L28 25 pdr - standard artillery gun. The original 25 pdr Mk I was in

fact rebored 18 pdr guns which were referred to as 18/25 pdr. A unique re w ng firing platform mounted under the gun.

hort - a shortened version of the 25 pdr field gun which bo blance to the original. It was produced in Australia specificall gle warfare and was nicknamed the `Baby 25 pdr'.

94mm L13 3.7" - mountain howitzer. HEAT ammunition became available st Japanese AFVs. Could be broken down for pack

94mm L ht weight howitzer developed for AFVs. Only smoke ammunition veloped.

95mm L eveloped as an infantry howitzer. Only saw service equipping various Cromwell & Churchill CS tanks.

114mm L16 4.5" - modified WWI howitzer. nged spigot mortar

use against fortifications. Nicknamed the ustbin'.

ic Cannon

76mm L25 3" - light

featu as the swingi 88mm L15 25 pdr S

re little resemy for jun

in 1943 for use againmule transportation.

15 3.7" - ligwas ever de

22 - d

290mm L4 Petard Mortar - muzzle-loaded short-rawhich fired a 40lb projectile for`Flying D AA/Automat

AA - three types of 20mm AA cannon were used by the British; Oerlikon, Hispano-Suiza & Polsten. The Oerlikon was the most common type in service while the less numerous Polsten was preferred. Self destructing ammunition was not developed until 1945 and these guns saw very limited service because of this. (ie, a non-self destructing AA shell fired at a plane is going to come down again...)

40mm L56 AA Bofors - Swedish AA gun which was widely export to many untries and used extensively by both sides during the war. Produced

license in UK & Hungary 1941+ and in US from 1942+. Prior to this, all guns were purchased direct from Sw en. Gun can be fired by crew with

20mm L85

counder the

edout unlimbering.

British Organisation IN Y BATTALION ’40 - ’4FANTR 5 T ch battalions made up an Infantry Brigade. hree su• an have trucks if the BEF. All sections/units without Carriers c• Radios issued to platoon level.

45 INFANTRY BATTALION 1940-‘y Qt Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have:

Infantry Battalion @ 12 PV) 1 Infantry Battalion HQ (1944-’45 - add 2 PIAT n/

- a

ort unit fielded intact

3 Infantry Companies 1 Support Company battalion supp 1 Support Company HQ (1 Company HQ Team + radio, 1 Rifle Team Rides, 2 carriers.) use only if company

6mm mortars, 2 carriers) (increase to 3 sections fr 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x 3”/7 om 1942) (1944 – ’45 - add 1 PIAT @ 6 PV each to each carrier in mortar platoon)

ntry platoon. 1 Carrier Platoon (13 x carrier, each with its own driver) Can carry one infa 1 MG Platoon (4 x Carrier ‘MMG’) 1 AT Platoon (6 x 2 pdr, 6 trucks) (1941 - 1942)

1 AT Platoon (6 x 6 pdr, 12 Carriers) (1943-1945) 1 Engineer Platoon (HQ + 3 squads as below, plus engineer weapons)

ngineer squad) (1944-’45 - add 2 PIAT @ 12 PV to each eInfan Company Infantry Company HQ 1940-43 (2 Co 1 p

trympany HQ Teams, 1with radio, 4 Rifle Teams) er inf co.

bove, but add 1 PIAT to one team) 1 per inf co. -

11 Infantry Company HQ 1944-’45 (as a3 Infantry Platoons Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ 1940-’41 (1 Pl. HQ Team + radio, 1 Boys ATR Team, 1 50mm mortar) 1 per inf pl. 1 Infantry Platoon HQ 1942-43

(as above, but add 1 PIAT to each team) (1 Platoon HQ Team + radio, 1 50mm mortar) 1 per inf pl.

1 Infantry Platoon HQ 1944-45 1 per inf pl. (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - 3 Infantry Section

Historical Section (do not use in gameplay) Infantry Platoon HQ Section 1940 - 1941 - (1 Off, 6 men, with 1 SMG, Boys AT Rifle, 50mm Mortar, and rifles, radinfantry Platoon HQ 1942 – 1945 - (1 Off, 6 men, with 1 SMG, 50mm Mortar, and rifles, radio)

o)

fantry Section - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 LMG, 9 rifles) fantry Company HQ Section - (2 Off, 2 – 4 NCO, 12 – 14 men with 2 – 3 SMG and rifles, radio)

IInInSupport Company HQ Section

54

Support Company Engineer Platoon - (1 Off, 4 NCO, 28 men)

40 - ’45 e and three to each motorised infantry brigade.

radios in the M3 scout cars or halftracks where relevant).

MOTORISED INFANTRY BATTALION ’

armored brigadOne was attached to each • Radios issued to platoon level, (plus

TORINo. Your Force Can Have:

MO SED INFANTRY BATTALION Qty Unit Type Motorised Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ 1 per inf bat. 4 Infantry Companies (Reduce to 3 Companies from 1942) -

nly take it co. not broken down)

MG Platoon 4 sections, each with 2 x Carrier ‘MMG’ (1 Carrier MMG team is Platoon HQ) (From ’44) battalion support unit

1 AT Company (From 1942) battalion support unit 1 AT Company HQ (o 4 AT Platoons (each with 4 x 2/6 pdr, 4/8 carrier) 1Motorised Infantry Company 1940

mpany HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 1 - 2 MMG, 1 - 2 trucks). 1 per inf co. s (Reduce to 2 Platoons from 1942) -

- nit

x carrier)

1 Infantry Company HQ (2 x Co3 Infantry Platoon1 Scout Platoon 1 MG Platoon (1942 – ’43) company support u 2 x MG Section (each with 2 x Carrier ‘MMG’. Treat one MMG Team as Platoon HQ) 1 x Mortar Section (2 x 3” mortar, 2 Motorised Infantry Platoon (From 1943 add 1 x PIAT to all HQ and infantry sections)

Q 1940 – ’43 (details below) 1 per inf pl.

uck) out Car)

ifle Teams, one with PIAT, M3 Halftrack) -

1 Infantry Platoon H 1 Platoon HQ Team + radio, 1 Boys ATR Team or 1 50mm mortar, 1 light truck (or M3 Scout Car in 1943) 1 Infantry Platoon HQ 1944-’45 (details below) 1 per inf pl. (1 Platoon HQ Section + radio, 1 Rifle Team + PIAT, 1 50mm Mortar, M3 Halftrack.) 3 Infantry Section 1940-’42 (1 LMG Team, 1 Rifle Team, 1 light tr - 3 Infantry Section 1943 (1 LMG Team, 1 Rifle Team with a PIAT, lt truck or M3 Sc - 3 Infantry Section 1944-’45 (1 LMG Team, 2 RMo ed Scout Platoon (From 1943 add 1 x PIAT to all HQ and storis cout sections)

PV) per inf pl. 1 Scout Platoon HQ (1 x Carrier ‘LMG’ + radio. Counts as HQ. + 30 1 2 ‘LMG’ Scout Section (1 x Carrier ‘LMG’) - 1 ‘AT Rifle’ Section (1 x Carrier ‘ATR’) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay)

en, 1-2 SMG, Boys AT Rifle OR 50mm Mortar, rifles, radio) 1 light truck , 5-7 men, 2-5 SMG, 50mm Mortar, rifles, radio, PIAT) M3 H/T.

1940 – ‘42 - (1 NCO, 5 men with 1 LMG, 0-1 SMG, rifles) 1943 - (1 NCO, 7 men with 1 LMG, 1-2 SMG, rifles, PIAT) 1 light truck or M3

n 1944 - '45 - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 LMG, 1-2 SMG, rifles, PIAT) 1 M3arrier ‘LMG’, rifles, portable radio)

4 SMG, 1 – 2 MMG, rifles,

RIGADE 1940-‘45 level and attached to infantry divisions when needed. one of the below tank squadrons per infantry company in your force.

Motorised Infantry Platoon HQ Section 1940 – ‘43 - (1 Off, 2 NCO, 3 mMotorised Infantry Platoon HQ Section 1944 - ‘45 - (1 Off, 2-4 NCO Motorised Infantry SectionMotorised Infantry Section Scout Car. Motorised Infantry Sec Halftrack. tioMotorised Scout Platoon HQ - (1 Off, 2 men, 1 CMo ed Scout ‘LMG’ Section - (1 NCO, 2 mtoris en, 1 Carrier ‘LMG’, rifles) Motorised Scout ‘AT Rifle’ Section - (1 NCO, 2 men, 1 Carrier ‘ATR’, rifles) Motorised Infantry Company HQ Section - (2 Off, 8-10 personnel, 2- radio) 1-2 trucks. INFANTRY TANK BThese units were held at Corps

than• you cannot have more

INF Y TANK BRIGADE 1940-‘41 ANTRQty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Tank Brigade 1940-‘41 1 Infantry Tank Brigade HQ (4 infantry tanks) 1 per inf tank brig.

attalions - 3 Infantry Tank Brigade BInfantry Tank Battalion 1 Infantry Ta 1 nk Battalion HQ (2 infantry tanks, 2 light tanks) per inf tank bat.

- 3 Infantry Tank SquadronsInfantry Tank Squadron

1 per inf tank squad. (equivalent to a company)

ron HQ (1 infantry tank, 1 light tank, 6 m/c, 1 carrier) ivalent to a platoon

1 Infantry Tank Squad5 Infantry Tank Troops (3 infantry tanks) equ - * Light Tanks are Mk VI, Infantry Tanks are Matildas. You can mix Matilda I and II in the same Squadron. Valentines can be used from 1941.

INFANTRY TANK BRIGADE 1942-‘45

o. Your Force CaQty Unit Type N n Have: Infantry Tank Brigade 1 Infantry Tank Brigade HQ (4 Cruiser & 2 AA tanks) (194 1 per inf tank brig.

s 4-’45 - 2 Command Tanks, 4 Cruisers)

5 ttalion support unit yer Troop (3 x Bridge Layer Tanks) 1944-’45 attalion support unit

3 Infantry Tank Brigade Battalion - AA Troop (2 x AA Tanks) 1944-’4 ba1

1 Bridge La bInfantry Tank Battalion

ttalion H1 Infantry Tank Ba 1 per inf tank bat. Q (2 infantry tanks, 2 lt tanks) (‘44-’45 - 4 infantry tanks, 2 light tanks) rons -

t unit 3 Infantry Tank Squad1 AA Tank Troop (8 x AA Tank) (drop from 1944-’45) battalion suppor1 Recon Troop (12 x Scout Cars, in 4 ‘platoons’ of 3 each) 1943-‘44 battalion support unit

dron (9 x Light Tank, 9 x Scout Cars, in 6 ‘platoons’ of 3 each) 1944-‘45 battalion support unit 1 Recon SquaInfantry Tank Squadron (equivalent to a comp

er inf tank squaany)

d. 1 Infantry Tank Squadron HQ (1 infantry tank, 2 CS tanks) 1 p 5 Infantry Tank Troops (3 infantry tanks) equivalent to a platoon - * Light Tanks are Mk VI, Infantry Tanks are Matildas. You can mix Matilda I and II in the same Squadron. Valentines can be used from 1941. * Infantry Tanks are Matildas or Valentines. Matildas can be used to and including 1943, Valentines to and including 1944. Churchills are the infantry

n armored brigade or division.

tanks used from 1944 – ’45. ARMORED REGIMENT 1940

de up the bulk of aThree such regiments ma

AR D REGIMENT 1940 MOREQty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have:

55

Armored Regiment 1940 1 Armored Regiment HQ (4 cruiser tanks 1 per arm. reg. ) 3 Armored Squadron - Armored Squadron

ron HQ (2 cruiser tanks, 2 CS cruiser tanks) per arm. squad. 3 Troop (3 x cruiser tank) (or 2 troops could have 3 x light tank) - 1 Armored Squad 1

MORAR ED REGIMENT 1941

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Regiment 1 Armored Regiment HQ (4 tanks, either A13, Stuart or Crusader) 1 per arm. reg. 3 Armored Squadron - Armored Squadron 1 Armored Squadron HQ (2 cruiser tanks, 2 CS cruiser tanks) 1 per arm. squad. 3 Troop (3 x cruiser tank) -

MOR

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AR ED REGIMENT 1942-‘43

Armored Regiment March 1 Armored Regiment HQ (4 x Stuart tanks) 1 per arm. reg. 2 Medium Armored Squadron - 1 Light Armored Squadron - Medium Armored Squadron 1 Medium Armored Squadron HQ (3 x Grant tanks) 1 per arm. squad.

oop (3 x Grant tanks) - 3 TrLi rmored Squadron 1 Light Armored Squadron HQ (4 x Stuart or Crusader)

ght A1 per arm. squad.

4 Troop (4 x Stuarts or Crusaders) - ARMORED REGIMENT 1944-‘45

No. Your Force Can Have: Qty Unit Type Armored Regiment March 1 Armored Regiment HQ (4 x Sherman, 4 x AA Tank) 1 per arm. reg. 3 Armored Squadron - Armored Squadron 1 Armored Squadron HQ (4 x Sherman) 1 per arm. squad.

man, and when available, 1 x Firefly was added, making 4 tanks) * 3 Troop (3 x Sher - * Another option is to have to 2 Shermans can have 76mCromwell instead of Sherman, and Challenger instead of Firefly. From 1944, up m.

1940-‘45 These units were held at Corps level or with an armored division.

RECCE/CAVALRY REGIMENT

RE CAVALRY REGIMENT 1940-‘41 CCE/Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Recce/Cavalry Regiment 1940-‘41 1 Recce/Cavalry Regiment HQ (4 cars) 1 per recce reg. 3 Recce/Cavalry Squadron - Recce/Cavalr1 Recc

y Squadron 1 per recce squad.

- e/Cavalry Squadron HQ (2 cars)

4-5 Recce/Cavalry Troop (3 cars) RECCE/CAVALRY REGIMENT 1942-‘43 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Recce/Cavalry Regiment

3 Recce/Cavalry Squadron - 1 Recce/Cavalry Regiment HQ (4 armored cars) 1 per recce reg.

Recce/Cavalry Squadron 1 Recce/Cavalry Squadron HQ (3 armored cars) 1 per recce squad. 5 Recce/Cavalry Troop (2 armored cars, 1-2 scout cars) -

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: RECCE/CAVALRY REGIMENT 1944-‘45

Recce/Cavalry Regiment 1 Recce/Cavalry Regiment HQ (3-4 Daimler/Staghound armored cars, up to 12 scout cars) 1 per recce reg.

- 4 Recce/Cavalry SquadronRecce/Cavalry Squadron

Squadron HQ (1 Daimler/Humber, 3 Staghound, 1 scout car) 1 Recce/Cavalry Support Troop (2-3 75mm gun halftracks or armored cars, 1 scout car) squadron support unit 5 Recce/Cavalry Troop (2 Daimler/Humber, 2 scout car) -

1 Recce/Cavalry 1 per recce squad.

* an alternative option is for Stuart tanks to replace armored cars, and turretless T8 tanks to replace scout cars.

ese attached to it.

ANTI-TANK REGIMENT 1940-‘45 • Each artillery brigade of a division had one of th• Radios from batteries and up.

INFANTRY DIVISION ANTI-TANK REGIMENT

o. Your Force Can Have: Qty Unit Type N Anti-Tank Regiment 3 AT Batteries see AT gun restrictions Anti-Tank Battery 4 Anti-Tank Troop (each with 4 x 2/6/17 pdr AT guns, all motorised) see AT gun restrictions

A ED DIVISION ANTI-TANK REGIMENT 1944-45 Qt

RMORy Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have:

Armored Division Anti-Tank Regiment 2 AT Batteries (same organisation as above) see AT gun restrictions

56

1 SP AT Battery - S -Tank Battery P Anti1 SP Anti-Tank Battery HQ (2 x Valentine) 1 per SP AT Battery

Troop (4 x 17 pdr/M10 SPs) - 4 SP Anti-Tank

• See artillery restrictions.

ARTILLERY • Larger calibre guns were held at corps level.)

No. Your Force Can Have: ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type Infantry Division Artillery Brigade Field Regiments (3 batteries, each with 8 x 25 pdr guns, all motorised) see artillery restrictions 3

Armored Division Artillery Brigade 1 RHA Regiment (3 batteries, each with 8 x Sexton or Priest SPs) see artillery restrictions 1 Field Regiment (3 batteries, each with 8 x 25 pdr guns, all motorised) see artillery restrictions

attached to it.

AA Regiment • Each artillery brigade of a division had one of these •

Radios from troops up.

AA REGIMENT Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AA Regiment 3 AA Batteries see AA Guns for restrictions AA Battery

p (6 x 40mm A o ed) see AA Gun r restr3 AA Troo A, all m toris s fo ictions

ATR TTALION 1944su formed an a e.

• Radios issued to platoon level. The attalion is e e P p one below, but has 12 jeeps attached to the mortar platooCom pdr with .

* from 1944, one battery was truck mounted 40mm AAs. PAR OOP BA -‘45 Three ch battalions irborne brigad

• glider borne b the sam as th aratroopany, with 4 x 6 8 jeeps )

n as transport, and an AT Platoon added to the Weapons

orce Can Have: PARA OOP BATTALIONTR

pe No. Your FQty Unit Ty Para on 1 Paratroop Batta Q

troop Battalilion H n/a

ies - pons C y e

on (6 x 3 ar, 1 PIAT ) (a ion b b weapon

3 Paratroop Compan1 Paratroop Wea omp (1 x Co. HQ Tan 1 Mortar Plato ”/76mm mort - 2

am alios

) batt n support unit

1 Engineer Platoon s normal sect elow, ut with additional engineer s) Paratroop Company 1 Paratroop Company HQ (details below) 1 per inf co. (2 Company HQ Teams, 1 + radio, 1 50mm m , 2 ams with PIAT e )

Platoons - ortar SMG Te , 1 Rifl Team

3 ParatroopPara op Platootro n 1 Paratroop Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team + o & 1 p f pl.3 Paratroop Section (1 LMG Team, 1 SMG Tea Rifle -

radi PIAT, 1 50mm mortar+ PIAT) er in m, 1 Team)

Historical Data (do not use in gameplay)

try n , CO, 5 men - AT, radio) fantry Section - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 LMG, 1-4 SM rifles fantry Company HQ Section (2-3 Off, 4-6 NCO, 11 io)

Finland ish Army throughout WWII was fa pared t pow ith little mechanisation. Grea

reliance was placed on the individual infantryman's initiative and high level of independence in combat. Also the fact that all the troops were perfectly used to sub-zero temperatures and that the bulk could ski put any invader at a great disadvantage. The Russians found out this the hard way. Although the Finns lost the 1940 Russo-Finnish War, they came out rich with experience and captured equipment. The Soviets lost ten times the casualties but also learnt many invaluable lessons.

Finnish equipment overall was obsolete and out-of-date. The bulk dated back to WWI. In 1944, large quantities of German AT weapons were ewed Soviet advance.

Infan Platoon HQ Sectio - (1 Off 2 N , w SMG, 50mm M rifle 2 PI

G, 9 ) ith 3-5 ortar, s, 1

InIn men with 50mm mortar, 1-2 PIAT, 6-12 SMG, Rifles, rad

The Finn irly small com o other Axis ers.It was strictly an infantry army w t

rushed in to stem the ren FINNISH EQUIPMENT LIST

PV AFV DATES PROD FR

27 6 6

116 BT 42 42-44 ? 6 211 StuG IIIG 43-44 ? 6

? 6

39-41 18 6 39 FT-17 SA 39-41 12 6 8 T26 m1933 41-44 ? 4

114 91 BT 5 41-44 ? 6

42-44 ? 6 222 T34/76 m1942 43-44 ? 7 303 T34/85 (Late) 44 ? 7

1 4249 KV 1 m1942 42-44 ? 7 111 T70A 44 ? 7

BA 20 BA 6 / BA 10

47 Vickers 6ton 1939 39-4466 Vickers 6ton 1940 39-44 238 KV 1 m194 41- 4 ? 7

216 Pz IVH 35 41-44 ? 6 87/94 41-44 ? 7 44

37 FT-17

999 T26 m1937 41-44 ? 6 100 T28 m1934 41-44 ? 7

T28 m1938 41-44 ? 7

99 BT 7 41-44 ? 7 224 T34/76 m1941

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 33 37mm L45 Bofors 39-44 112 3 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 39-44 ? 5

4 4

131 75mm L46 Pak 40 467 105mm L28 FH18 41-

44 45mm L46 M32 41-44 ? 6 29 75mm L16 M27 39-44 ? 4 53 76mm L30 M02/30 39-44 ? 5

76 41-44 ? 6 44 40mm L48 Bofors AA 41-44 ? 5

A 39-44 ? 4

30 37mm Pak 35/36 62 50mm L60 Pak 38

1-44 ? 4 2-44 ? 6 2-44 ? 7

44 ? 6

78 mm L41 M36

20 20mm L62 Madsen A PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39-44 - 4 180 105mm (per pair) 41-44 - 6 240 122mm (per pair) 41-44 - 6 300 150/155mm (per pair) 42-44 - 7 45 81mm mortar 39-44 ? 6 PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Field Car 39-44 ? 5

57

Germsoftsk 7 chart Motorcycle 39-44 ? 6

an Light Truck 39-44 ? 6 in Medium Truck 39-44 ?

TES PROD FR PV INFANTRY DA

7 44 ? 1 ? 4

? 5 15 LMG (Belt fed) Team 39-44 ? 4 13 LMG (Mag fed) Team 39-44 ? 3 26 MMG 39-44 ? 4 30 HMG 41-44 ? 5 6 AT Grenade Late 43-44 ? 4

? 3 13 13.9 Boys ATR Team 39- ? 4

8 Pzfaust 30/60

443 Molotov Cocktail 35ea Demolition Charge 3page39 AP Mine 39-44 ? 3 page39 AT Mine 40-44 ? 4 30 FAO Team 39-44 - 5 20 Radio 41-44 ? 5

Rifle Team 39-10 SMG Team 39-4410 Carbine Team 41-44

23 20mm s18 ATR Team 39-44 42

16 7.9 wz 35 ATR Team 39-44 ? 4 4 19 14.5 PTRD/S Team 42-44 ?

16 20mm Lathi/39 Team 39-44 ? 2 44 ? 2

16 Pzfaust 100 ? 3 9-44 ? 1 9-44 ? 5

FINNISH EQUIPMENT NOTES - No Finnish Gun Chart is given as all weapons employed were of foriegn purchase. - 37mm L45 was Swedish, 20mm L62 AA was Danish ( see Polish Guns.) - 37mm L45 Pak 35/36, 50mm L60, 75mm L46 and

were Soviet ( see Soviet Guns) The guns listed

was Swedish ( see British Guns.) - 75mm L36 was French (see French Guns) . -T26, T28, BT5/7, T34, KV 1, T70, BA20/32 were captured Soviet AFV's from the '40 conflict onwards ( see Soviet Armor.) - StuG I I IG & Pz IVH were from the Germans ( see German Armor.) - AT Grenades, 7.9mm wz 35 and Pzfaust 30/60/100 were German aid to stem the Soviet '44 attack. - 14.5mm PTRD/S AT Rifle was Soviet captured. - Artillery 75mm, 105mm and 81mm Mortar can fire smoke rounds indirectly - Finnish army can employ horse teams, ski -troops and

105mm L28 were German ( see German Guns.) - 45mm L46, 75mm L16, 76mm L30 and 76

cavalry. and 76mm L30 were not vehicle/tractor mm L41 - 75mm L36

from '41 towable.

onwards were captured, the others were bought pre-WWII. - 40mm L48 AA

Finnish Troop Class and Morale Rating Morale Rating Point Va Notes Unit/s Troop Class lue Modification

inland Elite no modi+50% o

F Offboard Artillery Veteran fication to PV All Other Units Veteran Elite r x 1.5 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers

or prior to 1939 and it's

y

bloodied but on the verge of major expansion with a large cache captured Soviet tanks.

V AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP

FINNISH ARMOR The Finnish Army had little experience with arm experienced andentire force at that time was made up of a few obsolete foreign tanks. The Russo-Finnish Winter War of 1939-40 left the small tank force ver

of

P 37 L22,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 10 C 6 47 Vickers 6ton m1939

66 Vickers 6ton m1940 37 L45,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 10 C 6 116 BT 42 114 L16 3 1 1 4 4 2 28 18 C 10

schargers; No AFVs equipped No AFVs equipped

Finnish AFV Notes:

Smoke DiRadios;One Man Turrets; none

Vickers 6ton Model 1939 - these British tanks were originally purchased without armament by the Finns who then fitted them with the small French 37mm SA gun.

Vickers 6ton Model 1940 - following the failure of the 37mm SA gun against Soviet tanks during the 1939-40 Russo-Finnish war, the surviving Vickers 6 ton tanks were upgunned with the 37mm L45 Swedish Bofors and a new mantlet.

Being used alongside captured T26 tanks, this model was also referred to as the T26`E' (the Soviet T26 was developed from the Vickers 6 ton anyway, so they were very similar in appearance.)

BT 42 - captured Soviet BT tanks were modified into SP Guns by removing the turret and fitting a fully enclosed armored superstructure around a British 115mm howitzer with limited traverse.

Finnish Organisation INFANTRY BATTALION 1939-‘40 • All transport was horse drawn. • During winter all infantry can use skis • Radios above regiment level only. INFANTRY BATTALION 1939-‘40 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Finnish Infantry Regiment 1939-‘40 1 Infantry Regiment HQ 1 per inf reg. 3 Infantry Battalion - 1 AT Platoon (2 – 4 37mm AT Guns) regiment support unit 1 Gun Platoon (2 – 4 75mm infantry guns) regiment support unit Finnish Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ 1 per inf bat. 3 Rifle Company - 1 AT Section (3 – 6 AT Rifle Teams) batalion support unit. 1 Mortar Section (2 x 81mm Mortar, horses and carts) batalion support unit. 1 Machine Gun Company batalion support unit. 1 MG Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team, 1-2 Rifle Teams) only use if co. not broken down 3 MG Platoons (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG, horses and carts) batalion support unit. Finnish Rifle Company 1 Rifle Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + horses, 1 – 2 Rifle Teams (1 has bicycles)) 1 per rifle co. 4 Rifle Platoons - Finnish Rifle Platoon 1 Rifle Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team) 1 per platoon co. 2 Rifle Groups (squads) 3 Rifle Teams - 2 Automatic Rifle Groups (squads) 1 LMG Team, 1 x Rifle Team - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Rifle Platoon HQ Section – (2 NCO, 2, with rifles) Rifle Group (Squad) - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 SMG, 9 rifles) Automatic Rifle Group (Squad) - (1 NCO, 6 men with 1 LMG, and rifles) Rifle Company HQ Section – (1 officer, 3 – 8 men, with rifles) Note: From '41-'45, there was a slight increase in automatic weapons, so 1 Rifle Team in each squad can be replaced by a SMG Team or a LMG Team. AT equipment such as Panzerfausts were available from 1944, so one Rifle team of each rifle squad can be given Panzerfausts during 1944. Radios crept in '42 onwards, to regiments, and maybe battalions.

58

FINNISH ASSAULT GUN BATTALION 1943-‘44

FINNISH ASSAULT GUN BATTALION 1943-‘44 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Assault Gun Battalion 1943-‘44 1 Assault Gun Battalion HQ (1 x StuG III, 1 x A/C, 2 car, 3 m/cycle) 1 per assault gun bat. 3 Assault Gun Company - Assault Gun Company 1 Assault Gun Company HQ (1 x StuG III, 1 x A/C, 1 car, 2 m/cycle) 1 per assault gun co. 2 Assault Gun Platoon (3 x StuG III) -

• See artillery restrictions.

ARTILLERY • Each infantry division had one artillery regiment.

ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Division Artillery Regiment 2 - 3 Artillery Battalion (2 - 3 batteries, first two with 4 x 75mm guns, third with 100/105mm) see artillery restrictions

FRENCH EQUIPMENT LIST

France With the exception of the Soviets, this was the largest army in Europe and appeared to be the biggest threat to the expansion of Germany. It was also one of the least strategically developed armies present, still relying on the static-front war of trenches and fortifications. As they had won the previous war, the French High Command was over confident and very inept. Artllery was still the pride of the army and the rnanpower was to provide the punch instead of the armor in any attack or counter-attack. The French were also in a transition period where new equipment was starting to be introduced. The bulk of the army still dated back to WWI, even the ammunition was antique with a large proportion of shells failing to go off. The defensive attitude also lead to a deliberate lack of motorisation and a heavy reliance on the horse.

PV AFV DATES PROD FR 37 FT-17 39-40 191 3 39 FT-17 SA 39-40 343 2 41 AMR33 39-40 ? 4 54 AMR 35 II HMG 39-40 400 4 52 AMR 35 II (25mm) 39-40 7 85 AMC 35 I 39-40 112 6 71 AMC 35 II 39-40 112 6 72 R35 39-40 1600 0 82 R39 39-40 90 6 86 AMX/R40 40 90 6 77 H35 39-40 345 1 87 H39 39-40 276 3 107 S35 39-40 400 2 96 D1 39-40 20 6 95 D2 39-40 100 5 152/168 Char B1 / B1 bis 39-40 320 2 127 Char 2C 39-40 ? 7 41 AMC P16 39-40 ? 5 64/55 Panhard P-178 a/b 39-40 360 4 31 Lorraine Schepp1er 39-40 387 4 27 AMX/Renault UE 39-40 6000 0

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 19 25mm L72 SA-L mle 34 39-40 ? 2 11 37mm L22 mle 16 39-40 ? 6 48 47mm L53 SA mle 37 39-40 ? 4 31 65mm L20 mle 06 39-40 ? 5 36 75 L19 mle 19S/28S 39-40 ? 3 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 39-40 ? 0 67 105 L19 mle 35B/34S 39-40 ? 1 24 20 L60 Madsen AA 39-40 ? 4 27 25 L60 Hotchkiss AA 39-40 ? 3 38 37mm L60 mle 29 AA 39-40 ? 5 PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39-40 - 0 180 105mm (per pair) 39-40 - 1 300 145/155mm (per pair) 39-40 - 3 350 194mm (per pair) 39-40 - 5 400 220/240mm (per pair) 39-40 - 6 15 60mm mortar 39-40 ? 3 45 81mm mortar 39-40 ? 3

PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Field Car 39-40 ? 4 soft Light Truck 39-40 ? 3 skin Medium Truck 39-40 ? 4 chart Light Half track 39-40 ? 5

Medium Half track 39-40 ? 7 Motorcycle 39-40 ? 4 Motorcycle Sidecar 39-40 ? 6 Tractor 39-40 ? 4 PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle 39-40 ? 1 13 LMG (Magazine fed) 39-40 ? 2 26 MMG 39-40 ? 2 30 HMG 39-40 ? 4 15 Flamethrower Team 39-40 ? 4 5ea Demolition Charge 39-40 ? 4 page39 AP Mine 39-40 ? 2 page39 AT Mine 39-40 ? 4 30 FAO 39-40 ? 3 20 Radio 39-40 ? 4 French Equipment List Notes - No standard SMG was issued - French army made extensive use of horse teams and cavalry - artillery 75mm, 105mm, 145/155mm and 81mm mortars can fire smoke rounds indirectly

French Troop Class and Morale Rating Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery Regular As unit rating no modification to PV Colonial Forces Regular Reliable no modification to PV whole force must be Colonial All Other Units Regular Poor -25% or x 0.75

Although purpose built military vehicles were grossly outnumbered by civilian vehicles in used, the former were entirely issued to combat units while the civilian types were relegated to supply, logistic and rear area transport units.

* you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers FRENCH SOFTSKINS Up until the mid 1930's, the French army relied entirely on the horse for hauling artillery, heavy weapons, supply and logistics. From 1935, the army commence a slow program of purchasing of military vehicles from various firms, both locally and imported with the intention of motorising various units and divisions. When German motorised forces stunned the world with their swift invasion of Poland in late 1939, the French army panicked and began purchasing large quantities of vehicles from any and all sources available (many of which did not get delivered before the German attack.)

When the Germans invaded the West on 10 May, the French army possessed a meagre 100,000 military vehicles, with a further 300,000 civilian vehicles requisitioned in the months leading up, (the latter being 4x2 types.) After the armistice in 1940, the French automotive industry continued to manufacture a variety trucks for the Wehrmacht until the country's liberation in 1944.

PV FRANCE Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Rhone 14R Motorcycle x 3 - A 55 19 1 - 8 Gnome & Rhone AX2 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 50 13 1 - 7 Peugeot 202 Light Car 4x2 B 60 16 1 -

59

13 Citroen 23, Renault ADK Light Truck 4x2 C 42 11 4 A 12 Laffly V15, Latil M7T1 Light Truck 4x4 C 45 19 2 A 14 Laffly W15T & S35TL Light Truck 6x6 C 40 23 2 B 17 Laffly S20TL, Lorraine 28 Light Truck 6x6 C 50 24 4 B 21 Citroen 45, Renault AGR Medium Truck 4x2 C 36 9 7 B 28 Renault AGK Heavy Truck 4x2 D 37 9 10 C 21 Laffly S45TL Heavy Truck 6x4 D 31 14 5 D 14 Unic TU1 Light Halftrack ht B 32 20 1 - 13 Citroen/Kegresse P17 Light Halftrack ht B 22 14 1 A 17 Citroen/Kegresse P19 Light Halftrack ht C 28 18 2 B 14 Unic P107 Medium Halftrack ht C 25 15 1 C 14 Somua MCG Heavy Halftrack ht D 20 13 2 D Rhone 14R Motorcycle - standard army solo motorcycle. Provision for rider

only, no passenger. Gnome & Rhone AX2 - standard heavy 3x2 M/cycle-sidecar combination

employed by the army. Optional pintle mounted LMG (mag fed) could be added for the sidecar passenger (at additional PV cost.)

Peugeot 202 - light commercial 4x2 militarised car. An pintle mounted LMG (mag fed) could be installed on the side opposite the drivers (at additional PV cost.) Also includes other various light civilian cars (Renaults, Citroens & Simcas) acquired and used in the same role.

Citroen 23, Renault ADK (4x2) - the Citreon 23 was the most common light 1« ton commercial trucks followed by the Renaults ADK, AGC and Peugeot DK5 & DMA. All these trucks were order in Sep 1939 during the panic of mobilisation and delivered in their thousands right upto June 1940.

Laffly V15, Latil M7T1 (4x4) - light off-road trucks used primarily as gun tractors for 25mm AT gun or 81mm mortar. As with all off-road vehicles and half-tracks built by Laffly, a pair of small anti-ditching wheels were built in under the radiator.

Laffly W15T & S15TL (6x6) - light off-road truck of extremely advanced design and exceptional cross-country performance. They were employed as gun tractors for light artillery (mainly the 75mm m1897.) The W15T was identical to the S15T except having a lower silhouette. The firm, Laffly, was the major supplier for cross-country trucks to the French army.

Laffly S20TL, Lorraine 28 (6x6) - both these trucks were special off-road carriers for the Dragon Portes (motorised infantry.) Numerous version were built; command/liason, troop carrier, mortar carrier, MG carrier and gun tractor. All were identical except for modification to the rear section.

Citroen 45, Renault AGR (4x2) - common types of medium 3« cargo trucks in service. Both used a conventional cab-after-engine design.

Renault AGK (4x2) - commercial 6 ton heavy cargo truck purchased in quantity between Sep 1939 and June 1940. The vehicle featured a cab-over-engine design similar in appearance to the AGR.

Laffly S45T (6x4) - militarised 7 ton heavy off-road cargo truck. The truck was distinctively Laffly with its protruding front end and anti-ditching wheels under the front.

Unic TU1 - light half track based on a Citroen car chassis and using the Kregress running gear with rubber band tracks. The vehicle was used built as a light command car and gun tractor.

Latil TARH - heavy wheeled tractors whose first use dated back to WWI. The design underwent modernisation during the 30's, and were in production upto 1940 and even further again under German occupation. The heavy tractor featured 4x4 drive and four wheel steering. The tractors were almost exclusively used to tow artillery 155mm or larger.

Citreon-Kegresse P17 - small semi-tracked prime mover for light guns. Except for the very smallest guns, it lacked carrying space to transport the entire gun crews which had to otherwise be transported some other way (ie. additional vehicles or on foot.)

Citreon-Kegresse P19 - these light half-tracks were specifically designed for the motorised infantry (fusilers portes) and featured the Kegresse tracked running gear. A number of variants were built; a command/liason version for HQ staff, an infantry carrier with bench seating at the rear, and a gun tractor version for towing light AT guns. This category also includes the less numerous Hinston 16CV half track employed in the same role.

Unic P107 - medium semi-tracked prime mover used for hauling light and medium artillery. This vehicle was the most common half-track in French service and used the Kegresse running gear with the rubber band tracks (that suffered from a very short life.)

Somua MCG - heavy semi-tracked prime mover. The design of this half-track lay with early Somua-Kegresse half tracks developed in the 1920's. The halftracks was used to tow heavy artillery and recovery of tanks being in tandem (two in-line). Its major drawback was the lacked of space to transport entire gun crews, the majority having to be transported via other means (additional vehicles or on foot.)

FRENCH MOTORISED GUNS PV FRANCE Descript Drive Size Speed Armamen Rd C/C

ion t

40 CAJ mle30 Berliet AA SP/Lt Truck 6x6 C 36 18 2 x HMG 28 25mm mle 38 Berliet AA SP/Lt Truck 6x6 C 36 18 25mm L72 56 47mm SA Laffly CdC AT SP/Lt Truck 6x6 C 40 23 47mm L53 69 75mm mle 97 Citreon/Renault AT SP/Md Truck 4x2 C 36 9 75mm L36 74 75mm mle 97 Conus For AT SP/Md Truck 4x4 C 42 17 75mm L36 d 62 40mm Bofors GMC AA SP/Md Truck 6x6 C 45 22 40mm L48 AA

CAJ mle30 Berliet - based on the light 1« ton Berliet VPR2 6x6 truck chassis. The vehicle was modified as a gun carriage with a flat platform over the rear to accommodate the dual 13.2mm HMG mounting and crew. The weapon had clear 360º traverse and no protection for the crew. Various field conversions existed with the same armament using the Laffly 6x6 or other vehicles, possibly outnumbering the official versions.

25mm mle38 Berliet - identical to the Camion de 13.2 except mounting the 25mm AA gun. No protection for crew provided. The 25mm AA gun was likewise mounted on various other trucks as field conversions (en porte.)

47mm SA35 Laffly CdC - self-propelled anti-tank gun based on the Laffly W15T 6x6 off-road truck. The vehicle had the 47mm SA35 AT gun mounted at the back facing the rear with limited traverse. The prototype originally had armor plating all-round with an open top. Production models however were rushed into service between May & June 1940 with the armor omitted except for the gun shield.

75mm mle97 Citreon/Renault - Vichy French forces in North Africa converted a number of heavy trucks in SP guns by mounting the 75mm mle

1897 gun on a rotating platform giving it 360o traverse. The gun retained its shield but the vehicle was otherwise unprotected. The weapon could not engage targets over the drivers cab.

75mm mle97 "Conus" Ford F60L - this field conversion was carried out by the Free French in North Africa and was based on the Canadian Ford F60L 4x4 3 ton truck using scavenged Italian tank turret components and 75mm mle1897 field gun. The gun had a 360º traverse although it could not engage targets over the drivers cab. The gun itself was armored in the front and sides and the truck had an armored front end, including an enclosed driver's cab. The name "Conus" came from the French officer responsible for its development.

40mm Bofors GMC - truck mounted AA gun based on the 6x6 2« ton GMC truck. These vehicles were modified in August 1944 to mount the 40mm Bofors AA gun on the rear with 360o traverse for use against air and ground targets. The vehicle required no out-riggers and crew were unprotected.

FRENCH ARMOR In keeping with the official French tactical doctrine of the late 1930's, tanks were nothing more than accompanying assault guns for the infantry. They were therefore designed to be slow, well armored and short ranged. In 1939, the French Army possessed over 3000 modern tanks - more than German could muster in May 1940. (That is, of course, if a tank with a one man turret could be called modern.) These were however divided and deployed all over France with little coordination or concentration of units.

During late 1939, attempts were made to form divisional size armored units (eg. DCR, DCL) but these were still forming and under training in May 1940. French armored units in general did not function well together and proved ineffective in the face of German Panzers, the only exception being the 4th DCR under DeGaulle which gave a commendable account as a fighting unit.

PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 37 FT-17 LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 5 4 B 4 39 FT-17 SA 37 L22 2 1 1 2 2 2 5 4 B 7 41 AMR 33 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 40 22 B 4 54 AMR 35 I HMG,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 34 18 B 5 52 AMR 35 II 25 L72,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 34 18 B 6 85 AMC 35 I 47 L34,LMG 3 1 1 3 2 2 25 13 B 6 71 AMC 35 II 25 L72,LMG 3 1 1 3 2 2 25 13 B 5 72 R35 37 L22,LMG 4 4 4 5 5 5 13 6 B 7

60

82 R39 37 L33,LMG 4 4 4 5 5 5 13 6 B 7 86 AMX/R40 37 L33,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 14 9 C 7 76 FCM36 37 L22,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 15 9 C 7 77 H35 37 L22,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 17 10 C 7 87 H39 37 L33,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 17 10 C 7 107 S35 47 L34,LMG 4 4 4 7 5 5 25 14 C 7 96 D1 47 L28,LMG 4 4 4 6 5 5 12 6 C 6 95 D2 47 L28,LMG 4 2 2 7 5 5 14 7 C 6 152 Char B1 75 L17,47L28,2*LMG 6 5 5 7 5 5 17 8 C 8 168 Char B1 bis 75 L17,47L34,2*LMG 8 6 6 7 5 5 17 8 C 8 127 Char 2C 75 L36,4*LMG 3 2 2 3 3 3 8 4 D 8 41 AMC P16 37 L22,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 16 C 7 64 Panhard P-178(a) 25 L72,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 48 14 C 5 55 Panhard P-178(b) 2*LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 48 14 C 4 27 AMX/Renault UE none 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 10 B - 31 Lorraine 37L none 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 10 B - 2 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped Radios; All S35, D1, D2, Char B1 bis & Char 2C are equipped as standard. For Panhard P-178, only platoon and company command vehicles are radio equipped. One Man Turrets; All AFVs except Char 2C and AMC-35. French AFV Notes:

- ex-WWI infantry tank.

French doctrine still considered artillery to be the dominant factor for any land battle, but the tactics employed were still hopelessly out-dated.

FT-17 AMR 33 - this light tank was accepted by the cavalry after deciding that

fully tracked AFVs were more practical for reconnaissance than wheeled ACs.

AMR 35 I & II - Variants I & II were identical except for the main armament, mounting either a 13.2mm HMG or 25mm L72 gun. There was a third less numerous model mounting an LMG. As the AMR 33 was under gunned, the AMR 35 quickly replaced it in production as the cavalry's reconnaissance tank.

AMC 35 I & II - this was the cavalry's combat tank, being more heavily armored & gunned than earlier AMR reconnaissance series. Variants I & II mounted the 25mm L72 & 47mm L34 guns, both with coaxial LMG. This was the only French tank to see combat with a turret crew of two.

R35 & R39 - light infantry tank which was slow, under gunned, but very well armored. Widely exported to pre-war French military allies. The R39 was a late production R35 which was upgunned with 37mm L33.

AMX/R40 - development of the R35 with AMX running gear fitted to provide better C/C performance. Majority were equipped with 37mm L33 with a small number still mounting the 37mm SA.

FCM36 - an infantry tank whose limited production was cut short for being too expensive.

H35 & H39 - entered service first with cavalry units and later accepted by the infantry. Its speed was twice that of the R35 but characteristics were otherwise very similar. The H39 was a late production H35 upgunned with the 37mm SA being replaced with a 37mm L33.

Somua S35 - built as a Cavalry tank, its modern design, thick armor, powerful gun & `all-cast' construction would have made this the best tank in 1940, except for the one man turret. The turret was identical to that used on the Char B1 bis.

Char D1 - the D1 was an unimpressive infantry tank introduced in the early 30's by Renault and was extremely unpopular with crews for being very unreliable and under powered. First French AFV to be radio equipped as standard and mount the 47mm L28 gun (semi-automatic.)

Char D2 - an infantry tank which was quickly superseded in production by the S35. Reasonably well armored, its impressive cast turret was used on both the latter Char B1 and S35 tanks.

Char B1 & B1 bis - main battle tank of the French Army. Although a modern design, this tank suffered from an extremely poor crew layout which limited its effectiveness in combat. The turret was crewed by one over-worked commander and the 75mm L17 howitzer in the hull was aimed and fired by the driver (which cannot be fired in the same turn if the AFV has moved.) Two LMGs were mounted, one in the turret and the other fixed in the hull alongside the 75mm howitzer. Neither of the hull mounted weapons could be fired while `hull down'. The `B1 bis' mounted the 47mm L34 gun while the earlier less numerous `B1' had a shorter semi-automatic 47mm L28 gun and less hull armor. Sixty captured Char B1 bis tanks in German service had the 75mm how. replaced by a flame projector. The hull gun is not effect by the ‘one-man-turret’ rule.

Char 2C - built as heavy `breakthrough' tank at the end of WWI, it entered service in 1921 and was the first multi-turreted tank in the world. It was manned by a crew of thirteen and mounted a 75mm L36 plus four MGs (one in front, one on each side & one in rear turret.)

Schneider AMC P-16 (M29) - an armored half track reconnaissance vehicle built in the late 20's for the cavalry. It was based on the Somua Kegresse (half-track) tractor and mounted a small turret over the rear of the driving compartment.

Panhard AMD-178(a) & (b) - 4x4 wheeled AC. Two variants were built mounting the 25mm L72 & LMG, or 2xLMG, in the turret. A command version had the 25mm gun removed.

AMX/Renault UE - light armored gun tractor built for towing the 25mm Hotchkiss or 47mm AT gun. Two vehicles were required, one towed the gun while the second towed a small ammunition trailer (both tractor crews dismounted to man the gun.)

Lorraine Scheppler - the only purpose built fully tracked APC to see service during WWII. Passengers rode in the small rear open topped compartment. Also used as a tractor for the 47mm L53 AT gun.

FRENCH GUNS By 1940, the pride of the French artillery was suffering from having large amounts of obsolete WWI guns and insufficient production to replace them with up-to-date designs. The vintage guns were inadequate for the Blitzkrieg, being both heavy & quite immobile with

horse drawn transportation. Ammunition stocks were also unreliable with the majority shells dating back over 20 years (WWI surplus.)

FRANCE Range in cm PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 19 25mm L72 SA-L mle 34 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 2 4 3 3 2 2 11 37mm L22 mle 16 A (10) (9) (6) 3 3 2 2 23 37mm L33 SA mle 38 * (11) (10) (9) (7) (5) * 5 4 4 3 2 27 47mm L28 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) * 5 5 4 3 3 2 33 47mm L34 SA mle 34 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) * 6 5 5 4 4 4 48 47mm L53 SA mle 37 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 8 7 7 6 6 6 5 4 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 31 65mm L20 mle 06 A - - - - - - (No g/shield) 4 Horse-drawn - - - - - - 34 75mm L17 SA mle 32 * (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) * - - - - - - 36 75mm L19 mle 19S/28S B (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk, Horse-drawn - - - - - - - 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk

61

8 8 7 7 6 5 4 4 3 67 105mm L19 mle 35B/34S C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk, Horse-drawn - - - - - - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L60 AA Madsen CMA A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 27 25mm L60 AA Hotchkiss A (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 38 37mm L60 mle 29 B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 3 5 5 4 4 3 3 French Gun Notes AT/Tank Guns

25mm L72 SA-L mle 34 - light AT gun. Towed by Renault UE tractor or Lt.truck. Not equipped with HE. In British service, gun can be transported & fired `en portee' on a 15cwt truck (or heavier) facing rearward.

37mm L22 mle 16 - obsolete punitive WWI infantry gun. Also employed as standard armament for infantry tanks. For cartage & transportation, this weapon counts as a heavy weapon, not an AT gun.

37mm L33 - designed as replacement tank armament for AFVs with the 37mm mle 16.

47mm L28 SA mle 32 - developed as tank armament only for cast APX turret. Most French AFVs guns were manually loaded with poor rates of fire. This gun was the first semi-automatic loader and suffer serious mechanical problems throughout its life.

47mm L34 SA mle 34 - specifically develop tank gun for the APX turret, superseding earlier 47mm mle 32.

47mm L53 SA mle 37 - divisional level AT gun. Towing vehicle was either a Lt truck or Lorraine 37L tractor. In German service, StGt 41 became available for use with this gun in late 1943, refer `Spigot Bombs'.

Howitzers/Field Guns

65mm L20 mle 06 - small mountain gun which could be disassembled for pack horse transport. No gun shield. Horse-drawn only.

75mm L17 - hull mounted howitzer on the Char B1 tank. 75mm L19 mle 19S/28S - mountain gun. Could be broken down for pack

horse transport. Widely exported. Horse-drawn only. 75mm L36 mle 1897 - famous pre-WWI gun. Widely exported and built

under license by many countries. 105mm L19 mle 35B/34S - standard medium artillery guns. Horse-drawn

only. AA/Automatic Cannon

20mm L60 AA Madsen CMA - licensed built version of the Danish Madsen 20mm AA gun.

25mm L60 AA Hotchkiss - intended for dual role as an AA & AT gun. Ground and vehicle mounted versions were used.

37mm L60 AA mle 29 - designed by the navy as a static mount AA gun, it was adopted by the army and built with a new carriage.

French Organisation INFANTRY REGIMENT • Three regiments were found in each infantry division. • Radios can be issued to regimental HQ, but not lower. Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: French Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Infantry Battalion - 1 Weapons Company regiment support company 1 Weapons Company HQ use only if field as a whole co. 2 x AT Gun Platoons (each with 3 x 25mm AT Gun) 2 x Mortar Platoons (3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) French Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 3 Infantry Company - 1 MG Company battalion support unit 1 MG Company HQ use only if field as a whole co. 1 Gun Platoon (2 x 25mm AT Gun, 2 x 81mm Mortar) 4 MG Platoons (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG) French Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (2 x Company HQ Team, 4 Rifle Teams) 1 per inf co. 4 Infantry Platoon - 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 1 x 60mm mortar) company support unit French Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team) 1 per platoon 3 Infantry Squads (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay)

• Radios issued to company HQs

Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Off, 2 – 3 NCOs, 3 – 4 men with rifles.) Infantry Squad (1 NCO, 10 men with 1 LMG and rifles.) Company HQ (2 Off, 5-9 NCO, 16 men, rifles)

MECHANISED INFANTRY BATTALION • Same as infantry battalion above, but entirely in trucks. • Also had the following additions/changes:

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: French Mechanised Infantry Battalion 1 MG Company was changed to the following: battalion support unit 1 MG Company HQ in 1 truck use only if field as a whole co. 1 Gun Platoon (4 x 25mm AT Gun, 4 x 81mm Mortar, 8 trucks) 2 MG Platoons (1 section, with 3 x MMG, 2 trucks) French Mechanised Infantry Company (addition) 1 MG Platoon (1 section, with 3 x MMG, 1 – 2 trucks) company support unit

• No radios.

AT Company • One was attached to each division.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AT Company 1 47mm Battery (4 x 47mm AT Guns) see AT gun restrictions

62

2 25mm Battery (4 x 25mm AT Guns) see AT gun restrictions

* See AFV chart regarding radios.

DCR ARMORED BRIGADE * One brigade formed the basis of an armored division, along with artillery and AT gun support.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: DCR Armored Brigade 1 DCR Armored Brigade HQ n/a

2 H39 Battalion - 2 Char B Battalion -

DCR Armored Battalion 1 Armored Battalion HQ (3 AFVs) 1 per arm. bat. 3 Armored Companies - DCR Armored Company 1 Armored Company HQ (2 Char B or 3 H39) 1 per arm. co. 3-4 * Armored Platoons (3 AFVs) - * 3 platoons if Char B, 4 platoons if H39 * There were also a number of independent companies based on the above format. Whole company is either Char D1, D2, B1 or H35/39.

DLM LIGHT MECHANISED BRIGADE

* See AFV chart regarding radios.

* One brigade formed the basis of a cavalry division, along with a motorised brigade of infantry, artillery and AT gun support.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: DLM Brigade

2 H35 Battalion -

1 DLM Armored Brigade HQ n/a 2 S35 Battalion -

DLM Battalion 1 Armored Battalion HQ (3 AFV) 1 per arm. bat. 3 Armored Companies - DLM Company 1 Armored Company HQ (2 AFV) 1 per arm. co. 4 Armored Platoons (3 AFVs) -

• Attached to armies.

• All the one type of AFV, either H35/39, R35/40, FCM, FT-17

INDEPENDENT ARMORED BATTALION

• See AFV chart regarding radios.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Independent Armored Battalion 1 Armored Battalion HQ (3 AFVs) 1 per arm. bat. 3 Armored Companies - Independent Armored Company 1 Armored Company HQ (3 AFVs) 1 per arm. co. 4 Armored Platoons (3 AFVs) - ARMORED CAR BATTALION • Two battalions attached to DLM and one to motorised divisions. • See AFV chart regarding radios. • All the one type of armored car. Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Car Battalion 1 Armored Car Battalion HQ (2 A/Cs) 1 per arm. car bat. 2 Armored Car Companies - Armored Car Company 1 Armored CarCompany HQ (3 AFVs) 1 per arm. car co. 3 Armored Car Platoons (3 AFVs) - ARTILLERY • Each infantry or armored division had two artillery regiments. • See artillery restrictions. ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Division Artillery Regiment # 1 3 75mm Artillery Battalion (3 batteries with 4 x 75mm guns) see artillery restrictions Infantry Division Artillery Regiment # 2 1 105mm Artillery Battalion (3 batteries with 4 x 105mm guns) see artillery restrictions 1 155mm Artillery Battalion (3 batteries with 4 x 155mm guns) see artillery restrictions Armored divisions had the same artillery as above, except with 2 x 105mm Artillery Battalions rather than one.

Germany The: German Army during WII was the most professional fighting force to enter the field of battle. Although it was defeated, its initial gains using the resources it had, were truly remarkable. The tactics and organisations used by the Germans were used by all the major powers to a large degree.

The actual strength of the German Army lay with the individual soldier and small unit leaders. Their weapons were also of top quality, even if lacking in numbers at times. Another advantage was their flexibility during the heat of the battle. Formations of ad hoc battlegroups from decimated regiments and divisions would often band together where other armies would have disintegrated.

The German army relied heavily upon transport, being over 70 percent horse drawn.

63

GERMAN EQUIPMENT LISTS PV AFV DATES PROD FR 49 Pz 1 39-41 1493 0 90 Pz IC 44-45 40 7 123 Pz IF 42-45 30 7 80 Pz II A - C 39-43 1754 1 85/95 Pz II D-E / F 39-43 1 141 Pz IIJ 42-43 ? 6

102 Pz 35(t) 39-41 298 4

115 Pz 38(t)E-G 41-43 846 2

80 PzJg 1 40-43 202 5

178 Marder III(t)M 43-45 975 2

165 Hetzer sIG 33 45 30 7

122 Flak pz IV 'Ostwind' 44-45 45 7

82 Pz II (Flamm) 41-42 155 5 95 Pz II 'Lynx' 44-45 100 6 137 Pz II 'Lynx' (Late) 44-45 30 7

103 Pz 38(t)A-D 39-42 565 2

103/115 Pz III A-D / E-F 39-42 673 3 125/141 Pz III G / H-J 41-43 2815 0 163/173 Pz III J1 / L-M 42-43 1969 2 148 Pz III N 42-45 700 4 98 Pz III (Flamm) 43-45 100 6 114 Pz IV A - D 39-43 663 5 134 Pz IV E - F 41-43 900 3 198 Pz IV F2 42-43 1200 2 216 Pz IV G - J 43-45 6094 1 330 Pz V 'Panther' 43-45 5976 2 299 Pz VI 'Tiger' 43-45 1354 4 465 Tiger II (Henschel) 44-45 439 5 450 Tiger II (Porsche) 44-45 50 6 722 Maus 45 2 7 193 P40(i) (Italian) 44-45 100 6 222/238 T-34/76 m42 / m43 42-44 50 7 109 StuG III A - E 40-43 822 6 183 StuG III F 42-45 8587 0 211 StuG III G 43-45 0 167 StuH 42 42-45 1211 4 190 StuPz IV 'Brummbaer' 43-45 306 5 164 StuG M43 75/34(i) 43-45 127 5 208 StuG M43 75/46(i) 43-45 29 6 171 StuG M43 105/25(i) 43-45 117 5

102 PzJg 35R(f) 41-44 174 6 167 Marder I 42-44 ) 6 180 Marder II 42-45 651 3 156 Marder II(r) 42-44 201 5 169 Marder III(t) (r) 42-44 363 4 192 Marder III(t)H 42-45 417 4

263 PzJg III/IV 'Nashorn' 43-45 494 5 217 PzJg 38(t) 'Hetzer' 44-45 2584 1 116 PzJg 38(t) Flamm 44-45 20 7 210 Jgpz IV/48 44-45 795 4 268 Jgpz IV/70 'Lang' 44-45 930 3 392 Jgpz V/ JagdPanther 44-45 392 5 491 Jgpz VI/ JagdTiger 44-45 77 7 412 PzJg VI 'Elephant' 43-44 90 7 111 siG IB 40-43 38 7 130 sIG II 42-43 12 7 146 siG 38(t)H 43-45 90 6 125 sIG 38(t)M 44-45 282 4

112 PzA II 'wespe' 42-45 679 4 152 PzA III/IV 43-45 714 5 199 SturrnTiger 45 18 7 116 PzA LrS(f) 42-44 94 6 178 StuIG 33B 42-44 24 7 63 Flak pz 38(t) 44-45 140 5 117 pz IV 'Moebelwagen' 44-45 240 4 112 Flak pz IV 'Wirblewind' 44-45 86 6

46 Sdkfz 250/1 41-45 3

76 Sdkfz 251/23 45 6

85 Sdkfz 250/7 41-45 5 81 Sdkfz 250/8 43-45 6988 6 77 Sdkfz 250/9 43-45 4 70 Sdkfz 250/10 41-45 4 102 Sdkfz 250/PaK38 42-45 7 50 Sdkfz 251/1 39-45 2 84 Sdkfz 251/2 40-45 4 60 Sdkfz 251/MMG 42-45 5 82 Sdkfz 251/9 42-45 4

72 Sdkfz 251/10 40-45 4 68 Sdkfz 251/16 43-45 5252 5 59 Sdkfz 251/17 43-45 4 74 / 78 Sdkfz 251/21 a / b 44-45 6 174 Sdkfz 251/22 45 6

33 kfz 13/14 39-40 187 6 46 Sdkfz 221/223 39-45 989 4 62 Sdkfz 221/sPzB 41-43 6 72 Sdkfz 222 39-43 3 88 Sdkfz 222(Late} 42-44 989 3 37 Sdkfz 247 39-42 58 5 72 Sdkfz 231/232 (6 rad) 39-40 151 5 84 Sdkfz 231/232 (8 rad) 39-45 607 4 93 Sdkfz 233 43-45 119 6 51 Sdkfz 263 39-45 240 6

Sdkfz 234/2 'Puma' 43-45 101 6

64/55 Panhard P-178 a/b 41-43 190 6

85 Sdkfz 234/1 44-45 200 5 13191 Sdkfz 234/3 44-45 88 6 185 Sdkfz 234/4 45 89 6 88 Aufkl pz 38(t} 44-45 50 7

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 23 20/28mm sPzB 41 41-43 ? 4

44 47mm L43 Pak 36(t) 39-41 ? 6

76mm L51 Pak 36(r) 41-45 ? 4

43 75mm L26 FK 18 39-45 ? 4

62 75mm L36 mle 1897 41-44 700 5

30 37mm L45 Pak 35/36 39-43 15000 1 48 42mm Pak 41 42-43 ? 5

62 50mm L60 Pak 38 41-44 ? 2 131 75mm L46 Pak 40 42-45 ? 3 182 75mm L58 PaK 41 42-43 150 6 111103 80mm L37 PAW 600 45 ? 6 49 88mm RPzBGr 44-45 ? 7 126 88mm L56 Flak 18/36 39-45 ? 3 209 88mm L71 Pak 43/41 44-45 ? 4 256 128mm L55 Pak 44 45 ? 7 36 75mm L10 LG40 41-45 ? 5 36 75mm L12 IG 18 39-45 ? 1 58 75mm L22 IG 37 44-45 ? 1

45 75mm L36 FK 38 39-45 ? 3 79 105mm L13 LG40 42-45 ? 5 67 105mm L28 FH18/36 39-45 ? 1 136 105mm L52 K18 39-45 ? 5 83 150mm L12 sIG 33 39-45 ? 4 104 150mm L30 FH18/36 39-45 ? 4 24 20 L55 Flak 30/38 AA 39-45 19000 1 48 20 L55 Flakvierling 38 41-45 ? 3 42 37 L60 Flak 18/36/37 39-45 ? 4 48 47mm L53 SA mle 37 41-44 ? 5 44 40mm L56 Bofors AA 39-45 ? 5

PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39-45 - 4 180 105mm (per pair) 39-45 - 1

2l0mm (per pair) 40-44 - 7

300 150mm (per pair) 39-45 - 3 350 170mm (per pair) 42-45 - 6 400

PV MORTARS DATES PROD FR 15 50mm 39-43 ? 2 45 81mm 39-45 ? 1 70 105mm 39-42 ? 6 100 120 43- ? 4

mm 45

PV ROCKETS DATES PROD FR 220 150 NbW 41 (per set) 41-45 ? 3 110 150 pzW 42 (each) 43-45 ? 6 400 210 NbW 42 (per set) 43-45 ? 4 450 300 NbW 41 (per set) 43-45 ? 5 150 280/320 sWG 40/41 41-45 ? 4 90 80mm R-VfW 43-45 ? 6 PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Kubel/Volkswagen 40-45 52000 2

soft Schwimmwagen 42-45 14000 3 skin Field Car 39-45 ? 3 see Light Truck 39-45 ? 2 soft Medium Truck 39-45 ? 1 skin Heavy Truck 39-45 ? 4 chart Light Half track 39-45 ? 4 Medium Half track 39-45 9000 3 Heavy Half track 39-45 12000 2 Tractor 39-45 ? 3 Motorcycle 39-45 ? 1 Motorcycle Sidecar 39-45 ? 3 Kettengrad 41-45 8345 4 PV TRUCK/SP DATES PROD FR

169 8.8cm FlaK 18(Sf) Zg 40-44 22 7

26 Kfz4 (le E-Pkw) 39-45 ? 5 36 Sdkfz 10/4 39-45 610 4 41 Sdkfz 10/4 armored 43-45 5 59 Sdkfz 7/1 42-45 319 5 63 Sdkfz 7/1 armored 43-45 6 65 Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 39-45 5 69 Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 armred 43-45 339 6 53 3.7cm PaK35/36 Zgkw 41-43 ? 4 93 5cm PaK38 Zgkw 1t 42-44 ? 6 147 7.62cm FK36(r) Zgkw 42 9 7 29 2cm FlaK30 m E-Pkw 43-45 ? 3 55 2cm Flakveirling s 4.5t 44-45 ? 5 150 7.5cm PaK40/4 Rpnsc 44 ? 7

PV SPIGOT GRENADE DATES PROD FR 22 37mm 42-43 ? 1 16 47mm 42-44 ? 4 10 50mm 42-44 ? 6 PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39-45 ? 1 10 SMG Team 39-45 ? 1 10 Carbine Team 41-45 ? 5 13 Assault Rifle Team 42-45 ? 3 15 LMG Team (Belt fed) 39-45 ? 1 13 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-45 ? 1

12 Mine detector 41-45 ? 3

20 Radio 39-45 ? 2

26 MMG 39-45 ? 2 30 HMG 44-45 ? 5 6 AT Grenade Late 43-45 ? 2 6 AP Rifle Grenade 41-45 ? 3 4 AT Rifle Grenade Early 40-43 ? 3 9 AT Rifle Grenade Late 43-45 ? 2 16 7.9m PzB ATR Team 39-42 ? 1 23 20mm s18 ATR Team 39-43 ? 3 8 Pzfaust 30/60 43-45 ? 1 16 Pzfaust 100 44-45 ? 0 24 Pzfaust 150 45 ? 3 15 Flamethrower Team 39-45 ? 2 5ea Demolition Charge 39-45 ? 2 page 39 Mine 39-45 ? 1 8 AT Mine 39-45 ? 2 5 Smoke Grenade 39-45 ? 3

39 Panzershreck Team 44-45 ? 3 30 FAO Team 39-45 - 1

30 FAC Team 39-45 ? 2 German Equipment List Notes - 47mm L53 SA mle 37 was a captured French gun which was used only in the Mediterranian - 40mm L56 Bofors AA is a Swedish gun purchased before the war and then later built under license. See British guns. - 75mm L36 mle 1897 is a captured French gun put on a PaK38 carriage and used only on the Russian Front

German Troop Class and Morale Rating

- 120mm mortar was a captured Soviet one, and must be towed by a vehicle (same size as a medium AT gun) - Sdkfz 251/7 is a 251/1 with an assault-bridge. Can only be used by engineers. - late war HMGs were aircraft guns put on ground mounts - artillery 150mm and below, plus 81mm, 105mm and 120mm mortars can fire smoke rounds indirectly - German forces can include horse teams, cavalry, and ski-troops.

Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery As unit class As unit rating Conscript –15% or x 0.85, Veteran no modification to PV SS/Paratroops Veteran Elite +50% or x 1.5 Volksgrenadiers Conscript Reliable - 25% or x 0.75 All Other Units Veteran Reliable +25% or x 1.25 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers

64

An explanation should also be provided on the "Kfz" numbering system used for the designation of vehicles. They were allocated on the size and role of a vehicle, not the make; ie. Kfz 70 refers to off-road medium sized personnel carriers and covered about a dozen different makes. On the other hand, a single vehicle could be issued with numerous "Kfz" numbers if it was employed for different roles, usually modified for each case.

(Note: refer to section on Motorised Guns for special rules concerning the armored types.)

GERMAN SOFTSKINS Throughout the war, the Wehrmacht suffered a continual lack of vehicles to fulfil its wartime requirements. Despite the ambitious policy of motorisation from 1935 onwards, the automotive industry failed to keep pace. Even with the industrial output of numerous occupied countries, mass requisition of civilian vehicles and large quantities of captured transport, the "horse" still played a major role throughout. By 1941, the Wehrmacht was operating over 600,000+ vehicles made up of 113 different types of trucks, 50 cars and 130 motorcycle types. This diverse automotive collection led to a logistical quagmire which was never really eliminated despite a rationalisation program which tried to reduced the different types in service to a more managable level. The majority of vehicles employed by the Wehrmacht were commercial types badly suited to the demands of battle. Continuous efforts were made to equip combat units with modern purpose built off-road transport but this more often failed.

French vehicles played major part after 1940 with the one Panzer and three motorised divisions being equipped entirely with French transport for Operation Barbarossa, 1941. After 1943, vast quantities of Italian trucks were also pressed into service as Italy fell under German control. The following list of trucks, cars, motorcycles, and halftracks is far from comprehensive and those listed below were the most common type made available to German combat units.

PV GERMANY Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 BMW R35, NSU 251 OSL Motorcycle x 2 - A 60 23 1 - 8 BMW R75, Zundapp KS750 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 55 18 1 or 2 * - 7 NSU Kettengrad Lt Semi-Track ht A 40 25 1 A 7 VW Kubelwagen Typ 82 Light Car 4x2 B 55 18 1 - 10 VW Schwimmwagen Typ 166 Lt Amphibious Car 4x4 B 55 18 1 - 6 Mercedes 170V, BMW 303 Light Car 4x2 B 50 13 1 - 8 le E-Pkw (Stowewer 40) Jeep etc 4x4 4x4 B 55 20 1 A 7 Adler 3Gd, Mercedes 830 Medium Car 4x2 B 55 15 1 A 9 AU/Horch, Opel Efm Medium Car 4x4 B 55 20 1 A 13 Horch 40, Steyr 1500A Heavy Car 4x4 B 50 22 3 B 13 Krupp L2H43, Steyr 640 Light Truck 6x4 B 46 18 2 B 22 Opel Blitz, Ford G917T Medium Truck 4x2 C 50 13 7 C 24 Opel Blitz, Mercedes-Benz Medium Truck 4x4 C 50 18 7 C 28 Henschel 33G1, Krupp L3H163 Medium Truck 6x4 D 45 16 9 C 31 Bussing-NAG, Saurer BT Heavy Truck 4x2 D 40 10 11 D 34 Bussing-NAG 4500A (4 ton) Heavy Truck 4x4 D 45 19 11 D 37 Tatra, Skoda (4 ton) Heavy Truck 6x6 D 40 19 12 D 18 Sdkfz 10 Demag (1t) Light Halftrack ht B 40 25 2 B 19 Sdkfz 11 Hanomag (3t) Light Halftrack ht C 37 23 3 C 20 Sdkfz 6 & 7 (5t & 8t) Medium Halftrack ht D 32 21 4 D 19 Sdkfz 8 & 9 (12t & 18t) Heavy Halftrack ht D 30 19 4 D 26 Mautlier Opel/Ford (2t) Light Halftrack ht C 24 15 7 C 16 Raupenscheppler-Ost Lt Tractor trk C 12 8 3 B

VW `Schwimmwagen' 4x4 Typ 166 (kfz 1/20) - amphibious car based on the VW Kubelwagen with a water tight hull, four wheel drive, new transmission and hinged propeller at the rear. Produced between 1942-44. A pintle mounted LMG could be added on the right side of the vehicle (LMG at

* German motorcycle sidecar bases can carry either 2 LMG (belt) Teams, 1 LMG (belt) Team & 1 HQ Team, or 1 of any other type of team.

BMW R35, NSU 251OSL - standard light solo motor cycles. Provision was made for a rear passenger in addition to the rider.

BMW R75, Zundapp KS750 - these were heavy 3x2 motorcycles with the outer wheel being powered. The lighter 3x1 models were rarely issued to forward combat units. The BMW and Zundapp were the finest motorcycles in the world, being copied by numerous countries including the Soviets. German motorcycle sidecar bases can carry either 2 LMG (belt) Teams or 1 of any other type of team.

NSU `Kettengrad' (Sdkfz 2) - small semi-tracked motorcycle designed originally as a gun tractor for airborne use. When towing a guns above 37mm calibre, there was no provision for carrying ammunition (must be transported via other means.) For movement purposes, treat as a Semi-tracked vehicle, not a motorcycle.

VW `Kubelwagen' Typ 82 4x2 (Kfz 1) - militarised version of the civilian Volkswagen Sedan. Although only 4x2, its light weight allowed excellent c/country performance. A pintle mounted LMG could be installed behind the front seats operated by passengers (LMG at additional.) This vehicle cannot be used for towing.

additional cost.) Mercedes 170V, BMW 303 4x2 (Kfz 1) - light passenger car based on

commercial touring car chassis with a militarised body. Phased out of production by 1943. These vehicles were not equipped for towing.

le E-Pkw 4x4 (Kfz 1) - purpose built light off-road passenger car made to the same specifications by various manufacturers. The main types used were the Stoewer 40, BMW 325 & Hanomag 20B. Production of all these types ceased in 1943, being superseded by the Kubelwagen.

Adler 3Gd, Horch 830 4x2 (kfz 11-15) - medium passenger car based on commercial touring car chassis with a militarised body. Other examples include various Ford Chevrolet models. Production of all these types ceased in 1943, being superseded by the Kubelwagen.

AU/Horch, Opel EFm 4x4 (Sdkfz 11-15) - purpose built off-road medium field cars made to the same specifications. Production of all these types ceased in 1943, being superseded by the Kubelwagen. The spare wheels were attached on free axle at the centre of the vehicle to prevent it bellying over rough ground.

Horch 40, Steyr 1500A 4x4 (kfz 21 & 69-70) - purpose built heavy off-road passenger cars. Other examples include the Mercedes L1500A and Phanomen Granit 1500A. The Horch was built in large numbers upto 1941 being overtaken by the Steyr 1500 which was built from 1941-44. The spare

wheels were attached on free spinning axle at the centre of the vehicle to prevent it bellying over rough ground.

Krupp L2H43, Steyr 640 6x4 (kfz 69-71) - light off-road trucks used for gun tractors or personnel carriers. The Krupp was nicknamed "Boxer" due to the shape of the front end. Other examples include the Daimler ADGR & Bussing NAG G31.

Opel Blitz, Ford G917T (4x2) - standard medium cargo trucks to the army. The Opel Blitz and Ford G series were the most common trucks, closely followed by the Mercedes-Benz L3000, Bussing-NAG 25 & Borgward 3 ToGW.

Opel Blitz, Mercedes-Benz (4x4) - the 4x4 truck superseded the 6x4 trucks in production at the beginning of the war, being cheaper to maintain with similar performance. These trucks were almost identical to their 4x2 counterparts and were prominently issued to combat units.

Henschel 33G1,Krupp L3H163 - a variety of 6x4 off-road cargo trucks were produced prior to the war with all but the Henschel 33G1 being taken out of production by 1940.

Sdkfz 10 Demag (1ton) - light semi-tracked prime mover for light AT & AA guns.

Sdkfz 11 Hanomag (3 ton) - medium semi-tracked prime mover for light and medium guns.

Sdkfz 6 & 7 (5 & 8 ton) - medium semi-tracked artillery prime movers. The Sdkfz 6 was unsuccessful and dropped from production in 1943. The Sdkfz 7 was the standard prime mover for the 88mm Flak gun and medium artillery in general. In 1943, the SWS tractor was introduced to replaced the Sdkfz 6.

Sdkfz 8 & 9 (12 & 18 ton) - heavy semi-tracked prime movers. The Sdkfz 8 was used primarily for hauling artillery and flak guns. The Sdkfz 9 was used for tank vehicle recovery work.

Mautlier Opel/Ford (2 ton) - Opel Blitz & Ford G917T cargo trucks modified with tracked running gear replacing the rear wheels. These conversions was first carried out by SS units in 1942 on the Eastern Front. Various other models of trucks were also converted, the Opel & Ford being the most numerous.

Bussing-NAG, Saurer BT 4x2 (4« ton) - heavy cargo truck. Other examples include the Bussing-NAG 500S & 4500S, and Mercede L4500S series models.

Bussing-NAG 4x4 (4« ton) - heavy off-road cargo trucks; Bussing-NAG-4500A, Mercedes L4500A (the "A" on each translated to "all-terrain", ie 4x4.) These vehicles were virtually identical to their 4x2 counterparts.

Tatra, Skoda 6x4 (6« ton) - the principal supplier through the war of heavy 6x4 cargo trucks was Czechoslovakia. These vehicles were used for carrying or hauling heavy guns, light tanks or engineering equipment (bridges.)

65

GERMAN MOTORISED GUNS PV GERMANY Descript Drive Size Speed Armamen Rd C/C

ion t

26 Kfz4 (le E-Pkw) Light AA Car 4x4 B 50 20 2 x LMG 36 Sdkfz 10/4 Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 20mm L55 AA 41 Sdkfz 10/4 (armored) Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 20mm L55 AA 59 Sfkfz 7/1 Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 20mm L55 Quad 63 Sfkfz 7/1 (armored) Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 20mm L55 Quad 65 Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 37mm L60 AA 69 Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 (armored) Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 37mm L60 AA 53 3.7cm PaK35/36 auf Zgkw 1t Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 37mm L45 93 5cm PaK38 auf Zgkw 1t Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 50mm L60 147 7.62cm FK36(r) Sf Zgkw 5t Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 76mm L51 29 2cm FlaK30 auf m E-Pkw Light AA Car 4x4 B 50 22 20mm L55 AA 55 2cm Flakveirling s Lkw 4.5t Md AA Truck 4x4 D 45 19 20mm L55 Quad 150 7.5cm PaK40/4 Raupenschpplr Md AT tractor trk C 12 8 75mm L46 169 8.8cm FlaK 18(Sf) auf Zgkw 12t Heavy AT h/track ht D 30 19 88mm L56 Kfz 4 (le E-Pkw) - standard Stoewer 40, BMW 325 or Hanomag 20B 4x4 field

car mounting a Zwillingslafette 36 dual AA LMG in the rear. The dual LMGs had a full 360o traverse.

Sdkfz 10/4 - purpose built AASP based on the light Demag 1 ton half-track. The 20mm FlaK 30/38 (with gun-shield) was mounted at the rear on a special flat platform at the rear with fold down sides. The FlaK gun had a clear 360o traverse for engaging targets.

Sdkfz 10/5 (armored) - identical to the Sdkfz 10/4 except with an enclosed armored drivers cab and partially armored front end.

Sdkfz 7/1 (armored & unarmored) - based on the 8 ton half track, the 20mm FlaKveirling was mounted on a flat platform at the rear with fold down sides and a clear 360o traverse for engaging targets. The gun shield from the FlaK 38 was retained for grew protection. The armored version identical with an enclosed armored drivers cab and partially armored front end.

Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 (armored & unarmored) - the Sdkfz 7/2 was identical to the 7/1 except mounting the 37mm FlaK 36. The Sdkfz 6/2 was a similar layout based on the 5 ton half track. The armored versions were identical with an enclosed armored drivers cab and partially armored front end. The gun-shield was included on some models.

3.7cm PaK 35/36 auf Zgkw 1t (armored) - field conversion carried out on the Eastern front, 1941. Consisted of light Demag 1 ton half track carrying a PaK 35/36 AT gun minus the wheels (or pedestal mounted.) The front end of the vehicle including part of the drivers cab were partially armored. The gun faced forward over the drivers cab with limited traverse.

AFV production amounted to over 80,000, with only 25,000 being Pz II - VI, and 17,445 being SPs and TDs, etc. The remainder were half-tracks and armored cars, etc. The number of Panzer Divisions peaked in 1943 with 32 divisions, although few were maintained at full strength. In the end, Germany's Panzers were swamped by the vast flood of Allied and Soviet armor, where no degree of tactical brilliance could help them.

5cm PaK 38 auf Zgkw 1t - identical to the previous 3.7cm Pak 35/36 auf Zgkw 1t except mounting a wheel-less 50mm PaK 38 AT gun facing forward with limited traverse. Conversion was carried out by SS units on the Eastern front late 1941.

7.62 FK 36(r) Sf Zgkw 5t - based on the 5 ton half track, the Russian 76.2mm M36 field gun was mounted in an armored box at the rear of the half-track with limited traverse to the front. The gun crew were protected all-round but the front end and drivers cab were completely unarmored.

2cm FlaK 30 auf m E-Pkw - numbers of heavy Horch passenger cars (s gl Einh PKW) were specially converted to FlaK vehicles. The vehicles were specially modified with a flat tray to mount the 20mm FlaK 30/38 (with gun-shield.) Fold down sides provided gun platform for the crew and a clear 360o traverse for the gun. Straight field conversion also existed with the AA mounted on unmodified bodies with gutted interiors.

2cm FlaKvierling 38 s Lkw 4.5t (armored) - consisted of the Mercedes-Benz L4500A heavy truck converted to a FlaK SP. The 2cm Flakveirling 38 (with gun shield) was mounted on the rear flat tray with fold down sides and four stabilising arms. The truck had an enclosed armored driver's compartment and partially armored front end. The gun could traverse 360º but cannot engage targets over the drivers cab.

7.5cm PaK40/4 Raupenscheppler-Ost - fully tracked gun tractor with pedestal mounted 75mm AT gun, having a clear 360º traverse. There were fold down sides enlarging the gun platform for the crew and the drivers cab was lightly armored.

8.8cm FlaK 18(Sf) auf Zgkw 12t/18t (armored) - two batches of these heavy AA/AT SP were built. The first ten built in 1939 were based on the Daimler-Benz 12 ton Sdkfz 8 half-track. The 88mm FlaK 37 was pedestal mounted on the rear of the vehicle with a fully armored front end and drivers cab. The 88's gunshield was retained for crew protection. The gun had a clear 360º traverse. The second batch of fifteen were built in 1940 based on the Famo 18 ton Sdkfz 9 half track. The vehicle was similar with a fully armored front end but no gun shield. The gun could not fire or engage targets over the drivers cab.

GERMAN ARMOR The shattering effect with which Germany opened up the war was due largely to the effort of the panzers and their crews. Their superior co-ordination and tactical control made up for their early inferiority in equipment and lack of numbers in all campaigns. Their success is also attributed to the close support given them by their armored infantry. When combined, these two were more than a match for their adversaries. Individually, German AFVs were characterised by their engineering sophistication and complexity. Coupled with insufficient standardisation, they were monsters to repair and to maintain in the field, and this was extremely time consuming. More over, the persistent

shortage of AFVs necessitated almost constant use, thus accelerating wear, tear, and the possibility of breakdowns. The large proliferation of so many types of AFVs and tank destroyers was a nightmare for supply echelons.

PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 49 Pz I 2 LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 25 12 B 4 90 Pz I Ausf C HMG,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 50 25 C 4 123 Pz I Ausf F 2 LMG 9 5 5 9 5 5 15 8 C 4 50 Pz Bef Wg I LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 25 12 C 3 80 Pz II Ausf A-C 20 L55,LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 25 14 C 5 85 Pz II Ausf D-E 20 L55,LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 34 16 C 5 95 Pz II Ausf F 20 L55,LMG 4 2 2 3 2 2 25 14 C 5 141 Pz II Ausf J 20 L55,LMG 8 5 5 9 5 5 19 9 C 4 82 Pz II (Flamm) 2*F/Thr,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 35 15 C 5 95 Pz II Ausf L 'Lynx' 20 L55,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 37 24 C 4 137 Pz II Ausf L (Late) 50 L60,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 35 22 C 7 102 Pz 35(t) 37 L45,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 22 13 C 6 103 Pz 38(t) Ausf A-D 37 L45,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 26 14 C 6 115 Pz 38(t) Ausf E-G 37 L45,2LMG 5 2 2 5 2 2 25 12 C 6 101 Pz III Ausf A-D 37 L45,3LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 25 13 C 5 113 Pz III Ausf E-F 37 L45,3LMG 3 3 2 3 3 3 25 14 C 5 125 Pz III Ausf G 50 L42,2LMG 3 3 3 4 3 3 25 14 C 6 141 Pz III Ausf H-J 50 L42,2LMG 5 3 5 6 3 3 25 14 C 6 163 Pz III Ausf J/1 50 L60,2LMG 5 3 5 6 3 3 25 14 C 6 173 Pz III Ausf L-M 50 L60,2LMG 6 3 5 8 3 3 25 14 C 6 148 Pz III Ausf N 75 L24,2LMG 6 3 5 7 3 3 25 14 C 7 98 Pz III (Flamm) F/Thr,LMG 7 3 5 8 3 3 25 14 C 4 114 Pz IV Ausf A-D 75 L24,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 25 12 C 7 134 Pz IV Ausf E-F 75 L24,2LMG 5 3 2 5 3 3 25 14 C 7 198 Pz IV Ausf F2 75 L43,2LMG 5 3 2 5 3 3 25 14 C 7 216 Pz IV Ausf G-J 75 L48,2LMG 8 3 3 5 3 3 24 13 C 7 330 Pz V `Panther' 75 L70,2LMG 13 6 5 12 5 5 29 16 D 7 299 Pz VI `Tiger' 88 L56,2LMG 11 8 8 11 8 8 24 10 D 8 465 Tiger II (Henschel) 88 L71,2LMG 21 9 9 18 9 9 22 10 D 8

66

450 Tiger II (Porsche) 88 L71,2LMG 21 9 9 13 9 9 22 10 D 8 722 Maus 128 L55,75L36,2*LMG 30 17 20 26 24 21 12 8 D 11 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 109 StuG III A-E 75 L24 5 3 3 5 3 3 25 15 C 7 183 StuG III F 75 L43,LMG 5 3 3 5 3 3 25 15 C 7 211 StuG III G 75 L48, LMG 9 3 5 8 3 3 25 14 C 7 167 StuH 42 105 L28,LMG 9 3 5 8 3 3 24 14 C 9 190 StuPz IV 'Brummbar' 150 L12 11 3 2 13 5 3 25 12 D 9 80 PzJg I 47 L43 2 1 1 2 1 - 24 12 C 4 102 PzJg 35R(f) 47 L43 4 4 4 3 2 2 13 8 C 5 167 Marder I 75 L46 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 10 C 6 180 Marder II 75 L46 4 2 2 1 1 - 25 14 C 6 156 Marder II(r) 76 L51 3 1 1 2 2 - 34 16 C 6 169 Marder III(t)(r) 76 L51,LMG 5 2 2 1 1 - 26 14 C 6 192 Marder III(t)H 75 L46,LMG 5 2 2 2 2 - 22 12 C 6 178 Marder III(t)M 75 L46 2 2 1 1 1 1 26 16 C 6 263 PzJg III/IV `Nashorn' 88 L71 3 2 2 1 1 1 26 14 D 8 217 JgdPz 38(t) `Hetzer' 75 L48,LMG 11 2 2 12 3 2 24 12 C 7 116 JgdPz 38(t) (Flamm) F/Thr,LMG 11 2 2 12 3 2 24 12 C 3 210 JdPz IV/48 75 L48, LMG 9 3 2 10 3 2 25 14 C 6 268 JdPz IV/70 `Lang' 75 L70, LMG 10 3 2 12 5 2 22 12 C 6 392 JdgPz V/JagdPanther 88 L71,LMG 13 5 4 14 6 5 26 16 D 8 491 JgdPz VI/JagdTiger 128 L55,LMG 21 8 9 25 8 8 22 10 D 9 412 PzJg `Elephant' 88 L71,LMG 20 8 8 22 8 8 12 6 D 7 111 sIG I B 150 L12 2 1 1 1 1 - 22 10 C 10 130 sIG II 150 L12 3 2 2 3 2 - 24 12 C 10 146 sIG 38(t)H `Grille' 150 L12,LMG 5 2 2 2 2 2 22 12 C 10 125 sIG 38(t)M `Grille' 150 L12 2 2 1 1 1 1 24 15 C 10 165 sIG 33 Hetzer 150 L12 10 2 2 7 3 1 20 10 C 10 112 PzA II `Wespe' 105 L28 3 2 2 1 1 1 25 14 C 8 152 PzA III/IV `Hummel' 150 L30 3 2 2 1 1 1 26 14 D 10 199 Sturm Tiger 380 Rkt,LMG 12 8 8 21 9 4 22 10 D 12 116 PzA LrS(f) 150 L12 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 8 C 10 178 StuIG 33B 150 L12,LMG 9 3 5 8 5 2 13 6 C 10 63 FlaK Pz 38(t) 20 L55 2 2 1 1 1 1 26 16 C 3 117 FlaK Pz IV `Mobelwagen' 37 L60AA,LMG 8 3 3 3 3 3 25 14 C 4 112 FlaK Pz IV `Wirbelwind' 20 Quad,LMG 8 3 3 2 2 2 25 14 C 4 122 FlaK Pz IV 'Ostwind' 37 L60AA,LMG 8 3 3 4 3 3 25 14 C 4 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 46 Sdkfz 250/1 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C 2 1 85 Sdkfz 250/7 81mm Mortar 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C - 81 Sdkfz 250/8 75 L24 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C 5 77 Sdkfz 250/9 20 L55,LMG 2 1 1 4 1 1 38 18 C 3 70 Sdkfz 250/10 37 L45 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C 3 1 102 Sdkfz 250/PaK38 50 L60 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 16 C 4 50 Sdkfz 251/1 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 2 3 84 Sdkfz 251/2 81mm Mortar 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C - 60 Sdkfz 251 `MMG' MMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 2 2 82 Sdkfz 251/9 75 L24 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 5 1 72 Sdkfz 251/10 37 L45 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 3 68 Sdkfz 251/16 2*F/Thr 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 2 59 Sdkfz 251/17 20 L55 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 1 74 Sdkfz 251/21 (a) 20L55 Triple 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 78 Sdkfz 251/21 (b) HMG Triple 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 174 Sdkfz 251/22 75 L46 2 1 1 1 1 1 30 14 C 5 76 Sdkfz 251/23 20 L55,LMG 2 1 1 4 1 1 33 16 C 3 33 Kfz 13/14 4x2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 43 10 B 2 46 Sdkfz 221/223 4x4 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 56 16 C 3 62 Sdkfz 221/PzB41 4x4 28 PzB41 1 1 1 1 1 1 56 16 C 5 72 Sdkfz 222 4x4 20 L55,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 53 15 C 3 88 Sdkfz 222 Late 4x4 20 L55,LMG 3 1 1 3 3 3 50 14 C 3 37 Sdkfz 247 4x4 none 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 14 C - 72 Sdkfz 231/232 6x4 20 L55,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 46 14 C 4 84 Sdkfz 231/232 8x8 20 L55,LMG 3 1 1 2 1 1 53 18 C 4 51 Sdkfz 263 8x8 LMG 1 1 1 2 1 1 60 20 C 3 93 Sdkfz 233 8x8 75 L24 3 1 1 2 1 1 53 18 C 5 85 Sdkfz 234/1 `Tatra' 8x8 20 L55,LMG 4 1 1 4 1 1 59 19 C 3 131 Sdkfz 234/2 `Puma' 8x8 50 L60,LMG 4 1 1 6 1 1 50 19 C 7 91 Sdkfz 234/3 8x8 75 L24 4 1 1 2 2 2 50 19 C 5 185 Sdkfz 234/4 8x8 75 L46 4 1 1 2 2 - 50 19 C 5 88 Aufkl Pz 38(t) 20 L55,LMG 5 2 2 4 1 1 26 16 C 3 Smoke Dischargers; PzI, PzII, PzIII, PzIV, Panther, Tiger I & II, Pz 35(t) & 38(t), all StuG III, JgPz IV/V/VI, Sdkfz 221 & 222, Sdkfz 231/232(8 rad) series, Sdkfz 234 series. Radios; All AFVs, except - sIG I B, Sdkfz 13/14 AC (only platoon/company command cars were radio equipped.) One Man Turrets; Pz I, Pz II (Flamm) & Pz III (Flamm). German AFV Notes: TANKS

Pz I Ausf B - the PzI Ausf`A' differed only in road speed (23 mph, 12 mph C/C) but was otherwise identical to the more numerous Ausf`B'.

Pz I Ausf C - the Ausf`C' was designed as fast reconnaissance tank and in no way resembled the earlier Pz I models. The main armament HMG was the rare EW141 MG.

Pz I Ausf F - the last development in the Pz I series intended as an assault tank with the heaviest possible armor the chassis could take. Like

67

Pz III (Flamm) - same as the Ausf`M' with 50mm gun replaced by a flame projector and internal fuel tanks. This AFV had a three man crew with the commander operating the turret entirely by himself (one-man turret.)

Tiger II (Porsche) - the Porsche Tiger II consisted of the Henschel chassis with the inferior Porsche turret. The turret had less armor than the He

many other vehicle designs, only a small batch were manufactured for field trials.

Pz Bef Wg I - based on the Pz IB hull, the sides of the superstructure were extended up to form a large compartment to house additional radio equipment. The armor listed is for the uparmored version which had additional armor added all round after Poland. For 1939, use armor values as per Pz IB.

Pz II Ausf A-C - the Ausf A,B & C varied little in performance and constituted the bulk of the panzer units until the start of 1941.

Pz II Ausf D-E - this unsuccessful design was intended as an fast cavalry tank and saw only brief service in it's original form. It was distinct from earlier models by its large road wheels.

Pz II Ausf F - identical to Ausf A-C except for increased armor on turret & hull front. By May 1940, 70% of the Ausf A-C had been uparmored to the same standard as Ausf`F' with the rest completed by the invasion of Russia.

Pz II Ausf J - an attempt to produce a heavy Pz II, it was very similar in concept to the Pz I Ausf`F'.

Pz II (Flamm) - rebuilt Ausf`D-E' with a fixed turret and two flame projectors mounted on the front hull.

Pz II Ausf L `Lynx' & (Late) - late war reconnaissance tank. No comparison to earlier Pz II designs, it incorporated new suspension, hull and engine. The Lynx was originally intended to be produced with an open-top turret mounting the 50mm L60 but only a handful of late production vehicle were built with this.

Pz 35(t) - a Czech tank confiscated by the Wehrmacht after their occupation of the country.

Pz 38(t) Ausf A-D - manufactured by Czechoslovakia under German supervision. Ausf`A' through to `D' were identical in performance with only minor differences.

Pz 38(t) Ausf E-G - identical to earlier Ausf A-D with armor protection doubled and minor layout changes.

Pz III Ausf A-D - these models were early designs which experimented with various types of suspension. All were similar in performance. They made up the bulk of the Pz IIIs used in Poland 1939 and were quickly scraped afterwards (except for the `D' with numbers serving briefly in Norway, April 1940.)

Pz III Ausf E-F - first standardised Pz III to be produced in quantity. All vehicles were built with the 37mm L45 and 30mm armor except for the last 100 `F's which had the 50mm L42. By 1941-42, surviving vehicles were upgraded to the same standard as the Ausf H by refitting with 50mm gun and additional armor plating.

Pz III Ausf G - the first production version to have the 50mm L42 fitted as standard. No 50mm gunned Pz III saw action during the invasion of France, 1940.

Pz III Ausf H-J - these vehicles were uparmored as standard with 50-60mm armor on the turret & hull front. Following the French campaign, all remaining Ausf D-G models were progressively upgunned and uparmored to the same standard as the Ausf H-J.

Pz III Ausf J/1 - was the standard Ausf J model upgunned with the 50mm L60 gun.

Pz III Ausf L-M - same as the Ausf J/1 with the addition of spaced 20mm armor on the superstructure and turret front. Production of the Ausf M was considerably reduced by the diversion of vehicles for Ausf N & Flamm conversions.

Pz III Ausf N - consisted of the Ausf`M' with the 75mm L24 howitzer (replacing the 50mm L60) and no spaced armor on the turret front.

Pz IV Ausf A-D - these models were identical in performance and were intended as support tanks as opposed to their latter role of `main battle tank.' Late production Ausf`D' were uparmored to the same as the Ausf`E'.

Pz IV Ausf E-F - these models were distinguished from earlier model by increased armor and improved road speed with a new engine and wider tracks.

Pz IV Ausf F2 - the Ausf F was upgunned with the 75mm L43 which replaced the shorter 75mm L24. Early production Ausf G were identical to the Ausf F2.

Pz IV Ausf G-J - the Ausf G was the last major upgrade undertaken for the Pz IV series. Subsequent Ausf H & J models differed in minor detail only, with skirts normally issued on turret & hull sides, though hull was often removed due to damage or need to access the tracks – not included in the PV.

Pz V `Panther' - introduced to counter the T-34, the Panther incorporated many of its design features such as sloped armor and wide tracks. As opposed to the Tiger I, the sloped sides of the Panther gave better protection for less armor and reduced weight. All models were identical in performance except for the early Ausf D which had no hull LMG (the radio operator had a pistol port for an SMG instead.) The Ausf D were rushed into service for the Kursk offensive.

Pz VI `Tiger' - despite being slow, unreliable and excessively heavy, the Tiger I did regain technical superiority over Soviet armor in 1943 and provide a much needed psychological boost for tank crews.

Tiger II (Henschel) - German translation is either `Royal' or `King' Tiger. The Henschel model was the standardised production version being preferred to the Porcshe. The Tiger II suffered from mechanical unreliability and it excessive weight. It was powered by the same engine as used in the Panther, but was twice the weight.

nschel counterpart and a dangerous shot-trap around the turret ring. Maus - many super-heavy tanks were on the drawing board towards the

end of the war, but the `Maus' was the only one to reach completion. Two were rumoured to have seen action against the Soviets. Built with such a low speed, it was strictly intended for defensive actions only. The 128mm & 75mm turret armament can both be fired in the same turn but only at one target (using the same Fire Order for both guns.) For Direct Area Fire, use both guns at same POA with their respective BZR.

SELF PROPELLED GUNS

StuG III Ausf A-E - based on the Pz III`E', the Ausf A-E models all had identical performance, differing only in superstructure layouts.

StuG III Ausf F - same as the Ausf`E' but upgunned with the 75mm L43. This conversion effectively changed the StuG role from `assault gun' to a `tank destroyer' role.

StuG III Ausf G - the Ausf`G', including late production Ausf`F', were uparmored as standard and mounted the longer 75mm L48 gun. An LMG & shield was also added for the loader on the superstructure roof. Side skirts on the hull were also often fitted, not included in the PV. The StuG IV was identical to the Stug III G in both armor and firepower with a road speed of 24mph.

StuH 42 - as per the Ausf`G' except 105mm L28 in place of the 75mm L48.

StuPz IV 'Brummbar' (Grizzly) - this assault gun was based on the Pz IV G-J chassis with a box shaped superstructure mounting the 150mm L12 howitzer. The hull LMG was only fitted on vehicles produced after June 1944. Side skirts were often fitted to the hull.

PzJg I - rebuilt Pz I`B', with turret removed and mounting a Czech 47mm AT gun with a small protective shield. Gun crew have partial cover from flanks and no cover from rear to small arms fire.

PzJg 35R(f) - captured French R35 light tank modified with an armored superstructure mounting the Czech 47mm L43 AT gun.

Marder I - captured French Lorraine Scheppler modified to mount 75mm Pak 40 AT gun in a rear open topped superstructure.

Marder II - built on the Pz II chassis mounting a 75mm Pak 40 gun and surrounded by an open-topped and rear armored superstructure.

PzJg II(r) Marder II - based on the Pz II Ausf D-E tank with a captured Soviet 76mm L51 gun mounted on a built up superstructure with an open top and rear.

Marder III(t)(r) - based on the Pz 38(t) hull with captured Soviet 76mm L51 gun mounted on a high superstructure. Crew was fully exposed from the flanks & rear to small arms fire.

Marder III(t)H - based on the Pz 38(t), mounting the Pak 40 instead of the Soviet 76mm L51. Open top and rear.

Marder III(t)M - previous Marder designs had high silhouettes and lacked proper crew protection. The Ausf`M' had the open topped fighting compartment moved to the rear making the AFV lower with all-round crew protection. Overall armor was thinner which gave a better road speed and improved engine reliability.

PzJg III/IV `Nashorn' (Rhino) - built on the hybrid Pz III/IV chassis with the 88mm L71 AT gun mounted in an open-topped rear compartment.

JgdPz 38(t) `Hetzer' - light tank destroyer based on the Pz 38(t)M chassis. Maximum protection was provided from the well sloped armor on front and sides. The roof mounted LMG which could be fired from within the AFV.

JgdPz 38(t) (Flamm) - standard Hetzer with the 75mm L48 replaced by a flame projector and enclosed in a dummy barrel.

JgdPz IV/48 - intended replacement for the StuG III, it featured the same gun with well sloped armor.

JgdPz IV/70 'Lang' (Long) - identical in appearance to the JgPz IV/48, mounting the longer 75mm L70 and increased frontal armor.

Jgpz V/JagdPanther - tank destroyer version of the Panther. The hull glacis plate was extended up to form the front of the superstructure and mounting the 88mm L71 in limited traverse. Best TD produced for the war.

JgdPz VI/JagdTiger - tank destroyer version of the Tiger II. A box shaped superstructure was built above the hull to mount the massive 128mm L55 gun. It is possible that half the SPs were equipped with 88mm L71 guns instead of the 128mm due to Allied bombing disrupting deliveries of the latter.

PzJg `Elefant' - Porcshe were so confident in winning the new Tiger design in 1942 that they produced a batch of 90 vehicles before getting the order. When the design was rejected, the hulls were re-manufactured into tank destroyers in time for the Kursk offensive, 1943. The hull LMG was only install early 1944 to the surviving tanks withdrawn from the front.

sIG I B - a rebuilt and over-stressed Pz IB (less turret) with a complete sIG33 howitzer, less wheels, mounted on top surrounded by a large shield on the front & sides. One of the few German AFVs not equipped with a radio. Open-topped and rear.

sIG II - the Pz II chassis was widened and lengthened to accommodate the 150mm L12 howitzer in a low open-topped superstructure.

sIG 38(t)H 'Grille' - built from Pz 38(t)H chassis, the 150mm L12 was mounted above the driver with an open-topped superstructure around the gun for crew protection.

sIG 38(t)M 'Grille' - identical chassis as used for the Marder III(t)M with modified superstructure for mounting the 150mm L12.

sIG 33 `Hetzer' - based on the Hetzer and modified to mount the 150mm L12 howitzer. Not equipped with roof mounted LMG.

PzA II `Wespe' (Wasp) - designed on the Pz II chassis with the 105mm L28 FH18 howitzer mounted in rear open-topped compartment.

PzA III/IV `Hummel' (Bumble Bee) - built on the hybrid Pz III/IV chassis with the 150mm L30 FH18 howitzer mounted in an open-topped rear compartment.

Sturm Tiger - built on the Tiger I chassis with a 380mm rocket mortar mounted in a large box shaped superstructure. Only twelve rounds of ammunition (plus one in the breech). Crew must get out of the AFV to load the gun, takes 2 turns per shell. Vehicle must be stationary. Note, Sturm Tiger companies had 4 Sturm Tigers, being two platoons of two each.

PzA LrS(f) - captured French Lorraine 37L tractors were modified to mount a 150mm howitzer in a rear open-topped compartment.

StuIG 33B - assault guns especially developed during the fighting in Stalingrad. Based on the unmodified StuG III F chassis, the 150mm L12 sIG33 howitzer was mounted in a fully enclosed bow-shaped superstructure. Production ceased with introduction of the `Brumbar'.

FlaK Pz 38(t) - consisted of the 38(t) chassis with the rear compartment modified to mount the 20mm AA gun with 360 degree traverse. Armored flaps had to be dropped for the gun to engage ground targets.

FlaK Pz IV `Moebelwagen' - based on the PzIV hull, the 37mm AA FlaK was mounted on top with all-round traverse. Folding armored sides provided crew protection. AA targets can be engaged with sides shields raised vertically. For engaging ground targets, shield must be down, meaning the AFV has open top, flanks and rear.

FlaK Pz IV 'Wirblewind' - the turret was removed from a normal PzIV H and replaced by a multi-sided open topped turret in which a Flakvierling 38 was mounted. Some were based on early Ausf F-G hull with less armor.

FlaK Pz IV `Ostwind' - a six sided open topped turret with a 37mm FlaK was mounted in place of the normal turret on converted PzIV H tanks.

APC/RECONNAISSANCE

Sdkfz 250/1 - light APC designed to carry a `half' section of PzGr infantry. Various 250 command/observation variants are not listed in the charts as these vehicle differed only in seating and radio equipment. The Sdkfz 250 Early (Alte) and Late (Neu) models were identical in performance.

Sdkfz 250/7 & 251/2 - the 81mm mortar could be either fired from the vehicle or debarked and setup on the ground. The vehicle is required to be stationary one turn prior to any firing for the weapon to be calibrated.

Sdkfz 250/8 - the majority of these SP versions were built on the 250 Neu with the standard field kit mounting the 75mm L24 (as used on the 251/9.)

Sdkfz 250/9 - this reconnaissance version originally mounted the turret as used on the Sdkfz 222. The 250 Neu used the Hf38 turret as used on the Sdkfz 234/1. Armament can be used against aircraft.

Sdkfz 250/10 & 251/10 - as the 37mm Pak35/36 became obsolete, they were requisitioned and mounted in place of the normal LMG on platoon and company command vehicles. It was a purpose built variant with many also being modified in the field. The size of the 37mm gun shield varied, some having it removed completely.

Sdkfz 251/1 - standard armored personnel carrier for a motorised/PzGr infantry section. Four models were produced, the Ausf A,B,C & D were all identical in performance. Ausf D was distinguished more by its simplified armor body and was the most numerous of the four types.

Sdkfz 251 (MMG) - the standard LMG mount was replaced by the heavier MMG mounting as used for MG 34/42. It enabled the MG to be used in a sustained fire role. The shield was removed.

Sdkfz 251/9 - Two types were produced, the Ausf A-C vehicles mounted ex-Pz IV 75mm L24 guns in the hull and the Ausf`D' vehicles mounted the gun above the driver and had extended front & side armor for crew protection.

Sdkfz 251/16 - engineers vehicle with flame projectors mounted either side of the vehicle (ie. can only fire in 180o arc each.)

Sdkfz 251/17 - two types were produced, the Luftwaffe version with fold down sides using the 251 Ausf A-C, and a late production version using an unmodified 251 Ausf D. An unofficial version existed and consisted of a 20mm FlaK gun simply dropped inside a 251/1. The Ausf D version was the only model designed to take passengers in addition to the crew.

Sdkfz 251/21 (a) & (b) - standard 251 Ausf D with an ex-naval triple AA gun mounting located in the passenger compartment. Weapons used were ex-Luftwaffe 15mm or 20mm MG151 cannons.

Sdkfz 251/22 - purpose built tank destroyer version mounting the 75mm Pak 40 (including the carriage less wheels.) The drivers roof was cut away to accommodate the gun.

Sdkfz 251/23 - reconnaissance version mounting the Hf38 20mm gun turret as used on the 234/1. Armament can be used against aircraft.

Kfz 13/14 - light passenger car with thin armor plating over the body. The vehicle was open-topped and was not radio equipped except for command cars.

Sdkfz 221/223 - light four wheeled AC. Both the 221 & 223 were identical in performance, the latter contained long range radio equipment for command & liaison purposes. Armament can be used against aircraft.

Sdkfz 221/PzB41 - standard 221 with a fixed turret and a 20/28mm PzB41 mounted in place of the MG to prolong the vehicles useful service life. Gun crew have only partial cover from flanks & rear.

68

Sdkfz 222 - modified version of the 221 with a larger turret mounting a 20mm cannon. Armament can be used against aircraft.

Sdkfz 222 Late - the late production models were uparmored in an attempt to reduce the vehicle vulnerability to infantry AT rifles & HMG fire. Armament can be used against aircraft.

Sdkfz 247 - armored command/staff car built on 6x4 or 4x4 truck chassis.

Sdkfz 231/232 (6 rad) - built on a 6x4 truck, this heavy AC was built to have better c/country performance than the standard light four wheelers. The 232 was distinguished by a large frame aerial and was otherwise identical to the 231.

Sdkfz 231/232 (8 rad) - the design incorporated many features revolutionary to ACs (such as all wheel steering and independent suspension.) Spaced armor was added to the front hull on many of the cars as extra protection against AT rifles which were the principal infantry AT weapons at the time. Two drivers were provided for in the front and back allowing it to be driven full speed in reverse.

Skfz 263 (8 rad) - command variant of the 231/232. The hull superstructure was extended up to provide a spacious interior. It was fully enclosed and had a bow mounted LMG at the front.

Sdkfz 233 (8 rad) - self propelled variant of the 231/232. This armor car was open-topped with the 75mm L24 howitzer mounted in the hull to the right (with limited traverse.)

Sdkfz 234/1 `Tatra' (Tropical) - designed for use in Nth Africa, it entered service a few years late. Replaced the Sdkfz 231/232 series in production. Two drivers were accommodated as with the 231/232. Armament can be used against aircraft.

Sdkfz 234/2 `Puma' - same as the 234/1, except the Hf38 20mm turret was replaced with a fully enclosed turret mounting a 50mm L60 gun.

Sdkfz 234/3 - self propelled variant of the original 234/1. The 75mm L24 was mounted on the front hull above the driver (limited traverse) with extended side armor for crew protection.

Sdkfz 234/4 `Pakwagen' - replacing the 234/3 in production, it mounted the 75

Tungsten cored APCR rounds were also introduced in mid-1941 for most AT guns but material shortages soon made supplies scarce and non-existent by 1943. With the set backs suffered on the Russian front during 1941 and the increasing presence of Soviet tanks all along the line, infantry gun/howitzers were all issued with HEAT ammunition to allow them some degree of AT capability.

mm PaK 40 with the intention of doubling as a tank destroyer. Aufkl Pz 38(t) - a late production Pz 38(t) with a modified superstructure

mounting the Hf38 20mm gun turret as used on the 234/1. This fully tracked recon vehicle was built specifically for the poor terrain of the Eastern front. Armament can be used against aircraft.

GERMAN GUNS German AT guns were without doubt the finest guns to see action during the war. Using their natural ingenuity, gun design through out the war managed to always out pace enemy AFVs with firepower. The optical sights and gun laying mechanisms were the best, which provided them with an unequalled technical edge. With industry struggling to keep up with the Wehrmacht's rapid expansion, vast quantities of sub-standard captured guns were pressed into service as a stopgaps. This lower overall quality of equipment and generated a logistical nightmare with the variety of gun types in service. While German AT guns were a step ahead of the enemy, the field artillery was well below standard in comparison to Soviet and

Allied counterparts. Field Guns and howitzers were characterised by their heavy weight and short range for the calibre. Over complicated designs meant production costs were steep and mobility of the guns in rough terrain was poor.

GERMANY range in cm PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 23 28mm L61 sPzB 41 A (11) (10) (9) (8) to-hit base 2 7 6 5 3 penetration 30 37mm L45 PaK 35/36 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 4 4 3 3 +22pp StGt 41 (HEAT) 1941+ (10) (6) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 48 42mm L56 PaK 41 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 No HE 9 8 8 7 5 4 3 44 47mm L43 PaK 36(t) A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 8 7 6 6 5 4 4 +16pp StGt 41 (HEAT) 1942+ (10) (7) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 42 50mm L42 KwK 38 * (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) * 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 62 50mm L60 PaK 38 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 9 8 8 7 6 5 5 4 3 +18pp APCR PzGr40 (11) (11) (9) (8) (7) (6) 4

69

14 12 11 9 8 6 +10pp StGt 42 (HEAT) 1942+ (10) (9) (6) 7 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 18 42 75mm L24 KwK 37 (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) 5 Smk 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 +18pg -> 75mm L24 KwK 37 HEAT ‘42 (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 101 75mm L43 KwK 40 * (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) * Smk 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 7 5 106 75mm L48 KwK 41 * (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) * Smk 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 6 131 75mm L46 PaK 40 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk 14 14 13 13 12 11 10 10 9 7 +13pp APCR PzGr40 (11) (12) (11) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 5 17 16 15 14 13 12 12 10 182 75mm L58 PaK 41 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 5 No HE 22 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 11 9 151 75mm L70 KwK 42 * (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) * 16 16 15 15 14 13 12 11 11 10 111 76mm L51 PaK 36(r) B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk 13 12 11 11 10 10 9 8 7 6 103 80mm L37 PAW 600 (HEAT) B (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 5 No HE 14 14 14 14 14 14 49 88mm RPzBGr (HEAT) A (11) (10) (9) (6) 6 No HE 11 11 11 11 126 88mm L56 FlaK 18/36 D (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 6 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 209 88mm L71 PaK 43/41 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) 6 22 21 20 20 19 18 17 17 16 15 256 128mm L55 PaK 44 D (11) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) 8 28 26 24 23 23 23 22 21 20 18 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 36 75mm L10 LG40 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - +15pg -> 75mm L10 LG40 HEAT 1942+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 36 75mm L12 IG 18 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - +14pg -> 75mm L12 IG 18 HEAT ‘42+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 58 75mm L22 IG 37 A (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - - ->75mm L22 IG 37 HEAT (9) (9 (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 43 75mm L26 FK 18 B (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 +18pg ->75mm L26 FK 18 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 45 75mm L36 FK 16nA B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - - - +21pg ->75mm L36 FK 16nA HEAT ‘42+ (10) (9) (9) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 79 105mm L13 LG40 B (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk - - - - - - - - -> 105mm L13 LG40 HEAT (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 67 105mm L28 FH 18 C (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk 8 7 7 6 6 6 5 4 4 3 +32pg ->105mm L28 FH 18 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 136 105mm L52 K18 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 12 11 11 10 +29pg -> 105mm L52 K18 HEAT ‘42+ (10) (11) (11) (10) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 83 150mm L12 sIG 33 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 Smk - - - - - - - +21pg ->150mm L12 sIG 33 HEAT ‘42+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 16 16 16 16 16 104 150mm L30 FH 18/36 D (10) (10) (9) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 9 - - - - - - - - - +37pg -> 150mm L30 FH 18/36 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 46 380mm L5 Rkt-Launcher * (10) (8) (6) *

70

- - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L55 AA FlaK 30/38 A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 48 20mm L55 AA Flakvierling 38 Quad B (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 36 20mm L55 AA MG151 Triple * (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) * 3 2 2 2 2 42 37mm L60 AA FlaK 18/36/37 B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 2 6 5 5 4 4 3 +22pp ->StGt 41 HEAT ‘42+ (10) (6) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 German Gun Notes AT/Tank Guns

20/28mm sPzB 41 - squeeze bore gun with the barrel tapering from 28mm down to 20mm at the muzzle. Designated as a heavy AT rifle, it could be broken down for pack-horse transport. A special light weight version for the airborne units was produced. Gun can be carried & fired `en portee' on a Lt truck or h/track (or heavier) facing to the rear.

37mm L45 Pak 35/36 - this weapon set the standard for pre-war AT guns, being extensively manufactured under license & copied by many countries around the world. StGt 41 became available for use with this gun in late 1941, refer to `Spigot Bombs'. Gun can be carried & fired `en portee' on a Lt truck or h/track (or heavier) facing to either the front or rear. Spigot bombs cannot be used on AFVs unless the AFV notes state otherwise.

42/29mm Pak 41 - second taper bore gun to be produced. The barrel tapered from 42mm to 29.4mm and was mounted on the PaK 35/36 carriage.

47mm L43 Pak 36(t) - ex-Czech AT gun which was used in both it's original form (split tail two wheeled carriage) or mounted on AFV chassis as a tank destroyer. StGt 41 became available for use with this gun in early ‘42, refer to ‘Spigot Bombs.’ Spigot bombs cannot be used on AFVs unless the AFV notes state otherwise.

50mm L42 KwK 38 - specifically developed for mounting in tanks. Replaced the 37mm KwK in earlier Pz III models and was usually referred to as the `Short 50mm'.

50mm L60 Pak 38 - standard AT gun replacing the 37mm PaK 35/36. StGt 42 became available for use with this gun in early 1942, refer to ‘Spigot Bombs’. Gun can be carried & fired `en portee' on a Md truck (or heavier) facing to the rear. Spigot bombs cannot be used on AFVs unless the AFV notes state otherwise.

75mm L24 KwK 37 - close support armament for tanks, originally intended to fire only HE.

88mm L71 Pak 43 - the success of the 88mm FlaK lead to the PaK 43 purpose built version being manufactured. The original PaK 43 was lower than the original `88' with a turn-table giving 360º traverse (treat as turret gun). The latter stopgap PaK 41/43 version had the gun mounted on a heavier less-mobile split trail howitzer carriage. This category also includes the less numerous FlaK 41 AA of the same calibre & length. FlaK 41 can be fired by the crew while still limbered.

75mm L43 & L48 KwK 40 & 41 - developed from the PaK 40 and specifically built as tank armament to replace the shorter 75mm L24. Both L43 & L48 guns were mechanically interchangeable with the L48 having slightly better performance.

75mm L46 Pak 40 - standard AT gun replacing the earlier PaK 38. The design itself was a scaled up version of the 50mm PaK 38. Variants to the PaK 40 design included an artillery version mounted on a heavier 105mm carriage and a shortened infantry model. The PaK 40 was actually introduced late 1941 but didn't see combat until earlier 1942. The APCR ammunition was introduced in mid-1942.

75/55mm L58 PaK 41 - tapered bore gun designed to compete with the PaK 40. The shortage of tungsten cored rounds meant its service life was brief and it was used until ammunition stock were depleted. Calibre started at 75mm & reduced to 55mm at the muzzle.

75mm L70 KwK 42 - high velocity gun specifically developed for mounting in AFVs. Smoke ammunition was never developed for this & other high velocity guns (88mm) because the rounds disintegrate too quickly on impact without adequate dispersal of the smoke producing filler.

76mm L51 Pak 36(r) - captured ex-Soviet 76mm M36 gun re-chambered to take 75mm PaK 40 ammunition.

80mm L37 PAW 600 - light weight gun which operated on a high-low pressure system to propel a low velocity fin stabilised HEAT round. The gun itself was extremely light. Use the 47mm L40 on To-Hit Table for all Direct Fire.

88mm RPzBGr - basically an 88mm Panzerschreck RP43 with the rear end sealed with a breach and mounted on a light carriage. Use the 37mm L40 on To-Hit Table for all Direct Fire. No HE rocket was produced.

88mm L56 Flak 18/36 - famous `88' pre-war AA gun with the dual ability of engaging ground & air targets. The `88' was very large and a hard

piece to conceal. All FlaK 18, 36 & 37 version were identical in performance. Gun can be fired by crew without unlimbering, and was on a turn-table giving 360º traverse (treat as turret gun). Traverses as a C sized gun.

128mm L55 Pak 44 - delays in developing a strong enough carriage for this gun lead to numerous stop-gap versions being built on captured Soviet 152mm & French 155mm artillery carriages.

Howitzers/Field Guns

75mm L10 LG 40 - recoilless gun designed for use with airborne and mountain units. The barrel sat on the tripod with all round traverse. Could be broken down for transport by pack-horse. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and transportation.

75mm L12 IG 18 - light stubby infantry gun which used a unique `shotgun' type breech.

75mm L22 IG 37 - a stop-gap infantry gun made from ex-Soviet 75mm barrels cut down to L22 and mounted on PaK 35/36 carriages. A latter IG 42 model used the same barrel mounted on surplus PAW 600 carriages.

75mm L26 FK 18 - conventional pre-war field gun. Horse-drawn only. 75mm L36 FK 16nA - modernised WWI field piece. The original 77mm

calibre was standardised to 75mm by replacing them with new barrels. Horse-drawn only.

105mm L13 LG 40 & 42 - heavy recoilless gun built for use with airborne and mountain units. The barrel sat on a tripod with all round traverse. The crew had to evacuate gun position prior to firing due to the backblast. Could be broken down for transport by pack-horse.

105mm L28 FH 18 - standard medium field howitzer. The FH18 was a heavy gun for its calibre and a lighter version, FH 18/40 based on a modified PaK 40 carriage, was developed & built in limited numbers.

105mm L52 K 18 - heavy field gun designed for counter-battery work. On limbering up the gun, the barrel had to be retracted up the carriage, therefore, double setup times for this gun are used.

150mm L12 sIG 33 - heaviest infantry gun to see combat. It's weight in combat limited its flexibility in battle.

150mm L30 FH 18/36 - standard heavy howitzer. 380mm L 5 Rocket-Launcher - naval development for use against

submarines, it was taken up by the army as a close range weapon for clearing built up areas such as fortified buildings.

A /AutA omatic Cannon

20mm L55 Flak 30/38 - conventional light AA gun with the FlaK 30 design going back to WWI. The FlaK 38 was more reliable with a higher rate of fire. If being towed, gun can be fired by crew without unlimbering. Gun can be carried & fired `en portee' on a Lt truck or h/track (or heavier) facing to either the front or rear.

20mm L55 Flakvierling 38 - consisted of four FlaK 38 guns on a common mounting. Gun can be carried & fired `en portee' on a Heavy truck with 360o traverse.

20mm L55 Triple MG151 - ex-Luftwaffe aircraft guns acquired by the Army. The gun was electrically operated and was therefore only vehicle mounted.

37mm L60 Flak 18/36/37 - the original FlaK 18 was so large and heavy that all models were mounted on halftracks as SPAA. The latter FlaK 36 & 37 versions were lighter and became standard production after 1939. StGt 41 became available for use with this gun (including non-AFV Self Propelled Guns) in early 1942, refer to `Spigot Bombs'.

German Organisation INFANTRY REGIMENT • Three regiments made up a division • Radios issued to company level. • All transport was horse drawn. INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1939 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: German Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Infantry Battalion (only 2 battalions from 1942) - 1 Infantry Gun Company (2 pl. of 3 x 75mm infantry guns, 1 pl. of 2 x 150mm inf guns) regiment support unit 1 AT Company 4 platoons each with 3 x 37mm AT guns (1939-’41) regiment support unit 3 platoons each with 3 x 50mm AT guns (1942-‘43) regiment support unit

71

3 platoons each with 3 x 75mm AT guns, 1 platoon of 3 Panzershreck Teams (44-’45) regiment support unit German Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 3 Infantry Company -

3 x MMG Platoon (2 sections, each with 1 x MMG) battalion support unit 1 Infantry Weapon’s Company (1 Co.HQ Team) use only if not broken down

1 x Mortar Platoon, with two sections of 3 x 81mm mortar (1939-’41) battalion support unit 1 x Mortar Platoon, with two sections of 2 x 120mm mortar (from 1942) battalion support unit

German Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + radio, 0 - 2 LMG Team, 1 - 2 Rifle Teams) 1 per inf co. 3 Infantry Platoon - 1 Infantry Company AT Section (2 – 4 AT Rifle Teams) 1939-’43 only 1 per inf co. (attach to a platoon) 1 Infantry Company Mortar Section (3 x 50mm mortars) 1941 only 1 per inf co. (attach to a platoon) 1 Infantry Company Mortar Section (2 x 81mm mortars) from 1942 1 per inf co. (attach to a platoon) German Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team) 1 per inf. Pl. 3 Infantry Squad 1939 – 1943 (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - 3 Infantry Squad 1944 - ’45 (3 teams, consisting of 1 - 2 LMG Team, 0-1 Rifle or SMG Team, 1 Rifle Team with Panzerfausts) Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 - 3 NCO, 4 - 5 men, with 1-2 SMG and rifles) Infantry Squad 1939 – 1943 - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 LMG, 1 SMG, 8 rifles) Infantry Squad 1944 - ’45 - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 - 2 LMG, 2 - 3 SMG, rifles, 1 - 3 Panzerfausts) Infantry Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 - 4 NCO, 4 - 6 men, with 0 - 2 LMG, 2-4 SMG and rifles, radio) Infantry Company AT Section - (1 NCO, 7 - 9 men, with 2 - 4 AT Rifles, and rifles) Infantry Battalion HQ - (1 - 2 Off, 4 - 6 NCO, 36 - 39 men, with 2 - 6 LMG, SMGs and rifles, radio)

• Until 1940, Panzer and Light Divisions had a single regiment. From 1941, increased to 2. From ’43, renamed Panzer Grenadiers.

• Radios issued to platoon level.

MOTORISED INFANTRY REGIMENT

• In 1942-‘43, for Panzer Divisions, the Regiment was reduced to only two battalions

MOTORISED INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1939 - ‘43 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: German Motorised Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Infantry Battalion - (1 or more battalion is Armored. Mostly only infantry platoons replace all trucks with armored Sdkfz 251 halftracks) 1 Cannon Company (2 pl. of 3 x 75mm inf guns, 1 pl. of 2 x 150mm inf guns, 8 trucks) regiment support company 1 Cannon Company (2 platoon of 3 x 150mm SPs, 6 trucks) Late 1942 - ’43 regiment support company 1 AT Company (4 platoons of 3 x 37mm AT guns, 12 trucks) 1939-‘40 regiment support company

1 Engineer Co. (as for infantry co. but no Co. Wpns Pl) Late 1942 - ’43. Squads as below =/> 1 inf co., max 1 per force

1 Recce Platoon =/> 1 inf co., max 1 per force

1 AT Company (4 platoons of 3 x 50mm or 75mm AT guns, 12 trucks) 1941-‘42 regiment support company 1 AT Company (1 pl. of 3 x 75mm AT guns, 1 pl. of 3 x PzSchrecks, 4 trks) Late 42 - ’43 regiment support company 1 AA Company (4 platoons of 3 x 20mm AA guns, 12 trucks in total) Late 1942 - ’43 regiment support company 1 Engineer Platoon 1939-’42 =/> 1 inf co., max 1 per force

1 LMG Team (with Panzerfaust from ’43), 1 LMG Team, 1 Flamethrower Team, 1 truck

German Motorised Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ 1 per inf bat. 3 Infantry Company (1 could be replaced with a motorcycle company) - 1 MMG Company battalion support unit 1 MMG Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + Radio, 1 Rifle Team, 1 truck, 1 m/c base) (don’t use if pl. allocated to co.) 3 MMG Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG, 1 truck) 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 2 x 81mm mortar, 1 trucks) 1939-42 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x 120mm mortar, 2 trucks) Late 1942 - ’43 battalion support unit 1 x MMG Co. AT Platoon (3 x 75mm AT guns, 3 trucks) Late 1942 - ’43 battalion support unit German Motorised Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + radio, 2 Rifle Teams, 1 truck, 1 m/c base) 1 per inf co. 3 Infantry Platoon - 1 Infantry Company AT Section 1939-’40 (3 – 4 AT Rifle Teams, 1 truck) 1 per inf co. (attach to a platoon) 1 Infantry Company Weapons Platoon 42-‘43 (as below) company support unit 3 sections, being 2 MG sections of 2 x MMG, 1 truck, 1 mortar section of 2 x 81mm mortar, 1 truck) German Motorised Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 Rifle Team, 1 truck) 1 per platoon 4 Infantry Squads 1939-’40 (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams, 1 truck) - 3 Infantry Squads 1941-’42 (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams, 1 truck) - 3 Infantry Squad Late 1942 - ’43 (2 LMG Teams, 1 with Panzerfaust from ’43, 1 truck) - 1 Weapon Section (1 x 50mm mortar, 1 truck) 1939-‘42 - German Motorcycle Infantry Company (one could replace an infantry company) 1 Motorcycle Infantry Company HQ 1 per mot. inf co. 1 Company HQ Team + radio, 11 LMG Teams, 6 x M/cycle Sidecar bases (2 m/c on each) to carry them. 3 Motorcycle Infantry Platoon - German Motorcycle Infantry Platoon 1 Motorcycle Infantry Platoon HQ 1 per mot. inf pl. 1 Platoon HQ Team and radio, 3 LMG Teams, 2 x M/cycle Sidecar bases (2 m/c on each) to carry them. 3 Motorcycle Infantry Squad (4 LMG Teams, 2 x M/cycle Sidecar bases (2 m/c on each)) - * Trucks could be replaced with heavy cars. Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Motorised Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (0 - 1 Off, 1 NCO, 4 men, with 1 SMG and rifles, radio.) 1 motorcycle & 1 truck Motorised Infantry Squad 1939 – ’42 - (1 NCO, 9 men with 1 LMG, 1 SMG, 8 rifles.) 1 truck Motorised Infantry Squad Late 1942 - ’43 - (1 NCO, 7 men with 2 LMG, 1 SMG, 5 rifles, upto 4 Pzrfausts* from ‘43.) 1 truck Motorised Infantry Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 NCO, 8 men, with 2-3 SMG and rifles, radio) 1 - 2 trucks, 2 motorcycles Motorised Infantry Company AT Section - (1 NCO, 6 - 8 men, with 3 - 4 AT Rifles, and rifles) 1 truck Motorised MMG Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 - 4 NCO, 3 - 5, with ? radio.) 1 - 2 motorcycle & 1 - 2 truck Motorcycle Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 - 3 NCO, 4 men, with 3 LMG and rifles, radio.) on 4 m/c sidecars Motorcycle Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 7 men, with 4 LMG and rifles) on 4 m/c sidecars Motorcycle Infantry Co HQ - (1 Off, 4 - 8 NCO, 18 men, with 12 LMG and rifles, radio.) on 12 m/c sidecars Motorised Engineer Squad Late 1942 - ’43 - (1 NCO, 7 men, 2 LMG, 1 SMG, 4 rifles, < 4 Pzrfausts* from ’43, 1 Flamethrower.) 1 truck

72

PANZER GRENADIER BATTALION 1943-‘45

From 1943 The Armored Infantry Battalion of a Motorised Infantry Regiment (Panzer Grenadiers) was changed to: Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: German Panzer Grenadier Battalion 1943+

1 Cannon Co. (treat as a platoon) 3 sections, each with 2 x Sdkfz 251/9

1 Panzer Grenadier Battalion HQ n/a 3 Panzer Grenadier Company - 1 Panzer Grenadier Heavy Weapons Company battalion support unit 1 Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + radio, 6 Rifle Teams, 2 x Sdkfz 251/1, 1 m/c base) (don’t use if pl. allocated to co.) 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x 120mm mortar, 2 x Sdkfz 251/1)

1 AA Co. (treat as a platoon) 3 sections, each with 2 x 37mm AA SPs German Panzer Grenadier Company 1943+ 1 Panzer Grenadier Company HQ 1 per inf co. 1 Company HQ Team with radio, 4 LMG Teams, 3 SMG Teams, 2 Rifle Team, transports as below: 2 x Sdkfz 251/1, 1 x Sdkfz 251/17, 2 x Volkswagons, 1 Motorcycle or Kettengrad base 3 Panzer Grenadier Platoon -

1 Hvy Wpns MG Section (3 x MMG teams in 1 x Sdkfz 251/1)

1 Panzer Grenadier Heavy Weapons Platoon, which contains as below: company support unit 1 Hvy Wpns Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team + radio, 1 LMG Team, 1 x Sdkfz 251/1) (don’t use if sect. allocated to pl.) 1 Hvy Wpns Mortar Section (2 x Sdkfz 251/2) 1 Hvy Wpns Cannon Section (2 x Sdkfz 251/9) 1 Hvy Wpns AA Section (2 x 251/17)

German Panzer Grenadier Platoon 1943+ 1 Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 Rifle Team, 1 x Sdkfz 251/1, 10 or 17) 1 per pz gr pl. 3 Panzer Grenadier Squads (2 LMG Team, one has Panzerfausts, 1 x Sdkfz 251/1) - * Note regarding units: Sdkfz 251/17 was extremely rare. AA Section Sdkfz 251/17 were mostly replaced by Sdkfz 10/4 AA SPs. The above organisation was not always obtained in combat and halftracks were often replaced by trucks or heavy cars. Historical Data (do not use in gameplay)

Panzer Grenadier Squad - (1 NCO, 7 men with 2 LMG, 2 - 4 SMG, & rifles, upto 4 Pzrfausts*) 1 x Sdkfz 251/1

Pz Gr Hvy Wpns Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 7-10 NCO, 16 men, radio.) 2 x Sdkfz 251/1 or trucks, 1-2 m/cycle

• Quite often entirely motorised in trucks (or 251/1 halftracks for squads & squad HQs only)

Panzer Grenadier Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 NCO, 3 - 5 men, with 2 SMG and rifles, radio.) 1 x Sdkfz 251/1, 10 or 17

Panzer Grenadier Company HQ - (1 Off, 9 NCO, 18 men, 4 LMG, 8-12 SMG & rifles, radio) 2 x Sdkfz 251/1, 1 x Sdkfz 251/17, 2 x Volkswagons, 3 Motorcycle Pz Gr Hvy Wpns Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 NCO, 4 men, with 1 LMG, 2 - 3 SMG & rifles, radio.) 1 x Sdkfz 251/1

FALLSCHIRMJAGER REGIMENT 1943 - ’45 • Although paratroopers, their losses were so horrific during their invasion of Crete that they served the rest of the war as elite infantry. They still count as

elite veterans, however. • Three regiments made up the bulk of the division • Radios issued to platoon level.

FALLSCHIRMJAGER REGIMENT 1943 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Fallschirmjager Regiment 1943 - ‘45 1 Fallschirmjager Regiment HQ n/a 3 Fallschirmjager Infantry Battalion - 1 AT Company (3 x 41/50/75mm AT Gun, 3 x 75mm Inf/Recoil Gun, 3 x LMG Teams) regiment support company Fallschirmjager Battalion 1943 - ’45 1 Fallschirmjager Battalion HQ n/a 3 Fallschirmjager Infantry Company - 1 Fallschirmjager Weapon’s Company battalion support unit 1 Weapon’s Company HQ (don’t use if pl. allocated to co.) 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) 2 MG Platoons (3 sections, each with 1 x MMG) Fallschirmjager Company 1943 - ’45 1 Fallschirmjager Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + radio, 2 SMG Teams, 1 truck) 1 per inf company 3 Fallschirmjager Infantry Platoon - 1 Mortar Section (3 x 50mm mortar) attach to a platoon 1 AT Section (3 x Panzerschreck Teams, 1 truck) attach to a platoon FallschirmjagerPlatoon 1 FallschirmjagerPlatoon HQ (1 Pl. HQ Team with rifle, 1 SMG Team, 1 truck or 251/1) 1 per inf platoon 3 FallschirmjagerInfantry Section (2 LMG Teams, 1 Asslt Rifle Team, 1 truck or 251/1) -

73

Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Fallschirmjager Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 8 men with 1-2 LMG, 2-3 SMG, 1-2 Assault Rifles, rifles) Fallschirmjager Platoon HQ Section - (1 Officer, 1-2 NCO, 1-2 men with 2-3 SMG, rifles, radio) Fallschirmjager Company HQ Section - (1 Officer, 2-3 NCO, 4-6 men with SMG, radio) Fallschirmjager Company AT Section - (2 NCO, 8 men with 3 x Pzrschreck, 2-6 SMG, rifles) VOLKSGRENADIER BATTALION 1944 ‘ -45 • Each Volksgrenadier division was built around the remnants of a decimated regular infantry division, to which were added boys, men over 60, wounded

returning from hospitals, navy transfers, etc. Due to time restrictions, rather then adequately train them, (only three months!) they were armed with large numbers of automatic weapons. After their poor performance in the Battle of the Bulge, they were mostly used in defensive operations.

• Radios issued to company level. • One battalion per division could be equipped with bicycles and horse drawn transport. • Volksgrenadier units are CONSCRIPT. • The only Volksgrenadier units allowed in your force, are to be taken from the below Volksgrenadier Battalion, plus Volksgrenadier artillery. See later. VOLKSGRENADIER BATTALION 1944 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Volksgrenadier Battalion HQ 1 Volksgrenadier Infantry Battalion HQ 1 per inf bat. 3 Volksgrenadier Rifle Company - 1 Volksgrenadier Heavy Company battalion support unit 1 Volksgrenadier Heavy Company HQ 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 2 x 81mm mortar) 1 Infantry Gun Platoon (4 x 75mm Infantry Gun, horse drawn) 2 MG Platoons (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG) Volksgrenadier Rifle Company 1 Volksgrenadier Infantry Company HQ 1 per inf co. 1 Volksgrenadier Rifle Platoon - 2 Volksgrenadier Sturm Platoon - Volksgrenadier Rifle Platoon 1 Volksgrenadier Rifle Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 SMG Team) 1 per Volks. Rif. Pl. 3 Volksgrenadier Rifle Squads (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Volksgrenadier Sturm Platoon 1 Volksgrenadier Sturm Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 LMG Team) 1 per Volks. Sturm Pl. 1 Volksgrenadier Sturm Rifle Squad (1 LMG Team, 1 SMG Team, 1 Rifle Team) - 2 Volksgrenadier Sturm SMG Squads (3 SMG Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay)

Volksgrenadier Rifle Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 1 NCO, 4 men, with 3 SMG and 2 rifles, 1 pistol)

• Radios as per the German AFV charts

Volksgrenadier Rifle Squad - (1 NCO, 8 men with 1 LMG, 2 SMG, 6 rifles.) Volksgrenadier Sturm Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 1 NCO, 4 men, with 2 LMG and 2 rifles) Volksgrenadier Sturm Rifle Squad - (1 NCO, 8 men with 1 LMG, 5 SMG, 3 rifles) Volksgrenadier Sturm SMG Squad - (1 NCO, 8 men with 9 SMG) PANZER REGIMENT • Initially two regiments were contained in each Panzer Division, but this was reduced to one by 1941.

PANZER REGIMENT: 1939 - ‘40 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Panzer Regiment 1939 - ‘40 1 Panzer Regiment HQ (6 - 9 tanks plus 15 m/cycles) n/a 3 Panzer Battalion - Panzer Battalion 1939 - ‘40 1 Panzer Battalion HQ (5 - 6 tanks) n/a 1 Mixed Panzer Company - 2 Panzer Company - Mixed Panzer Company 1939 - ’40 All Option A or all Option B 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 tanks) Option A - Pz II, Option B - Pz III 1 per mixed pz co. 2-3 Panzer Platoons (5 tanks) Option A - Pz II, Option B - Pz III - 1 Panzer Platoons (5 tanks) Option A - Pz III, Option B - Pz IV - Panzer Company 1939 - ‘40 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 tanks, all Pz I or Pz II) 1 per pz co. 3-4 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz I or 5 x Pz II) - * Note: 35(t) was occassionally used as a substitute for the Pz III. Some Pz Divisions were equipped with 38(t), probably as a replacement for the Pz I or II PANZER REGIMENT: 1941 - ‘42 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Panzer Regiment 1941 - ‘42 1 Panzer Regiment HQ (6 - 9 tanks plus 15 m/cycles) n/a 2 Panzer Battalion - Panzer Battalion 1941 - ‘42 1 Panzer Battalion HQ (5 - 6 tanks) n/a 1 Heavy Panzer Company - 2 Panzer Company - Heavy Panzer Company 1941 - ‘42 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 tanks, both Pz III or Pz IV) 1 per heavy pz co. 2 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz III) - 1 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz IV) - Light Panzer Company 1941 - ‘42 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 tanks, Pz III) 1 per light pz co. 2 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz II) - 1 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz III) - * Note: 35(t) was in rare cases used as a substitute for the Pz III, probably in Light Companies. Some Panzer Division’s Light Companies probably entirely equipped with 38(t) PANZER BATTALION: 1943 Replaces 1941 - ’42 Battalion Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have:

74

Panzer Battalion 1943 1 Panzer Battalion HQ (5 - 6 tanks) 1 per pz bat. 1 - 2 Medium Panzer Company (note, max of 3 medium & light companies in total) - 1 - 2 Light Panzer Company - Medium Panzer Company 1943 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 x Pz IV) 1 per heavy pz co. 3 - 4 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz IV) - Light Panzer Company 1943 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 x Pz III) 1 per light pz co. 3 - 4 Panzer Platoons (5 x Pz III) - Note: StuG III could be used to replace tank losses in above platoons. PANZER REGIMENT: Late 1943 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Panzer Regiment 1943 - ‘45 1 Panzer Regiment HQ (6 - 9 tanks plus 15 m/cycles, 9 x 37mm AA SPs or tanks) 1 per pz reg. (treat as 4-5 platoons) 2 Panzer Battalion (one bat. has Pz IV, other bat. usually has Pz V, otherwise Pz IV too) - Panzer Battalion 1943 - ‘45 1 Panzer Battalion HQ (5 tanks, 3 x 20mm Quad SPs or tanks) 1 per pz bat. (treat as 2 platoons) 3 Panzer Company - Heavy Panzer Company 1943 - ‘45 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 tanks) 1 per heavy pz co. 3 Panzer Platoons (5 tanks) - Panzer Company 1943 - ‘45 1 Panzer Company HQ (2 tanks) 1 per pz co. 3 Panzer Platoons (5 tanks, but normally 4 tanks due to attrition, especially for Pz V) - Note: StuG III could be used to replace tank losses in above platoons. ARMORED RECONNAISANCE BATTALION • One attached to each Panzer Division. • Radios as per the German AFV charts • Apart from Sdkfz 251 used to carry the Armored Infantry or Pz Grenadier Infantry squads, HQs, etc, these units make large use of Sdkfz 250 light armored

halftracks. eg use the Sdkfz 250/7 instead of Sdkfz 251/2 ARMORED RECONNAISANCE BATTALION 1939 - ‘42 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Reconnaissance Battalion 1939 - ‘42 1 Armored Reconnaissance Battalion HQ 1 per arm car bat. 2 Armored Car Company - 1 Motorised Infantry Company (trucks or armored) same as in Motorised Infantry Reg - Armored Car Company 1939 - ‘42 1 Armored Car Company HQ 1 per arm car co. 1 Heavy Armored Car Platoon (6 x Sdkfz 231/232 8rad) - 3 Armored Car Platoons (6 x Sdkfz 221/222) - ARMORED RECONNAISANCE BATTALION 1943 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Reconnaissance Battalion 1943 - ‘45 1 Armored Reconnaissance Battalion HQ 1 per arm car bat. 1 Armored Panzer Grenadier Company (armored halftracks) same as in Pz Gr Reg - 1 Motorised Panzer Grenadier Company (in trucks) same as in Pz Gr Reg - 1 Panzer Grenadier Heavy Weapons Company, same as in Pz Gr Reg - 1 Armored Car Company (3 options available) - Armored Car Company 1943 - ’45 Option 1 1 Armored Car Company HQ (1 x Sdkfz 234/2, 2 Rifle Team, Volkswagon, 1 m/c base) 1 per arm car co. 4 Armored Car Platoons (6 x Sdkfz 234/2) - or Armored Car Company 1943 - ’45 Option 2 1 Armored Car Company HQ (1 x Sdkfz 234/1, 2 Rifle Team, Volkswagon, 1 m/c base) 1 per arm car co. 1 Heavy Armored Car Platoon (6 x Sdkfz 234/3 or 234/4) - 3 Armored Car Platoons (6 x Sdkfz 234/1) - or Armored Car Company 1943 - ’45 Option 3 1 Armored Car Company HQ (1 x Sdkfz 250/9, 2 Rifle Team, Volkswagon, 1 m/c base) 1 per arm car co. 3 Armored Car Platoons (4 x Sdkfz 250/9) - HEAVY TANK BATTALTION • Most independent units attached at Army level only. • Radios as per the German AFV charts HEAVY TANK BATTALION: 1943 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Heavy Tank Battalion 1943 1 Heavy Tank Battalion HQ (2 x Tiger) 1 per bat. 2 Heavy Tank Company - Heavy Tank Company 1943 1 Heavy Tank Company HQ (1 x Tiger) 1 per co. 2 Heavy Tank Platoon (4 x Tiger) - 2 Escort Platoon (4 x Pz III N) - HEAVY TANK BATTALION: 1944 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Heavy Tank Battalion 1944 - ‘45 1 Heavy Tank Battalion HQ (3 x Tiger) n/a 3 Heavy Tank Company - Heavy Tank Company 1944 - ‘45 1 Heavy Tank Company HQ (2 x Tiger) 1 per co. 3 Heavy Tank Platoon (4 x Tiger) -

75

• Radios as per the German AFV charts

TANK HUNTER DETACHMENT: 1943 - ‘45 • Independent units attached to corps level. • AFVs in the Battalion are either all Nashorn, all Jagdpanther, all Jagdpanzer IV/70, or all JagdTiger

TANK HUNTER BATTALION: 1943 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Tank Hunter Battalion 1 Tank Hunter Battalion HQ (1 x SP -> Self Propelled Gun) n/a 1 Panzer Grenadier Company - 3 Tank Hunter Company - Tank Hunter Company 1 Tank Hunter Company HQ (2 x SP) 1 per co. 3 Tank Hunter Platoon (3 - 4 x SP) - ASSAULT GUN BRIGADE: 1943 - ‘45 • Could be independent units attached to corps level or divisional detachments • From 1942 - ’43 these were called battalions, and had all StuG III, and added an armored car to the Battery HQs. • All StuG III could be replaced by StuG IV (JgPz IV/48) • Radios as per the German AFV charts ASSAULT GUN BRIGADE: 1943 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Assault Gun Brigade 1 Assault Gun Brigade HQ (1 x StuG III) n/a 1 Panzer Grenadier Company (details given previously) - 3 Assault Gun Battery - Assault Gun Battery (treat as a company) 1 Assault Gun Battery HQ (2 x StuG III) 1 per co. 2 Assault Gun Platoon (4 x StuG III) - 1 Assault Gun Platoon (4 x StuH 42) - ANTI-TANK BATTALION • The Panzer Division had a single AT Battalion, as below: • Infantry Divisions AT Battalion is identical to below, except from 1941 only one AT SP Co and two AT Co. Also, motorised transport was limited, being

mostly horse drawn. StuG companies not received until much later. • Radios as per the German AFV charts ANTI-TANK BATTALION: 1939 - ‘40 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Anti-Tank Battalion 1939 - ‘40 1 Anti-Tank Battalion HQ 1 per bat. 3 Anti-Tank Company - Anti-Tank Company 1939 - ‘40 1 Anti-Tank Company HQ 1 per co. 3 Anti-Tank Battery (4 x 37mm AT guns, entirely motorised) - ANTI-TANK BATTALION: 1941 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Anti-Tank Battalion 1941 - ‘45 1 Anti-Tank Battalion HQ 1 per bat. 1 - 2 Anti-Tank Company (note, a total of 3 companies of these two types) - 1 - 2 Anti-Tank SP Company - Anti-Tank SP Company 1941 - ‘45 1 Anti-Tank SP Company HQ (2 x SPs) 1 per co. 3 Anti-Tank SP Battery (4 x Marder or StuG III or JgPz IV/70) - Anti-Tank Company 1941 - ‘45 1 Anti-Tank Company HQ 1 per co. 3 AT Battery (4 x 28mm/50mm/75mm/76mm AT guns slowly replace 37mm, motorised) - ARTILLERY • See further artillery restrictions. ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Division Artillery Regiment 1939 - ‘45 2 - 3 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 105mm howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 150mm howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions Panzer Division Artillery Regiment 1939 - ‘42 2 - 3 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 105mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x ith 150mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions Panzer Division Artillery Regiment 1943 - ‘45 1 SP Artillery Battalion (see below) see artillery restrictions 1 - 2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 105mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 150mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions SP Artillery Battalion 1943 - ’45 2 105mm SP Artillery Battery (6 x Wespe) see artillery restrictions 1 150mm SP Artillery Battery (6 x Hummel) see artillery restrictions Volksgrenadier Division Artillery Regiment 1944 - ‘45 1 Artillery Battalion (2 batteries, each with 6 x 75mm howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions 2 Artillery Battalion (2 batteries, each with 6 x 105mm howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (2 batteries, each with 6 x 150mm howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions ANTI-AIRCRAFT UNITS Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Panzer Division Anti-Aircraft Battalion 1941 3 37mm AA Batteries (4 guns in each, entirely motorised) see guns restrictions 1 88mm AA Battery (4 guns, entirely motorised) see guns restrictions Panzer Grenadier Division Anti-Aircraft Battalion 1944 - ’45

76

1 37mm AA Company (3 platoons of 3 x 37mm AA, entirely motorised) see guns restrictions 1 20mmAA SP Company (2 platoons of 3 x 20mmAA SP, 1 of 3 x Quad 20mm SP) see guns restrictions

1 88mm AA Company (2 platoons of 4 x 88mm AA, entirely motorised) see guns restrictions German SS Units Panzer, Heavy Tank Battalion, and Panzer Grenadier units can be SS. Basically, SS units were given the best weapons, vehicles and equipment available.

Hungary The only ingredient lacking in the Hungarian Army was the quality of equipment. Like most of Germany's allies, there was an overwhelmed industry which always found difficulty keeping up with the war effort. German guns were especially bought as the artillery was very much out dated. AT guns were extremely short in supply and the horse formed the bulk of the transport available. Cavalry were very good, if not a little obsolete. The Hungarian Army was to stick by Germany to the end with troop morale never really collapsing. The Hungarian High Command was fairly competent in the field and the high proportion of German speaking officers allowed good coordination with their ally. The armies first campaign began in 1940 in Yugoslavia with a limited advance. HUNGARIAN EQUIPMENT LISTS PV AFV DATES PROD FR 61 38M Toldi I-II 40-44 195 3 88 38M Toldi IIa 42-45 80 4 116 42M Toldi III 43-45 12 7 131 40M Turan I 43-45 285 3 141 43M Turan II 44-45 139 4 144 40/43M Zrinyl II 44-45 66 5 85 40M Nimrod 42-45 135 4 50 39M Csaba 40-45 140 5 47 L3/35 40-41 104 4 49 Pz I 42-43 12 7 115 Pz 38(t)E 42-45 89 4 173 Pz III M 42-43 10 7 134 Pz IV F 42-43 22 6 198 Pz IV F2 42-45 22 6 299 Pz VI 'Tiger' 44-45 10 7 211 StuG III G 44-45 50 5 178 Marder III(t) M 44-45 20 6 217 Jgpz 38(t) 'Hetzer' 44-45 100 4 PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 20 20mm L105 S18-1000 39-45 ? 2 58 105mm L20 40M 39-45 ? 5 44 40mm Bofors AA 39-45 ? 4 30 37mm L45 Pak 35/36 39-45 ? 2 62 50mm L60 Pak 38 42-45 ? 6 131 75mm L46 Pak 40 42-45 ? 7 67 105mm L28 FH18 41-45 ? 5 36 75mm L15 vz 15 39-45 ? 4 62 100mm L19 vz 14 39-45 ? 4 44 47mm L43 Pak 36(t) 41-45 ? 5 33 47mm L32 SA-FRC 41-45 ? 5 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 42-45 ? 6 24 20mm L62 AA 39-45 ? 4

PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39-45 - 2 180 100/105mm (per pair) 39-45 - 4 300 150mm (per pair) 39-45 - 6 400 210mm (per pair) 42-45 - 7 15 50mm Mortar 39-45 ? 2 45 81mm Mortar 40-45 ? 5 22 37mm Spigot 42-45 ? 4 16 47mm Spigot 42-45 ? 5 PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Kubel/Volkswagen 42-45 ? 6 soft Field Car 39-45 ? 5 skin Light Truck 39-45 ? 4 charts Medium Truck 39-45 ? 5

Tractor 39-45 ? 4

incl. Heavy Truck 41-45 ? 7 German Medium Half Track 39-45 ? 5 one Heavy Half Track 40-45 ? 7 Motorcycle 39-45 ? 4 Motorcycle Sidecar 39-45 ? 6

PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39-45 ? 1 10 SMG Team 39-45 ? 4 15 LMG Team (Belt fed) 39-45 ? 3 13 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-45 ? 3 26 MMG 39-45 ? 3

30 FAO Team 41-45 - 4

4 AT Grenade Early 42-45 ? 4 6 AP Rifle Grenade 42-45 ? 4 4 AT Rifle Grnde Early 42-44 ? 5 9 AT Rifle Grnde Late 44-45 ? 5 23 20mm s18 ATR Team 39-45 ? 2 8 Pzfaust 30/60 44-45 ? 3 16 Pzfaust 100 44-45 ? 4

5ea Demolition Charge 40-45 ? 5 page39 AP Mine 39-45 ? 2 page39 AT MIne 41-45 ? 4

20 Radio 40-45 ? 5 Hungarian Equipment Notes

Hungarian Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

- L3 tankette was a pre-WWII purchase from Italy (see Italian Armor.) - Pz I, 38(t)E, 111M, IVF, IVF2, VI'Tiger', Marder III (t)M, StuG IIIG and Hetzer were purchased from the Wehrmacht ( see German Armor. ) - Medium and Heavy Half tracks were purchased from Germany, Sdkfz 11 & 7. - 40mm L48 AA was license built Bofors - see British Guns.) - 37mm L45, 50mm L60, 75mm L46 and 105mm L28 were bought before and during the war from Germany, (see German Guns.) - 75mm L15 vz 15, 100mm L19 vz 14 were Czech quns, (see Polish and Italian Guns.) - 47mm L43 and 47mm L32 were German captured booty given as aid (see German and Belgium Guns.) - 75mm L36 was purchased from pre-war France (see French Guns.) - 20mm L62 AA was bought from Danish (see Polish Guns.) - Artillery 75mm, 100/105mm and 8lmm Mortar can fire smoke rounds indirectly. - Hungarian army can employ horse teams and cavalry. - AT & AT Rifle Grenades, AT Mines and Pzfaust 30/60 /100 were all from the Germans

Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery Conscript Reliable -15% or x 0.85 All Other Units Conscript Reliable -25% or x 0.75 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers HUNGARIAN SOFTSKINS Rumania lacked any automotive production facilities for churning out military vehicles and relied solely on purchasing foreign models. Hungary produced a limited range of licence-copied trucks. During the

war years, both countries relied on purchases made from Germany and captured stocks.

PV HUNGARY/RUMANIA Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 13 Daimler ADGR, Tatra T92 Light Truck 6x4 B 40 15 2 B 14 Botund 38M Light Truck 6x4 B 40 17 3 B 28 Raba Medium Truck 6x4 C 45 16 9 C Damiler ADGR, Tatra T92 (6x4) - light off-road cargo trucks. The Daimler

was built in Austria and exported solely to Rumania. This vehicle featured anti-ditching rollers at the front. The Tatra were purchased from Czechoslovakia. Both models acquired pre-war.

Botond 38M (6x4) - light off-road cargo truck licensed produced in Hungary. The vehicle featured anti-ditching rollers at the front.

Raba (6x4) - medium off-road cargo truck produced under licence in Hungary. The vehicle was a copy of the Krupp L3H 163.

HUNGARIAN ARMOR Hungarian industry through out the war managed to produce the bulk of its own armor with Czech & Swedish designs being manufactured under licence. All had good mobility but compared badly with their Soviet counterparts, being out gunned & under-armored throughout the war.

The heavy battlefield loses of 1941 led to the purchasing of German AFVs to bolster unit strengths and in 1942, the first armored division was formed being organised on German lines (a second division was raised in 1944.) Hungarian crews performed well on the

77

Total AFV production amounted to 1055 tanks & SP guns, not including 335 German AFVs purchased.

PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP

eastern front despite poor equipment and fought right up to the closing days of the war. The perception that Germany aided it's Hungarian ally with AFVs throughout the war is incorrect. German tanks obtained between 1942-45 were purchased at an very high price. As late as 1944 when

Hungary requested permission to manufacture the `Panther' tank under licence, Germany still denied them production rights by demanding an extraordinary price which they could not afford.

61 38M Toldi I-II 20 L105,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 31 16 C 5 88 38M Toldi IIa 40 L51,LMG 4 1 1 2 1 1 31 16 C 7 116 42M Toldi III 40 L51,LMG 6 2 1 4 3 1 31 16 C 7 131 40M Turan I 40 L51,2*LMG 6 3 2 5 3 2 29 17 C 5 141 43M Turan II 75 L21,2*LMG 6 3 2 5 3 2 29 17 C 7 144 40/43M Zrinyl II 105 L20 9 3 2 8 3 2 27 15 C 8 85 40M Nimrod 40 L56 AA 3 1 1 1 1 1 32 18 C 4 50 39M Csaba 20 L105,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 5 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; Turan I & II, 42M Toldi, 40/43M Zrinyi & 40M Nimrod were equipped as standard. For 38M Toldi & 39M Csaba, only platoon & company commands were radio equipped. (+10 PV in this case) One Man Turrets; 39M Csaba. Hungarian AFV Notes:

38M Toldi I-II - Hungarian version of the Swedish Strv m/33 Light tank manufactured under licence. Mounted the semi-automatic Solothurn 20mm s1000 gun. Minor differences between different models only.

38M Toldi IIa - following the winter battles on the Eastern front 1941, Toldi tanks were found to be totally out gun & under armored. Late production Toldi II were therefore upgunned with the 40mm L51 gun and additional armor was added to the front.

42M Toldi III - last production variant of the Toldi series which was simply uparmored but otherwise identical to previous models. Production started 1943.

40M Turan I - licence manufactured copy of the Czechoslovakia T-22 Medium tank mounting the Hungarian 40mm L51 gun. Running gear was similar to the LT-35 (Pz 38t).

41M Turan II - same as the Turan I except a larger turret was produced to mount a 75mm gun. Skirt armor on the hull side and around the turret was common from 1943+ onwards (similar to that used on German Pz IV.)

40/43M Zrinyl II - based on the 43M Turan II, a 105mm L25 howitzer was mounted in a box shaped superstructure with limited traverse and heavily influenced by the German StuG III. Side skirts on the hull sides were standard. Similar in appearance to the Italian Semovente M43 series.

40M Nimrod - the 40mm AA Bofors gun was mounted on an extended Toldi chassis with a fixed open-topped superstructure. Built as an AA tank, it was employed more as a tank destroyer. This AFV is the only known example which used the German Spigot Grenade StGt41 in combat, from 1942. Reloading must be carried out by dismounted crew member and requires one full move with AFV being stationary.

39M Csaba - light 4x4 wheeled AC.

HUNGARIAN GUNS Following the break-up of the Austro-Hungarian Empire, Hungary was left with quantities of WWI Czech Skoda guns, old WWI German field pieces and a few native designs. After joining the Axis powers, limited

quantities of German guns were purchased along with captured booty taken on the Eastern Front.

HUNGARY PV Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 20 20mm L105 S18-1000 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 2 No gun shield 4 3 2 2 2 35 40mm L51 Skoda * (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) * 6 6 5 5 4 3 44 75mm L21 41M * (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) * Smk 7 6 6 5 4 4 3 58 105mm L20 40M C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk 8 7 7 6 5 4 4 4 3 +28pg -> 105mm L20 40M HEAT ‘43+ (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 44 40mm L56 AA Bofors B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 2 6 5 5 4 4 3 +22pp StGt 41 HEAT ‘42 (10) (6) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 Hungarian Gun Notes

20mm L105 Solothurn s1000-18 - Swiss designed gun produced under licensed. Referred to as a heavy anti-tank rifle. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and transportation.

40mm L51 - Licensed produced copy of the Czech 40mm Skoda A-17 tank gun. AFV mounted only.

75mm L25 41M - production of this gun in 1942 went entirely to arming the Turan II tanks.

105mm L20 40M - medium howitzer produced in limited numbers with majority being mounted on the Zrinyi II SPG. Field piece was horse-drawn only.

40mm L56 AA Bofors - licensed built copy of the Swedish AA gun. Gun can be fired by crew without unlimbering. StGt 41 became available for use with this gun in late 1942, refer to `Spigot Bombs'.

Hungarian Organisation INFANTRY REGIMENT 1941-‘43 • Three regiments formed the bulk of the infantry division • Radios were issued to regiment and sometimes battalion HQs • All guns etc are horse-drawn. INFANTRY REGIMENT 1941-’43 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Regiment 1941 – ‘43 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Infantry Battalion - 1 AT Company (3 platoons, each with 4 x 37mm/47mm/50mm AT Guns) regiment support unit 1 Gun Company (2 platoons, each with 2 – 3 75mm infantry guns) regiment support unit Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 3 Infantry Company - 1 Weapons Company battalion support unit

1 Weapons Company HQ Section only use if not broken down 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, 2 x 81mm mortar) 1 AT Platoon (2 sections of 3 x 37mm/47mm AT Guns, 2 sections of 3 x 20mm AT Rifle Teams)

78

Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (1-2 Company HQ Teams, 3-4 Rifle Teams) 1 per inf co. 3 Infantry Platoon - 1 MG Platoon (2 sections, each with 1 x MMG) company support unit 1 AT Section (2 x 20mm AT Rifle Teams) company support unit Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team) 1 per inf pl. 3 Infantry Squads (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2-4 NCO, 3-5 men, with 1-2 SMG and rifles) Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 9-10 men with 1 LMG and rifles)

• Radios were issued to Company level

Infantry Company HQ Section - (1-2 Off, 4-8 NCO, 8-12 men, with 1-3 SMG and rifles) MOTORISED INFANTRY BATTALION 1942-‘45 • Three battalions formed motorised regiments of armored and a few cavalry divisions

MOTORISED INFANTRY BATTALION 1942-‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Motorised Infantry Battalion 1942 – ‘45 1 Motorised Infantry Battalion HQ 1 per mot inf bat 3 Motorised Infantry Company - 1 Support Company battalion support unit 3 MG Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG and trucks) 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each 2 x 81mm mortar, 4 trucks) 1 AT Platoon (6 x 37mm or 50mm AT Guns, 6 trucks) 1 AA Platoon (4 x Nimrod AA SPs) 1 Motorised Engineer Company battalion support unit Motorised Infantry Company 1 Motorised Infantry Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + Radio, 2 Mot. Inf. Squads, 3 trucks) 1 per mot inf co. 3 Motorised Infantry Platoon - 1 AT Section (2 x 20mm AT Rifle Teams, 1 - 2 trucks) company support unit 1 Mortar Section (2 x 50mm mortars, 1 - 2 trucks) company support unit Motorised Infantry Platoon 1 Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team, 1 light truck, 1 field car or volkswagon) 1 per mot inf pl. 3 Squads (3 teams total, being 1 – 2 LMG Team, 1 – 2 Rifle Teams, 1 truck). - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Motorised Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2-4 NCO, 3-5 men, with 1-2 SMG and rifles) Motorised Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 8-9 men with 1-2 LMG, 1 SMG, rifles) Motorised Infantry Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 25 men, radio) ARMORED RECON BATTALION 1941-‘45 • One was attached to the armored division. ARMORED RECON BATTALION 1941-‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Recon Battalion 1941-‘45 1 Armored Recon Battalion HQ 1 per arm. Recon bat. 1 Armored Car Company - 1 Motorised Infantry Company (as above) - 1 Motorcycle Infantry Company (as Mot. Infantry. Bat. but on motorcycles.) - 1 AT Platoon (4 x 37mm AT Guns, HQ Section, 5 trucks) battalon support unit Armored Car Company 1 Armored Car Company HQ (1 x Csaba) 1 per arm. Car co. 3 Armored Car Platoons (4 x Csaba) - TANK BATTALION 1944 • One was attached to the armored division. TANK BATTALION 1944 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Tank Battalion 1944 1 Tank Battalion HQ (2 x Turan I) 1 per tank bat. 2 Heavy Tank Company - 2 Medium Tank Company - 1 Recon Platoon (5 x Toldi) battalion support unit (cannot break down) 1 AA Battery (4 x Nimrod) battalion support unit (cannot break down) Heavy Tank Company 1 Heavy Tank Company HQ (1 x Turan I, 1 x Turan II) 1 per tank co. 3 Heavy Tank Platoon (5 x Turran II) - 1 Recon Platoon (5 x Toldi) - Medium Tank Company 1 Medium Tank Company HQ (2 x Turan I) 1 per tank co. 3 Medium Tank Platoon (5 x Turran I) - 1 Recon Platoon (5 x Toldi) - SP/AA/AT BATTALION 1944 • One was attached to the armored division. SP/AA/AT BATTALION 1944 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: SP/AA/AT Battalion 1944 1 SP/AA/AT Battalion HQ (2 x Nimrod) 1 per SP/AA/AT bat. 3 SP/AA/AT Battery (6 x Nimrod) -

ARTILLERY

79

• To buy armored divisional artillery, you must have at least one armor or motorised infantry platoon. See further artillery restrictions. • To buy infantry divisional artillery, you must have at least one infantry company. See further artillery restrictions.

ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Division Artillery Regiment 1939-43 2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions Infantry Division Artillery Regiment 1944-45 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm or 100/105mm, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions Armored Division Artillery Regiment 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm, motorised) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm or 100/105mm, motorised) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (2 batteries, each with 4 105mm, motorised) see artillery restrictions

Italy The Italian Army was not one that entered war willingly or with any conviction. Right from it's first encounter in 1940 against France, the Italian troops always came off worse. In Greece it was was estimated that an attack only had to be stalled for 20 minutes before the whole attack broke into total confusion and collapsed. Only in Russia did they show any enthusiasium which resulted in a number successive victories against the Soviet forces up until Staligrad. Equipment all round was very poor and antiquated. Motorisation was rare wit.h a great reliance on horses (except in North Africa). Italian troops were frequently issued with German AT equipment to stiffen them against attack, mainly '42 onwards. This went as far as giving a battalian of 88mm's to each mobile division ie. Ariete 132nd. Under German command and with German equipment, ltalian troops did give a better account of themselves. ITALIAN EQUIPMENT LISTS PV AFV DATES PROD FR 45 L5/21 39-43 ? 2 52 L5/32 39-43 ? 4 47 L3/35 39-44 2200 0 58 L3 (Flamethrower) 39-44 4 54 L3 (20mm) 39-42 5 74 L6/40 41-45 283 4 70 M11/39 39-41 100 2 116 M13/40 40-44 1902 1 134 M15/42 43-45 82 6 193 P40 44-45 100 6 75 Semovente L40 47/32 41-45 300 3 93 Semovente M40 75/18 41-43 200 5 109 Semovente M42 75/18 42-45 6 136 Semovente M42M 75 43-45 115 6 177 Semovente M41M 90 43-45 30 6 164 Semovente M43 75/34 43-45 ? 7

38 AS 37 43-45 ? 7

107 S35 43 35 6

208 Semovente M43 75/46 43-45 ? 6 171 Semovente M43 105/25 43-45 ? 6 74 Carro Commando M41 41-45 ? 4 46 Lancia I.Z.M 39-41 75 6 63 AS 611 39-41 120 5 47 AS 40 40-43 620 5 70 AS 41 (20mm) 41-45 3 92 AS 43 43-45 30 7 113 AS 41/43 (50mm) 44-45 120 6

36 AS Lince 43-45 250 4 72 R35 43 70 5

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 20 20mm L105 39-43 ? 1 22 37mm L40 37/40 39-43 ? 2 33 37mm L45 37/45 39-43 ? 2 32 47mm L32 47/32 39-45 ? 0 46 75mm L20 75/18 41-45 ? 5 71 75mm L34 75/32 41-45 ? 6 84 75mm L46 75/46 39-45 ? 7 126 90mm L53 90/53 39-45 ? 5

42 65mm L17 65/17 39-42 ? 4 55 75mm L30 75/27 39-45 ? 1 62 100mm L19 vz 14 39-44 ? 4 70 100mm L24 vz 14/19 39-45 ? 4 71 102mm L35 105/35 39-43 ? 6 70 105mm L25 105/25 39-43 ? 6 24 20mm L65 20/65 AA 39-45 ? 3 62 50mm L60 Pak 38 42-43 ? 6 126 88mm L56 Flak 18/36 42-43 ? 5 36 75mm L15 vz 15 39-43 ? 4 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 39-44 ? 3 44 40mm L56 Bofors AA 39-43 ? 6 PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39-45 - 1 180 100/105mm (per pair) 39-45 - 4 300 150mm (per pair) 41-43 - 6 400 210mm (per pair) 41-43 - 7 15 45mm mortar 39-43 ? 1 45 81mm mortar 39-45 ? 3 PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Motorcyc1e 39-45 ? 2 soft Motorcycle Sidecar 39-45 ? 3 skin Light Car 39-45 ? 4 chart Light Truck 39-45 ? 3 Medium Truck 39-45 ? 4 Heavy Truck 39-45 ? 5 Medium Half track 43-45 ? 6 Heavy Half track 43-45 ? 7 Tractor 39-45 ? 3 PV TRUCK/ SP DATES PROD FR 26 Moto Guzzi Trialce 39-43 ? 6 24 Fiat 508C Mil 39-43 ? 6 42 Camionette Desertica 43-45 ? 6 59 Autocannone 75/27 39-43 ? 5 160 Autocannone 90/53 39-43 ? 6

48 AS 42 HMG 42-45 3

39 AS 42 (s18) 42-45 4

85 Autocannone 102/35 39-43 ? 7

46 AS 42 (20/65) 42-45 300 4

PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39-45 ? 1 10 SMG Team 39-45 ? 3 15 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-40 ? 2

Radio 39-45 ? 3

26 MMG 39-45 ? 3 3 AT Grenade Early 42-45 ? 3 16 7.9 PzB ATR Team 42-44 ? 4 11 7.9 wz 35 ATR Team 41-44 ? 3 23 20 S18 ATR Team 39-45 ? 3 8 Pzfaust 30/60 44-45 ? 5 page39 AP Mine 39-43 ? 2 page39 AT Mine 41-43 ? 3 5ea Demolition Charge 39-45 ? 3 15 Flamethrower 39-45 ? 3 5 Smoke Grenade 41-45 ? 4 FAO 39-45 - 3 FAC 39-45 - 5

ITALIAN EQUIPMENT NOTES - R35 and S35 were French tanks handed over by the Germans and employed in Sicily and Sardinia only (see French Armor.) - 50mm L60 and 88mm L56 guns were German issued to mobile divisions for AT unit by Rommel ( see German Guns) . - 7.9mm PzB 38/39 & wz 35 were German, the latter being from captured Polish stocks. - 75mm L15 vz 15 was Czech made ( see Polish Guns.) - 75nmm L36 mle 1897 was bought from pre-war France (see French Guns). - 40mm L48 AA was a licence built Bofors ( see British Guns.) - All AT Grenades and Pzfaust 30/60 were German issue. - Italian army can use horseteams, ski-troops and cavalry ( the last two in Russia only) - Artillery 75mm, 100/105mm and 81mm Mortars can fire smoke rounds indirectly. - All guns are vehicle/tractor towable except 65mm.

Italian Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery Regular Reliable no modification to PV Onboard Artillery * Regular Reliable no modification to PV not support unit guns; AA; or AT guns Bersaglieri Regular Reliable no modification to PV All Other Units Conscript Poor -50% or x 0.50 You need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers * can be put in poor conscript companies. When testing the battery/platoon it counts as regular reliable. When testing the company, counts as poor conscript. ITALIAN SOFTSKINS The Italian motor industry without doubt produced some of the most innovative truck/tractor designs to see service during the war. The

Italian Army fully expected to fight its next war along her mountainous northern borders as in WWI and vehicles were designed for use in this

While the army possessed excellent designs, the country lacked the industrial capacity to produced enough for any widespread

motorisation of its forces. Hence, the majority of purpose built military vehicles were allocated for use with artillery units, leaving the infantry and armor to suffice with inferior commercial transport.

80

rugged Alpine region. Narrow vehicle width, all wheel drive, tight cornering and excellent cross country performance were prominent features.

PV ITALY Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Moto Guzzi 'Alce' Motorcycle x 3 - A 56 19 1 - 8 Moto Gilera 'Marte' M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 50 13 1 - 7 Fiat 508 MC Light Car 4x2 B 55 15 1 - 10 Autocarretta OM 32,37 Light Truck 4x4 B 30 12 2 A 11 Fiat/Spa TL37, CL39 Light Truck 4x4 C 30 14 2 B 13 Fiat 618 CM, Ceirano 50C Light Truck 4x2 C 38 10 4 B 15 Fiat/Spa TM40 Medium Truck 4x4 C 33 14 4 C 20 Fiat 626, Fiat 38R Medium Truck 4x2 C 33 8 7 C 27 Lancia 3Ro, Fiat 633,634 Heavy Truck 4x2 D 27 8 10 D 15 Breda TP32, TP40, Fiat P4 Heavy Truck 4x4 C 22 10 4 D 28 Breda, Fiat/Soa Dovunque Heavy Truck 6x4 D 20 10 10 D 10 Fiat 708 OCI Lt Tractor trk A 12 6 0 B

Moto Guzzi `Alce' - standard army solo motorcycle. Unlike their German counterpart, there was no provision for an extra passenger on the back, hence one rider only.

Moto Gilera `Marte' - standard army motorcycle sidecar with provision for adding a pedestal mounted LMG on the sidecar to be operated by passenger.

Fiat 508 MC - militarised derivative of the civilian Fiat 1100 car. Variants built were a staff car and cargo carrier.

Autocarretta OM 32,37 - small 4x4 mountain truck designed as a tractor for towing light guns through alpine regions. It had four wheel steering for tight cornering and was very narrow for negotiating small tracks. A pedestal mounted AA LMG could be added at the back and operated by passengers (additional PV.) The OM 32 had solid rubber wheels, the OM 37 was an improved model with pneumatic tyres.

Fiat/Spa TL37, CL39 - the TL37 light 4x4 truck had four wheel steering and excellent cross country performance. Both personnel and cargo versions were produced, including a desert variant, the AS37. The Spa CL39 was a scaled up version of the Autocarretta OM series.

Fiat 618 CM; Ceirano 50C - these archaic cargo trucks dated back to the late 1920's and were still in wide spread use at the outbreak of war.

Fiat/Spa TM40 - medium 4x4 truck used exclusively as artillery tractors. Variants built included a cargo version.

Fiat 626 & 38R - standard medium 4x2 cargo trucks. Other examples include vehicles such as the OM Taurus & Bianchi Miles.

Lancia 3RO; Fiat 633,634 - standard heavy 4x2 cargo trucks. Other examples include the Alfa Romeo 800RE & Fiat 665.

Breda TP32,TP40; Fiat P4 - the Fiat TP32 & TP40 were heavy 4x4 trucks used exclusively as artillery tractors. The Fiat P4 vehicle was an artillery tractor originally produced in 1924 and modernised during the 30's with massive pneumatic tyres.

Breda & Fiat/Spa Dovunque - these 6x4 heavy cargo trucks had the army designation of "Dovunque" meaning "all-terrain" vehicles. They include the Breda 41 & 52, Fiat/Spa 33 & 35.

Fiat 708 OCI - small caterpillar (tracked) gun tractor used for hauling mountain guns. The vehicle had no provision for carrying the crew or ammunition, both of which must follow up or be transported separately.

ITALIAN MOTORISED GUNS

PV ITALY Descript Drive Size Speed Armamen Rd C/C

ion t

26 Moto Guzzi'Trialce' MMG Motor-tricycle - A 46 12 MMG 24 Fiat 508C Mil Light AA Car 4x2 B 55 15 twin LMG 42 Camionette Desertica M43 Lt AA truck 4x4 C 30 14 20mm L65 AA, LMG 59 Autocannone 75/27 Md AA truck 4x2 C 38 10 75mm L30 160 Autocannone 90/53 Hvy AA truck 4x2 D 27 8 75mm L27 85 Autocannone 102/35 Hvy AA truck 4x2 D 27 8 102mm L35 48 AS 42 (HMG) Recon Car 4x4 C 55 26 HMG, LMG 46 AS 42 (20/65) Recon Car 4x4 C 55 26 20mm L65 AA, LMG 39 AS 42 (20mm s18) Recon Car 4x4 C 55 26 20mm L105, LMG

Moto Guzzi`Trialce' MMG - motorised tricycle which was used as an MMG carrier. The vehicle carried a crew of three (including the driver) and the MMG could be stowed in the rear or mounted on a central pedestal ready to fire. The MMG can only be fired when stationary and the crew dismounted (no set-up required.) The MMG can be dismounted and used as a normal MMG within 10cm of the tricycle.

Fiat 508C Mil - the cargo version of the Fiat 508 with pedestal mounted dual AA LMG on the rear with 360o traverse.

Camionette Desertica M43 - standard TL37 Desert truck with 20mm Breda AA gun mounted in the passenger compartment with 180o arc of fire towards the rear. An LMG was mounted at the front and was manned by the co-driver.

Autocannone 75/27 - ex-WWI 75mm Krupp AA gun mounted on the rear of a 1928 Ceirano 50CM truck. Fold-down sides provided a wider platform for the gun crew with no crew protection provided. Another variant used in limited numbers was the Sahariana Corte 75/27 which consisted of a TL37 truck modified in the field to mount a 75/27 Model 12 field gun. The gun was mounted in the rear firing over the front with limited traverse. The original gun shield was still retained.

Italian AFVs were characterised during the war by thin armor, weak engines and poor armament. Italian AFV crews understandably had little confidence in their equipment and fought only moderately well under the circumstances. Even the quality of armor plating used on the tanks was poor, having a tendency to crack when impacted by a shells even when failing to penetrate.

Autocannone 90/53 - Lancia 3RO heavy truck mounting the 90mm L53 AA gun with all-round traverse. Fold-down sides provided a wider gun platform for the crew and four out-riggers were used to stabilise the truck. A large gun shield was provided on most vehicles giving partial cover to gun crew within the guns AOF. Gun could not be fired over the drivers cab. In 1942, the Breda 41 `Dovunque' 6x6 truck replaced the Lancia 3RO in production, being built in very small numbers before the September 1943 Armistice.

Autocannone 102/25 - Fiat 633 heavy truck mounting the ex-WWI 102mm L35 naval gun. The vehicle had fold-down sides for a wider gun platform and four out-riggers to stabilise the truck. No gun shield or crew protection were provided.

AS 42 (LMG), (HMG), (20/65) & (20mm s18) - this unarmored vehicle (and variants) were based on a modified AB41 chassis and designed for reconnaissance operations in the North Africa. They were equipped with a variety of armament with the most common types being the 20mm Breda AA gun, 20mm s18-1000 AT gun and 13.2mm HMG. All were mounted on a central pedestal with 360º traverse. An LMG was also mounted at the rear to one side with provision for a second LMG (additional PV; applicable to all variants.)

ITALIAN ARMOR

The over-burdened Italian industry struggled to produce enough AFVs for the army requirements and the design of better tanks

was given low priority due to the loss of production from retooling and conservatism within the Army. As late as 1943, Mussolini had to order the development of a 75mm gunned tank (P40) because the army still saw no requirement for one. Italy enter the war in 1939 with approximately 1660 tanks and produced a further 3300 tanks, SPs & armored cars up until 1943.

PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 45 L5/21 2 LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 8 B 4 52 L5/32 37 L40 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 8 B 7 47 L3/35 2 LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 26 12 B 3 58 L3 Flamethrower F/Thr,LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 26 12 B 3 54 L3 (20mm) 20 L105 2 1 1 2 1 1 26 12 B 4 74 L6/40 20 L55,LMG 3 2 1 3 3 3 26 16 C 5 70 M11/39 37 L40,2LMG 3 2 1 3 3 3 20 12 C 6

81

116 M13/40 47 L32,3LMG 3 3 3 4 3 3 20 9 C 6 134 M15/42 47 L40,3LMG 4 3 3 5 3 3 25 14 C 6 193 P40 75 L34,LMG 8 5 5 7 5 5 26 15 C 8 PV Self Propelled Guns ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 75 Semovente L40 da 47/32 47 L32 3 2 2 3 2 2 26 17 B 6 93 Semovente M40 da 75/18 75 L20 3 2 1 3 2 1 20 10 C 7 109 Semovente M42 da 75/18 75 L20 4 3 3 5 3 3 26 12 C 7 136 Semovente M42M da 75/34 75 L34 4 3 3 5 3 3 26 12 C 7 177 Semovente M41M da 90/53 90 L53 3 3 1 4 1 - 23 12 C 8 164 Semovente M43 da 75/34 75 L34 7 3 3 8 3 3 25 14 C 7 208 Semovente M43 da 75/46 75 L46 7 4 3 10 5 3 24 14 C 7 171 Semovente M43 da 105/25 105 L25 7 4 3 10 5 3 24 14 C 9 74 Carro Commando M41 HMG 4 3 3 4 3 3 26 14 C 3 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 46 Lancia IZ`M' 4x2 3 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 40 12 C 3 63 AB611 6x4 37 L40,2LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 10 C 5 47 AB40 4x4 3 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 16 C 4 70 AB41 4x4 20 L65,2LMG 1 1 1 2 1 1 52 18 C 5 92 AB43 4x4 47 L40,2LMG 1 1 1 3 2 2 54 20 C 6 113 AB41/43 4x4 50 L60,2LMG 1 1 1 2 1 1 54 20 C 7 38 AS37 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 38 20 C 2 3 36 AB Lince Scout Car 4x4 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 54 20 B 2 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped! Radios; L6/40, M15/42, P40, Semovente M40/M41/M42/M43, Carro Commando M41, AB 40/41, AB Lince, AS37 were equipped as standard. For M13/40, radios were standard after late 1941, prior to which only platoon/company command tanks were radio equipped. One Man Turrets; L5/21, L5/32, L6/40, M11/39. Italian AFV Notes: TANKS

L5/21 - also referred as the Fiat 3000, they were built from 1921 onwards with the design being heavily influenced by the French FT-17. The L5/21 mounted twin MGs while the L5/32 had a low velocity 37mm. The latter was intended for use as platoon and company command tanks.

L3/35 - includes the L3/33 version which was identical. This AFV was more an MG carrier than a tankette and was widely exported because it was cheap. Platoon & company command tanks were able fit one of their two MGs onto an AA mount for the commander. No radios were fitted.

L3 (20mm) - a small quantity of L3/35 were modified to mount the 20mm Solothurn AT rifle in place of the twin MG.

M13/40 - includes the M14/41 which had a more reliable engine but was otherwise identical. The M13/40 was still a poor design with an awkward cre

P40 - based on the M15/42, its sloped armor was influenced by the T34 encountered by Italian troops in Russia. Production continued after the armistice with vehicles going to the Wehrmacht.

L3 Flamethrower - developed in 1935, the L3 tankettes had one of their two MGs replaced with a flame projector. The majority of vehicles towed an armored fuel trailer while late production models had small fuel tanks installed over the engine compartment. This was the only flame throwing AFV to be produced by the Italians.

L6/40 - built to replace the L3/35 in it's reconnaissance role. Although it went into production in 1940, it didn't see general use until 1942 by which time it was obsolete. Production was therefore switched to the Semovente L40.

M11/39 - carrying the 37mm gun mounted in the front hull and a small turret with two MGs, it was intended as a main battle tank but production was limited in favor of the better M13/40. The `One Man Turret' rule applies to turret LMGs only.

w layout, thin riveted armor and under-powered/unreliable engine. M15/42 - same as the M13/40 with increased armor, lengthened hull and

mounting the longer 47mm L40.

SELF PROPELLED GUNS Semovente L40 da 47/32 - with the L6/40 obsolete before entering

service, production was switched to an SP variant. The 47mm gun was mounted with limited traverse in the open topped hull alongside the driver.

Semovente M40 & M41 da 75/18 - influenced by the German StuG III, the hull of the M13/40 tank was used to mount the 75mm L20 infantry howitzer in a fully enclosed superstructure. After 60 vehicles had been produced, M40 was replaced by the M41 which was still identical except for using the latter M14/41 chassis.

Semovente M41M da 90/53 - based on a modified M14/41 chassis, the engine was moved to the centre and the 90mm L53 AA gun mounted at the

rear with limited traverse. Only a few rounds were carried in the SP which meant a turret-less L6 tank carrying extra ammunition had to follow. Only two of the gun crew rode along with the SP and can only fire if completely stat

Carro Commando M41 - a turretless M13/40 or M14/41 converted to a command tank with additional radio equipment and a HMG replacing the hull twin LMGs. Large hatches were installed over the turret ring.

Semovente M42 da 75/18 & M42M da 75/32 - identical to the M41 except built on an M15/42 tank chassis. The production model was to mount the 75mm L34 gun but delays in delivery meant the 75mm L20 howitzer was used as a temporary substitute. Also includes the limited number of M41 da 75/32 which were virtually identical.

ionary. Gun crew receive no cover from sides or rear. Semovente M43 `Daschund' da 75/34, 75/46 & 105/25 - based on the

P40 tank chassis, the length and width of the hull was increased to accommodate a larger superstructure mounting the 75mm L46 AA gun or 105mm L25 howitzer. When the M43 first went into production in 1943, both guns were temporarily unavailable and the 75mm L34 gun was used as a stop-gap, giving rise to the M43 75/34. The M43 75/46 mounted the 75mm L46 AA gun and was to be used as a tank destroyer, while the M43 105/25 with the 105mm L25 howitzer was intended for counter-battery fire role. Production continued on after the armistice under German supervision. Side skirts on the hull sides were standard – covers upper hull only, included in PV.

APC/RECONNAISSANCE Lancia IZ`M' - this 1912 AC saw extensive service throughout WWI,

Spanish Civil War (1937), conquest of Ethiopia (1935-36). By 1940, it was still in its original form except for having the MGs updated. On the front of this AFV, a special wire cutter was mounted which allows it to pass through bar

AB43 - the AB41 was modified by installing a new turret mounting the longer 47mm L40 gun. This turret was considerably larger than on the previous AB41, being originally designed for the prototype `Celere Sahariano' tank (which never reached production). The hull was widened to take

ITALIAN GUNS

As a result, the Italian Army fielded more calibres and shell types than any other nation involved in WWII, creating enormous logistical problems and headaches for the already over-stretched

logistics. Italian gunners however, fought surprisingly well for all their handicaps and were noted for their brave conduct in combat, a significant contrast to the remainder of the Italian forces. With German assistance, HEAT ammunition was introduced during September 1942 for certain guns in an attempt to bolster the Italian AT firepower.

b-wire (fences) without any movement penalty. AB 611(a) & (b) - also referred to as the Fiat 611 or AB34. Built on a 6x4

military truck and designed for colonial service. The (a) mounted twin MGs in the front of the turret while the (b) support version had the low velocity 37mm gun.

AB 40 - first in the series of 4x4 wheeled AC, the AB40 mounted only MGs and was quickly superseded in production by the AB41 mounting a 20mm cannon. Two drivers were provided for in the front and back allowing it to be driven full speed in reverse.

AB41 - identical to the AB40 except the turret was redesigned to take the 20mm cannon. (Also includes the post-armistice production AB43/41 which mounted the 20mm cannon and was similar in both performance and appearance.)

the larger turret and uparmored on the front. AB41/43 - after the armistice, the AB43 production came under German

supervision and the AC was modified to mount the more powerful German 50mm L60 in the same turret. Production of a 20mm gun version was also carried out using the original AB41 turret design.

AS37 - the 4x4 wheeled open-topped APC. The only Italian effort made during the war to produce an APC. Based on the Fiat TL37 truck, it was open-topped with rear access doors.

AB Lince - manufactured from 1942, it was an exact copy of the British Dingo Scout car.

Italy's artillery situation was one of the worst of any major power in WWII. Possessing large quantities of vintage obsolete guns, this situation was only made worse by the acceptance of captured booty from various sources or purchased from Germany.

ITALY PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 20 20mm L105 S18-1000 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 2 No gun shield

82

4 3 2 2 2 22 37mm L40 37/40 A (11) (10) (9) (7) (5) 3 4 4 3 3 2 33 37mm L45 37/45 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 4 4 3 3 32 47mm L32 47/32 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 No gun shield 5 5 4 4 3 3 +23pp -> StGt 41 HEAT ‘43+ (11) (7) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 39 47mm L40 47/40 * (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) * 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 46 75mm L20 75/18 B (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 3 +14pg ->75mm L20 75/18 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8

8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 71 75mm L34 75/32 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk

84 75mm L42 75/39 C (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 5 No gun shield 9 9 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5

11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 6 103 75mm L46 75/46 C (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5

126 90mm L53 90/53 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 6 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 42 65mm L17 65/17 A (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 4 No gun shield, Hdrawn - - - - - - +0pg -> 65mm L17 65/17 HEAT ‘42+ A (8) (8) (7) (6) 5 5 5 5 55 75mm L30 75/27 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 3 3 +17pg 75mm L30 75/27 HEAT ‘42+ (10) (9) (9) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 62 100mm L19 vs 14 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - +15pg -> 100mm L19 vs 14 HEAT ‘42+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 70 100mm L24 vs 14/19 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - - +16pg ->100mm L24 vs 14/19 HEAT 1942+ (9) (8) (8) (8) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 71 102mm L35 102/35 C (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - - - 70 105mm L25 105/25 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 +16pg ->105mm L25 105/25 HEAT ‘43 + (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L65 AA 20/65 A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 No gun shield 3 2 2 2 2 Italian Gun Notes AT/Tank Guns

20mm L105 Solothurn s18 - Swiss designed gun produced under license. It was classified as a heavy AT rifle. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and transportation (ie. cannot be

75mm L20 75/18 - field howitzer & mountain gun built in limited numbers.

90mm L53 90/53 - pre-war AA gun used extensively in dual AA/AT role. Slightly better than the German 88mm L56 FlaK. Ground & vehicle mounted versions used.

towed.) 37mm L40 37/40 - low velocity tank mounted gun developed early 1920s. 37mm L45 37/45 - licensed copy of the German 37mm PaK 35/36. Can be

carried & fired `en portee' on a Lt.truck facing to the front or rear. 47mm L32 47/32 - copy of the Austrian 47mm Bohler. Used as an infantry,

AT & mountain gun. No gun shield. Can be carried & fired `en portee' on Lt.truck (or heavier) facing to the rear. In German service, StGt 41 became available for use with this gun in late 1943, refer `Spigot Bombs'. (Cannot be used on AFVs). Gun cannot be towed prior to 1942.

47mm L40 47/40 - tank mounted gun specifically designed to replace the 47/32.

HEAT ammunition introduced Sep 1942 prior to battle of El Alamien. 75mm L34 75/32 - identical to the 75/18 in appearance except for the

extended barrel. Intended as an artillery gun, it mainly served in an AT role. HEAT ammunition introduced Sep 1942 prior to battle of El Alamien.

75mm L42 75/39 - ex-British pre-war Vickers AA guns left behind in France. 54 were purchased from the Germans in 1941. No gun shield.

75mm L46 75/46 - pre-war AA gun used extensively in dual AA/AT role. No gun shield.

Howitzers/Field Guns

65mm L17 65/17 - pre-WWI mountain gun. Although designed with a gun shield, they were not used in combat.

75mm L30 75/27 - original model was licensed copy of the pre-WWI Krupp 75mm M1905 gun. Various upgraded models built with different carriages ranging from single to split trails.

100mm L19 vz14 & L24 vz14/19 - ex-Austro-Hungarian howitzers obtained under WWI war reparations with further quantities purchased from Germans in 1941. Also includes the identical Czech 100mm vz16 mountain gun.

102mm L35 102/35 - ex-naval AA gun used on ground-mount or in a static role. Truck & rail mounted versions also used. Capable of 360º degree traverse.

105mm L25 105/28 - Licensed built version of the French mle 1913 medium artillery gun.

AA/Automatic Cannon

20mm L65 AA 20/65 - standard light AA gun. Used extensively in dual AA/AT role. No gun shield. Can be carried & fired `en portee' on Lt.truck (or heavier) with 360º traverse. Gun can be fired by crew without unlimbering.

Italian Organisation

INFANTRY REGIMENT

83

• All transport was horse drawn.

• Two regiments made up the bulk of a division • Radios were issued to Regiment HQs only.

INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1940 - ‘43 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Regiment 1940 - ‘43 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3-5 Battalion - 1 Mortar Company (2 – 3 platoons, each with 3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) regiment support unit 1 AT Company (2 platoons of 3 – 4 x 47mm AT Guns each) regiment support unit 0-1 Gun Company (2 platoons of 2 – 3 75mm Infantry Guns each) regiment support unit Infantry Battalion

3 Infantry Company -

1 Weapons Company HQ only use if not broken down

2 Mortar Platoons (each with 3 sections of 3 x 45mm mortar) battalion support unit

1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a

1 Weapons Company

2 MG Platoons (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG) battalion support unit

1 AT Platoon (with 3 sections of 3 x 20mm AT Rifles) battalion support unit Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (2 Company HQ Teams, plus one Infantry Section) 1 per inf co. 3 Infantry Platoons - Infantry Platoon

2 Infantry Sections (see below) - 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team) 1 per inf pl.

Treat as two squads, each with 1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams, but each squad must remain in squad cohesion with the other. Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 1 NCO, 1 SMG and rifle) Infantry Section - (2 NCO, 18-19 men, 2 LMG, 2 SMG and rifles) Infantry Company HQ Section - (2 Off, 3-9 NCO, 24-26, rifles)

BERSAGLIEN MOTORISED INFANTRY REGIMENT 1942-‘43

• A good proportion of transport was horse drawn, eventhough trucks are listed below. • The Bersaglieri also had limited armoured battalions, but in Russia had ONLY L6/40 (two companies in total!).

• Two were attached to motorised infantry divisions, one to armored divisions. • Radios issued to company level HQs.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Regiment 1942-‘43 1 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry HQ n/a 2-3 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Battalion -

1 AA Company (3 platoons of 4 x 20mm AA guns) 13 trucks regiment support unit

1 Mortar Company (3 platoons with 3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) regiment support unit 1 AT Company (3 platoons of 3 x 47mm AT gun, 3 trucks) regiment support unit

Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Battalion 1 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 2 - 4 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Company - 1 MG Company 1 MG Company HQ (Company HQ Team, 2 Rifle Teams, 1 truck) only use if pl. not allocated 4 MG Company Platoon (2 sections, each with 1 x MMG, 1 truck) battalion support unit Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Company 1 Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team + radio, 3 Rifle Teams, 2 Trucks, 1 Field Car) 1 per Ber. mot. inf. co. 3 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Platoon - 1 Light Gun Platoon (3 x 20mm AA/AT guns, 3 trucks) company support unit 1 AT Gun Platoon (3 x 47mm AT guns, 3 trucks) company support unit Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Platoon 1 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team, 1 truck) 1 per Ber. mot. inf. pl. 3 Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Section (2 LMG Teams, 1 Rifle Team, 1 truck) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 3 NCO, 3 men, 3 SMG, rifles) 1 Truck Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Section - (1 NCO, 8 men, 2 LMG, 2 SMG, 5 rifles) 1 Truck Bersaglien Motorised Infantry Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 4 NCO, 10 men, 5 SMG, rifles, radio) 2 Trucks, 1 Field Car

• One was found in each armored division from 1941. Note, the only armor used in Russia was L6/40 and Semovente L40 da 47/32.

MEDIUM TANK REGIMENT 1941 onwards

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Medium Tank Regiment

3 Medium Tank Battalion - 1 AA Battalion (3 batteries of 4 x 20mm AA guns) 13 light trucks regiment support unit

1 Medium Tank Regiment HQ n/a

Medium Tank Battalion 1 Medium Tank Battalion HQ (1 tank) 1 per med. tank. bat. 1 Medium Tank Battalion Reserve (2 platoons of 5 tanks) battalion support unit 3 Medium Tank Company - Medium Tank Company 1 Medium Tank Company HQ (1 tank) 1 per med. tank co. 3 Medium Tank Platoon (5 tanks) -

• From 1942, regiments fell out of use, but light tank battalions were assigned independently.

LIGHT TANK REGIMENT • One was found in each 1940-‘41 armored division.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have:

84

Light Tank Regiment 1 Light Tank Regiment HQ n/a 3 Light Tank Battalions - Light Tank Battalion 1 Light Tank Battalion HQ (1 tank) 1 per lt. tank bat. 3 Light Tank Company - Light Tank Company 1 Light Tank Company HQ (1 tank) 1 per lt. tank co. 3 Light Tank Platoon (4 tanks) -

• One was attached to each armored division.

ARMORED RECON BATTALION

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Recon Battalion 1 Armored Recon Battalion HQ (1 Bat HQ Team in Field Car, 1 Recon Section*) 1 per arm. rec. bat. 3 Armored Recon Troops (treat as company) - Armored Recon Troop 2 Armored Recon Section (treat as platoon) 3 x armored car -

* Recon Section 10 Rifle Teams and 10 motorcycle bases as transport. No effect on battalion morale if this section receives bad morale result or is destroyed.

SELF PROPELLED BATTALION • At least one battalion was attached to each armored division’s artillery regiment.

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Self Propelled Battalion 1 Self Propelled HQ Battery (2 Command AFVs* + 1 Recon Section) 1 per SP bat. 2-3 Self Propelled Battery (each with 4 - 6 SPs plus 1 command AFV*) - * Command AFVs were Carro Commando M13 series if 75mm SPs were used.

• Radios at Company HQ level • Could be entirely motorised

PARACHUTE BATTALION 1942-‘45 • Eight battalions per airborne division

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Parachute Battalion 1 Parachute Battalion HQ n/a 3 Parachute Company - 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) battalion support unit Parachute Company 1 Parachute Company HQ (2 Company HQ Teams (1 with radio), 1 Rifle Section) 1 per para. co. 3 Parachute Platoon - Parachute Platoon 1 Parachute Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team) 1 per para. pl. 3 Parachute Section (2 LMG Teams, 1 Rifle Team) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Parachute Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 NCO, 2 SMG, rifles) Parachute Section - (1 NCO, 8 men, 2 LMG, 2 SMG, 5 rifles) Parachute Company HQ Section - (2 Off, 2-4 NCO, 4-6 men with 2 SMG, rifles, radio) AT COMPANY • Up to two AT Companies with 2 – 3 battieres could be attached to mobile and armored divisions. • One AT Company with 3 batteries would be attached to each infantry division. Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AT Company See Guns/Artillery/Mortars Restrictions 1 AT Company HQ 1 per AT co. 2 – 3 Battery (4 x 90mm AA/AT/SP Guns) - ARTILLERY

• See artillery restrictions.

• One artillery regiment would support two infantry regiments in a division. • Often horse drawn, but motorised in North Africa, and often motorised in Motorised Infantry units.

ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Artillery Regiment 2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 105mm or 75mm) see artillery restrictions 1 Mortar Battalion (3 companies, each with 2 platoons of 3 x 81mm mortar) see artillery restrictions

Japan The Japanese Army was first and foremost an infantry force and although it's armor component was weak, it was one to be greatly respected. Out- numbered in most of their engagements with the enemy, the spirit of the Japanese and the ability of their conmanders made them exremely tough opposition up until the start of '43. From the start of 1943, poor quality recruits lowered the standard of the whole army. We have made all 1943 – 1945 Japanese units ‘regular’ to average out the army’s mix of veteran and conscript troops. Within the division there was a tendency to split and divide up formations to form ad-hoc battle groups for individual tasks and missions. On completion, these units were quite often not reattach back to their parent unit, thus destroying any esprit de corps a division or regiment might have. Their equipement was another story. Obsolete and out of date, the machine guns and rifles used were crude and badly designed plus the lack of general maintainance by the Japanese soldier may explain why they preferred open charges and hand to hand combat in preferrence to firing their

own weapons. Japanese fanaticism in the field went extremes with even tank crews leaving perfectly good tank to engage the enemy on foot in close combat.

85

JAPANESE EQUIPMENT LISTS

PV AFV DATES PROD FR 36 Type 92 Combat Car 39-43 ? 6 34 Type 94 Light TK 39-43 ? 6 60 Type 95 Light HA-GO 39-45 2400 2 52 Type 97 Light TE-KE a 39-45 ? 1 35 Type 97 Light TE-KE b 39-45 ? 3 69 Type 98 Light KE-NI 42-45 200 5 66 Type 4 Light KE-NU 44-45 100 6 76 Type 89B CHI-RO 39-45 225 4 92 Type 97 CHI-HA 39-45 - 3 132 Type 97 Special 42-45 1600 5 149 Type 01 CHI-HE 42-45 ? 7 179 Type 03 CHI-NU 44-45 60 7 75 Type 2 KA-MI 42-45 ? 6 124 Type 1 HO-NI I 42-45 - 6 119 Type 1 HO-NI II 42-45 - 7 136 Type 3 HO-NI III 44-45 95 7 133 Type 4 HO-RO 43-45 - 7 58 Type 98 SA-TO 39-45 ? 7 62 Type 98 SA-KI 39-45 ? 7 28 HO-KI 41-45 ? 7 37 Type 91 SUMIDA 39-45 ? 5 48 Type 95 (NAVAL) 39-45 ? 6 52 Type 92 OSAKA 39-45 ? 5 38 Carrier LMG 42-45 ? 7 144 M3'STUART' 44-45 ? 7 PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 11 37mm L22 Type 11 39-43 ? 5 28 37mm L45 Type 94/97 39-45 ? 2 48 47mm L54 Type 01 4l-45 ? 5 74 75mm L38 Type 90 39-40 ? 4 85 75mm L44 Type 88 39-45 ? 5

23 70mm L9 Type 92 39-45 ? 1 40 75mm L19 Type 41 39-45 ? 2 45 75mm L21 Type 94 39-45 ? 3 55 75mm L31 Type 38i/95 39-45 ? 3 69 105mm L24 Type 91 39-45 ? 5 82 150mm L11 Type 38 39-45 ? 7 93 150mm L23 Type 96 39-45 ? 7 24 20mm L73 Type 98 AA 39-45 ? 3 32 20mm L73 Dual 98 AA 39-45 ? 6 27 25mm L60 Type 96 AA 39-45 ? 5 36 25mm L60 96 Double 39-45 ? 7 PV MORTARS DATES PROD FR 15 50mm (each) 39-45 ? 0 45 81mm 39-45 ? 2 70 90mm 39-45 ? 4 180 150mm 39-43 ? 7 PV ARTILERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39-45 - 3 180 105mm (per pair) 39-45 - 5 300 150mm (per pair) 39-45 - 7

PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Motorcycle 39-45 ? 4 soft Motorcycle Sidecar 39-45 ? 7 skin Light Car 39-45 ? 6 chart Light Truck 39-45 ? 5 Medium Truck 39-45 ? 6 Heavy Truck 39-45 ? 6 Amphibious Truck 39-45 ? 6 Halftrack 39-45 ? 6 Medium Tractor 39-45 ? 3

PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39-45 - 1 10 SMG Team 41-45 - 5 15 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-45 - 3 26 MMG 39-45 - 3 30 HMG 39-45 - 4 6 AT Grenade Late 43-45 - 3 6 AP/Rifle Grenade 42-45 - 3 4 AT/Rifle Grenade Early 42-45 - 3 9 AT/Rifle Grenade Late 43-45 - 3 18 20mm 97 ATR Team 39-45 - 2 5 Smoke Grenade 39-45 - 5 8 Lunge Mine 44-45 - 2 page39 AP Mine 39-45 - 2 page39 AT Mine 41-45 - 4 15 Flamethrower 39-45 - 3 5 Demolition Charge 39-45 - 4 20 Radio 39-45 - 5 30 FAO 39-45 - 4 30 FAC 41-45 - 5 JAPANESE EQUIPMENT NOTES - M3 ‘Stuarts' were captured in 42 from US forces and used against them when they returned in 44-45 in the Phillipines. They can only be used in the Phillipines. - Carriers were captured from British in small numbers while advancing into Burma, Malaya and Singapore. - AT Rifle Grenade was a copy of the German ones. - SMG's were primarily issued to airborne units.

Heavy Tractor 39-45 ? 4

- Japanese army can use horseteams and cavalry in China only. - Artillery 75mm and 105mm, and all mortars can fire smoke rounds indirectly.

Japanese Troop Classes and Morale Ratings Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery Veteran Elite no modification to PV 1939-42 Offboard Artillery Regular Elite no modification to PV 1943-45 All Other Units Veteran Elite +50% or x 1.5 1939-42 All Other Units Regular Elite +25% or x 1.25 1943-45 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers JAPANESE SOFTSKINS During the late 20's and early 30's, vehicle production within Japan was dominated by Ford & GM. By the outbreak of war in 1939, the majority of vehicle manufacturing plants were consumed by Japanese companies who continued to churn out obsolete American truck designs. The industry, however, sadly lacked a background in vehicle technology which resulted in few new designs were forthcoming during the course of the war. Japanese tactical doctrine placed little emphasis on motorised forces. Manchuria and China provided few surfaced roads suitable for

vehicles and the Pacific and Indo-china campaigns were likewise unsuitable with the additional problem of shipping. As a result, the infantry rarely rode into battle. Trucks were usually collected into transport regiments for supply and logistical work. Tracked prime movers were employed entirely for hauling artillery. Quantities of captured vehicles were used when ever possible, including British and US vehicles overrun in Malaysia, Singapore and Bataan.

PV JAPAN Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Type 97 Sankyo Motorcycle x 3 - A 44 15 1 - 8 Type 97 Iwasaki M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 40 11 1 - 8 Type 95 Kurogane Light Car 4x4 B 44 16 1 - 13 Nissan 180 Isuzu Typ 94 Light Truck 4x2 C 42 11 4 B 24 Isuzu Type 94 A/B Medium Truck 6x4 C 40 15 7 C 27 Isuzu Type 2 (7 ton) Heavy Truck 4x2 D 32 8 10 D 21 Toyota SUKI Amphib Truck 4x4 D 30 12 5 - 20 Isuzu Type 98 KO-HI Halftrack ht C 28 16 4 C 16 Type 94,92,98 (4-6 ton) Medium Tractor trk C 25 13 2 C 11 Type 92, 95 (8-13 ton) Heavy Tractor trk C 20 8 0 D

Type 97 Sankyo & Iwaski Motorcycles - these two types were the most common models supplied to the army. Designs were based on US Harley Davidsons and both used solo & with sidecar. Sidecar versions could be equipped with a pintle mounted LMG (magazine fed) at additional cost.

Type 95 Kurogane - nicknamed the "Black Medal", this 4x4 command/scout car was the equivalent to the famous Willy's Jeep, preceding it by more than four years. Production stop in 1940.

Nissan 80 & 180; Isuzu Type 94 - most common types of trucks employed tactically by the Army. These vehicles were based on pre-war US designs.

Isuzu Type 94A/B - the 4x6 Type 94A/B trucks were identical to 2x4 Izusi Type 94 except for the additional rear driven axle.

Isuzu Type 2, (7 ton) - the heaviest tactical truck employed by the Army. Toyota SUKI - unarmored 4x4 amphibious vehicle based on the Toyota KCY

truck. The vehicle had a boat shaped hull. Isuzu Type 98 KO-HI - semi-tracked vehicle influenced from German semi-

tracked prime movers. Type 92,94,98 (4-6 ton) - these fully tracked vehicles were the standard

prime movers for light and medium artillery. Their running gear was all based on light tank chassis with the first model entering service in 1932.

Type 92,95 (8-13 ton) - fully tracked prime movers for hauling medium to heavy artillery.

86

JAPANESE ARMOR With the Japanese Army very infantry orientated, their deployment and training of tank units was ultra-conservative and unimaginative. Tanks were characteristically small in size, thinly armored, poorly gunned and light weight. Size & weight were important for shipping purposes as all were envisaged as fighting abroad. With the poor road network in China, tanks were all required to have good cross-country mobility. The tactical use of tanks was limited to infantry support with units being split amongst infantry divisions. These tactics were heavily influenced & mislead by the fighting in China where enemy forces was

always disorganised and poorly equipped. The need for heavier armor and more effective guns was therefore not realised until late in the war. Tank Divisions were first formed in mid-1942, but were still committed to battle piece-meal (ie. company, battalions.) By late 1944, the opportunity to effectively deploy armor was minimal and in many defensive actions, tanks were simply dug-in and used as pill-boxes. Japan entered the in 1941 with 3000 tanks & tankettes and manufactured a further 6490 up to 1945.

PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 36 Combat Car Type 92 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 12 B 3 34 Light Type 94 TK LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 25 12 B 3 60 Light Type 95 `HA-GO' 37 L45,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 17 C 5 52 Light Type 97 `TE-KE'(a) 37 L45 2 1 1 1 1 1 26 14 C 5 35 Light Type 97 `TE-KE'(b) LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 26 14 C 3 69 Light Type 98 `KE-NI' 37 L50,2*LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 34 19 C 5 66 Light Type 04 `KE-NU' 57 L26,2*LMG 1 1 1 3 3 3 24 16 C 6 76 Medium Type 89B `CHI-RO' 57 L22,2*LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 8 C 6 92 Medium Type 97 `CHI-HA' 57 L26,2*LMG 3 2 2 3 3 3 25 18 C 6 132 Medium Type 97 Special 47 L54,2*LMG 3 2 2 5 3 3 25 18 C 5 149 Medium Type 01 `CHI-HE' 47 L54,2*LMG 6 3 3 5 3 3 27 19 C 5 179 Medium Type 03 `CHI-NU' 75 L38,2*LMG 6 3 3 5 3 3 27 19 C 7 75 Amphibious Type 02 `KA-MI 37 L50,2*LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 23 14 C 5 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 124 Type 01 `HO-NI I' 75 L38 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 7 119 Type 01 `HO-NI II' 105 L24 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 9 136 Type 03 `HO-NI III' 75 L44 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 7 133 Type 04 `HO-RO' 150 L11 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 11 58 Type 98 `SA-TO' 20 L73 AA 2 2 2 1 1 1 25 18 C 4 62 Type 98 `SO-KI' 20 L73 Double AA 2 2 2 1 - - 25 18 C 4 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 28 `HO-KI' - 2 1 1 1 1 1 25 18 B - 37 Type 91 `Sumida' 6x4 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 39 8 C 3 1 48 Type 95 `Naval' 6x4 4*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 10 C 3 52 Type 92 `Osaka' 4x2 MMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 5 C 3 Smoke Dischargers;Radios; All Med Type 97 Specials, Med Type 01 CHI-HE, Med Type 03 CHI-NU, SP Type 01/03 HO-NI I,II & III, SP Type 04 HO-RO were equipped with radios as standard. For Med Type 97 CHI-HA & Light Type 95 HA-GO, only company command tanks were radio equipped.

Medium Type 97 CHI-HA, Type 97 Special, Type 01 CHI-HE & Type 03 CHI-NU. From 1944+, Light Type 95`HA-GO'.

One Man Turrets; All `Light' tanks, except Type 02 KA-MI.

Japanese AFV Notes: TANKS

Combat Car Type 92 - designed to replace ACs in cavalry units, the light AFV mounted a 13.2mm HMG in the hull and an LMG in the turret. The late production models had improved suspension and the hull HMG was sometimes replaced with a standard tank LMG.

Light Type 94 TK - this tankette was developed as a supply tank with an ammunition trailer for resupplying front line troops. A small turret with LMG was added for protection.

Light Type 95 `HA-GO' - the most popular AFV due to its reliability. Remained in production until 1943 and became one of the main AFVs alongside the Medium CHI-HA. The turret mounted a 37mm infantry gun & a rear offset LMG (only one of either can be fired each move.)

Light Type 97 `TE-KE'(a) & (b) - mounting either the 37mm infantry gun or LMG in the turret, this AFV was very advanced in 1937.

Light Type 98 `KE-NI' - produced as a replacement for the HA-GO. It mounted a longer 37mm gun, slightly better armor and was considerably faster. Only a limited production was carried out (100).

Light Type 04 `KE-NU' - approximately 100 Type 95 HA-GO tanks had their turrets replaced with ex-CHI-HA turrets (mounting the 57mm gun.) These turrets had become available when old CHI-HA tanks were upgraded to `Specials'.

Medium Type 89B `CHI-RO' - first Japanese AFV to enter mass production (1928). Designed for infantry support, there were two versions, A (1928) & B (1936) which differed slightly in appearance but were otherwise identical in performance.

Medium Type 97 'CHI-HA' - except for the turret armament, the tank was very advanced when introduced in 1937. Unlike any other AFV, it was progressively upgunned and uparmored. Radios were not installed in these tanks until 1945.

Medium Type 97 Special - the standard CHI-HA was upgunned by redesigning a new turret mounting a copy of the Soviet 45mm AT gun. Unlike the standard CHI-HA, radios were installed as of 1942 which lead to it being issued as a platoon/company command tank.

Medium Type 01 `CHI-HE' - Identical to the Type 97 Special with a substantially uparmored hull. This upgrade was carried out after combat against Soviet 45mm AT guns in 1939 where they easily penetrated the armor on the CHI-HA.

Medium Type 03 `CHI-NU' - using the Type 01 CHI-HE hull, a new larger turret was installed mounting a new 75mm gun. Production took place during 1944-45 with sixty being built. Although assigned to tank regiments for the defence of the Japanese mainland, none saw combat.

Amphibious Type 02 `KA-MI' - based on the Type 95 HA-GO, large pontoons were mounted either side of the hull for buoyancy and a pair of

propellers & rudders for propulsion. While travelling on land with pontoons attached, all road & C/C speed is reduced x2/3. Pontoons can be jettisoned by the crew from within the AFV and costs half a move to complete (stationary.)

SELF PROPELLED GUNS

Type 01 `HO-NI I' & `HO-NI II' - the `HO-NI I' Tank Destroyer was based on the Type 97 CHI-HA Medium tank chassis with a 75mm Type 90 gun mounted with limited traverse. A shield was placed around the front and side of the gun. Crew receive only partial cover from flank and none from rear to small arms fire. The HO-NI II was identical except it mounted a 105mm howitzer.

Type 03 `HO-NI III' - identical to the HO-NI I, but with additional armor added to the top and rear of the gun shield fully enclosing the gun crew. It was armed with the more powerful 75mm Type 88 AA gun.

Type 04 `HO-RO' - similar to the `HO-NI I', this self propelled howitzer was built by the Japanese Navy and mounted the old 150mm Type 38 howitzer. Crew receive only partial cover from flank and none from rear to small arms fire.

Type 98 `SA-TO' - AA tank based on a modified lengthened KE-NI Light tank chassis. Consisted of a single 20mm AA cannon mounted in an open topped turret.

Type 98 `SO-KI' - AA tank consisting of twin 20mm AA guns with shield, mounted on a modified lengthened KE-NI light tank chassis with built up superstructure. Another version mounting only one 20mm gun on the same tank also existed. Crew receive only partial cover from flanks & rear to small arms fire.

APC/RECONNAISSANCE

`HO-KI' (Cap:11) - fully tracked armored troop carrier. Passengers were not fully protected and received only hard cover from sides & rear. Also employed as a gun tractor.

Type 91 `Sumida' - built on commercial 6x4 truck chassis with the LMG mounted in a turret at the rear. This AC was capable of converting to rail movement and carrying passengers.

Type 95 `Naval' - similar layout to the Sumida AC except built on a different 6x4 chassis. The extra LMGs were mounted in the sides & front hull with limited traverse. Not adaptable to rail.

Type 92 `Osaka' - built on a 4x2 8-cwt chassis with one turret mounted LMG at the rear and the other mounted in the front hull. (The large variety of Japanese armored cars employed during the war was a massive and motley collection of both foreign designs and local expedients. The above three examples were the most common official Japanese versions used in combat.)

JAPANESE GUNS

87

As with most aspects of the Imperial Japanese Army, gun development was heavily influenced by their experiences in China. Soviet intervention into Manchuria 1939 led to a number of large battles with better equipped Russian troops. Many deficiencies brought to light in equipment prompted an urgent rethink in many areas, especially in development of AT guns which had been previously neglected altogether.

Except for some early German Krupp designs, the majority of Japanese guns were copied directly from French guns with minor modifications. Manufacturing quality was always inferior to other Western nations and only handful of guns were designed for vehicle towing as the horse was still in wide spread use. Japanese artillery suffered from a lack of large calibre guns. Medium & heavy artillery above 75mm were only allocated at Corps/Army level formations. JAPAN PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 11 37mm L22 Type 11 A (10) (9) (6) to-hit chance 3 No gun shield 3 2 2 penetration 28 37mm L45 Type 94/97 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 Horse-drawn 6 5 4 4 3 3 29 37mm L50 Type 00/01 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 48 47mm L54 Type 01 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 23 57mm L22 Type 90 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) * 4 4 3 3 2 26 57mm L26 Type 97 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) * 5 4 4 3 3 74 75mm L38 Type 90 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 5 WP 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 85 75mm L44 Type 88 C (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 No gun shield 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 PV Howitzers/ Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 23 70mm L9 Type 92 A (9) (9) (8) (6) (Horse-drawn) 4 WP - - - - +0pg -> 70mm L9 Type 92 HEAT ’45 (8) (8) (7) (5) 4 4 4 4 40 75mm L19 Type 41 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 (HEAT:5 ‘44+) WP - - - - - - - +0pg -> 75mm L19 Type 41 HEAT ‘44+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 5 5 5 5 5 45 75mm L21 Type 94 A (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 WP - - - - - - - - +0pg -> 75mm L21 Type 94 HEAT ‘44+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 5 5 5 5 5 5 55 75mm L31 Type 38/95 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 (Horse-drawn) WP 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 3 3 69 105mm L24 Type 91 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - - 82 150mm L11 Type 38 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 (Horse-drawn) WP 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 93 150mm L23 Type 96 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 WP - - - - - - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L73 Type 98 A (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) (No g/shield) 1 (Horse-drawn) 3 2 2 2 2 32 20mm L73 Dual Type 98 A (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) 1 (Horse-drawn) 3 2 2 2 2 27 25mm L60 Type 96 B (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 (Static mount only) 3 3 2 2 2 2 36 25mm L60 Dual Type 96 B (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 (Static mount only) 3 3 2 2 2 2 Japanese Gun Notes: AT/Tank Guns

37mm L22 Type 11 - copy of the French 37mm mle 16 infantry gun. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and transportation.

37mm L45 Type 94/97 - the crude Type 94 was produced as an infantry/AT gun and like most Japanese guns, it was very light for man-handling through awkward terrain. The Type 97 was a licensed built copy of the German 37mm PaK 35/36 AT gun.

37mm L50 Type 01 - used exclusively for armament in the Type 98 KE-NI & Type 02 KA-MI tanks

47mm L54 Type 01 - developed in 1941 combining features from both the Soviet 45mm and German 37mm AT guns and intended specifically for an AT role.

57mm L22 Type 90 & L26 Type 97 - both Type 90 & 97 were pre-war guns exclusively built as AFV armament (CHI-RO & CHI-HA).

75mm L38 Type 90 - the design was based on the French Schneider 85mm mle 1927 and was employed extensively as an AT gun.

75mm L44 AA Type 88 - a copy of the 75mm Vickers AA gun from 1922. No gun shield. 360o traverse.

Howitzers/Field Guns

70mm L9 Type 92 - short infantry gun often referred to as the `battalion gun'. It was capable of firing at very high trajectory and could be disassembled for pack horse transport. Horse-drawn only.

75mm L19 Type 41 - a copy of the Krupp Model 1908 mountain gun built under license. Could be dismantled for pack horse transport. Horse-drawn only.

75mm L21 Type 94 - based on the earlier Type 41 mountain gun, 75mm L31 Type 38/95 - improved copy of the pre-WWI 75mm Krupp

Model 1905 field gun. Horse-drawn only. 105mm L24 Type 91 - standard divisional field howitzer based on a

French 105mm Schneider design. Crude and very light. Horse-drawn only. 150mm L11 Type 38 - pre-WWI howitzer which was a license built Krupp

design. Although withdrawn from service in 1942, it was dragged out again to arm the Type 01 HO-KI SP. Horse-drawn only.

150mm L23 Type 96 - standard heavy artillery howitzer. AA/Automatic Cannon

20mm L73 Type 98 - standard light AA gun which was also treated as an AT gun. Could be disassembled for pack horse transport. Gun can be fired by crew without unlimbering.

88

25mm L60 Type 96 - three versions existed; single, dual & triple gun mounted. All were ex-naval armament removed from ships & installed as

part of beach defences (static mounted only.) No gun shields were provided and they were usually still manned by naval personnel.

Japanese Organisation INFANTRY REGIMENT 1939 - 1945 • No Radios were issued below Regiment HQ. • All transport was horse drawn or crew drawn. INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1939 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Infantry Battalion - 1 Gun Company (2 platoons of 2 x 70mm infantry guns each) regiment support unit 1 AT Company (3 platoons of 2 x 37mm or 47mm AT guns each) regiment support unit Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 4 Infantry Company (standard, modified, or strengthened.) - 1 MG Company battalion support unit 1 MG Company HQ Section (1 HQ Team, 2 Rifle Teams) take only if not broken down 3 MG Platoons, each with 4 MG Sections (each having 1 MMG, 1 Rifle Team) 1 Gun Platoon with 2 gun sections (each with 2 x 70mm infantry guns, or 2 x 81mm mortars, or 2 x 37mm AT guns) Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ 1 per inf. Co. 3 Infantry Platoons - 1 Weapons Platoon (‘Strengthened’ companies ONLY) company support unit Standard Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team) 1 per inf. pl. 3 Infantry Sections (1 LMG Team, 3 Rifle Teams) - 1 Weapons Section (3 x 50mm mortars, 2 Rifle Teams) platoon supprt unit ‘Modified’ or ‘Strengthened’ Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ 1 per inf. pl.

1 ‘Modified’ Weapons Section (3 x 50mm mortars) platoon supprt unit 3 Infantry Sections (1 LMG Team, 4 Rifle Teams) -

1 ‘Strengthened’ Weapons Section (4 x 50mm mortars) platoon supprt unit ‘Strengthened’ Weapons Platoon 1 Weapons Platoon HQ 1 per inf. pl. 4 Weapons Platoon Infantry Sections (1 x HMG or 1 x 20mm AT Rifle Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Infantry Platoon or Weapons Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 1 NCO, pistol and rifle) Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 12 men with 1 LMG and rifles) ‘Modified’ or ‘Strengthened’ Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 14 men with 1 LMG and rifles) Weapons Section – (1 NCO, 12 men, 3 or 4 50mm mortars, rifles)

• One of these was attached to each armored division. • Radios were issued to company level.

Weapons Platoon Infantry Section – (1 NCO, 10 men, 1 HMG or 20mm AT Rifle, rifles) MOTORISED INFANTRY REGIMENT 1944 - 1945

MOTORISED INFANTRY REGIMENT 1944 - 1945 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Motorised Infantry Regiment 1 Motorised Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Motorised Infantry Battalion - 1 Gun Company (3 platoons of 2 x 75mm field guns, 8 trucks) regiment support unit Motorised Infantry Battalion 1 Motorised Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 3 Motorised Infantry Company battalion support unit 1 MG Company (as for Infantry Regiment plus 13 trucks) Motorised Infantry Company

3 Motorised Infantry Platoon - 1 Motorised Infantry Company HQ 1 per mot. Inf. Co.

1 AT Section (2 x 47mm AT Gun, 3 – 4 trucks) company support unit Motorised Infantry Platoon 1 Motorised Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, ride with Wpns Section) 1 per inf. pl. 3 Motorised Infantry Sections (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams, 1 truck) - 1 Weapons Section (3 x 50mm mortars) platoon supprt unit ARMORED RECON COMPANY 1941 – ‘45 • Maximum of one such company in your force. • One was found in each tank regiment, or, independent ones were attached to an infantry division. ARMORED RECON COMPANY 1941 – ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: ARMORED Recon Company 1 Company HQ (1 x armored car or tankette) 1 per co. 4 Platoons (each with 4 armored cars or tankettes) 1941 – ’43 - 3 Platoons (each with 4 light tanks) 1944 – ’45 - TANK REGIMENT 1943 – ‘45 • 2 – 3 regiments like this were found in armored divisions. TANK REGIMENT 1943 – ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Tank Regiment 1943 – ‘45

1 Regiment HQ (3 light & 4 medium tanks) n/a 4 Mixed Companies - 1 Armored Recon Company (as above) - Tank Company 1 Company HQ (1 light and 2 medium tanks) 1 per tank co. 3 Tank Platoons (3 x medium tank) - 1 Light Tank Platoon (3 x light tank) - INDEPENDENT TANK REGIMENT 1943 – ‘45 • A regiment was frequently assigned to an infantry division during an offense. INDEPENDENT TANK REGIMENT 1943 – ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: INDEPENDENT Tank Regiment 1943 – ‘45 1 Regiment HQ (3 light & 1 medium tanks) n/a 3 Tank Companies - Tank Company 1 Company HQ (2 light & 1 medium tanks) 1 per tank co. 3 Medium Tank Platoon (5 x medium tank) - 1 Light Tank Platoon (4 x light tank) - AT BATTALION • One of these was attached to each armored division. AT BATTALION Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AT BATTALION 1 AT Battalion HQ n/a 2 AT Company (each with 3 platoons of 3 x 47mm AT guns, sometimes motorised) - 1 MG Platoon (each with 4 MG Sections (each having 1 MMG, 1 Rifle Team) -

• Guns of 105mm and 150mm were held at Corps and Army level for special operations and counter battery fire.

ARTILLERY • See artillery restrictions.

ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Division’s Artillery Regiment 3 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm) see artillery restrictions Armored Division’s Artillery Regiment 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm SP HO-NI *) see artillery restrictions 2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 105mm) see artillery restrictions * HO-NI 75mm were also used in a tank destroyer role. Maximum of 3 batteries may be used on board in this fashion, in your force.

POLAND Despite the adoption of French tactics and organisation, the Polish army put great emphasis on aggressive and offensive attitudes. This wuuld have been fine if the infantry had had the heavy weapons and fire support, but they did not and instead it cost them many casualties. Transport was almost entirely horsedrawn except for two convert ed Cavalry Brigades which were motorised. POLISH EQUIPMENT LISTS PV AFV DATES PROD FR

89

33 TK/TKS 39 679 1 39 TK/TKSz 39 24 6 36 VAU 33 dw 39 24 6

82 R35 39 53 5

50 VAU 33 jw 39 52 5 39 7TP dw 39 169 4 78 7TP jw 39 3 51 Ursus wz 29 39 8 7 31 Ursus wz 34 39 86 6 33 Ursus wz 34 (a) 39 5

42 Mk IV B 39 50 5 37 FT-17 39 6 39 FT-17 SA 39 67 5

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 33 37mm L45 Bofors 39 ? 4 31 65mm L20 mle 06 39 ? 6 36 75mm L15 vz 15 39 ? 4 24 20mm L62 Madsen CHM AA 39 ? 5 44 40mm L48 Bofors AA 39 ? 6 36 75mm L19 mle 19/28 39 ? 4

70 100mm L24 vz 14/19 39 ? 4

53 76mm L30 M02/30 39 446 5

62 75mm L36 role 1897 39 ? 2 62 100mm L19 vz 14 39 ? 4

PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 39 - 2 180 100/105/114mm (pair) 39 - 5 300 155mm (per pair) 39 - 7 15 46mm Mortar 39 - 1 45 81mm Mortar 39 - 6 PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Motorcycle 39 ? 3 soft Motorcycle Sidecar 39 ? 5 skin Light Car 39 ? 6 chart Light Truck 39 ? 4 Medium Truck 39 ? 5 Light Tractor 39 ? 3 Medium Tractor 39 ? 5 PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39 ? 1 15 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39 ? 3 30 MMG 39 ? 4 11 7.9mm wz 36 AT Rifle 39 ? 3 5 Demolition Charge 39 ? 5

page39 AP Mine 39 ? 3 30 FAO 39 ? 4 20 Radio 39 ? 5 POLISH EQUIPMENT NOTES - FT-17 and R35 were purchased from the French ( see French Armor). - Light Mk IVB were purchased from British ( see British Armor.) - No SMG or Flamethrowers were available.

- 75mm L19 and L36 was purchased from the French ( see French Guns.)

Polish Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

- 75mm L30 was bought from the Soviets ( see Soviet Guns)

- 100mm L19 & L24 were bought from Czechs ( see Ital ian Guns.) - 40mm L48 Bofors AA was from Sweden ( see British Guns.) - Artillery 75mm, 100/105/114mm and 81mm mortar can fire smoke rounds indirectly. - Polish army can use horse teams and cavalry. - Only 37mm L45 and 40mm L48 AA guns are vehicle/ tractor towable.

Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery Conscript Reliable - 15% or x 0.85 All Other Units Conscript Reliable - 25% or x 0.75 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers

90

The majority of Polish Army vehicles were purchased from PZInz industries in Warsaw where various Fiat model trucks were manufactured under licence. The same vehicles were also in

widespread use among the civilian population with the majority being requisitioned by the army in the weeks leading upto September 1939.

POLISH SOFTSKINS

PV POLISH/FINNISH Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Sokol 200 & 600 Motorcycle x 3 - A 50 17 1 - 8 Sokol 1000 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 45 12 1 - 7 Poski-Fiat 508/518 Light Car 4x4 B 38 10 1 - 12 Ursus A Light Truck 4x2 C 35 9 4 B 18 Poski-Fiat 621 Medium Truck 4x2 C 33 8 6 B 10 C2P Lt Tractor trk B 30 16 0 B 12 C7P Medium Tractor trk C 22 11 0 D Sokol 200, 600 & 1000 - the Sokol 200 & 600 were small engined

motorcycles while the heavier Sokol 1000 was used as the side-car version. The latter could have a `magazine fed' LMG mounted over the side-car to be fired by the passenger (PV for LMG is additional.)

Poski-Fiat 508/518 - a derivative of the Italian Fiat 508 MC manufactured under licence. An AA LMG (magazine feed) could be mounted over the rear (PV for LMG is additional.)

Ursus A Light Truck - antiquated Polish built light truck supplied to the army during late 20's. Slowly replaced by Fiat models during the 30's. This category

also includes the less numerous Polski-Fiat 618 which had the same capacity & performance.

Polski-Fiat 621 - standard army vehicle which was a licence built derivative of Italian Fiat 621.

C2P Light Tractor - small unarmored tractor based on the TK & TKS tankette chassis. Used for towing of light guns, primarily the 40mm AA Bofors.

C7P Medium Tractor - unarmored tractor based on the chassis of the 7TP tank. Used for towing heavy artillery and tank recovery.

POLISH ARMOR At the out break of WWII, Poland possessed 1200 AFVs with about 800 being servicable. This figure included 700 obsolete tankettes and imported British/French tanks purchased prior to the invasion to bolster the reserves. The official tactical doctrine for tanks closely followed the French line of thinking which lead to all the AFVs being parceled out to infantry divisions, cavalry brigades or battalion sized units held at army reserve.

The High Command also lacked any experience in handling tanks and when the invasion came, the armored units were simply swept aside except for a few small successful encounters. Tank crews overall were badly trained and equipped. Little could have been done by them in the face of the Blitzkrieg.

PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 33 TK/TKS LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 14 B 3 39 TK/TKSz 20 L55 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 14 B 4 36 VAU 33 dw 2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 C 4 50 VAU 33 jw 47 L12,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 C 6 39 7TP dw 2 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 20 12 C 4 78 7TP jw 37 L45,LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 20 12 C 6 51 Ursus wz 29 4x2 37 L22,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 8 C 6 31 Ursus wz 34 (a) 4x2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 34 10 C 4 33 Ursus wz 34 (b) 4x2 37 L22 1 1 1 1 1 1 34 10 C 7 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped Radios; No AFVs equipped One Man Turrets; VAU 33 dw, 7TP dw, Ursus 34.

TK/TKS - light tankette intended for scouting and infantry support. The LMG was mounted on the front hull with limited traverse. There were minor differences between the TK & TKS versions.

TK/TKSz - lacking any AT capability with their tankettes, the Polish Army modified about a quarter of them to mount a 20mm L55 gun (not auto-cannon).

VAU 33 dw & jw - purchased from England in the late 30's, they were Vickers 6 ton tanks modified by the Poles to their own standard (mainly engine & rear deck layout.) The `dw' mounted dual MG turrets abreast on the hull, the j̀w' had a larger single turret mounting the original British 47mm L12 gun.

7TP dw & jw - manufactured in Poland, these tanks were improved copies of the Vickers 6 ton and featured increased armor on the hull and a two man turret for the `jw' variant. The `dw' had dual MG turrets mounted abreast on the hull, the `jw' had a large single turret mounting the Swedish 37mm L45 Bofor gun.

Ursus wz 29 - antiquated four wheeled AC based on commercial truck chassis. It mounted the French 37mm SA gun & an LMG in the turret with a second LMG mounted on the rear hull.

Ursus wz 34 I & II - antiquated four wheeled light AC based on a touring car chassis. The Mk I mounted an LMG in a turret with the Mk II having the French 37mm SA.

POLISH GUNS Polish artillery consisted of a diverse collection of ex-WWI German, Russian, Austrian and French guns with small numbers of modern Czech and Swedish pieces acquired leading up to 1939. Artillery was predominantly horse drawn with the exception of the few AA & AT guns. At all levels, the Polish army was short of guns with a particular

weakness in heavy calibre weapons above 75mm (being only available???) in Corps and Army level formations. Polish Infantry units were also ill-equipped, lacking any direct-fire support weapons normally found in other armies. Their reliance on offensive tactics only made this deficiency all the more felt.

POLAND PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 13 20mm L55 FK * (11) (10) (8) (6) to-hti chance * 3 2 2 2 penetration 11 37mm L22 SA mle 16 * (10) (9) (6) * 3 2 2 33 37mm L45 Bofors A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 14 47mm L12 QF * (11) (9) (7) (5) * 3 3 2 2 PV Howitzers/ Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 31 65mm L20 mle 06 A (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) (No g/shield) 4 (Horse-drawn) - - - - - - 36 75mm L15 vz 15 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 (Horse-drawn)

91

- - - - - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L62 AA Madsen CHM A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 No gun shield 3 2 2 2 2 44 40mm L56 AA Bofors B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 3 No gun shield 6 5 5 4 4 3

ish Gun Notes;Pol

20mm L55 FK - semi-automatic AT cannon mounted on tankettes only. 37mm L45 Bofors - imported Swedish AT gun purchased in large

numbers by Poland prior to the war. 47mm L12 QF - British tank armament as equipped to the VAU (Vickers 6

ton) tanks. 75mm L15 vz 15 - Czech mountain howitzer purchased prior to the war. It

could be broken down for pack horse transport. Horse-drawn only. Also

used extensively by all Axis countries, acquired before the war or either as captured booty from Poland or Yugoslavia.

75mm L30 wz 02/26 - in 1926, the new state of Poland purchased large quantities of the Russian Model 02 field gun. The gun was derived from the pre-WWI Krupp Model 1902 gun. Horse-drawn only.

20mm L60 AA Madsen - licensed built copy of the Danish Madsen 20mm AA gun. No gun shield.

Polish Organisation INFANTRY REGIMENT 1939 • No Radios at all. • All transport was horse drawn. INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1939 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 3 Battalions - 1 AT company (with 3 platoons, each having 3 x 37mm) regiment support unit 1 Gun Platoon (2 x 75mm guns) regiment support unit Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 3 Infantry Companies - 1 Heavy Weapons Company battalion support unit 1 Heavy Weapons Company HQ only take if co. not broken down 3 MG Platoons (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG) 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (1 Co. HQ Team, 1 LMG Team, 4 Rifle Teams) 1 per inf. Co. 3 Infantry Platoon - Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Pl. HQ Team, 1 45mm Mortar) 1 per inf. pl. 3 Squads (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Section – (1 NCO, 10 men, with 1 LMG and 10 rifles), Platoon HQ - (with 1 Off, 2 NCOs, 4 men with 45mm mortar & 6 rifles). Company HQ - (1 Off, 4-6 NCOs and 13-15 men with 1 LMG, 16 rifles.) LIGHT INDEPENDENT TANK COMPANY • One such company was attached to each division. LIGHT INDEPENDENT TANK COMPANY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Light Independent Tank Company 1 Light Independent Tank Company HQ (1 x TK/TKS) 1 per Ind. Tank. Co. 2 Light Independent Tank Platoon (5 x TK/TKS) - 1 Light Independent Tank Reserve Platoon (2 x TK/TKS) - INDEPENDENT TANK BATTALION • Mostly distributed to infantry and cavalry divisions for infantry support. INDEPENDENT TANK BATTALION Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Independent Tank Battalion 1 Independent Tank Battalion HQ (1 x 7TP/VAU) n/a 3 Independent Tank Company - Independent Tank Company 1 Independent Tank Company HQ (1 x 7TP/VAU) 1 per Ind. Tank. Co. 3 Independent Tank Platoon (5 x 7TP/VAU) - ARMORED CAR COMPANY ARMORED CAR COMPANY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Armored Car Company 1 Armored Car Company HQ (1 x wz29f34) 1 per Ind. Tank. Co. 2 Armored Car Company Platoon (2 x wz29/34) - CAVALRY REGIMENT: '39

• Radios at regiment HQ and above. • All transport was horse drawn.

• Three to four regiments, plus an optional infantry battalion, and an armored battalion formed the basis of a Cavalry Brigade.

CAVALRY REGIMENT: '39

Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Cavalry Regiment 1 Cavalry Regiment HQ n/a 4 Cavalry Squadrons - 1 AT Section (Treat as a platoon) 4 x 37mm, horsedrawn regiment support unit 1 Heavy MG Squadron (3 platoons, each with 2 sections of 2 x MMG, horse drawn) regiment support unit Cavalry Squadron (Equivalent to a company) 1 Cavalry Squadron HQ (1 Company HQ Team, on horses) 1 per cavalry squadron 3 Cavalry Sections - Cavalry Section (Equivalent to a platoon) 1 Cavalry Section HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 LMG Team, 1 AT R Team, on horses) 1 per cavalry section 4 Cavalry Patrols (4 Rifle Teams, on horses) - MECHANISED REGIMENTS: '39 • Two such regiments formed the bulk of a converted cavalry brigade of which there were two in '39. • Radios at company level HQs and above throughout. • All transport was horse drawn. MECHANISED REGIMENT: '39 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Mechanised Regiment 1 Mechanised Regiment HQ n/a 1 Infantry Battalion (as above, but in trucks) - 1 Artillery Battalion (with 3 platoons of 4 x 75/100mm guns, all horse drawn) regiment support unit 1 AA Battery (6 x 40mm AA Bofors, horse drawn) regiment support unit AT BATTALION • One was attached to a cavalry brigade. • Radios at company level HQs and above throughout. • All transport was horse drawn. AT BATTALION Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AT Battalion 1 AT Battalion HQ n/a 3 AT Companies (each with 3 platoons, each having 3 x 37mm AT Guns, all horse drawn) - ARTILLERY REGIMENT • See artillery restrictions. • One regiment supported each infantry division. ARTILLERY REGIMENT Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Artillery Regiment 2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm) see artillery restrictions 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 100/105mm) see artillery restrictions

RUMANIAN EQUIPMENT LISTS

RUMANIA Throughout the period 1941-'42, Rumania was Gernany's largest ally on the Eastern Front. Up until it's defection in 1944, Rumania was also the least demanding and most co-operative in respect to sending troops to the front. The Army was strictly an infantry force with ore of the largest armor components of all the Axis nations. Mechanisation was extremely minimal with total reliance on the horse. It was also a strongly Royal army with deep segregation between the officers and the men, who would have virtually nothing to do with one another. The High Command was only just competent yet there were often acts of negligence and corruption which cost many casualties. Lack of punctuality in the field often strained coordination and cooperation with allies.

Rumanian equipment was also lacking in numbers and quality. Divisions were constantly under full strength and their AT arsenal was virtually non-existant. The Germans tried to offset this this by handing over AT guns and captured booty, but it was never enough. It would only be fair to say that both the Rumanians and Hungarians never fought so vigoriously than when they were fighting each other, and had to be constantly seperated on the battlefield.

PV AFV DATES PROD FR

211 StuG IIIG 43-44 ? 6

72 R35 39-42 30 6

83 LT-34 39-42 44 5 39 R-1 (AH-4) 40-42 35 5

92

79 S-Id 40-41 ? 7 78 T-3D 40-42 ? 7 127 TACAM R-2 43-44 ? 7 136 TACAM T60 43-44 ? 6 47 Vickers 6ton m1939 39-42 ? 6 66 Vickers 6ton m1940 39-42 ? 5 102 Pz 35(t) (LT-35) 39-42 110 4 115 Pz 38(t)E (LT-38) 43-44 65 5 216 Pz IVH 43-44 ? 6

37 FT-17 39-41 ? 7 39 FT-17 SA 39-41 ? 6

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 27 47mm L39 Bohler 39-44 ? 4 55 75/76mm L30 39-44 ? 3 61 105mm L14 M12/14 39-44 ? 5

30 37mm L45 Pak 35/36 41-44 ? 3 62 50mrn L60 Pak 38 42-44 ? 6 131 75mm L46 Pak 40 42-44 ? 7 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 39-44 ? 4 62 100mrn L19vz14 39-44 ? 5 63 114mrn L16" 4.5" 39-44 ? 5

PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75/76mm (per pair) 39-44 - 4 180 100/105mrn (per pair) 39-44 - 5 300 150/ 155mrn (per pair) 40-44 - 7 45 81mm mortar 41-45 ? 6 TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR use Field Car 39-44 ? 7 German Light Truck 39-44 ? 5 soft Medium Truck 39-44 ? 7 skin Light Half track 39-42 ? 7 chart Motorcycle 39-44 ? 6 Motorcycle Sidecar 39-44 ? 7 Kubel/Volkswagen 41-44 ? 7 INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39-44 ? 1 10 SMG Team 39-44 ? 5 15 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-44 ? 4

26 MMG 39-44 ? 4 6 AT Grenade Late 43-44 ? 5 16 7.9 PZB 38 ATR Team 41-44 ? 4 23 20 s18 ATR Team 39-44 ? 3 8 Pzfaust 30/60 44 ? 4 5ea Demolition Charge 40-44 ? 5 Page39 AP Mines 39-44 ? 4 30 FAO 39-45 ? 5 20 Radio 41-44 ? 5 RUMANIAN EQUIPMENT NOTES - FT-17 and R35 were bought during pre-war alliance with France! (see French Armor.) - Pz 35(t) was purchased from Czech ( see German Armor. ) - Pz 38(t)IE, Pz IVH, and StuGIIIG were from Germany to replace total losses suffered at Stalingrad ( see German Armor.) - 7.9mm PZB 38/39, AT Grenades and Pzfaust 30/60 were German aid. - 37mm L45, 50mm L60 and 75mm L46 were German ( see German Guns.) - 75mm mle L36 was French, bought before the war and also obtained from the Germans on the Pak 38 carriage. (See French Guns.)

93

- Artillery 75/76mm, 100/105mm and 81mm Mortar can fire sooke rounds indirectly.

Rumanian Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

- 100mm L19 was Czech. (see Italian Guns.) - 114mm L16 was British 4.5" Infantry gun (see British Guns)

- The Light Half track was the French Somua model - LT-34/35/38 were the original czech designations. - Rurranian army can esrploy oorse ~ am cavalry.

Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery Conscript Reliable -15% or x 0.85 Armor etc see notes Conscript Reliable -25% or x 0.75 Includes armor, guards, mtn, & cav units All Other Units Conscript Poor -50% or x 0.50 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers

Rumania lacked any automotive production facilities for churning out military vehicles and relied solely on purchasing foreign models. Hungary produced a limited range of licence-copied trucks. During the

war years, both countries relied on purchases made from Germany and captured stocks.

RUMANIAN SOFTSKINS

PV HUNGARY/RUMANIA Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 13 Daimler ADGR, Tatra T92 Light Truck 6x4 B 40 15 2 B 14 Botund 38M Light Truck 6x4 B 40 17 3 B 28 Raba Medium Truck 6x4 C 45 16 9 C Damiler ADGR, Tatra T92 (6x4) - light off-road cargo trucks. The Daimler

was built in Austria and exported solely to Rumania. This vehicle featured anti-ditching rollers at the front. The Tatra were purchased from Czechoslovakia. Both models acquired pre-war.

Botond 38M (6x4) - light off-road cargo truck licensed produced in Hungary. The vehicle featured anti-ditching rollers at the front.

Raba (6x4) - medium off-road cargo truck produced under licence in Hungary. The vehicle was a copy of the Krupp L3H 163.

RUMANIAN ARMOR During the late 30's, Rumania's ability to manufacture tanks was very limited and small quantities were purchased abroad from military allies with the long term intention of licensed manufacture taking place. Up until 1938 the main supplier of AFVs was Czechoslovakia but this source quickly dried up after German intervention. Entering the war in 1941 with a motley collection of AFVs, the first armored division was saw action in the Operation Barbarossa and again around Stalingrad in 1942 were it was completely decimated. Up until then, Germany's export of tanks had only amounted to 48, the

majority being obsolete Pz 35(t). Further AFV purchases were made between 1943-44 up until Rumania defection in August 1944. As with Hungary, Germany's arms export policy was very miserly with Rumanian requests for licence production of heavier Czech tank designs being denied throughout the war. Even though crew training was under German supervision, Rumanian armored units gave a poor account of themselves in Russia, much of the problem lying with the shabby logistics and supply which plagued the army in general.

PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 83 LT-34 37 L45,2LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 21 10 C 6 39 R-1 2 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 28 15 B 3 79 S-Id 47 L43, LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 28 15 B 6 78 T-3D 37 L45,LMG 3 1 1 3 1 1 19 12 B 6 127 TACAM R-2 76 L41,LMG 3 2 2 1 1 - 20 10 C 7 136 TACAM T60 76 L41,LMG 6 2 2 1 1 - 24 12 C 7 93 R35/45 45 L46,LMG 4 4 4 5 5 5 13 6 B 7 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; TACAM R-2, TACAM T60. Only platoon/company command LT-34 were radio equipped. One Man Turrets; R-1, R35/45. Rumanian AFV Notes;

R-1 - light tankettes purchased from Czechoslovakia in 1936 (R-1 is the Rumanian title given to the AFV, the Czech designation was AH-IV.) One LMG was mounted in a small conical turret while the second was operated by the driver in the hull.

LT-34 - Czech tank which was supplied by the Wehrmacht after their occupation. Similar to the later LT-35 or R-2 tank (PzKpfw 35t) but inferior in performance and armor.

S-Id - light turret-less tankette mounting a 47mm gun in the front hull with limited traverse. Designed as a tank-destroyer.

TACAM R-2 - following Stalingrad, all but three of the surviving R-2 (Pz 35t) tanks were converted to tank destroyers in mid 1943 by mounting

captured Soviet 76mm L41 ZiS-3 guns on top of the hull. The design was heavily influenced by the German Marder SPs with open backed super-structure being built around the gun for crew protection.

TACAM T60 - captured Soviet T60 Light tanks were converted to tank destroyers in mid 1943 by removing the turret and placing a captured Soviet 76mm L41 ZiS-3 gun on top of the hull. Armored front and sides were built up around the gun for crew protection.

R35/45 - in 1944, surviving French R35 tanks were upgunned by mounting captured Soviet 45mm L46 gun in the turrets replacing the 37mm L22. The turret was otherwise unmodified except for the gun mantlet.

RUMANIAN GUNS

The Rumanian Army was still desperately ill-equipped, particularly in the area of anti-tank guns, with only six effective guns allocated per division.

After being almost totally destroyed in WWI, Rumania received large quantities of former Austrian-Hungarian equipment as reparations in addition to French equipment deemed surplus. During the 1920s and 30s, modern equipment was procured by the army from military allies France & Czechoslovakia. After joining the Axis, limited amounts of

German equipment were purchased along with any captured booty that was seized.

RUMANIA PV Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 27 47mm L39 Bohler A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 No gun shield 5 5 4 4 4 3 55 75/76mm L30 Krupps B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 3 3 61 105mm L14 M12/16 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 (Horse-dawn) - - - - - - - Rumanian Gun Notes;

47mm L39 Bohler M35 - purchased from Austria in large numbers prior to the war. The gun was developed for a dual infantry & AT role but failed in the latter. Widely exported around the world & built under license in Italy.

75/76mm L30 Krupps - ex-WWI reparations from the former Austria-Hungarian Empire. Horse-drawn only.

105mm L14 M12/16 Krupps - howitzers supplied by Germany to Rumania during WWI. Horse-drawn only.

94

Rumanian Organisation INFANTRY REGIMENT 1941-‘44 • No Radios at all. • All transport was horse drawn. • Three regiments made up the bulk of a division. INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1941-‘44 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Regiment 1 Infantry Regiment HQ n/a 2 Infantry Battalion - 1 AT Company (with 2 platoons of 3 x 37mm AT Guns each) regiment support unit 1 Gun Company (with 1-2 platoons of 2 x 75mm infantry guns each) regiment support unit Infantry Battalion 1 Infantry Battalion HQ n/a 3 Infantry Company - 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar) battalion support unit 1 MG Platoon (2 – 4 MG sections with 2 x MMG each) battalion support unit Infantry Company 1 Infantry Company HQ (1-2 Co. HQ Teams, 5 Rifle Teams) 1 per inf co. 3 Platoon - 1 MG Section (2 MMG) company support unit Infantry Platoon 1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team, 1 Rifle Team) 1 per inf pl. 3 Infantry Section (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Infantry Platoon HQ – (1 Off, 2-3 NCO,3-4 men with rifles.) Infantry Section – (1 NCO, 9-11 men with 1 LMG and rifles) Infantry Company HQ - (1-2 Off, 5-7 NCO, 10-15 men with rifles)

Use German tank company organisation.

• All transport was horse drawn.

RUMANIAN ARMOR

AT COMPANY 1941-‘44 • No Radios at all.

AT COMPANY: 1941-‘44 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AT Company 1 AT Company HQ 1 per AT co. 2 Platoon (each with 6 x 47mm AT guns) - 1 Platoon (with 6 x 75mm field or AT guns) 1942-‘44 - ARTILLERY REGIMENT • See artillery restrictions. • Each infantry division had two artillery regiments ARTILLERY REGIMENT Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Artillery Regiment 3-5 * Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 75mm) see artillery restrictions 0-2 * Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 100mm) see artillery restrictions * maximum of 5 battalions

Soviet The Soviet army was the largest in the world. It revolved around being crude and simple. Their attacks relied on massed fire power and numbers to make up for poor leadership and co-ordination. The bulk of the army was made up of peasants, many of whom had been recruited hours before a battle. All training was basic and communications were very poor, which led to orders being carried out to the letter irrespective of the circumstances. Initiative was also frowned upon. Transportation was either horses or a ride on the back of a tank. Support and supply troops were few and offensives were often limited to how far the armor would go on one tank of fuel. SOVIET EQUIPMENT LISTS PV AFV DATES PROD FR 188 T34/76 m1940 41 4 224 T34/76 m1941 41-44 5 222 T34/76 m1942 42-45 2 233 T34/76 m1942 Mod 42-45 35800 5 238 T34/76 m1943 42-45 0 249 T34/76 m1943 Mod 43-45 5 246 OT34 m1942 42-45 5 261 OT34 m1943 43-45 5 293 T34/85 (Early) 44-45 6000 4 303 T34/85 (Late) 44-45 23500 2 315 OT34/85 44-45 5 196 KV 1 m1939 39-41 4 238 KV 1 m1941 41-42 6000 4 249 KV 1 m1942 41-43 3 267 KV 1E 42-43 5

223 KV 1s 42-45 2000 4 230 KV 2 (Early) 40-41 636 7 244 KV 2 41 6 295 KV 85 43-44 130 6 217 KV 8 42-43 50 7 371 IS 2 44-45 3800 4 401 IS 2m 44-45 3 439 IS 3 45 500 7 345 T44 45 200 7 45 T26 m1931 39-41 1 82 T26TU m1931 39-41 3 98 T26 m1933 39-42 12000 0 99/104 T26S m1937 / m1939 39-42 1 121 T26E m1937 41-42 5 121 T26A 39-42 5 63/69 OT130 / 133 39-41 6 100 T28 m1934 39-41 5 114 T28 m1938 39-41 600 5 162 T28E 40-41 5 190 T35 m1933 39-41 60 7

212 T35 m1935 40-41 7 40 T27A 39-41 2848 3 32 T37 39-41 2500 3 32 T38 / M 39-42 4 50 T40A 41 220 6 109 T50A 42-43 65 7 76 T60 41-43 6000 2 111 T70A 42-45 8226 1 79 BT 2 39-41 4 91 BT 5 39-41 5000 2 96 BT 5A 39-41 5 99/105 BT 7 / BT 8 39-42 2000 3 99 BT 7A 39-41 6 89 SU 37 44-45 300 6 72 SU 45 40-41 ? 7 127 SU 57 40-41 ? 6 128 SU 76 42-45 12600 1 132 SU 76i 42-45 190 6 223 SU 85 43-45 2050 4

95

335 SU 100 44-45 1800 5

36 Komsorrolet 39-42 ? 3

176 SU 122 (T34) 43-45 1148 5 283 SU 122 43-45 35 7 243 SU 152 43-45 2050 5 319 ISU 122 44-45 4000 3 278 ISU 152 44-45 3 143 SU 57(a) 43-45 650 6 87 BA 6 39-41 5 94 BA 10 39-41 4800 4 35 BA 20 39-41 3 64 BA 64 43-45 3500 3

PV LEASE AFV DATES PROD FR 132 M3A1 Stuart 42-43 1676 6 266 M3 Lee Late 42-43 1386 6 226 M4A2 (75) 43-45 1990 5

191 Valentine IX 43-44 5

81 M16 MGMC 44-45 1100 6 38 Carrier LMG 42-45 2656 5

263 M4A3 (76) 44-45 2095 5 167 Matilda II 42-43 1084 6 151 Valentine II 42-43 3700 6

216 Churchill III 43 301 6 60 M3A1 Scout Car 43-45 3310 5 71 M3A1 Halftrack 43-45 1158 6

PV LEASE TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Jeep 43-45 20000 4 US/UK 'Field Car (Beep) 43-45 50000 3 soft Light Truck 43-45 3 skin Medium Truck 43-45 365000 3 charts Heavy Truck 43-45 5 PV GUNS DATES PROD FR 33 37mm L45 M30 39-43 ? 3 44 45mm L46 M32 & M37 39-44 ? 1 60 45mm L66 M42 42-45 ? 2 102 57mm L73 M41 & M43 41-45 ? 5 78 76mm L41/42 M40-42 39-45 ? 0

132 152mm L29 M37 39-45 ? 4 24 20mm L55 M40 AA 39-41 ? 6

73 57mm L45 Ml / 6 pdr 43-45 ? 5

110 76mm L51 M36 39-42 ? 4 119 85mm L55 M44 39-45 ? 5 194 100mm L54 M44 45 ? 6 168 122mm L46 M31 39-45 ? 4

29 76mm L16 M27/M43 39-45 ? 1 53 76mm L30 M02/30 39-42 ? 1 91 107mm L43 39-41 ? 4 82 122mm L22 M38 39-45 ? 2 94 152mm L24 M1938 39-45 ? 3

29 25mm L91 M40 AA 40-41 ? 6 45 37mm L74 M39 AA 39-45 ? 3 44 40mm L56 Bofors AA 39-42 ? 5

PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 76mm (per pair) 39-45 - 0 120 85mm (per pair) 44-45 - 4 180 107mm (per pair) 39-41 - 4 240 122mm (per pair) 39-45 - 2 300 152mm (per pair) 39-45 - 3 400 203mm (per pair) 39-45 - 5 PV MORTARS DATES PROD FR 15 50mm 39-45 ? 0 45 82mm 39-45 ? 0 70 105mm 39-45 ? 5 100 120mm 39-45 ? 4 180 160mm 44-45 ? 6 PV ROCKETS DATES PROD FR 70 82mm M-8 x 1 41-45 ? 3 140 132mm M-13 x 1 42-45 ? 4 180 310mm M-31 x 1 43-45 ? 5 70 300mm Rack M30 x 3 42-45 ? 4

TRUCK/SP DATES PROD FR PV

45 Zis-42-AA 41 ? 6

46 SU-12 39-42 ? 4 56 Gaz-4M-AA 40-42 ? 5 131 YAG-l0-AA 40-42 ? 5

PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Field Car 39-45 ? 4 soft Light Truck 39-45 ? 4 skin Medium Truck 39-45 ? 5

chart Heavy Truck 39-45 ? 6 Tractor 39-45 ? 3 Motorcycle 39-45 ? 4 Motorcycle Sidecar 39-45 ? 6 PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 39-45 ? 0

26 MMG 39-45 ? 2

20 Radio 39-45 ? 4

10 SMG Team 39-45 ? 0 10 Carbine Team 39-42 ? 5 13 LMG Team (Mag fed) 39-45 ? 2

30 HMG 40-45 ? 3 6 AT Grenade Late 43-45 ? 3 6 AP Rifle Grenade 41-45 ? 5 4 AT Rifle Grenade Early 40-45 ? 4 16 14.5mm ATR Team 41-45 ? 1 15 Flamethrower Team 39-45 ? 5 3 Molotov Cocktail 41-45 ? 1 5ea Demolition Charge 39-45 ? 5 page39 AP Mine 39-45 ? 2 page39 AT Mine 39-45 ? 3 30 FAO/FAC Team 39-45 - 4

SOVIET EQlJIPEMENT NOTES: - Enormous attrition rates inflicted in the early stages of combat resulted in entire series of tanks to disappear by the end of '41-42. - For Lend/Lease AFV's, refer to U.S. and British Armor for details. - Lend/Lease Transport was entirely U.S. vehicles. - 57mm L45 was either the British 6pdr or the US version. - 40mm L48 AA was the Swedish Bofors purchased from foriegn sellers ( see British Guns.) - Except for 76mm L30, all guns are vehicte/tractor towable. - 160rnm and 120mm Mortars were both vehicle towed, and manhandled as for medium AT gun. - Artillery 76mm, 107mm, 122mm and Mortars of 81mm, 107mm, 120mm can fire smoke rounds indirectly. - Molotov Cocktail can only be used from the winter of 1941 and onwards

Soviet Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery As unit class As unit rating Conscript –15% or x 0.85 : Regular no modification to PV Siberians Regular Elite +25% or x 1.25 officers escaped Stalin’s purges Pre-1941 Winter Conscript Poor -50% or x 0.50 does not include Siberians Guards Conscript Elite no modification to PV All Other Units Conscript Reliable - 25% or x 0.75

All the GAZ, ZIS and YAG trucks built were crude and simple, if not backwards. The engines were low compression, mechanical brakes were common and friction shock absorbers used throughout. Unlike tanks & aircraft, if it could move and carry a payload, it was considered servicable.

One area which the Soviets completely failed to exploit, as did their German opponent, was the wide spread use of half-tracked vehicles which were ideally suited to Russian conditions.

* you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers

SOVIET SOFTSKINS During the early 1930's, the Soviet automotive industry was established with the aid of the Ford Motor company. The industry had virtually no background in vehicle design and could do little more than reproduce obsolete Ford design right throughout the war.

The Soviets recognised their deficiency in trucks, both in performance and quantity and eagerly requested them under Lend-

Lease in preference to tanks. US vehicles were very highly regarded in the army and were more often issued to combat units for their better cross-country performance. Soviet vehicle production by 1945 totalled 345,000 with a further 429,000 vehicles received under Lend Lease. In addition to this, large quantities of captured German, Italian and other vehicles were also pressed into service.

PV SOVIET Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 IZ-12 solo Motorcycle x 3 - A 60 21 1 - 8 AM-600; M-72 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 68 16 1 - 6 GAZ-M Field Car 4x2 B 30 8 1 10 GAZ-61, 64, 67B Light Car 4x4 B 55 20 2 15 GAZ-AA, GAZ-MM, GAZ-42 Light Truck 4x2 C 44 12 5 B 20 GAZ-AAA (2 ton) Medium Truck 6x4 C 40 17 5 C 21 ZIS-5 (2 ton) Medium Truck 4x2 C 40 10 7 C 26 ZIS-6 Heavy Truck 6x4 D 37 16 7 D 25 YAG-6 Heavy Truck 4x2 D 25 6 9 C 29 YAG-10 Heavy Truck 6x4 D 25 11 10 D 24 ZIS-33 Medium Halftrack ht C 24 14 7 C 20 Stalin, Komintern Heavy Tractor trk D 16 7 5 D 15 STZ-5 Medium Tractor trk C 16 8 2 C

96

SOVIET MOTORISED GUNS

IZ-12 solo - standard army motorcycle. An LMG could be mounted over the front handled bars for use by the rider while stationary, but not dismounted (LMG added at additional cost.)

AM-600, M-72 - The M-72 was a copy of captured German BMW sidecar, entering production in 1942. Both types had provision for adding a pedestal mounted LMG on the sidecar (operated by the passenger.)

GAZ-M 4x2 - command car based on the American Ford 1933/44 sedan. GAZ-61,64,67B - The GAZ-61 & 64 entered service in 1940 and were

derivatives of the GAZ-11-73 civilian model sedan. The GAZ 67B replaced these earlier models, entering service in 1943 and was closely patterned on the US Jeep.

GAZ-AA, GAZ-MM, GAZ-42 - the GAZ-AA entered production in 1932 and was a direct copy of the American Ford Model AA truck. The subsequent GAZ-MM & GAZ-42 models were militarised versions of the GAZ-AA and are identical in game terms.

GAZ-AAA - six wheeled version of the GAZ-AA. The truck was identical except for the modified dual rear axles. The vehicle could be quickly converted to a half-track by fitting a loose set of broad tracks around the rear

tyres. For use in this mode; Rd 33 / C/c 22. Vehicle must start the game with tracks on if they are to be used. Tracks were phased out after 1942.

ZIS-5 - scaled up version of the GAZ-AA with a larger engine, heavier springs, longer chassis and double the payload.

ZIS-6 - six wheeled version of the ZIS-5. The truck was identical except for the modified dual rear axles.

YAG-6 - heavy cargo truck patterned on the obsolete American Ford Hercules with modifications. Entered service in 1935.

YaG-10 - six wheeled version of the YaG-6. The truck was identical except for the modified dual rear axles.

ZIS-33 - the only half-track employed in any quantity. Consisted of a modified ZiS-5 truck with the rear wheeled exchanged for tracked running gear.

Stalin, Komintern - fully tracked prime movers for medium and heavy artillery. Both models were very similar in appearance with the engine upfront, drivers cab in the middle and cargo tray at the rear. Also referred to as "Voroshilovyets" tractors.

STZ-5 - militarised version of the early STZ-3 tractor. It had the drivers cab mounted over the engine with a rear tray for cargo & passengers.

PV SOVIET Descript Drive Size Speed Armamen Rd C/C

ion t

46 SU-12 (GAZ-A Md SP Truck 6x4 C 40 17 76mm L16 AA) 56 GAZ-4M-AA Md AA Truck 4x2 C 44 12 quad HMG 131 YaG-10-AA Hv AA Truck 6x4 D 25 11 76mm L51 45 ZIS-42-AA Md AA Truck 4x2 C 40 10 25mm L91 AA

SU-12 (GAZ-AAA) - first mechanised gun adopted by the army, entering service in 1932. Various types of trucks used, the most common being the GAZ-AAA. Consisted of a 76mm M1927 howitzer mounted on a rear flat bed with a thin armored shield. Gun cannot be fired over the drivers cab.

GAZ-4M-AA - quadruple MMG mounted onto the rear of a GAZ-AA truck for AA use. Can not be dismounted or fired over the drivers cab. No crew protection provided.

YaG-10-AA - YaG-10 heavy truck mounting the 76mm L51 AA gun with all-round traverse. Fold-down sides provided a wider gun platform for the crew and four out-riggers were used to stabilise the truck. No gun shield was

PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP

provided for crew protection. Gun cannot be fired over the drivers cab. ZIS-42-AA - limited numbers of ZIS-5 trucks were modified to mount the

25mm L91 AA cannon with 360º traverse. No gun shield was provided for crew protection. Gun cannot be fired over the drivers cab.

SOVIET ARMOR Soviet tank design in 1941 was considerably advanced, even if many features like crew layout and reliability had a lot to be desired. All AFV designs were simple, crude and effective and this policy suited the crews well as their mechanical appreciation was low and technical training poor, if existing at all! When the German invasion commenced in June 1941, Soviet armored units were quickly overrun by the tactically superior Panzer units of the Wehrmacht. Within a brief period of six months, 17,000 - 24,000 tanks were destroyed, captured or abandoned, mainly due to lack of spares & poor logistics. By August 1941, all Tank Corps had

been disbanded as the logistics had failed to support these formations properly. Armored units were broken up and relegated to a secondary role of supporting infantry divisions. It took until mid-1943 before Tank Corps once again regained prominence over the infantry as the Soviet Army retook the initiative of her German opponent. The Soviet Army entered the war with approximately 24,000 to 29,000 tanks and AFVs in 1941 and manufactured a further 110,000 AFVs up until 1945 (71,000 being KV,T34 & IS tanks.) Unlike the Western Allies or the Axis, AFV production was virtually concentrated solely on tanks and SPs.

188 T-34/76 m1940 76 L30,2LMG 9 6 7 7 5 6 33 25 C 8 224 T-34/76 m1941 76 L41,2LMG 9 6 7 8 6 7 33 25 C 8 222 T-34/76 m1942 76 L41,2LMG 9 6 7 7 7 7 33 25 C 8 233 T-34/76 m1942 Modified 76 L41,2LMG 12 6 7 7 7 7 32 24 C 8 246 OT-34/76 m1942 76 L41,F/Thr,LMG 12 6 7 7 7 7 32 24 C 8 238 T-34/76 m1943 76 L41,2LMG 9 7 7 8 6 7 34 25 C 7 249 T-34/76 m1943 Modified 76 L41,2LMG 12 7 7 8 6 7 34 25 C 7 261 OT-34/76 m1943 76 L41,F/Thr,LMG 12 7 7 8 6 7 34 25 C 7 293 T-34/85 (Early) 85 L51,2LMG 9 7 7 11 8 6 31 22 C 8 303 T-34/85 (Late) 85 L55,2LMG 12 6 7 11 8 6 31 22 C 8 315 OT-34/85 85 L55,F/Thr,LMG 12 6 7 11 8 6 31 22 C 8 196 KV 1 m1939 76 L30,3LMG 9 8 8 8 8 8 22 11 D 8 238 KV-1 m1941 76 L41,3LMG 11 8 8 10 8 8 22 11 D 8 249 KV-1 m1942 76 L41,3LMG 12 8 8 11 10 10 22 11 D 7 267 KV-1E 76 L41,3LMG 13 8 8 13 11 11 19 8 D 8 223 KV-1s 76 L41,3LMG 9 6 6 8 6 6 25 12 D 7 230 KV-2 (Early) 122 L22,2LMG 9 8 8 12 8 8 16 8 D 10 244 KV-2 152 L24,2LMG 9 8 8 12 8 8 16 8 D 11 295 KV-85 85 L51,3LMG 9 6 6 13 10 10 25 14 D 9 217 KV-8 F/thr,45L46,2LMG 12 8 8 11 8 8 22 11 D 4 371 IS-2 122 L43,2LMG 14 9 8 13 8 8 23 12 D 10 401 IS-2m 122 L43,2LMG 18 9 8 15 11 10 23 12 D 10 439 IS-3 122 L43,2LMG 20 10 9 23 11 10 25 12 D 10 345 T-44 85 L55,LMG 18 9 6 12 9 6 33 20 C 8 45 T-26 m1931 2 LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 10 C 4 82 T-26TU m1931 37 L45,LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 10 C 7 98 T-26 m1933 45 L46,2LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 17 9 C 6 99 T-26S m1937 45 L46,1LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 17 9 C 6 104 T-26S m1939 45 L46,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 17 9 C 6 121 T-26E m1937 45 L46,1LMG 6 3 2 6 4 2 15 6 C 6 121 T-26A 76 L16,2LMG 6 3 2 6 4 2 15 6 C 7 63 OT-130 F/thrower,LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 17 9 C 4 69 OT-133 F/thrower,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 17 9 C 4 100 T-28 m1934 76 L16,3*LMG 4 2 2 2 2 2 25 13 D 8 114 T-28 m1938 76 L24,3*LMG 4 2 2 2 2 2 25 13 D 8 162 T-28E 76 L24,3*LMG 8 2 2 8 4 4 14 8 D 8 190 T-35 m1933 76L16,2*37L45,5*LMG 3 2 2 2 2 2 18 9 D 8 212 T-35 m1935 76L16,2*45L46,4*LMG 4 2 2 2 2 2 18 9 D 8

97

40 T-27A LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 26 14 B 3 32 T-37 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 B 4 32 T-38 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 13 B 4 45 T-38M 20 L55 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 13 B 5 50 T-40A HMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 14 B 4 109 T-50A 45 L46,LMG 6 4 4 4 4 4 32 18 B 7 76 T-60 20 L55,LMG 6 2 2 3 2 2 27 14 B 5 111 T-70A 45 L46,LMG 7 2 2 8 4 4 28 14 C 7 79 BT-2 37 L45,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 45 26 C 6 91 BT-5 45 L46,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 45 26 C 6 96 BT-5A 76 L16,2*LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 45 26 C 7 99 BT-7 45 L46,LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 33 24 C 6 99 BT-7A 76 L16,2*LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 33 24 C 7 105 BT-8 45 L46,2*LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 33 24 C 6 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 89 SU-37 37 L74 AA 5 2 2 1 1 1 28 15 C 2 72 SU-45 45 L46 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 15 C 4 127 SU-57 57 L73 1 1 1 1 - - 24 12 C 4 128 SU-76 76 L41 5 2 2 3 1 1 28 17 C 5 132 SU-76i 76 L41 3 3 2 4 2 2 30 20 C 6 223 SU-85 85 L51 7 5 5 7 5 5 33 20 C 7 335 SU-100 100 L54 11 5 5 11 5 5 33 20 C 8 176 SU-122 (T-34) 122 L22 7 5 5 7 5 5 28 15 C 9 283 SU-122 122 L46 9 6 6 9 6 6 25 10 D 9 243 SU-152 152 L29 9 6 6 9 6 6 25 10 D 10 319 ISU-122 (Late) 122 L43 12 9 8 11 9 8 23 14 D 9 278 ISU-152 152 L29 12 9 8 11 9 8 23 14 D 10 143 SU-57(a) 57 L73 1 1 1 1 1 1 42 18 C 4 PV APC/RECON ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CAP 35 BA-20 4x2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 53 8 B 4 87 BA-6 6x4 45 L46,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 39 12 C 6 94 BA 10 6x4 45 L46,2*LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 34 10 C 6 64 BA 64 4x4 HMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 50 14 C 3 36 Komsomolet LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 24 12 B 3 2 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; Prior to 1943, only company/battalion command AFVs were radio equipped except for BT-5A, BT-7A & T-26A which were equipped as standard. All AFVs entering service from 1943 onwards are radio equipped as standard. One Man Turrets; T-37, T-38, T-40, T50, T-60, T-70, T-26m1931. SOVIET AFV NOTES: TANKS

T-34/76 m1940 & m1941 - The debut of the T34 proved it to be the finest tank in the world. Having well sloped armor, wide tracks, high road and cross country speeds, an excellent power to weight ratio, and a 76mm gun, it gave the, Soviets a technical advantage over the Germans which was not initially exploited. The T34 did however have drawbacks common to all Soviet AFVs of that period. Cramped interior lead to early crew fatigue, two man-turret gave a poor rate of fire, no radio and frequent mechanical breakdowns all effected its overall fighting efficiency. The Model 1940 was distinguished by its short 76mm L30 gun. Its transmission was so bad that a spare was often carried on the rear deck in the event of a breakdown. The Model 1941 which mounted the longer 76mm L41 was initially built only as a command tank but this

T-34/76 m1943 & Modified - this was the most numerous model to be produced and see action. It had a new spacious two-man turret and slightly better armor on the hull side and turret. It was also the first tank to be equipped with a radio as standard. By late 1944, all T34 production was swi

T-26TU m1931 - (Also referred to as T26V-1.) This was the platoon & company command tank which had the right LMG replaced with a low velocity 37mm gun. Other variants of this command variant had a HMG or 20mm cannon replacing the 37mm gun. They were however, vary rare.

was quickly overturned and it became the standard production model. T-34/76 m1942 & Modified - this model had an increased armor

thickness around the turret and was essentially identical to earlier models except for minor changes to simplify production. T34/76 (1942) `Modified' were tanks which had an additional armor plate welded to the upper front. This armor plate was specially produced and was added in the field or prior to leaving the factory. Production of the Model 1942 also saw the use of steel road wheels which were introduced due to a shortage in rubber.

tched to the T34/85. OT-34/76 - both the T34/76 m1942 & m1943 models were converted to

flame thrower tanks by replacing the hull MG with a flame projector. Internal fuel tanks were used.

T-34/85 (Early) & (Late) - following the Battle of Kursk 1943, the T34/85 was rushed into production to counter the new generation of German tanks which were starting to appear. A larger turret was designed to mount the 85mm gun with early models having an L51 gun which was latter standardised to the L55 gun. Early models used the T34 m1943 chassis while the late version had a chassis with thicker armor.

OT-34/85 - based on the late T34/85, the hull mounted LMG was replaced by a flame-projector. Internal fuel tanks were used.

KV 1 m1939 - as with the early T34, the initial series of the KV tanks were armed with the short 76mm L30 gun intended only as a stop-gap.

KV 1 m1941 - also includes the m1940 (which was identical in performance.) The m1941 was upgunned with the 76mm L41 and had increased armor around the turret & the hull front.

KV 1 m1942 - this variant was identical to the m1941 except for the cast turret which was manufactured with thicker armor. Applique armor was also welded onto the hull front.

KV 1 `E' - afraid of being outgunned by the Germans, many KV 1 m1940 & m1941 variants had applique armor plating bolted to the turrets and hull front. The increase in weight reduced their mobility accordingly which was taken as a mixed blessing by their crews. The letter `E' stood for `ekranami' which meant `with applique'.

KV 1s - the mobility of the KV tank was increased by thinning out its armor and redesigning a new turret with a better crew layout.

KV 2 & KV 2 (Early) - this Dreadnought or `Bunker-Buster' was developed because of the difficulties in breaching the fortified Mannerhiem Line on the Finnish frontier. The turret, mounting the 152mm howitzer, was so massive that it could not be traversed unless on level ground. Initial production models mounted a 122mm howitzer as an early stop-gap.

KV 85 - this variant was based on the KV 1s and mounted the new prototype IS-1 turret with the 85mm L51. Intended to counter the German Tiger & Panther, production was cut short in favor of the IS series.

KV 8 - based on a KV-I m1942, the main gun was replaced with a 45mm gun to allow enough room for a co-axial flame-thrower. A dummy barrel was fitted over the 45mm gun to make it appear like a normal 76mm gun.

IS 2 - the KV tank was completely redesigned to produce the next generation heavy tank, the IS-2 (Iosef Stalin). It featured a new hull and chassis with a larger diameter three man turret mounting the massive 122mm L43 gun. Original IS-1 prototypes mounted an 85mm L51 and 100mm L54, but the 122mm was selected for its HE capability.

IS 2m - During mid-1944, the IS-2 underwent modification with an increase in armor thickness all round and was renamed IS-2m (m; modifikatsirovanniy). It was best distinguished by a sloped hull front as compared to the stepped hull of the IS-2.

IS 3 - nicknamed `Pike' because of its pointed hull, this heavy tank differed vastly from the IS-2 by having a better protected domed turret and an improved ballistically shaped hull for maximum shot deflection. Entered production in November 1944.

T-44 - intended as a replacement for the T34, design & mechanical problems prevented it from entering mass production. It's armor was thicker and better sloped on the hull front than on the T34 and it was to mount the 100mm gun (the design eventually leading to the post-war T54/55.)

T-26 m1931 - (Also referred to as T26A.) Licence produced copy of the Vickers 6 ton tank. This infantry tank had two small turrets each mounting an LMG. (Soviet titles have been used with the German/English designation provided in these notes.)

T-26 m1933 & T-26 m1933 (Late) - (Also referred to as T26B-1 & T26B-2) The twin turrets of the T26 m1931 were replaced by a larger two-man cylindrical turret mounting the 45mm gun. The `Late' production T26 m1933 (built during 1936-37) was identical in all respects except for a rear turret mounted LMG and the all-welded construction (as opposed to riveting on early models.) An AAMG could also be fitted for the commander.

OT-130 - this variant consisted of a T26 m1933 with the 45mm gun replaced by a flame projector and internal fuel tanks. The OT-26 was the flamethrower variant of the T26 m1931 with the flame projector mounted in the right turret and the left being removed for the internal fuel tanks and was identical in performance.

T26A - an artillery support variant based on the T26 m1933 with new larger turret (similar to that on the T28) mounting the 76mm L16. As the chassis was mechanically overloaded, it was produced in small numbers.

98

T-37 - light amphibious scouting tank produced prior to the war (Am

T-70 - the greatest problem with light tanks had been their thin armor and small calibre armament. The T-70 attempted to rectify this by having enough armor to resist 37mm shell hits and a 45mm gun to adequately engage other ene

BT-5 - the early BT-2 hull was mated with the T26 m1933 turret (45mm gun) to produced the BT-5. Capable of `wheeled' movement, see BT-2.

BT-5A - consisted of BT-5 hull with a new turret similar to that on the T28 mounting 76mm Infantry gun. Capable of `wheeled' movement, see BT-2.

BT-7 - similar to the BT-5 except armor protection was increased with a new designed turret and hull front with thicker sloped armor (welded.) New

F PR T-26S m1937 & m1939 - following the encounters against the Japanese in Manchuria, the T26 design underwent a drastic revision to reduce its vulnerability to light AT weapons. The resulting T26S was sleeker and more heavily armored. The turret was conically shaped and the hull armor was sloped as well. The T26S m1939 differed from the early m1937 by the addition of a rear turret mounted LMG. Both variants were also referred to as T26C.

T-26E - during the first Russo-Finnish War, the T26S still proved too thinly armored for its own survival. Small numbers of T26S subsequently had applique armor added over the front.

T-28 m1934 & m1938 - first medium tank to be produced by the Soviets. Its main turret mounted the 76mm L16 infantry gun and was flanked by two smaller MG turrets in the front hull. Nicknamed the `Mail-Train' during the Finnish War due to its size and clumsiness. In 1938, the design was modernised by upgunning it with the 76mm L24 and was referred to as the T28 m1938. Also referred to as T28`A' & T28`B'.

T-28E - when up against the light Finnish AT guns, the T28 was extremely vulnerability and many T28 m1938's were retro-fitted with applique armor around the turret and hull. Also referred to as T28`C'.

T-35 m1933 - Two initial production batches of ten vehicles each were produced before the design was finally standardised. These were the T35 m1932 & m1933 and were identical in performance and armament. The m1932 was distinguished by a `dome' shaped turret while the m1933 mounted a turret identical to that on the T28 Heavy Tank. Both types had the main turret flanked by four smaller sub-turrets (two with 37mm guns & two with LMGs) and a hull mounted LMG was which was deleted on the later models.

T-35 m1935 - this was the main production model of the T35 series. The secondary armament was upgunned with 45mm L46 and the chassis was lengthened which made it even more difficult to steer. The late m1938 variant (only six built) was identical in performance to the m1935 and was distinguished by the sloped armor on the turrets.

For all T35 variants, damage inflicted on individual sub-turrets will only affect that turret, not the overall tank. Each sub-turret has it own AOV and there is no communication between sub-turrets unless their commanders are `up' (including the main turret.) The hull sides have `spaced' (included in PV) armor which makes them impervious to AT rifles & HEAT ammunition, (except `track' hits.)

T-27A - a copy of the Carden-Loyd tankette. It mounted an LMG with limited traverse and was primarily a gun tractor for the 37mm & 45mm AT guns by 1941.

phibious Speed across water; 4cm/move). T-38 & T-38 (20mm) - next progressive design up from the T37, it was

wider, lower and had an improved speed across land and water. Small numbers were modified to mount a 20mm ShVAK auto-cannon in place of the LMG and were used as command tanks. (Amphibious Speed across water; 6cm/move).

T-40A - amphibious tank which enter production in 1940 and was to replace the T37 & T38. Its production life was short due to the cry for heavier tanks. Late production vehicles were converted direct to Katyusha multiple rocket launchers.

T-50A - this light AFV was intended to replace the T26 tank but proved too complicated to manufacture and only a small production batch was carried out.

T-60 - this was the non-amphibious version of the T40 which mounted the 20mm canon. The T60 completely superseded the T40 in production once the war had started.

my light tanks. By mid-1942, it superseded to the T-60 in production. BT-2 - based on the US Christie tank as a Cavalry tank for a long-range

exploitation role. The original version mounted 3xLMG but the later 37mm gunned model was only accepted by the Cavalry. The turret was cylindrical in shape. Both BT-2 & BT-5 were capable of travelling on wheels with tracks removed (rareley used); Speed/Move - Rd 55cm & CC 10cm. For movement restrictions using wheels, treat as 4x2 vehicle. Fifteen moves are required for crew to change from tracks to wheels or vice-versa.

engine & transmission installed. The `wheeled' capability as used on the BT-5 was discarded.

BT-7A - consisted of BT-7 hull with a new turret similar to that on the T28 mounting the 76mm Infantry gun.

BT-8 - identical to the BT-7 except for a rear turret mounted LMG and redesigned turret hatches

SEL OPELLED GUNS SU 37 - built only in small numbers, this AASP was based on the SU

76

gthened T70 chassis, it was intended as a tank-destroyer but proved far more successful in an infantry support role. The

s open-topped with the rear partially exposed which

com

APC/

-M with a rear mounted open-top turret housing a 37mm AA gun.

SU 45 - consisted of a Komsomolet tractor converted to an SP by housing a 45mm gun in a fully enclosed & armored crew compartment at the rear.

SU 57 - this SPG was built to provide mobility for the 57mm AT gun. It mounted the gun directly behind the driving compartment with small side shields added. The crew is fully exposed from the flanks or rear.

SU 76 - based on a len

crew compartment waled it's crews to nickname it the `Bitch'. Various minor modifications took place during it's service. In 1945, a SU-76M with a fully enclosed fighting

partment was introduced. SU 76i - an SP conversion of the captured German Pz III with a box liked

structure built over the hull to mount a 76mm L41 gun. A reduction in weight improved the speed of the SP considerably.

SU 85 - this tank destroyer utilised the T34 chassis and was developed from the SU-122. The 85mm gun was mounted on the front hull with limited traverse. Its was superseded by the more potent SU-100 in 1944.

SU 100 - consisted of an upgunned SU-85 mounting the 100mm ex-naval gun with a new mantlet. Front armor was increased and a larger circular cupola for the commander was added.

SU 122(T34) - based on the T34 chassis, this assault gun mounted the 122mm howitzer in the front hull with a fully enclosed fighting compartment. Late production batches used the SU-85 mantlet.

SU 152 - based on the KV-1s hull with a 152mm howitzer mounted in a heavily armored superstructure.

SU 122 - identical to the SU-152 except mounting a 122mm artillery piece instead of the 152mm howitzer. Intended to compliment the SU-152 with its better AT capability. Limited production only with the ISU series entering production.

ISU 152 & ISU 122 - similar in concept to the SU-152 except based on the IS-2 hull. The early ISU-122 was armed wi12

th a pig’s head mantlet and 2mm L46 artillery piece, as with the SU-122, and was developed as a

tank destroyer, while the ISU-152 was intended to support it as an assault gun. The late version ISU-122 had the same 122mm L43 gun as the IS-2 and a smaller mantlet.

SU 57(a) - lend lease T48 GMC with the original US 57mm L45 replaced by a Soviet 57mm L73 AT gun.

RECONNAISSANCE BA- 20 4x2 - modernised version of the old BA-27. Based on Ford Model

A c

4 armored car with open topped turret

en seating for six

hassis with light armored body and MG turret on top. BA-6 6x4 - (also referred to as BA-32) based on the 6x4 Gaz AAA truck

chassis. The turret was identical to that used on the BT-5 and was mounted at the rear. The earlier BA-3 series was identical except for the rear access doors.

BA-10 6x4 - (also referred to as BA-32) upgraded BA-6 with slightly heavier armor. The new turret was conical in shaped with slope armor on the hull.

BA 64 - purpose built light 4xmounting 12.7mm HMG.

Komsomolet - light armored gun tractor built to tow the 37mm, 45mm and 57mm AT guns. Armed with a bow LMG, oppassengers was provided on the rear (no cover.)

SOVIET GUNS Russian guns were characterised by their simplicity, low weight and

nt ra and calibre. Sovie abou y the West and oore t ssive artillery forc

or use primers, ane to co e volume of fire, an

calibr pons than the opposing armies. ays lacked the eff

to bo units. Coordination

the lower quality and quantity of communications equipment along rtillery packed

entrated in

ristic of an artillery was their e t d of heav guns against enemy armor in an AT

o rate measure on any standard, it had t AFVs. (Being hit be a

E a a such as a Pz III or IV.)

excelle nge for their size t designers had a v

with the skilled technicians to operate it. Divisional a being conc phobia t being out gunned b er-designed most

m required. The ma eonly a light punch, with larger calibre gun

nd Army level. guns han s were set back by po , badl d attempts were

Artillery divisions or at Corps a Another charactey fused propellents and

mad mpensate for this with th d the use of Russi

fr quen eployment ylarger e wea role. Alth ugh a despe Soviet artillery alw iciency that was

al lied & German wdevastating effects against mos German

dism ntle tanknorm th Al as hampered by 152mm H shell can literally

T S OTES

SOVIE PV AT/Tank Guns iz 20 40 60 80 125 75 O Ne 100 150 1 200 250 F

n

33 37m A 11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) to-hi chan 6 5 4 4 3 3 penetratio

m L45 M30 ( t ce 3

99

44 45mm L46 M3 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 2 & M37 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 60 45mm L66 M42 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 102 57mm L73 M41 & M43 B (11) (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) 4 (7) (6) 12 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 7 5 +18pp -> 57mm L73 APC (11) (11) (11) (10) (9) (7) (7) (6) 4 R 15 14 14 13 11 10 9 7 45 76mm L24 * (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 78 76mm L41/42 M194 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 5 0-42 Smk 9 9 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 4 +11pp -> 76mm L41/42 APCR (1942+) (11) (11) (10) (10) (8) (7) (6) (6) 5 11 10 10 9 8 6 4 3 110 76mm L51 M36 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk 12 11 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 119 85mm L51/55 M43/M44 C/B (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) 8) 7) 6 Smk ( ( 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8

2 194 100mm L54 M44 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 7 21 20 20 19 19 18 16 15 13 1168 122mm L43/46 M43/M31 D (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (9) (8) 8 Smk 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 13 12 10

zers/ Field Guns S 1 0 FO NOTES PV Howit ize 20 40 60 80 100 25 150 175 200 25

B mk 29 76mm L16 M27/M43 /A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 S 5 4 3 3 3 2 2 53 76mm L30 M02/30 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 (Horse-drawn) 7 7 6 6 5 4 3 3 3 91 107mm L43 M1910/30r C (10) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) (6) 7 Smk - - - - - - - - - - 82 122mm L22 M38 C (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 8 Smk - - - - - - - - - +48pg -> 122mm L22 M38 HEAT (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 ‘43 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

7 6 94 152mm L24 M1938 D (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 12 11 10 10 9 8 8 132 152mm L29 M1937 D (10) (10) (9) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 9 16 15 14 14 13 12 11 11 10 PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

5) 1 2

24 20mm L55 AA M40 A (12) (11) (10) 3 2 2

(7) ( 2

29 25mm L91 AA M40 B (12) (12) (11 ) (9) (7) (5) 1 2 2

) (10 ( 5

4 3 3 2 ) 9) (7) 2

4 4 45 37mm L74 AA M39 B (12) (12) (11

6 6 5

IET GUN NOTES:SOV

ank Guns

/TAT 37mm L45 M30 - license built copy of the German 37mm PaK 35/36 AT

gun with wire spoked wheels. 45mm L46 M32 & M37 - identical in appearance to the 37mm M30, it used

the same carriage with a larger 45mm L46 barrel. The M37 was an updated model. 45mm L66 M42 - redesigned 45mm M32 with a lengthened barrel and various minor changes, identical in appearance. 57mm L73 M41 & M43 - the M41 entered production in 1941 with the barrel being mounted on a 76mm M41 carriage. The gun was redesigned in 1943 with a much lighter carriage and was referred to as M43. Also

rom 1942. 85mm L51 M39 AA & M43 - the M39 was an AA gun introduced in 1941 to

replace the 76mm M38 AA. The latter M43 `D5T' gun was an adaption of the 85mm AA gun for use in AFVs during 1943 (KV-85, SU-85 & early T-34/85.). 85mm L55 M44 ZiS 53 - this was the purpose built 85mm field gun intended as an artillery piece but employed more as an AT gun. Being

ed the early M43 D5T as armament for the entical in performance.

eloped from an ex-naval gun, it featured two ail carriage. Also referred to as D-10. The L54

2mm M10/34 carriages and no gun

shield. A modified version was adapted for use in the first production batch of SU-122 (KV based) SPA. In 1944, a modified M43 D-25T version was

wi

referred to as the ZiS 2. 76mm L24 L10 - built as an upgrade for AFVs equipped with the shorter M27 model gun. No field gun version existed. 76mm L41 M40 & 76mm L42 - The M1940 F-34 76mm L41 (including models M1941 & M1942) is the L41 gun mounted on T-34 and KV series, etc. The standard Soviet artillery, AT, and infantry support piece was the various models of L42 calibre length guns, all with identical performance with each other and the L41. Guns included are the widely used 76mm L42 M1939, the rare 76mm L42 M1941 SiS 3, the stopgap 76mm M1939/42, and the extensively produced 76mm M1942 SiS 3. APCR ammunition became available from 1942 and was issued to both guns & AFVs. 76mm L51 M36 - introduced in 1939, it was replace d in production during 1941 by the preferred lighter 76mm L42 guns. Also included under this category are two AA versions, the 76mm AA M31 & M38 which were replaced in production by the 85mm M39 gun. APCR ammunition became available f

introduced in 1944, it replacT34/85. Both guns virtually id

100mm L54 & L60 M44 - devdouble-wheels and a split tr

was tank mounted while the L60 was the AT gun. Performance was identical. 122mm L43 M43 & L46 M31 - the M31 is a heavy long range artillery piece with early models being mounted on 15

built for use only in AFVs and had the same performance.

tzers/Field GunsHo 76mm L16 M27 - small sturdy infantry gun. The original pre-war design

had a single trail carriage. In 1943, the gun was reissued using the lighter 45mm M42 gun carriage. A modified version (M32) was built for use in the T28 & T35 tanks.

40 barrel. 10/30r - elderly French artillery piece updated in 1930

had dual wheels and was mounted on the same carriage as the

107mm M40 gun. 152mm L29 M1937 - also includes the earlier M1910/30r howitzer which

had similar performance and from which the M1937 was derived from. Used in SU-152 & ISU-152.

AA/Automatic Cannon

76mm L30 M02/30 - the Model 02/30 was an upgraded version of the Model 00/02 which dated back prior to WWI. Both types were horse-drawn only and used a single trail carriage. A second less numerous variant of the M02/30 mounted an 76mm L

107mm L43 M19with a new longer barrel. Also includes the modernised M40 version which used a new carriage. No gun shield. Horse-drawn only.

- imported from France prior to WWI, the Schnei 122mm L13 M10/30 der 10S howitzers were modernised in 1930. Horse-drawn only.

122mm L22 M38 - standard medium howitzer which was very light for its calibre. HEAT ammunition became available in 1942. 152mm L24 M1938 - standard heavy artillery howitzer also referred to as the M10. It

20mm L55 M40 - this cannon was a derivative of the TNSh aircraft cannon

used in fighter aircraft and mounted on various light AFVs. 25mm L91 AA M40 - built in very limited numbers, possibly because the

factories involved were overrun by the Germans. 37mm L74 AA M39 - rugged sturdy gun derived from the Swedish 40mm

Bofors AA. Like all Soviet AA guns, none were capable of being fired while limbered.

100

Soviet Organisation RIFLE REGIMENT 1939 - ‘45 • Three regiments made up the bulk of a division • No Radios were issued below Regiment HQ.

All tr• ansport was horse drawn. R EGIMENT: 1939 - ‘45 IFLE R

ve: Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Ha Soviet Rifle Regiment

t HQ n/a 1 Rifle Regimen3 Rifle Battalions -

m giment suppo1 Anti-Tank Gun Co repany (2 platoons of 3 x 45/37mm AT guns) rt unit

t.) attalion)

e later, but add 3 PV per team ort unit

1 Howitzer Company (2 platoons of 2 x 75mm Infantry Guns) regiment support unit (2 platoons of 3 sections, each with 1 x 120mm mortar) 1942-‘45 1 Mortar Company regiment support unit

1 AT Rifle Company regiment support unit fle Co. HQ) (don’t use if pl. allocated to ba 1 x AT Rifle Company HQ (same as Ri

3 x AT Rifle Platoons (same as in the b (a SMG platoon on horses) Se regiment support unit 1 Recon Platoon

1 Engineer Platoon (1 Off, 2-3 NCO, 17 men) regiment suppSovi ifle Battalion et R

ny (two platoons (3 from 1942), each with 3 sections of 1 x 82mm mortar) battalion support unit ort unit

oon HQ) t broken down

ttalion support unit

1 Rifle Battalion HQ 1 per rifle bat. 3 Rifle Companies - 1 Mortar Compa1 AT Rifle Platoon battalion supp 1 AT Rifle Platoon HQ (same as rifle plat take only if no 3 AT Rifle Section (3 AT Rifle Teams)

MG Company (3 platoons of 3 x MMG) ba1Soviet Rifle Company

Team, 2 Rifle Teams) 1 per rifle co. 1 Rifle Company HQ (1 Company HQ3 Rifle Platoons -

3 x 50mm mortars (2 x 50mm mortars from 1942) company support unit x MMG (from 1942) company support unit

1 Mortar Section (treat as a platoon) MG Section (treat as a platoon) 21

Soviet Rifle Platoon 1 Rifle Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team) 1 per rifle pl.

am)

3 - 4 Rifle Sections 1939-‘41 (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - Rifle Te - 3 - 4 Rifle Sections 1942-‘45 (1 LMG Team, 1 LMG or SMG Team, 1

9- 0 m with LM , 3-4 SMG, rifles) LMG Team, 1 SMG Team or 1 Rifle Team

iberian (any date) or Guards Rifle Squad - (Historical data - 1 NCO, 1 en 2 GS

2

stHi orical Data (do not use in gameplay) Rifle Platoon HQ - (1 Off, 1 NRifle Squad 1939

CO, 2 men, with 1-2 SMG and rifles) – ’41 - (1 NCO, 9-10 men with 1 LMG, rifles)

- (1 NCO, 9-10 men with 1 - 2 LMG, 3-4 SMG, rifles)

Identicental level

Rifle Squad 1942 – ’45 - (1 Rifle Company HQ Off, 3-4 NCO, 4-6 men, with 1-3 SMG and rifles)

- (1 NCO, 7 men with 3 AT RIfle, 3 SMG, rifles) Rifle AT Section

OTORM ISED RIFLE REGIMENT • al to Rifle Regiment, except entirely motorised with trucks • Also had the following units attached at regim

MOTORISED RIFLE REGIMENT: 1943 - ’45

No. Your Force Can Have: Qty Unit Type S et Motorised Rifle Regiment 1943 - ’45 additions to Rifle Regiment

ith 3 sections of 1 x 82mm Mortar, 1 truck) regiment support unit ovi

1 Mortar Company (4 platoons, each w1 Artillery/AT Company (3 platoons of 4 x 76mm Guns, 12 trucks) regiment support unit 1 Recon Company =/> 1 Mot co., max=/< 1 per Mot Reg

any (same as below, but riding in 10 x M3 Halftrack/Scout Cars) d Car Company (1 HQ of 1 x AC, 2 platoons of 2 x AC each)

4 platoons of 3 x HMG)

1 SMG Comp - 1 Armore - 1 AA Company ( regiment support unit SU CHINE GUN BATTALION 1941 - ‘45 B MA

iding into combat, with sup ven trucks. s and support weapons, with ny instead of three.

• ny ngth. This type of unit was attached to all armored and motorised units, in either battalion, compa , or even platoon stre• Radios were issued only to Battalion HQ. • Tran ion of r sport was either tanks or closed-top SPs with the intent port weapons being gi• For Motorised SMG Battalions, trucks were provided for all troop 4 platoons per compa

ION 1941 – ‘45 SUB MACHINE GUN BATTALy Qt Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have:

Su chine Gun Battalion Battalion HQ n/a

b Ma

rt unit 1 AT Platoon (2 sections with 3 x 45mm AT guns) (from 1942) battalion support unit 1 AT Rifle Platoon (3 x AT Rifle Section) (from 1942) battalion support unit

MMG) (from 1942) battalion support unit 6mm gun) (from 1942) battalion support unit

1 Sub Machine Gun 3 Sub Machine Gun Companies - 1 Mortar Company (2 platoons, each with 3 sections of 1 x 82mm mortars) (from 1942) battalion suppo

1 MG Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x Gun Platoon (2 sections with 2 x 71

Sub Machine Gun Company 1 Sub Machine Gun Company HQ (1 Company HQ Team) 1 pe

- r SMG Co.

3 Sub Machine Gun Platoons Sub Machine Gun Platoon 1 Sub Machine Gun Platoon HQ (Nominate 1 Team of the platoon as the HQ, + 10 PV) 1 per SMG Pl. 3 Sub Machine Gun Sections 1941 (2 SMG Teams) -

101

Sub Machine Gun Sections 1942 - 1945 (1 SMG Team, 1 LMG Team) - 3

s Hi torical Data (do not use in gameplay)

- (1 NCO, 7 mSub Machine Gun Section 1941 en with SMGs) 1942 – ’45 - (1 NCO, 7 men with 1 LMG, 7 SMGs)

Sub Machine Gun Company HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 NCO with SMGs) ion HQ Section - (1-2 Off, 6-8 NCO, 10 EM with SMGs)

ANTI-TANK BATTALION: • One battalion was attached to all motorised divisions/corps, also to rifle divisions. From 1942?

ee Guns/Artillery/Mortars Restrictions Radios at battalion HQ only.

Sub Machine Gun

Sub Machine Gun Battal

• S•

TQty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: AN I-TANK BATTALION:

Anti-Tank Battalio See Guns/Artillery/Mortars Restrictions n 1 Anti-Tank Battalion HQ 1 per AT bat

eries (4 x 37mm/45mm/57mm/76 AT guns, 4 trucks) Company (as per Rifle Battalion, but with 2 x platoons, not x 3) battalion support unit

3 Anti-Tank Batt - 1 AT Rifle

TANK COMPANY: 1939 - 1941

Radios as per AFV charts.

• Whole company has the same type of tank, whether BT or T-26. •

y No. Your Force Can Have: TANK COMPANY: 1939 - 1941 Qt Unit Type Tank Company:

x Tank) 1 Tank Company HQ (2 1 per Tank Co. oon (5 x Tank) 3 Tank Plat -

have 3 or 4 AFVs. * Due to mechanical unreliability of Soviet tanks, many broke down on the way to battle. Any platoons may BTs of one platoon may be replaced by artillery BTs.

HEAVY TANK COMPANY: 1939 - 1941

Radios as per AFV charts.

* If co. is a BT co. then 2

• Whole company has the same type of tank, whether T-28, T-35, or KV. You cannot have more than 1 KV Company in a 1939-’41 Soviet force. •

•

Ay

HE VY TANK COMPANY: 1939 - 1941 Qt Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Heavy Tank Company:

HQ (1 x Tank) 1 per Tank Co. 1 Heavy Tank Companynk Platoon (3 x Tank) 3 Heavy Ta -

may therefore have 2 AFVs. * Due to mechanical unreliability of Soviet tanks, many broke down on the way to battle. Any platoons

a company of KVs, or up to a company of T-34s, or less than a company of each. eg 1 KV platoon and 1 T-34 platoon. • Radios as per AFV charts.

NK BTA RIGADE: cSept 1941 hese brigades were accepted as the largest Soviet tank formations at this time. • Due to staggering losses, t

Unl• ess you field an entire tank battalion, you cannot have more than one company in total of KV or T-34 tanks in a 1939-’41 Soviet force. So either up to

TA RIGADE: 1941 NK BQty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Tank Brigade: 1 Tank Brigade HQ n/a 2 Tank Battalion - 1 SMG or Motorised Rifle Battalion - Ta ttalion nk Ba

er Tank Bat ompany -

1 Medium Tank Company - 1 Light Tank Company -

1 Tank Battalion HQ (1 x T-34/76) 1 p1 Heavy Tank C

Heavy Tank Company (Max of 1 KV Company in a 1939-’41 force) nk Company HQ (1 x KV)

2 Heavy Tank Platoon (2 x KV) - 1 Heavy Ta 1 per Tank Co

Medium Tank Company (Max of 1 T-34 Company in a 1939-’41 force) Tank Company HQ (1 x T-34/76) 1 per Tank Co 1 Medium

2 Medium Tank Platoon (3 x T-34/76) - Light Tank Company 1 Light Tank Company HQ (1 x T-26 or BT) 1 per Tank Co 3 Light Tank Platoon (3 x T-26 or BT) -

NK BNo. Your Force Can Have:

TA RIGADE: July 1942 Qty Unit Type Ta igade: nk Br

-

1 SMG or Motorised Rifle Battalion - 1 AT Battery (4 x 76mm AT Gun, 4 truck) brigade support unit

1 Tank Brigade HQ n/a2 Tank Battalion

Tank Battalion Tank Battalion HQ (1 x T-34/76 in 1st Battalion, and 1 x T-60/70 in 2nd Battalion) 1 per Tank Bat

any (2nd Battalion has 1 x Mdm Tank Co, 1 x Lght Tank Co.) - 12 Medium Tank CompMe ium Tank Company

Medium Tank Company HQ (1 x T-34/76) 1 ped

1 r Tank Co 2 Medium Tank Platoon (3 x T-34/76) - Light Tank Comp

1 per Tank Co any

1 Light Tank Company HQ (1 x T-60 or T-70) toon (3 x T-60 or T-70) 3 Light Tank Pla -

102

‘45 Thre f tank, suc strictions), or a lend-lease tan

r AFV charts.

TANK BRIGADE: 1943 - • e tank brigades form the bulk of a Tank Corps. One brigade was in a Mechanised Corps. Each brigade was equipped with entirely one type o

h as T-34 (can be a mix of 76s and 85s according to date re k. • Radios as pe TANK BRIGADE: 1943 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Tank Brigade: 1 Tank Brigade HQ (3 x Tank, 1- n/a3 motorcycle bases)

Tank Battalion - lion - - 12 HMG, 5 - 10 trucks) brigade support unit

31 SMG or Motorised Rifle Batta1 Tank Brigade AA Company (9Tank Battalion 1 Tank Battalion HQ (1 x Tank, 1 motorcycle base) 1 per Tank Bat 2 Tank Companies - Tank Company

1 per Tank Co 1 Tank Company HQ (1 x Tank) x Tank) 3 Tank Platoon (3 -

HE TANK REGIMENT: 1942 - ‘45 AVY

ost entirely independent, being held at Corps or Army level to support a ancing infantry units, etc. The r IS.

harts.

• These units were alm dv• regiment had all of one of the following types of heavy tank: KV1, KV-85 o• Radios as per AFV c

AVYQty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: HE TANK REGIMENT: 1942 - ‘45

Heavy Tank Regiment: 1 Heavy Tank Regiment HQ (1 x Heavy Tank, 2-4 jeeps/cars/motorcycles) n/a

- rt unit

4 Heavy Tank Companies - 1 SMG Company 1 AT Rifle Company (as per Rifle Battalion, but with 2 x platoons, not x 3) regiment suppoHeavy Tank Company

nk Company HQ (1 x Heavy Tank) 2 Heavy Tank Platoon (2 x Heavy Tank) 1 Heavy Ta

LF P• These units were either independent, attached at Corps or Army level, or part of the Tank/Mechanised Corps. • Unit performed a dual role of artillery and anti-tank support. • The regiment had all of one of the following types of SP: SU 76, SU 85, SU 100, SU 122/152, ISU 122/152.

SE ROPELLED ARTILLERY REGIMENT: 1942 - ‘45

• Radios as per AFV charts.

ty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: SELF PROPELLED ARTILLERY REGIMENT: 1942 - ‘45 Q Self Propelled1 Self

Artillery Regiment: Propelled Artillery Regiment HQ (1 x T-34/76 or 85, 2-4 jeeps/cars/motorcycles) n/a

- 1 SMG Company -

ompany (as per Rifle Battalion, but with 2 x platoons, not x 3)

4 Self Propelled Artillery Batteries

1 AT Rifle C regiment support unit Self Propelled Artillery Battery

Artillery Battery HQ (1 x SP) x SP) -

1 Self Propelled 1 per self prop. art. bat. 2 Self Propelled Artillery Detachments (2

include in your force. The

ARTILLERY • See artillery restrictions regarding what artillery you can• Soviets had entire artillery divisions as well!

No. Your Force Can Have: ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type Infantry Division Artillery Regiment 1941 - ‘42 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 152mm howitzers, all horse draw see artillery restrictions n)

howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions n)

2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 122mm2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 76mm howitzers, all horse draw see artillery restrictions Infantry Division Artillery Regiment Late 1942 - 1945 152mm Artillery Bat ee artillery restrictions

ee artillery restrictions Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 76mm howitzers, all horse drawn) see artillery restrictions

talion withdrawn to Corps/Army level, but same structure as above s 1 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 122mm howitzers, all horse drawn) s2 Tank or Motorise1 Artillery Batta

d Division Artillery Regiment 1941 lion (3 batteries, each with 6 x 122mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions

2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 6 x 76mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions Tank or Motorised Division Artillery Regiment 1942 - ‘45 2 Self Propelled Artillery Regiments, as above see artillery restrictions 2 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 6 x 76mm howitzers, all motorised) see artillery restrictions Rocket Katyusha Brigade (held at Army Level and attached to units when required.)

Katyusha Regiments (3 batteries, each with 8 x mobile launcher, either M-13 or M-31) 3

hese w ‘Guards’ and received a 30 - 50% increase in (mostly support) quipme itional sections to the support platoons, or dditiona uards company). A Guards company cannot

or exa

GUARDS UNITS T ere combat units which had distinguished themselves in battle. In return, they were titlede nt. In game terms, you must therefore increase all Guards support units by 25 - 50%, by adding adda l platoons to the support companies. Minimum size for a Guards unit is one company (even if an ad-hoc Gh non-Guards unit in it. ave any F mple, a Guards Rifle Regiment could have the following changes: Soviet Guards Rifle Regiment 1942 - Increases in Support Units Anti-Tank Gun Company (increase from 2 to 3 or 4 platoons of 3 x 45/37mm AT guns) Mortar Company (increase from 2 to 3 or 4 platoons of 3 x 120mm mortars)

103

Howitzer Company (2 platoons of 2 x 75mm Infantry Guns) increase to 3 to 4 platoons of 2 x 75mm guns mpany (add one more AT Rifle Platoon)

MG Section (treat as a platoon) 2 x MMG - increase from 2 to 3 or 4 MMG atoon) 2 x 50mm mortars - increase from 2 to 3 or 4 mortars

S Europe xcept for the paratroops, US infantry were by no means impressive. Rarely did they attack without armor, artillery, or air support. Emphasis by the High ommand upon offensive tactics was strong, which led to the infantry not being trained in defensive manoeuvres or withdravals. Only on two occasions

were they forced to do this and although it was a s bles o disaster. U re d yed organisa s such as tank and artillery battalions. This worked to e d the to used con

ust embered that t U otstinctive chara t ca kless it s, o

d not rec di four years.

n

AT Rifle CoSoviet Rifle Battalion 1942 Mortar Company (3 platoons of 3 x 82mm mortars) increase from 3 to 4 platoons of 3 mortars AT Platoon (3 x AT Rifle Section) increase from 3 to 4 AT Rifle Sections MG Company (3 platoons of 3 x MMG) increase from 3 to 4 platoons of 3 x MMG Soviet Rifle Company 1942 Mortar Section (treat as a pl SIBERIAN UNITS An East Front force can also include Siberian Rifle or Siberian Motorised Rifle units from the 1941 winter, and units from Siberian Tank Brigades, from 1942. A Siberian company cannot have any non-Siberian units in it. The Siberian divisions had mostly escaped Stalin’s purges, so had quality officers and leadership that had retained sound tactical doctrine, hence their regular troop status. As in Guards units, they had a higher proportion of support units. In game terms, you must therefore increase all Siberian Rifle support units by 25 - 50%, by adding additional sections to the support platoons, or additional platoons to the support companies, as per Guards Units. Siberian units in the Far East until 1941 can include armor (but no T-34, KV, T-28 or T-35).

UEC

ham , it did not lead t S units we eplo in a flexible tion of pooling unit som egree, though the problem of which Q H y had report to ca sidera le confusion. b

It m be rem he tactical unit in the S army was the battalion, n the regiment. y wa ve, in and i s, re Another di cteristic of he US

e th itish, ha e vy nish arm s its aggressi utious, at t me c handling of un s commander whits by

unlik e Br eived th hea pu ment shed out by the Germans over the past US Europe Equipme t Lists PV AFV DATES PROD FR 134 M2A4 39-40 ? 2 144 M3 42-43 5811 4 132 M3A1 42-43 4621 3 119 M3A1 Satan 42-43 4621 5 136 M5A1 42-45 8884 2

e' 95 198 M24 'Chaffe 44-45 41 5 249/2 M3 'Lee' Earl 42-43 1500 1 66

63 M4A3 (76) 44-45 4546 1 276 M4A3 (76) Modified 44-45 ? 3

5) 'Jumbo' 6) 'Jumbo' ing'

'Hellcat' 14 M36 GMC 'Jackson' 44-45 1413 4

337 M36B2 GMC 'Jackson' 44-45 ? 6 M3 GMC 42-43 2202 3

2 T30 HMC 42-43 500 2 25 T19 HMC 42-43 324 3

104 M15 MGMC 42-45 2332 4 88 M16 MGMC 44-45 ? 4

M4A1/M21 Mo 1282 ?

8348

94 M8 'Greyhound' 43-45 8523 2 60 M3A1 Scout Car 42-44 21000 2

t Car

1 ck lf-trk

y / Late 223 M4 (75) 42-45 164 0 76 227 M4 (105) 44-45 1641 4 230 M4A1 42-45 ? 0 262 M4A1 (76) 44-45 ? 1 274 M4A1 (76) Modified 44-45 ? 5

226 M4A2 42-45 ? 4 233 M4A2 Late 42-45 ? 1 225 M4A3 / A4 (75) 43-45 476 2 1232 M4A3 Late 44-45 2 2

269 M4A3E8 76 HVSS 44-45 ? 2 239 M4A3 (105) HVSS 44-45 3036 3 155 M4 POA-CWS 75-HI 44-45 ? 5 +26 M4 Flame-thrower Kit 44-45 ? 3 +10 Cullin Hedge Cutters 44 ? 1 304 M4A3E2 (7 44-45 254 6 332 M4A3E2 (7 45 ? 6 354 M26 'Persh 45 310 6 154 M8 HMC ‘Scott’ 44-45 177 4 8 189 M7 HMC 'Priest' 42-45 3490 4

'Wolverine' 3 241 M10 GMC 43-45 499 2 215 M18 GMC 44-45 2507 4 3

12391

82 rtar Car 42-45 5 102 43-45 6 LVT(A)1 136 LVT(A)4 45 4

89 M20 Scou 44-45 3791 3 97 M5A1 Recce 44-45 ? 3 70 M2 Half track 42-44 11415 2 47/7 M3 / M3A1 Half tra 44-45 17004 1 76 M3A1 `LMG' Ha 44-45 ? 3 107 M3A1 `MMG' Ha 44-45 ? 4 lf-trk 8 LVT(A)2 43-45 ? 6 7

83 LVT(A)4 Buffalo 43-45 ? 6 PV GUNS DATES PROD FR

4 75mm L31 M2 42-45 ? 3

40 57mm L27 M18 RR 45 50 7

0 RR A1 Pack

80

56

A1 AA fors AA A

38 37mm L54 M3A1 42-44 18700 0 73 57mm L50 M1 43-45 16000 1 7113 76mm L52 M5 44-45 2500 3 151 90mm L53 M1A1/M2 44-45 7831 5

55 75mm L28 M2 45 ? 7 1 75mm L16 M1 43-45 5000 4 5

68 75mm L34 M1917 41-44 ? 3 93 105mm L16 M3 43-45 25 3 92 105mm L22 M2A1 42-45 83 1

39 37mm L54 M1 42-45 7278 4 44 40mrn L56 Bo 43-45 34116 3 0 HMG Quad A 43-45 ? 5 6

OD PV ARTILLERY DATES PR FR

80 75mm (per pair) 43-45 - 4

ir) (per pair) (per pair)

180 105mm (per pa 42-45 - 1 300 155mm 42-45 - 4 400 203mm 43-45 - 6 PV MORTARS DATES PROD FR 15 60mm 42-45 75000 0 45 81mm 42-45 ? 2 70 107mm 43-45 ? 4

TR PROD FR PV ANSPORT DATES

see Jee 42-45 ? 0

skin Field Car 42-45 ? 4 t

Motorcycle 42-45 ? 1

p

soft Jeep 'GPA' 43-45 ? 5

char Light Truck 42-45 ? 3 Medium Truck 42-45 ? 0

Heavy Truck 42-45 ? 4

27 DUKW 43-45 ? 3

OD PV ROCKETS DATES PR FR

0

200 114mm 44-45 ? 4 T34 x 1 15 182mm M17 x 1 44-45 ? 5

OD PV INFANTRY DATES PR FR

eam (mag)

9 enade Late

m 42-45 ? 1

10 US Rifle/Carbine Team 42-45 ? 1 10 SMG Team 42-45 ? 3

Team 13 Assault Rifle 45 ? 2 14 US LMG T 42-45 ? 1 26 MMG 42-45 ? 1 30 HMG 42-45 ? 2

Grenade6 AP Rifle 43-45 ? 3 AT Rifle Gr 43-45 ? 1

20 Bazooka Tea 15 Flamethrower Team 42-45 ? 3 5ea Demolition Charge 42-45 ? 2 page39 AP Mine 42-45 ? 1 page39 AT Mine 42-45 ? 1 12 Mine Detector 42-45 ? 1 30 FAO/FAC Team 42-45 ? 1 20 Radio 42-45 ? 0 US Equipment Notes - M4 Sherrran Crab is an M4 (75) with flail equipment attached, see 'Mine Removal' section. - Cullin Hedgeraw cutters were added to any tank engaged in the bocage terrain. - U.S. forces cannot use cavalry or horse teams, but are allowed individual pack horses ( Italy only.) - All guns are vehicle/tractor towable. - Artillery of 75mm, 105mm, 155mm and all Mortars can fire s indirectly.

and Morale Ratings

smoke round

US Europe Troop Classes

dification Notes Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Mo 1.25 1.5

ion to PV for Regs, +25% or x 1.25 for Vets +25% o x 1.25 ation to PV

Offboard Artillery As unit class As unit rating +25% or xParatroopers Veteran Elite +50% or xArmor ’44 – ’45 Regular or Veteran Reliable no modificatAll Other Units Regular Reliable no modific

p Class and Morale Rating modifiers

worlds lar most advaautomotive industry behind it. An impressive total of 3,200,000 military vehicles had been produced by 1945, many being supplied to allied countries.

m war with strictstan isation ehicle manufac hich ne of the keyelements to mass production. The range of excellent vehicles produced

* you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troo U.S.A. SOFTSKINS

red WWII with theUS forces ente gest and nced Unlike any other nation, the US com enced the dard on v ture w was o

104

re requirements off- d .

Th loy motorised t fashe nterparts. Inf otori vel transport assi

to t . Th not to there was a shortage vehicles for on the contrary, entire division s we iftly truck-lifted between dest equired. ctical doctrine ply dictated that the use of mot d tr ct combat was not permitted with the task being best to " ed" infantry.

we all design to military with excellent roaility

hem is is sayperformance and good reliab

did not emps and corp re sw

e US Army roops in the same hion ere n

inations as r Ta simas t ir German or Soviet cou antry units w fully

on corps leorise oops in dire

mot sed and relied regiments to be gned left armor

e ed pacity eams

PV USA Description Drive Siz Spe Ca Towi Rd C/C n t

7 Harley-Davidson W Motorcycle x 3 - A 60 23 1 - LA 9 Jeep (wpns extra) Light car 4x4 B 55 24 1 A 10 Ford GPA Amphibious Car 4x4 B 55 20 1 - 12 Weapons Carrier 'Beep' Light Truck 4x4 B 50 20 2 A

C 15 Dodge (1 ton) Light Truck 4x4 50 18 4 B 19 C 26 C

Dodge (2 ton) Light Truck 6x6 GMC (2 ton) Medium Truck 6x6

50 24 5 B 45 22 7 C

27 GMC DUKW (2 ton) 'Duck' Amphib Truck 6x6 11 Diamond T (4 ton) Heavy Truck 6x6

C D

45 20 6 - 40 21 0 D

20 D C

Mack (7 ton) Heavy Truck 6x6 31 15 5 D 18 M5 (13 ton) High Speed Heavy Tractor trk 35 15 3 D

ring mounted HMG could be added for use by the co-driver (at additional cost.)

Harley-Davidson WLA Motorcycle - this was that most common and

Car, and various other «ton trucks which were phased out when the Beep was introduced during 1942.

Dodge (1« ton) 4x4 - light off-road cargo truck. Although produced in large « ton truck was mostly supersed dge 2« ton

hich was more versatile, mobile and hence, preferred by combat units. HMG could be added for use river (at addi

Dod was a standard Dodg rrier tand ngthened chassis. En late 19

opellers. A ring mounted HMG could be added for use by the co-driver (at additional cost.)

Diamond T (4 ton) 6x6 - heavy prime mover for transporting and recovering AFVs and heavy vehicles. Also includes the 12 ton M26 Tractor (6x6) used for the same role and called the "Dragon".

Mack (7« ton) 6x6 - heavy truck employed as a prime mover for heavy

5 (13 peed - heavy tractor based o e tracked runningght tanks. Used ver for medium

ti

US

numerous types employed by US forces, closely followed by the Indian 640 & 741B models. A few side car versions were built but not issued to combat units. The bike was made for the rider only, no passenger. Jeep 4x4 - the nickname "Willys Jeep" is derived from its Ford manufacturing designation, "GPW" (General Purpose Willys). The Jeep came in a variety of standard versions. It could have a pintle mounted AA HMG, MMG or LMG (belt fed) behind the front seats (at additional cost.) Ford GPA 4x4 - amphibious jeep based on the standard Willys Jeep with a boat like hull and engine driven propeller at the rear. Only built in limited numbers.

Dodge Weapons Carrier `Beep' 4x4 - light off-road truck nickname the "Beep" (from Big Jeep.) Also includes the Dodge Command/Reconnaissance

numbers, this 1 ed by the Do truck (6x6) w

artillery. M ton) High S n the sam

A ring mounted by the co-d tional cost.)

gear as used on the M3 & M5 Li as a prime mo ar llery.

ge (1« ton) 6x6 - this e 4x4 Weapons Ca with a em rear bogie and le tered production 42. A

GMC (2« ton) 6x6 - medium off-road cargo truck nicknamed "Deuce & a half". This vehicle was the most common transport vehicle operated by US forces being used extensively by all services. There was a 4x4 version built alongside the 6x6 but these vehicles were employed almost entirely by supply and logistic units. A ring mounted HMG could be added for use by the co-driver (at additional cost.)

GMC DUKW (2« ton) `Duck' 6x6 - amphibious medium truck developed from the GMC 2« ton truck. The vehicle had a boat shaped hull with twin rear driven pr

A MOTORISED GUNS

Speed Armament Rd C/C

PV Size

BRITAIN / USA Description Drive

42 17 40mm L4858 SP, 4x4 Bofors 40mm AA 30cwt truck 4x4 C AA 46 37mm M6 GMC Light AT SP 4x4 B 50 20 37mm L54

40mm AA - this AASP used the Morris Commercial CS9/B 37mm M6 GMC - very light gun carriage conceived as a tank destroyer and base

ith virtually no exper ical doctrine dictate

r break throughs wh r with by tank destroye t

ve to comply with in batt were amended. hind both German

as uction rather than s

suff d from therobl ir rt. The Wehrmach

t e war un used them as tank . US s rs creasingly pressed

as a ul d nsuitable with their armor and n e his l the demise of the C and a

CAP

SP 4x4, Bofors

4x4 truck chassis specially fitted to mount a 40mm Bofors AA gun with 360o traverse. Three outriggers on the side and rear were used to provide stability. A gun-shield was fitted at the front of the weapon. An Australian version was also built based on the Ford F60L 3 ton 4x4 truck with similar arrangement (with four outriggers) as did the Canadians on the Ford F60B.

d on the Dodge Weapons Carrier. A pedestal mounted 37mm AT gun was installed in the rear and provided with a large shield for crew protection. The cramped crew area around the gun allowed the weapon to have a limited 180º traverse towards the rear, although it could be operated 360º traverse if the crew serviced the weapon while dismounted (ie. « move for crew to re-embark before moving again.)

U.S. ARMOR The US Army entered WWII w ience in tank warfareor design. Their original tact d that tanks were to

Curiously, the US Tank Destroyer Command ere opposite p em to that of the German counterpa t

operate as assault guns fo ile the enemy armo star ed th with assault g s and successfullywould be exclusively dealt rs. This arrangemen destroyers tank de troye were, however, inhowe r proved impossible le and US tank crews into action ssa t guns an were completely usuffered badly until such tactics

be hthin ope turr ts. T inability resu ted in

AFV design lagged & Soviet thinking, wit TD omm fter the war. emph is placed on mass prod urvivability. PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO 134 M2A4 37 L54,4*LMG 4 3 3 4 3 3 26 12 C 6 144 M3 37 L54,4*LMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 36 20 C 6

132 M3A1 37 L54,2*LMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 36 20 C 6 119 M3A1 'Satan' F/thrower,2*LMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 36 20 C 4 136 M5A1 37 L54,2*LMG 6 3 3 5 3 3 36 24 C 6 198 M24 'Chaffee' 75 L40,2*LMG 5 3 3 5 3 3 35 25 C 8 249 M3 `Lee' (Early) 75 L31,37L54,4*LMG 7 4 4 7 5 5 26 16 C 7 266 M3 `Lee' (Late) 75 L40,37L54,4*LMG 7 4 4 7 5 5 26 16 C 7

240 M3 `Grant' (Early) 75 L31,37L54,3*LMG 7 4 4 6 5 5 26 16 C 7 258 M3 `Grant' (Late) 75 L40,37L54,3*LMG 7 4 4 6 5 5 26 16 C 7 223 M4 75 L40,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 24 15 C 7 227 M4 (105mm) 105 L22,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 24 16 C 9 230 M4A1 75 L40,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 24 15 C 7 262 M4A1 (76mm) 76 L52,2*LMG 9 5 4 10 7 7 24 15 C 7 274 M4A1 (76mm) Modified 76 L52,2*LMG 12 5 4 10 7 7 24 15 C 7 226 M4A2 75 L40,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 29 17 C 7 233 M4A2 (Late) 75 L40,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 29 17 C 7 225 M4A3/M4A4 75 L40,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 26 16 C 7 232 M4A3 (Late) 75 L40,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 26 16 C 7 263 M4A3 (76mm) 76 L52,2*LMG 9 5 4 10 7 7 26 16 C 7

105

276 M4A3 (76mm) Modified 76 L52,2*LMG 12 5 4 10 7 7 26 16 C 7 269 M4A3E8 (76mm) HVSS 76 L52,2*LMG 9 5 4 10 7 7 28 20 C 7

,2*LMG 239 M4A3 (105mm) HVSS 105 L22 9 5 4 9 6 6 28 20 C 10 155 M4 POA-CWS 75-HI F/Thr,2*LMG 8 5 4 9 6 6 26 16 C 3

' 304 M4A3E2 (75mm) 'Jumbo 75 L40,2*LMG 16 7 3 18 15 15 22 12 C 7 332 M4A3E2 (76mm) 'Jumbo' 76 L52,2*LMG 16 7 3 18 15 15 22 12 C 7

354 M26 'Pershing' 90 L53,2*LMG 16 8 5 13 9 9 20 12 D 8

ARMAMENT CAP PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO

154 M8 HMG `Scott' 75 L16,HMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 40 20 C 7 189 M7 HMG `Priest' 105 L22,HMG 7 2 2 6 2 2 25 15 C 7

241 M10 GMC `Wolverine' 76 L52,HMG 6 3 3 8 3 3 30 20 C 6 215 M18 GMC `Hellcat' 76 L52,HMG 2 2 2 3 2 2 50 24 C 6

314 M36 GMC `Jackson' 90 L53,HMG 6 3 3 8 3 3 30 18 C 7 337 M36B2 GMC `Jackson' 90 L53,HMG,LMG 9 5 4 8 3 3 26 16 C 7 123 M3 GMC 75 L40 1 1 1 1 - - 40 16 C 5 92 T30 HMC 75 L16 1 1 1 1 - - 44 17 C 5 125 T19 HMC 105 L22 1 1 1 1 - - 40 16 C 7 104 M15 MGMC 37 L54,2*HMG 1 1 1 1 1 - 40 16 C 3 88 M16 MGMC 4 HMG (Quad) 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 3 82 M4A1 & M21 Mtr Carrier 81mm Mortar 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C -

102 LVT(A)1 37 L54,3*LMG 1 1 1 5 3 3 20 12 D 6 136 LVT(A)4 75 L16,HMG 1 1 1 4 3 3 20 12 D 7

NCE P PV APC/RECONNAISSA ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd C/C Sz FO CA

94 M8 `Greyhound' 6x6 37 L54,LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 55 20 C 5 60 M3A1 Sct Car 4x4 HMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 14 C 2 2 89 M20 Scout Car 6x6 HMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 55 22 C 2 1 97 M5A1 Recce HMG 6 3 3 6 3 3 40 25 B 2 70 M2 Half-trk HMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 3 47 M3 Half-trk LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 4 71 M3A1 Half-trk HMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 4 76 M3A1 `LMG' Half-trk (USA o

Half-trk (USAnly) HMG,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 3

only) HMG,2*MMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 107 M3A1 `MMG' 78 LVT(A)283 LVT4 `B

HMG,2*LMG 1 1 uffalo' HMG,2*LMG 1 1

1 1 1 1 20 14 D 2 5 1 1 1 1 20 14 D 2 9

okSm e Dischargers; From 1944 onwards, M24 Chaffee, Medium M4 series, M10,

equ ped prior to 1944.) M18, M M

ipdioe

USA

36, 36B2, M20 & M8 AC were equipped with smoke pots or mortars. (No AFVs

Ra s; All AFVs equipped as standard. On Man Turrets; none

AFV Notes;

S TANK

M2A4 Light Tank - predecessor to the M3 Light tank, it was the mainstay of US Armored divisions in 1940 with 375 in service.

M3 Light Tank - the M2A4 design underwent considerable revision which resulted in the improved M3 Light tank. The chassis was unchanged, but the armor had been increased and a new turret added. The M3 had four LMGs, one co-axial with the 37mm gun in the turret, one bow mounted LMG in the hull, and two fixed LMG mounted either side in the superstructure (operated by the driver.) M3A1 Light Tank - an improved M3 tank which had the two fixed LMGs removed and redesigned welded turret which eliminated the riveting.

until the later M4 tank enter service. The hull mounted 75mm gun has limited traverse with two fixed LMGs mounted in the hull and fired by the driver (can only be fired if stationary and at target within 30º of the AFVs front.) The commander's LMG turret on the `Lee' can be used in AA role. The `Grant' was identical to the Lee except for the redesigned 37mm gun turret which had the radio equipment mounted in it and not in the hull. Early production Lee/Grant all had the shorter 75mm M2, while late production used the

d Kits - Any M4 tank (except for Jumbo) can have the

M3A1 `Satan' - built for eliminating Japanese bunkers, the USMC modified numbers of M3A1s by replacing the main armament with a Ronson flame projector.

M5A1 Light Tank - includes the M3A3 & M5 which are equivalent in performance. These variants had much thicker armor (than the earlier M3A1) and was sloped better to enhance protection. Turret designs were similar except for the M3A3 & M5A1 which had a rear bussel housing the radio equipment. M24 Light Tank `Chaffee' - based on a modified M18 chassis, this light tank was to replace the M5A1 light tank. It mounted a light version of the 75mm L40 gun in a newly designed turret. M3 Medium Tank `Lee' & `Grant' - the M3 was built as a stop gap measure

longer 75mm M3 gun. M4 Medium Tank - the original M4 design entered production several

months after the M4A1 & M4A2. The hull was of all welded construction with a cast turret common to all M4 tanks mounting the 75mm gun. M4 (105mm) - standard M4 tanks modified to mount the 105mm L22 howitzer. The only external difference to the standard tank (except for the howitzer) was a new mantlet. One hundred of the late production models had HVSS suspensions.

M4A1 Medium Tank - this variant is distinct by its rounded cast upper hull which provided better protection than the standard welded hull used (which had the same amount of armor.) The M4A1 was the first Sherman to enter production and was preferred by the US army which meant only a small proportion were despatched as Lend-Lease. This category also includes the `composite hull' M4 tanks which had a cast front hull with the sides and rear welded. M4A1 Medium Tank (76mm) - this variant entered production in mid-1944 was upgunned by using a larger T23 turret (developed two years earlier) mounting the 76mm L52 gun. The cast hull was slightly modified to accept the larger turret.

M4A2 Medium Tank - this model was the second Sherman model to enter production and was virtually identical to the M4. The hull was lengthened to accommodate a more powerful diesel engine which gave it a much higher road speed than any other model. The majority were assigned to Lend/Lease with a number being requisitioned by the USMC. M4A2 Late - redesigned M4A2 which entered production from February 1944 onwards. The front hull was modified with a thicker one-piece 47o glacis plate providing better protection over earlier models with welded multi-piece hulls. Engines & chassis remained unchanged. The turrets incorporated minor improvements; eg. cupola, hatches. M4A3 & M4A4 Medium Tank - these models were identical to the earlier M4 & M4A2. The hulls were slightly longer to accommodate different engines giving a better road speed. The M4A3 production was retained for the US Army, while all M4A4s were assigned to Lend/Lease. M4A3 Late - redesigned M4A3 which entered production from February 1944 onwards. The front hull was modified with a thicker one-piece 47o glacis plate providing better protection over earlier models with welded multi-piece hulls. Engines & chassis remained unchanged. Minor improvements were incorporated into the turret; eg. cupola, hatches. M4A3 Medium Tank (76mm) - this variant entered production in mid-1944 using the late model M4A3 hull & chassis (47o hull front.) It was upgunned by installing the larger T23 turret (developed two years earlier) mounting the 76mm L52 gun. M4A1 (76mm) Modified & M4A3 (76mm) Modified - the vulnerability of the M4 to German AT guns led to many being uparmored in the field by welding on special armor plate kits to the front hull. Designed for the M4A3, many were added to the M4A1 although the rounded hull made the practice less common.

M4A3 (76mm) HVSS - from September onwards, HVSS suspension became standard production. By May 1945, 50% of all M4A3 76mm Shermans in service had the new HVSS running gear. Uparmoring the hull was standard practice by crews during late 1944. M4A3 Medium Tank (105mm) HVSS - standard M4A3 modified to mount the 105mm L22 howitzer (the only external difference being a new mantlet.) The majority of these tanks were built with the improved HVSS running gear which gave better C/C performance.

M4 POA-CWS 75-HI - M4A1 tank with a Ronson flame projector mounted in the breech of the 75mm L40 for conversion to a `flame' tank. As the barrel & turret were unmodified, the tank could not be distinguished from the standard M4A1.

M4 Flame-thrower Fielhull LMG removed and replaced with a flamethrower, cost 18 extra PV. Fuel tanks are internal. M4A3E2 (75mm) & M4A3E2 (76mm) `Jumbo' - With the arrival of the M26 Pershing being delayed until early 1945, a stopgap heavy assault tank was required and the M4A3E2 was introduced as a compromise. Based on the M4A3, hull armor was increased all round and new heavier turret (based on the T23) with 6" inch armor and 7" mantlet was used. The original armament for the tank was a 75mm L40, but many were progressively upgunned in the field with the 76mm L52. An increase in weight reduced the speed and reliability respectively.

106

SELF

M26 `Pershing' - The heaviest US AFV to see combat, the Pershing was designed to be equivalent to the German Tiger I, having roughly the same armor, speed and firepower. It incorporated many new design features such as a rear drive sprocket, torsion bar suspension and wide tracks.

PROPELLED GUNS M8 HMG `Scott' - based on the M5 Light tank (with thinner hull armor), it

mounted the 75mm L16 Pack howitzer in larger open-topped turret. Replaced the T30 HMC.

M7 HMG 'Priest' - called the `Priest' because of its pulpit HMG mount, the majority were built on the M3 Lee/Grant chassis with late production vehicles using the M4A3. The 105mm howitzer was mounted with limited traverse in an open topped fighting compartment.

M10 GMC 'Wolverine' - based on the M4A2 chassis, it mounted the heavy 3" AA gun in an open topped turret. The armor was so light that a 1630 kg counter-weight was attach to the rear of the turret to balance it. Speed was greater than the M4 due to the reduction in weight. These TDs were equipped with HVAP ammunition as standard (and is included in the AFVs PV.)

M18 GMC 'Hellcat' - sacrificing armor for speed, this tank was the fastest tracked AFV to see combat. The 76mm L52 gun was mounted in an open-topped turr

AA turret. -down

calibrated. LVT(A)1 - consisted of an LVT(A)2 with the roof covered over and an M5A1

tank turret mounted on top. Behind the turret on either side there were two LMGs with armored shields with crew access through hatches in the roof.

r; 7cm/move.) 1 except mounting a 75mm howitzer in an

open topped turret as used on the M8 HMC. The rear mount LMG positions were not included. (Amphibious Speed across water; 7cm/move.)

APC/

et. These TDs were equipped with HVAP ammunition as standard (and is included in the AFVs PV.)

M36 GMC `Jackson - the M10A1 was upgunned by installing a new open-top turret mounting the potent 90mm AA gun. HVAP ammunition was standard issue (and is included in the AFVs PV.)

M36B2 GMC `Jackson' - the increasing demand for powerful tank destroyers lead to the M36 turret being mounted on M4A3 tanks hulls. The bow LMG was retained and HVAP ammunition was standard issue (included in the AFVs PV.) T48 GMC - consisted of an M3 Halftrack mounting the 57mm L45 AT gun behind the driver's cab. All vehicles were assigned to lend-lease. The British converted their T48s back to APCs while the Soviets were the only ones to use them in combat (many being upgunned with their own 57mm L73 AT gun.)

M3 GMC - consisted of an M3 Halftrack with the 75mm M1897 field gun mounted behind the driving cab with limited traverse. A shield was added over the front of the gun. and a pedestal mounted HMG provided close-in protection.

T30 HMC - light assault gun used for direct fire support. Consisted of an M3 Halftrack mounting the 75mm pack howitzer. A shield was added over the front for extra crew protection. Replaced by the M8 HMC. Similar layout to M3 GMC. T19 HMC - built to provide mobility for the 105mm L22 howitzer, it was used as stop-gap until the M7 HMC became available. 105mm howitzer was mounted behind the driving cab and the original gun shield retained. M15 MGMC - an M3 Halftrack with a rear mounted turret housing a combination of a 37mm AA gun and two co-axial HMGs. The turret lacked rear armor and the guns were incapable of engaging ground targets when firing over the driving cab. Both Area fire from 37mm AA and infantry fire from 2xHMG can be used against the same target/s. M16 MGMC - an M3 Halftrack mounting a small quadruple HMG The turret was installed in the rear passenger compartment with foldsides to allow ground targets to be engaged. Nicknamed the `Meat Chopper'. M4A1 & M21 Mortar Carrier - based on the smaller M2 Halftrack with an 81mm Mortar mounted in the passenger compartment. The M4 & M4A1 had the mortar facing rearward and can only engage targets 30 degrees left or right. The M21 was redesigned (using the M3 Halftrack) with the mortar facing forward and can engage targets 30 degrees either side. The vehicle is required to be stationary one turn prior to any firing for the weapon to be

(Amphibious Speed across wate LVT(A)4 - similar to the LVT(A)

RECONNAISSANCE M8 `Greyhound' - designed originally as a tank destroyer, it was accepted as an armored car despite being thinly armored and under gunned. Nicknamed `Greyhound' by the British who appreciated it's quietness and excellent cross-country speed. M3A1 Scout Car - based on a commercial 4x4 truck

chassis, it was

ull with a ring mounted HMG. Intended to replace

ted LMG in the centre of the passenger

compartment. The LMG can be dismounted and operated by a passenger team. In this case, the LMG Team replaces one Team. If all teams dismount, the vehicle cannot move or fire.

M3A1 Half Track - as per the M3 except a HMG was added in a forward pulpit mount over the driver cab and a LMG on a side pintle mounting in the rear. In a USA force, the HMG & LMG (belt) can be dismounted and operated by the passenger teams. In this case, the LMG (belt) Team

intended for the cavalry as a replacement for the horse. The HMG was mounted on a skate rail which ringed the open-top passenger compartment. M20 Scout Car - derived from the M8 armored car. A super-structure was built around the top of the hthe M3A1 Scout Car. The crew can dismount as a HMG Team OR a Bazooka Team, which are included in the point value. The HMG cannot be operated further than 15cm from the vehicle due to the small size of the AFV crew operating it. The Bazooka can be fired from the vehicle or dismounted. If the crew has dismounted, the vehicle cannot move or fire. M5A1 Recce - as the M24 `Chaffee' began entering service, surplus M5A1 tanks had their turrets removed and a ring mounted HMG installed. Influenced by the British conversion of their excess M3 `Stuarts', it was used in a similar scout car role.

M2 Half Track - smaller than the M3 Halftrack, it was intended to replace the M3A1 Scout Car in cavalry units but was deployed as a mortar/MG carrier or a prime mover. On the M2, the HMG & MMG were mounted on a track which ran around the inside of the passenger compartment providing 360 degree arc of fire. The latter M2A1 was similar to the M3A1 with the HMG in a pulpit and the MMG on a side pintle mounting. In a USA force, the HMG & MMG can be dismounted and operated by the passenger teams. In this case, the MMG Team replaces one Team, and the HMG Team replaces 2 Teams. If all teams dismount, the vehicle cannot move or fire. M3 Halftrack - this halftrack was intended as an infantry carrier (unlike the M2) and had a single pedestal moun

replaces one Team, and the HMG Team replaces 2 Teams. If all teams dismount, the vehicle cannot move.

M3 `LMG' Half Track - represents a standard M3 or M3A1 Halftrack which had two additional Air-cooled .30 Brownings LMGs added for the purpose of providing supporting fire to the infantry squads (as used in each Armored Infantry Platoon.) One more LMG can be added at cost; making 1xHMG, 3xLMG. The HMG & LMGs can be dismounted and operated by the passenger teams. In this case, each LMG (belt) Team replaces one Team, and the HMG Team replaces 2 Teams. If all teams dismount, the vehicle cannot move. M3 `MMG' Half Track - represents a standard M3 or M3A1 Halftrack which had additional Water-cooled .30 Brownings MG added for the purpose of providing supporting fire to the infantry squads (as used in each Armored Infantry Platoon and Armored Infantry Battalion MG Platoon.) One more MMG can be added at cost (making 1xHMG, 3xMMG). Vehicle’s crew may dismount as three MG teams, whether 1 x HMG and 2 x MMG, or 3 x MMG if it has 3 x MMGs. Also has a Bazooka Team. These teams are included in the vehicles Point value. If all teams dismount, the vehicle cannot move. The MGs cannot be operated further than 15cm from the vehicle due to the small size of the crews operating them. LVT(A)2 - armored version of the LVT2 cargo carrier. The passenger compartment was positioned between the driver's cab and the rear ebay which meant all cargo & passengers had to pass over the sides. HM

ngine

Gs & MMGs must be operated by passengers and cannot be dismounted. (Amphibious Speed across water; 8cm/move.)

LVT4 - similar to the LVT(A)2 with the engine moved directly behind the driver allowing rear manually operated ramp for quickly loading or debarking passengers/cargo. Nicknamed the `Water Buffalo', a light vehicle or gun (eg. jeep, 57mm gun) could also be carried with 1/2 move required for loading/unloading. HMGs & MMGs must be operated by passengers and cannot be dismounted. (Amphibious Speed across water; 8cm/move.)

ED S rm o experience

ly erman or Britisent a uns always fell below British & G

up un of the war. Emphasis

UNIT TATES GUNSThe U y entered WWII in guns and relied standard ation were considered more important th . S A with nextensive on ideas taken from G h designs. Tank

is an firepower(Even as late as D-Day 1944, the introduction of 76mm Shermans

armam nd AT g erman standards were delayed so as not to complicate logistics & supply.) right til the very end on quantity and

USA

Guns S 1 0 250 FO NOTES PV AT/Tank ize 20 40 60 80 100 25 150 175 20 1 +)

20cm 38 37mm L54 M3A A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 (USA Canister ‘42

Canister range is 6 6 5 5 4 4 73 57mm L50 M1 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 (HE 1944+) 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 5 5 +10pp -> 57mm L50 APDS (11) (11) (10) (10) (8) (6) (6) (5) 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4

74 75mm L31 M2 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 5) 5 S(5) ( mk & WP ‘44+ 4 3 9 9 8 7 7 6 5 5

90 75mm L40 M3 * (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) * Smk & WP ‘44+ 10 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 6 6

113 76mm L52 3” M5 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk ‘45+

+ pp 6mm L52 HVAP (11) 13 12 12 11 10 9 9 8 8 6

14 -> 7 (12) (11) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 7

107

151 90mm L53 M1A1, M2 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) 9) 9) 8) 7) 8 (10) ( ( ( ( 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 11 10 + -> 90mm L53 HVAP (11) (12) (12) (11) (9) 43pp (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 23 21 19 18 17 15 13 12 10 8

zers/ Field Guns S 1 5 200 250 FO NOTES PV Howit ize 20 40 60 80 100 25 150 17 0 4 No gun shield

ss HEAT

4 57mm L27 M18 Recoilless A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) - - - - - -> 57mm L27 M18 Recoille (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 7 7 7 7 7 5 75mm L28 M20 Recoilless A (11) (10) (9) (9) (8) 7)5 ( (6) 5 No gun shield, WP - - - - - - - -> 75mm L28 M20 Re (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) coilless HEAT 9 9 9 9 9 51 75mm L16 M1A1 P A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 No g/shield WP,Canistr ack

Canister range is 30cm EAT

- - - - - - - -> 75mm L16 M1A1 Pack H (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 68 75mm L34 M1917 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 P W 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 4 4 3 93 105mm L16 M3 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 No gunshield, Smk, WP - - - - - - - - -> 105mm L16 M3 HEAT (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) (5) 11 11 11 11 11 11 92 105mm L22 M2A1 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk, WP, Canister - - - - - - - - - Canister range is 40cm -> 105mm L22 M2A1 HEAT C (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

39 37mm L54 AA M1A1 B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) (No g/shield) 2 5 5 4 4 3 3 US Gun Notes;

/T AT ank Guns

37mm L54 M3A1 - with no prior experience on AT guns, the 37mm M3A1 was derived from the German 37mm PaK 35/36 design. Canister ammunition was introduced in mid 1942, including AFV mounted guns. A specialised `T32 Manpack' version was developed which c

onsisted of the barrel & recoil mechanism mounted on a .50 cal HMG tripod. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and

05mm M2A1 carriage. Early 3" guns were used in their original AA roles (in the Pacific) with mobile and static mountings (360o traverse.) HVAP ammunition was only issued officially to TD units, with regular tank units having to acquire HVAP stocks on their own initiative. (So for TD units, each vehicle can purchase HVAP ammo at +14 PV per vehicle, and can each vehicle can fire it every turn. Tanks can only purchase HVAP ammo at +14 PV per platoon, and therefore only one tank per platoon can fire it per turn.) Smoke ammunition (no White Phosphorous) was introduced 1945.

90mm L53 M1A1,M2 - the early M1A1 was designed for an AA role and could not engage targets on a negative depression. The M2 was designed

could be fired by crew while still limbered. n was only issued

ving to acquire HVAP stocks

transportation. Maximum canister range is 20cm. 57mm L50 M1 - with the 37mm M3 being obsolete, a copy of the British 6

pdr AT gun was rushed into production with only minor modifications. Limited stocks of HE & APDS ammunition were available late 1944 from British sources with a US HE round being introduced in 1945. Can be towed by a jeep, with the crew in another vehicle. 75mm L31 M2 - the M2 gun was the longest barrel capable of being manufactured in 1941 and was therefore standard on all AFVs including the original M4 Sherman. 75mm L40 M3 - standard tank armament between 1942 to mid 1944. Smoke/White Phosphorous ammunition was introduced in June 1944. 76mm L52 3" M5 - includes both the heavy barrelled 3" AA gun and the latter 76mm M5 tank armament. The AT gun consisted of the 3" AA barrel & recoil mechanism mounted on a 1

for both ground & air targets andThe M2 was mounted in the M36 GMC. HVAP ammunitioofficially to TD units with regular tank units ha

on their own initiative. (So for TD units, each vehicle can purchase HVAP ammo at +43 PV per vehicle, and can each vehicle can fire it every turn. Tanks can only purchase HVAP ammo at +43 PV per platoon, and therefore only one tank per platoon can fire it per turn.) Howitzers/Field Guns

57mm L27 M18 Recoilless - using technology from British developments, the M18 was developed in 1943 & entered production in 1944. Designed to be fired from the shoulder or a .30" cal MG tripod. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and transportation. Crew size is two and one move is required for setup prior to firing.

75mm L28 M20 Recoilless - basically an enlarged version of the 57mm

ds for pack-horse transport or airdrops. No gun shield was

provided. Could be towed by a Jeep with additional transport required for the crew. Maximum canister range is 30cm.

75mm L34 M1917 - derivative of the famous French 75mm mle 1897 built under licence following WWI with various improvements.

105mm L22 M2A1 - standard medium artillery howitzer with a two wheeled split trail carriage. These guns in US service can also fire canister from 1944. Maximum canister range is 40cm. AA/Automatic Guns

M18 mounted on a .30" cal MG tripod. No shield was provided and the gun is treated as a heavy weapon for cartage and transportation. Crew size is four and two moves are required for setup prior to firing. 75mm L16 M1A1 Pack - developed as a mountain gun, it could be broken down into loa

105mm L16 M3 - developed in 1941 as an air-transportable howitzer. It used the shortened M2 barrel on a modified pack howitzer carriage. Cannot be man-handled by crew once setup because the wheels were raised prior to firing.

37mm L54 AA M1A2 - this gun compared unfavourably with the 40mm

Bofors, being considerably heavier and taking longer to get into action. This led to it being used in the M15 MGMC.

ganisation

US Europe Or

FANTRY REGIM

IN ENT • Radios were issued down to platoon level. • Entire regiment could be motorised in trucks if required.

ave: INFANTRY REGIMENT: 1942 - ‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can H Infantry Regiment

I 1 per Infa1 nfantry Regiment HQ ntry reg.

trucks) regiment support unit

3 Infantry Battalions - (2 platoons of 3 x 105mm howitzer, 3 trucks) regiment support unit 1 Cannon Company

1 AT Company (4 platoons of 3 x 57/76mm ATG, 4In B alion fantry att1 In ntry Battalion HQ

57mm ATG, 3 trucks) fa 1 per Infantry bat.

attach to a company nies -

1 AT Platoon (3 x3 Infantry Compa

108

battalion support unit H azooka teams) (don’t use if platoons allocated to co.)

1 Mortar Platoon 1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 US Rifle Team

1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 US Rifle Team

1 Heavy Weapons Company 1 eavy Weapons Co. HQ (as per infantry co. HQ, but no B

2 sections of 3 x 81mm Mortars 3 standard infantry squads with 1 Bazooka Team added to each 2 MG Platoons

2 MG Section (each same as Heavy Weapons MG Section) Infantry Company

ams, 2 – 3 US Rifle T ry co. 3 Infantry Platoons -

mpany support unit 1 Heavy Weapons Pl. HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio) (don’t use if sections allocated to pl.) 1 MG Section (2 MMG Teams, 2 US Rifle Teams)

rtar Teams, 3 US Rifle Teams)

1 Infantry Company HQ (2 Co. HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 1 – 3 Bazooka Te eams) 1 per Infant

1 Heavy Weapons Platoon co

1 Mortar Section (3 60mm MoInfantry Platoon

1 per Infantry pl. -

3 Infantry Sections 1944-‘45 (2 US LMG Team, 1 US Rifle Team) -

1 Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 US Rifle Team) 3 Infantry Sections 1941-‘43 (1 US LMG Team, 2 US Rifle Teams)

Historical Data (do not use in gameplay)

O, 2 men, with 1 SMG and SL rifles/carbines, radio)

fantry Company HQ Section - (2 Off, 2-5 NCO, 14-17 men, with 4 SMG and SL rifles/carbines, 1-3 Bazookas) eavy Weapons Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 1 NCO, 2 men, with 2 SMG and SL rifles/carbines, radio)

, 15 men, with 2 MMG, 2 SMG, SL rifles/carbines) Heavy Weapons Mortar ‘Section’ - (2 NCO, 18 men, with 3 x 60mm mortar, 16 SL rifles/carbines) Heavy Weapons Company HQ Section Heavy Weapons Mortar Platoon - (1 Off, 8-10 NCO, 50 men, with 6 x 81mm mortar, 3 bazooka, 10 SMG, 40 SL rifles/carbines, radio/s) Heavy Weapons MG Platoon - (1 Off, 6-8 NCO, 32 men, with 4 x MMG, 8 SMG, 24 SL rifles/carbines, radio/s)

AR D INFANTRY BATTALION

• Radios were issued down to section/squad level, that is, each halftrack had a radio. Non-HQ radios cannot be removed from the APC.

Infantry Platoon HQ Section - (1 Off, 2 NCInfantry Squad to 1943- (1 NCO, 10 men with 1 SMG, 1 LMG, and SL rifles/carbines) Infantry Squad 1944 – ’45 - (1 NCO, 10 men with 1 SMG, 2 LMG, and SL rifles/carbines) InHHeavy Weapons MMG Section - (1 NCO

MORE• Three of these were part of all armored divisions

ARMORED INFANTRY BATTALION

No. Your Force Can Have: Qty Unit Type A d Infantry Battalion rmore

ttalion HQ n/a

1 Weapon Company battalion support unit

halftrack, 3 with 81mm mortars, ie 3 sections plus HQ in 4th halftrack)

1 Gun Platoon (3 x M-7 Priest, 2 x halftrack)

1 Armored Infantry Ba3 Armored Infantry Companies -

1 Recon Platoon (1 halftrack, 5 jeeps with HMG, individually based) 1 Mortar Platoon (4 1 MG Platoon (3 MMG halftrack)

A d Infantry Company rmore. HQ Team + radio, 1 Bazooka Team, 2 US Rifle Teams, 1 halftrack, 1 jeep per Arm Inf Co.

3 Armored Infantry Platoons - am, 3 x 57mm ATG, 3 x halftrack) mpany support unit

1 Company HQ (1 Co )1

1 AT Platoon (1 x Jeep with Pl HQ Te coArmored Infantry Platoon 1 Armored Infantry Platoon HQ (1 Pl. HQ Team + radio ride with mortar or MG section) 1 per Arm Inf Pl. 3 Armored Infantry Section -

Total of 4 Teams, being 1 Bazooka Team, 0 – 1 SMG Team, 2 – 3 US Rifle Teams, 1 x Halftrack. 1 Mortar Section -

1 x 60mm Mortar Team, 1 Bazooka Team, 1 US Rifle Team, 1 x Halftrack. 1 MG Section 1 x M3 ‘MMG’ Halftrack. -

their passengers!

istorical Data (do not use in gameplay)

See notes for halftracks in the US Armor Charts notes – their heavy weapons can be removed and used by

H

Armored Infantry Platoon HQ - (1 Off, 1 NCO, 2 SMG, radio) Ride with mortar section m es, 1 Bazooka) Ride in a halftrack. m bines, 1 Bazooka, radio in halftrack)

Armored Inf. MG Section - (1 NCO, ? men, 2 x MMG, SL rifles/carbines, 1 Bazooka) Ride in a halftrack. o. HQ - (1 Off, ?, 1 Bazooka, radio) Ride in a halftrack. Also has a jeep.

LION • pendent formation attached to infantry and armored divisions.

Rad on or section/squad level. same type of Tank Destroyer.

Ar ored Infantry Squad - (1 NCO, 10 men with 1-4 SMG, and SL rifles/carbinAr ored Inf. Mortar Section - (1 NCO, ? men, 60mm mortar, SL rifles/car

Armored Infantry C

TANK DESTROYER BATTAInde

• ios were issued down to plato• Whole Battalion has the TANK DESTROYER BATTALION Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: T s yer Battalionank De tro

alion HQ n/a n pl.) per force

1 Recon Company battalion support unit 3 Recon Platoons 1 attached to ea TD Co. 1 Recon Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ + radio, in Jeep) 4 Recon Jeep with HMG + radios (jeeps carry 4 sections, which are: 2 x 60mm mortar, 2 x Bazooka Teams) 2 x M8 A/C

1 Tank Destroyer Batt3 Tank Destroy Company max 1 (+ its reco

Tank Destroyer Company * 1 Tank Destroyer Company HQ (1 jeep with HMG, 1 Jeep with Co.HQ + radio, 2 M20 A/C) 1 per TD Co.

Tank Destroyer Platoon - 3Tank Destroyer Platoon

eam with radio) 1 per TD Pl. 1 Security Section (2 x M20) 1 per TD Pl. 1 Platoon HQ (1 Jeep with HMG and carrying 1 Platoon HQ T

109

2 Gun Section (2 x M10/18/36) - * Note, although the Tank Destroyer company has infantry HQs and jeeps at company and platoon level, the unit still counts as being an

purposes. TANK BATTALION

dependently or three per armored division. RadMed 1944-’45 1 - 3 M4s per Medium tank platoon could have ximum of 2 Jumbo’s per company.

AFV unit for morale

• Either used in• ios were issued down to platoon or section/squad level. • ium tanks were M3 or M4. From 76mm guns. Ma• Light tanks were M5 or M24. TANK BATTALION Qt Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: y Tank Battalion 1 Tank Battalion HQ (1 x halftrack) n/a 1 Tank Battalion HQ Company 1 per tank bat.

Recon Platoon (1 halftrack, 5 jeeps with HMG) battalion support unit 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortars, 1 x halftrack) battalion support unit

x M4 105mm) battalion support unit

-

1 1 Assault Gun Platoon (33 Medium Tank Company - 1 Light Tank Company Tank Company

y HQ (2 tanks) From late 1944, add 1 M4 105mm per tank co. 3 Tank Platoons (5 tanks) - 1 Tank Compan 1

VAL N • One was attached to each armored division or used independently.

CA RY RECON SQUADRO

• Radios were issued down to section/squad level. CAVALRY RECON SQ

ve: UADRON

Qt Unit Type No. Your Force Can Hay Cavalry Recon Squadron (equivalent to a battalion)

Q n/a

Assault Gun Troop (4 platoons each with 2 x M8 HMG) squadron support unit

1 Cavalry Recon H3 Recon Troops - 1 Light Tank Company (as in Tank Battalion) - 1Cavalry Recon Troop (equivalent to a comp1 Recon Troop HQ (2 x M8, 3 jeep

any) s, 1 Co HQ Team + radio, 1 MMG, 1 US Rifle Team) 1 per Cav Rec. Troop

3 Recon Platoons - Cavalry Recon Platoon 1 Armored Car Section (3 x M8) One M8 is Platoon HQ -

(3 squads, each with 2 jeeps, carrying 1 MMG and 1 60mm mortar + radi1 Scout Section o) - PARACHUTE BATTALION: 1944 - ‘45 • Radios were issued down to platoon/squad level. PA HUTE BATTALION: 1944 - ‘45 RACQty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Pa te Battalion rachu1 Parachute Battalion HQ n/a 3 Parachute Companies - Parachute Company

Parachute Company HQ (2 Co1 mpany HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 4 – 6 US Rifle Teams) 1 per Parachute co. - 3 Parachute Platoons

Parachute Platoon 1 Parachute Platoon HQ (2 Platoon HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 1 Bazooka Team) 3 Sections (3 Teams in total, being 1 – 2 US LMG Teams, 0 – 1 US Rifle Team, 1 SMG Team)

1 per Parachute pl. -

1 Mortar Squad (1 x 60mm mortar) Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) Parachute PlatoonParachute Squad -

HQ Section - (2 Off, 5 men, with 1-2 SMG, 1-2 LMG and carbines, 1 bazooka, radio) (1 NCO, 11 men with 1-2 LMG, 2-4 SMG, and carbines)

Parachute Company HQ Section - (2 Off, 2-6 NCO, 14-25 men, with 4-8 SMG and SL rifles/carbines)

ARTILLERY Furt

• See further artillery restrictions.

• her gun battalions were held at corps level, which had 155mm and 204mm artillery.

ARTILLERY Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: Infantry Division Artillery Regiment 4 Light Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 105mm guns, all motorised) see artillery restrictions 1 Medium Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 4 x 155mm guns, all motorised) see artillery restrictions Armored Division Artillery Regiment 3 Artillery Battalion (3 batteries, each with 6 x M-7 Priest) see artillery restrictions

110

The pacific theatre was a completely different kettle of fish compared with Europe. The enemy was composed of fanatics, while the terrain was often dense and impassible, making supply difficult.This required a unique fighting force - the US Marine Corps. Unlike marine forces of other nations, who were restricted to reconnaisance or large raiding parties, the USMC was established to assault and overwhelm any enemy defended position. By the end of the war, the USMC was one of the toughest arms possesed by the US.

US Pacific Equipment Lists

US PACIFIC

Also active in the Pacific was the army under MacArthur. These troops were green and ill equipped or trained for jungle warfare and suffered much as a result. The US command also lacked experience, causing many set backs initially, and giving the Japanese an early upper hand. Pacific forces were not equipped as those in Europe. Tank warfare was rare and infantry were the primary arm of assault.

PV AFV DATES PROD FR 144 M3 41-42 5811 4 132 M3A1 42-44 4621 3 119 M3A1 'Satan' 44-45 80 5 136 M5A1 44-45 8884 2 266 M3 'Lee' Late 43 6258 1 223 M4 (75) 43-45 16476 0 227 M4 (105) 44-45 1641 4 226 M4A2 42-45 ? 1 225 M4A3 (75) 44-45 4761 2

+26 M4 Flamethrower Kit 44-45 ? 1

154 M8 HMC 44-45 1778 5

241 M10 GMC 'Wolverine' 43-45 150 4

314 M3 GMC 41-45 2202 4

102 LVT(A) 1 44-45 509 4 136 LVT(A) 4 44-45 1890 4

89 M20 Scout Car 44-45 3791 5

83 LVT4 44-45 8348 2

239 M4A3 HVSS (105) 44-45 3036 4 155 M4 POA-CWS 75-HI 45 54 5

189 M7 HMC 'Priest' 44-45 3490 3

215 M18 GMC 'Hellcat' 45 50 6

104 M15 MGMC 45 2332 6 88 M16 MGMC 45 ? 6 82 M4A1 Mortar Carrier 44-45 600 6

94 M8 'Greyhound' 44-45 8523 5 60 M3A1 Scout Car 41-45 21000 4

70 M2 Half track 41-45 11415 4 71 M3A1 Half track 44-45 17004 5

PV GUNS DATES PROD FR

40 57mm L27 M18 RR 45 100 6

151 90mm L53 M1A1/M2 43-45 7381 6

68 75mm L34 M1917 41-42 4236 4 93 105mm L16 M3 44-45 2580 3 91 105mm L22 M2Al 42-45 8356 1

44 40mm L56 Bofors AA 43-45 34116 4

38 37mm L54 M3A1 41-45 18700 1

73 57mm L45 M1 44-45 16000 3

55 75mm L28 M20 RR 45 ? 7 113 76mm L52 M5 41-42 800 5

51 75mm L16 M1A1 Pack 43-45 5000 2

39 37mm L54 M1A1 41-45 7278 4 60 HMG Quad AA 43-45 ? 5

PV ARTILLERY DATES PROD FR 80 75mm (per pair) 41-45 - 2 180 105mm (per pair) 42-45 - 1 300 155mm (per pair) 41-45 - 4 400 203mm (per pair) 44-45 - 7 PV MORTARS DATES PROD FR 15 60mm 41-45 75000 0 45 81mm 41-45 30000 2 70 107mm 43-45 8500 5 180 155mm 44-55 244 7 PV TRANSPORT DATES PROD FR see Motorcycle 41-45 ? 4

27 DUKW 43-45 21000 3

soft Jeep 41-45 640000 0 skin Jeep 'GPA' 43-45 6000 5 chart Field Car 41-45 ? 3 Light Truck 41-45 ? 3 Medium Truck 41-45 ? 0 Heavy Truck 41-45 ? 5

PV INFANTRY DATES PROD FR 7 Rifle Team 41-45 ? 1 10 US Rifle Team 43-45 ? 1 10 SMG Team 41-45 ? 1 13 Assault Rifle Team 45 ? 1 13 LMG Team (Mag fed) 41-45 ? 1 14 US LMG Team (Mag) 43-45 ? 1 15 LMG Team (Belt fed) 43-45 ? 2 26 MMG 41-45 ? 1 30 HMG 42-45 ? 1 6 AP Rifle Grenade 43-45 ? 3 9 AT Rifle Grenade Late 43-45 ? 3 20 Bazooka Team 43-45 ? 3 15 Flamethrower Team 42-45 ? 1 5ea Demolition Charge 42-45 ? 1 page39 AP Mine 41-45 ? 1 page39 AT Mine 42-45 ? 4 12 Mine Detector 42-45 ? 3 30 FAO 41-45 ? 1 20 Radio 41-45 ? 1 30 FAC 42-45 ? 1 US PACIFIC EQUIPMENT NOTES - 37mm, 75mm,and 105mm guns are capable of firing canister rounds, see 'Canister Rounds'. - 40mm L48 AA, see British Guns. - M4 Flamethrower Kit, see Flamethrower rules. - US and Marine forces cannot employ horse teams or cavalry although single pack horse are allowed. - Artillery of 75mm, 105mm, 155mm and all Mortars can fire smoke rounds indirectly.

US Pacific Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

Unit/s Troop Class Morale Rating Point Value Modification Notes Offboard Artillery As unit class As unit rating +25% or x 1.25 Marines Veteran Elite +50% or x 1.5 Army Conscript Reliable -25% or x 0.75 * you need to modify all PVs of your force according to these compulsory Troop Class and Morale Rating modifiers

Use USA Europe Softskin, Motorised Guns, Armor and Gun Charts.

US Pacific Organisation US MARINE BATTALION ‘D’ Series 1941-‘42 • Radios were issued down to platoon level. • Three battalions made up a regiment. • Marines were still using WW1 style bolt action rifles. US MARINE BATTALION 1941-‘42 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: US Marine Battalion 1 US Marine Battalion HQ n/a 3 US Marine Company - 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x 81mm mortar) battalion support unit 3 MG Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x MMG) battalion support unit 1 AT/AA Platoon (6 x 37mm AT Gun) battalion support unit US Marine Company 1 US Marine Company HQ (1-3 Co. HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 3-6 Rifle Teams) 1 per marine co. 3 US Marine Platoon - 1 Weapons Platoon (1 mortar section with 2 x 60mm mortar, 1 MG Section with 2 x MMG) company support unit US Marine Platoon 1 US Marine Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 Rifle Team) 1 per marine pl. 3 US Marine Section (1 LMG Team, 2 Rifle Teams) - 1 US Marine Automatic Rifle Section (2 LMG Teams) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) US Marine Section – (1 NCO,8 men with 1 LMG, 1 SMG and bolt action! rifles)

111

• Marines were now issued with sufficient M1 Garrand self loading rifles.

US Marine Automatic Rifle Section – (1 NCO,5 men with 2 LMG and bolt action rifles) US MARINE BATTALION ‘E’ Series 1943 • Radios were issued down to platoon level. • Three battalions made up a regiment.

US MARINE BATTALION 1943 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: US Marine Battalion 1 US Marine Battalion HQ n/a 3 US Marine Company - 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, both with 2 x 60mm mortars OR 2 x 81mm mortar) battalion support unit US Marine Company 1 US Marine Company HQ (1-3 Co. HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 3-6 US Rifle Teams, 1 jeep) 1 per marine co. 3 US Marine Platoon - 1 MG Platoon (3 MG Sections, each with 6 x MMG OR 6 x HMG) company support unit 1 Mortar section (3 sections, each with 1 x 60mm mortar) company support unit US Marine Platoon 1 US Marine Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 Bazooka Team) 1 per marine pl. 3 US Marine Section (2 US LMG Teams, 1 US Rifle Team) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) US Marine Section – (1 NCO, 11 men with 2 LMG and carbines/rifles) US MARINE BATTALION 1944-‘45 • Radios were issued down to platoon level. • Three battalions made up a regiment. US MARINE BATTALION 1944-‘45 Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: US Marine Battalion 1 US Marine Battalion HQ n/a 3 US Marine Company - 1 Mortar Platoon (2 sections, each with 2 x 81mm mortar) battalion support unit US Marine Company 1 US Marine Company HQ (1-3 Co. HQ Teams, 1 with radio, 3-6 US Rifle Teams) 1 per marine co. 3-4 US Marine Platoon - 1 Weapons Platoon (1 mortar section with 4 x 60mm mortar, 1 MG Section with 6 x MMG/HMG) company support unit US Marine Platoon 1 US Marine Platoon HQ (1 Platoon HQ Team with radio, 1 Bazooka Team) 1 per marine pl. 3 US Marine Section (3 US LMG Teams, 0 – 1 Flamethrower Team) - Historical Data (do not use in gameplay) US Marine Section – (1 NCO,12 men with 3 LMG and rifles/carbines) US Marine Plat. HQ - (1 Off, 2 NCO, 4 men with 1-3 SMG and rifles, 1 Bazooka or flamethrower.) US MARINE TANK BATTALION 1943-‘45 • Either used independently or three per armored division. • Radios were issued down to platoon or section/squad level. • Medium tanks were M3 or M4. From 1944-’45 1 - 3 M4s per Medium tank platoon could have 76mm guns. Maximum of 2 Jumbo’s per company. • Light tanks were M5 or M24. US MARINE TANK BATTALION Qty Unit Type No. Your Force Can Have: US Marine Tank Battalion 1 Tank Battalion HQ (1 x halftrack) n/a 1 Tank Battalion HQ Company 1 per tank bat. 1 Recon Platoon (1 halftrack, 5 jeeps with HMG) battalion support unit 1 Mortar Platoon (3 sections, each with 1 x 81mm mortar, 1 x halftrack) battalion support unit 1 Assault Gun Platoon (3 x M4 105mm) battalion support unit 3 Medium Tank Company - 1 Light Tank Company - US Marine Medium Tank Company 1 Tank Company HQ (2 tanks) From late 1944, add 1 M4 105mm 1 per tank co. 4 Tank Platoons (5 tanks) - US Marine Light Tank Company 1 Tank Company HQ (2 tanks) 1 per tank co. 2 Tank Platoons (5 tanks) - 1 Tank Platoon (5 tanks with flamethrowers) - US MARINE AMPHIBIAN BATTALION Has 3 platoons, each with 5 LVT, plus Company HQ with 3 LVT. A battalion had 4-5 companies plus a battalion HQ (3 LVT). Refer to armor charts to see how many teams these vehicles can carry. US MARINE ARTILLERY Use US European organisation. US PACIFIC ARMY UNITS Use US European organisation, but note that these units are all Reliable Conscripts!

112

Ad-hoc Company HQ for Reliable Veterans

82

Soviet Tank Company for Reliable Conscripts

1 293

1

1

303

24.75

2 0.75

Squad (1 SMG Team, 1 LMG Team - both have Molotovs)

0.75

Sample Force Lists Here are two sample force lists for a 3,000 point encounter game, between Soviet vs German clash in 1945. Two Reliable Conscript Soviet companies take on one Reliable Veteran German company. German 3,000 Point Force, 1945, Eastern Front

German Ad-hoc Company, Eastern Front, 1945 3,000 Point Force Modifier

1 UNIT PV Extension 2 Tiger I 299 598 1.25 747.5 2 Extra PV for above being Co. HQ AFVs 20 40 1.25 50

1 Heavy Tank Platoon 1 Tiger I Platoon HQ + 10 PV 309 309 1.25 386.25 3 Tiger I 299 897 1.25 1121.25

1 Panzer Grenadier Platoon 1 Pz Gr Platoon HQ with radio 43 43 1.25 53.75 1 Steyr 1500A 13 13 1.25 16.25 3 PzGr Squad (2 LMG mag Team, 1 with Pzrfaust 100) 42 126 1.25 157.5 3 Steyr 1500A 13 39 1.25 48.75 1 Pz Gr Hvy Wpns AA Section 1 Sd Kfz 251/17 59 59 1.25 73.75

1 Sd Kfz 251/9 SP Support Platoon 1 Sd Kfz 251/9 Platoon HQ 92 92 1.25 115 2 Sd Kfz 251/9 164 1.25 205

2975

Soviet 3,000 Point Force, 1945, Eastern Front Modifier

UNIT PV Extension 1 Tank Company HQ T-34/85 Early 293 0.75 219.75 1 Extra PV for above being Co. HQ AFVs 20 20 0.75 15 Tank Company Platoon

1 T-34/85 Early Platoon HQ + 1o PV 303 303 0.75 227.25 2 T-34/85 Early 293 586 0.75 439.5

1 Tank Company Platoon T-34/85 Early Platoon HQ + 1o PV 303 303 0.75 227.25 2 T-34/85 Early 293 586 0.75 439.5

1 Tank Company Platoon 1 T-34/85 Early Platoon HQ + 1o PV 303 0.75 227.25 2 T-34/85 Early 293 586 0.75 439.5

Sub Machine Gun Company 1 Sub Machine Gun Company HQ 1 1 Company HQ Team 34 34 0.75 25.5

1 Sub Machine Gun Platoon 1 SMG Squad (1 LMG Team as Pl HQ + 10 PV, 1 SMG Team) 33 33 0.75 SMG Squad (1 SMG Team, 1 LMG Team - both have Molotovs) 29 58 43.5

1 Sub Machine Gun Platoon 1 SMG Squad (1 LMG Team as Pl HQ + 10 PV, 1 SMG Team) 33 33 0.75 24.75 2 SMG 29 58 0.75 43.5

1 Sub Machine Gun Platoon 1 SMG Squad (1 LMG Team as Pl HQ + 10 PV, 1 SMG Team) 36 36 0.75 27 2 SMG Squad (1 SMG Team, 1 LMG Team - both have Molotovs) 29 58 43.5

1 Offboard Tank Division SP Artillery Battery 2 152mm SP Battery (per pair of SP Guns) 300 600 0.85 510 + 2 x FAO in Jeeps, Bat Fire Ctrl. 104 104 0.75 78 3055

Makers of magnificent pre-painted scenery in all scales, micro, 15mm & 20mm, and 28mm.

Visit their website to check prices, photos, new releases http://www.miniatureworldmaker.com.au/

Panzerfaust Armored Fist Game Board Rivers A 180cm x 120cm board set up for Panzerfaust, and covered with Wide River Pack, WR15/1, just one of a huge range of rivers, with excellent Miniature World Maker terrain. Includes MWM’s road, a large variety of river and river bank widths! Check out their website river, two village scenes, and several different types of fields. for photos.

Villages Item C81d, a village scene perfect for the Russian front, in suitable for 15mm and 20mm.The buildings can be removed, allowing for easy house to house combat!

Roads Item RDT01, a Dirt Road Pack containing all of the above pieces. One example of dozens of different roads made by MWM, including cobblestone roads, dirt roads, and bitumen roads, with a choice of different widths.

Fields Item C57a, one of many stunning fields made by Miniature World Maker. Don’t let your games of Panzerfaust Armored Fist have large open areas – populate them with fields!

Fortifications Miniature World Maker also make a wide range of field fortifications, such as bunkers, gunpits, dragon’s teeth, sandbag entrenchments, trenches, and so on.

113

114

QUICK REFERENCE CHARTS Belgium

PV BELGUIM Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 FNH M12 Motorcycle x 3 - A 50 17 1 - 25 FN63C Heavy Truck 4x2 D 35 9 9 C 21 FN63C Heavy Truck 4x4 D 30 13 6 D 14 Vickers-Armstrong Lt Tractor trk A 16 10 2 A BELGUIM Tanks PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP

67 T-13 I 47 L32,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 - 40 18 C 5 73 T-13 II 47 L32,LMG 3 1 1 1 1 - 37 17 C 5 44 T-15 HMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 40 16 C 4 97 AGC I 47 L32,HMG 3 1 1 3 2 2 25 13 C 6 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; No AFVs equipped One Man Turrets; T-15 Belg uns PV Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

ium G

16 47mm L15 FRC A (11) (9) (7) (5) 3 No Gun Shld 3 3 2 2 33 47mm L32 SA-FRC A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 40 75mm L24 m1934 B (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk - - - - - - - - 51 75mm L30 TR/Gp B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk,Horse dr 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 2 61 75mm L37 GP I/II B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk,Horse dr 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 3 31 76mm L9 FRC A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 5 Smk, Nog/sh - - - - - - 84 105mm L22 GP C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk,Horse dr - - - - - - - - - 23 20mm L60 AA Madsen A (12) (11) (10) (7) 1 No Gun Shld 3 2 2 2

Britain

PV BRITAIN Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Matchless, Velocette Motorcycle x 3 - A 55 19 1 - 8 Norton CS8, BSA M20 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 50 13 1 - 6 Humber Sniper, Morris 10HP Light Car 4x2 B 46 14 1 - 11 Morris PU Light 8cwt Truck 4x4 B 50 20 2 A 10 Morris CS8, Bedford MW Light 15cwt Truck 4x2 C 46 14 2 B 12 Quad-Ant, Morris C8/GS Light 15cwt Truck 4x4 C 42 18 2 B 14 Bedford OX, Austin K30 Light 30cwt Truck 4x2 C 45 14 4 B 14 Morris C8, Chevrolet C30 Light 30cwt Truck 4x4 C 42 17 4 B 16 Morris CD, CDF, CD/SW Medium 30cwt Trck 6x4 C 37 14 4 B 26 Bedford OY, Austin K3 Medium 3ton Truck 4x2 C 40 12 10 C 28 Bedford QL, AEC Matador Medium 3ton Truck 4x4 C 38 15 10 C 13 Quad FAT Medium Truck 4x4 C 42 18 2 C 21 Scammell Recovery/Tractor Heavy Truck 6x4 D 36 17 5 D 19 Terrapin Mk1 Amphib. Truck 8x8 D 18 12 5 - 17 Loyd/Windsor Carrier Tractor trk B 30 18 2 B PV BRITAI Descri Drive Size Speed Armament Rd C/C

N / USA Mot. Guns ption

58 SP, 4x4 Bofors 4 30cwt truck 4x4 C 42 17 40mm L48 0mm AA AA 46 37mm M6 GMC Light AT SP 4x4 B 50 20 37mm L54 BRITAIN Armor PV TANK TYPE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 95 A9 40 L50,3LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 15 C 5 76 A9 CS 94 L15,3LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 15 C 9 99 A10 40 L50,2LMG 3 1 1 3 1 1 16 8 C 5 81 A10 CS 94 L15,2LMG 3 1 1 3 1 1 16 8 C 9 91 A13 I Cruiser 40 L50,2LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 18 C 5 115 A13 II Cruiser 40 L50,2LMG 3 1 1 3 3 1 30 14 C 5 96 A13 II CS Cruiser 94 L15,2LMG 3 1 1 3 3 1 30 14 C 9 71 A11 Matilda I MMG 7 3 3 4 2 2 9 6 B 4 167 A12 Matilda II 40 L50,LMG 9 7 7 8 7 7 15 8 C 5 171 A12 Matilda II CS 76 L25,LMG 9 7 7 8 7 7 15 8 C 7 156 A12 Matilda II FROG F/thr,LMG 9 7 7 8 7 7 15 8 C 7 42 Light Tank Mk I-V MMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 33 18 C 4 78 Light Tank Mk VI-VIC HMG,LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 36 20 C 3 68 Light Tank Mk VI AA 4*LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 36 20 C 4 97 Tetrach 40 L50,LMG 1 1 1 3 3 1 40 26 C 7 102 Tetrach CS 76 L25,LMG 1 1 1 3 3 1 40 26 C 9 135 Crusader I 40 L50,2LMG 6 5 3 4 2 2 27 17 C 5 139 Crusader I CS 76 L25,2LMG 6 5 3 4 2 2 27 17 C 7 144 Crusader II 40 L50,LMG 7 5 3 5 4 2 27 17 C 5 148 Crusader II CS 76 L25,LMG 7 5 3 5 4 2 27 17 C 7 180 Crusader III 57 L45,LMG 7 5 3 5 4 2 27 17 C 7 197 Centaur IV 95 L22,2LMG 8 4 2 8 7 7 27 16 C 9 226 Cromwell IV 75 L40,2LMG 8 4 2 8 7 7 32 20 C 7 204 Cromwell VI 95 L22,2LMG 8 4 2 8 7 7 32 20 C 9 240 Cromwell VII 75 L40,2LMG 10 5 2 10 7 7 32 18 C 7 216 Cromwell VIII 95 L22,2LMG 10 5 2 10 7 7 32 18 C 9 273 Firefly 76 L55,LMG 7 4 4 9 5 5 26 16 C 7 272 Challenger 76 L55,LMG 9 4 2 8 6 3 30 15 C 6 266 Comet 77 L49,2LMG 8 4 3 10 8 7 33 18 C 7 151 Valentine I-VII 40 L50,LMG 7 6 6 7 6 6 15 8 C 6 191 Valentine IX-X 57 L45,LMG 7 6 6 7 6 6 15 8 C 7 209 Valentine XI 75 L40,LMG 7 6 6 7 6 6 15 8 C 8 214 Churchill I 40L50,76L25,LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 5 216 Churchill III-VI 57 L45,2LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 6 212 Churchill V 95 L22,2LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 9 235 Churchill NA75 & VI 75 L40,2*LMG 9 8 5 9 8 5 17 10 C 7 287 Churchill VII 75 L40,2*LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 7 263 Churchill VIII 95 L22,2*LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 9 246 Churchill AVRE 290 L4,2*LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 12 277 Churchill Crocodile 75L40,FThr,LMG 15 10 6 15 10 10 14 8 C 7 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 259 Achilles 76 L55,HMG 6 3 3 8 3 3 30 20 C 6 144 Bishop 88 L28 7 6 6 5 3 3 15 8 C 7 214 Archer 76 L55 7 5 5 2 2 2 20 10 C 6 135 Sexton 88 L28 7 4 4 3 2 1 28 18 C 6 98 Deacon 4x4 57 L45 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 12 C 5 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 127 AEC I 4x4 40 L50,LMG 4 4 2 7 6 6 40 15 C 6 166 AEC II 4x4 57 L45,LMG 5 5 3 5 4 4 39 14 C 7

184 AEC III 4x4 75 L40,LMG 5 5 3 5 4 4 38 14 C 8 103 Staghound I 4x4 37 L54,LMG 3 2 1 3 3 3 55 18 C 5 108 Staghound II 4x4 76 L25,LMG 3 2 1 3 3 3 55 18 C 7 174 Staghound III 4x4 75 L40,LMG 4 2 1 5 4 4 55 18 C 8 86 Staghound AA 4x4 2*HMG 4 2 1 2 2 2 55 20 C 4 73 Humber II-III 4x4 HMG,LMG 1 1 1 2 2 2 48 16 C 3 95 Humber IV 4x4 37 L54,LMG 2 1 1 3 3 3 45 15 C 5 45 Humber Scout Car 4x4 LMG (Bren) 1 1 1 1 1 1 55 18 B 2 44 Humber/Otter LRC 4x4 LMG (Bren) 1 1 1 1 1 1 47 14 C 3 57 Daimler Scout Car 4x4 LMG (Bren) 3 1 1 3 1 1 57 18 B 2 98 Daimler I-III 4x4 40 L50,LMG 3 1 1 3 3 1 50 16 C 7 57 Lynx Scout Car 4x4 LMG (Bren) 3 1 1 3 1 1 52 18 B 2 52 Morris Cs9/LAC 4x2 Boys ATR,Bren 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 10 C 2 52 Rolls Royce 1924 4x2 Boys ATR,Bren 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 10 C 2 55 Marmon Herr'ton I-III 4x4 Boys ATR,Bren 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 2 63 Marmon Herr'ton IIIa 4x4 20 L65 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 3 65 Marmon Herr'ton IIIb 4x4 47 L32 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 5 40 Carrier `ATR' Boys AT Rifle 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 1 38 Carrier `LMG' LMG (Bren) 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 1 49 Carrier `MMG' MMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 45 Carrier 2" Mortar 2" Mortar 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B - 1 55 Carrier Wasp F/Thr 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 18 B 2 42 IP Carrier LMG (Bren) 2 1 1 2 1 1 54 17 C 2 1 81 IP Carrier 3" Mortar 3" mortar 2 1 1 2 1 1 54 17 C - 86 Stuart Kangaroo/Recce LMG 5 3 3 5 3 3 40 22 B 2 1 112 Priest Kangaroo HMG 7 2 2 6 2 2 30 20 C 2 6 114 Ram Kangaroo LMG 8 4 4 8 4 4 30 20 C 3 4 82 Buffalo Mk II 20 L85,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 14 D 3 4 85 Buffalo Mk IV 20 L85,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 12 D 3 6 Smoke Dischargers; All AFVs, except AEC Deacon, Achilles, Stuart Recce, Ram/Priest Kangaroo, Bishop, Sexton, Marmon Herrington AC, IP Carrier and AA AFVs. Radios; All AFVs, except AEC Deacon, Matilda I, Light Tank MkI-V and all Carriers. One Man Turrets; Light Tank MkI-V, Matilda I. BRITAIN Range in cm PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 36 40mm L50 2 pdr A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) to-hit base 3 HE 1943+ 6 6 5 5 4 4 penetration +9pg -> 2 pdr Lt John Adapt. (11) (10) (8) (6) (5) 3 no HE 9 8 7 6 4 73 57mm L45 6 pdr B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 HE 1943+ 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 5 5 +10pp APDS ammunition (11) (11) (10) (9) (7) (6) (6) (5) 4 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 90 75m 1) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 10 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 6 6

m L40 Mk V-VA * (1 * Smk,WP ‘44+

40 76mm L25 3” MI-IIA * (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) * Smk - - - - - - - - 143 76mm L55 17 pdr B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 +58pp APDS ammunition (11) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) (7) (6) 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 17 119 77mm L49 Mk II * (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) * 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 7 18 94mm L15 3.7” * (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) * Smk ONLY - - - - - 69 95mm L22 Mk I * (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) * Smk,WP - - - - - - - - -> 95mm L22 Mk I HEAT (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 57 84mm L29 18 pdr B (10) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) 6 Smk, WP 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 63 88mm L28 25 pdr B (10) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) 6 Smk 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 44 88mm L15 25 pdr short (No gnsld) B (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 6 Smk - - - - - - - 50 94m 0) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) m L13 3.7” B (1 7 Smk, WP - - - - - - - +0pg -> 94mm L13 3.7” HEAT 1943+ (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 6 6 6 6 6 63 114mm L16 4.5” C (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 8 Smk,WP - - - - - - - 54 290mm L4 Petard * (10) (8) (6) * - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 25 20mm L85 AA A (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) 1 3 3 2 2 2 33 20mm L85 AA Dual * (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) * 3 3 2 2 2 44 40mm L56 AA Bofors B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 2 6 5 5 4 4 3

Finland Finla d Armor PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP

n

47 Vickers 6ton m1939 37 L22,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 10 C 6 66 Vickers 6ton m194 37 L45,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 10 C 6 116 BT 42 114 L16 3 1 1 4 4 2 28 18 C 10

0

Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped Radios; No AFVs equipped One Man Turrets; none Rumania POLISH Armor PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 83 LT-34 37 L45,2LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 21 10 C 6 39 R-1 2 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 28 15 B 3 79 S-Id 47 L43, LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 28 15 B 6 78 T-3D 37 L45,LMG 3 1 1 3 1 1 19 12 B 6 127 TACAM R-2 76 L41,LMG 3 2 2 1 1 - 20 10 C 7 136 TACAM T60 76 L41,LMG 6 2 2 1 1 - 24 12 C 7 93 R35/45 45 L46,LMG 4 4 4 5 5 5 13 6 B 7

Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; TACAM R-2, TACAM T60. Only platoon/company command LT-34 were radio equipped. One Man Turrets; R-1, R35/45. RUM PV Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

ANIA

27 47mm L39 Bohler A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 No gun shield 5 5 4 4 4 3 55 75/76mm L30 Krupps B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 3 3 61 105 ) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 (Hor - - - - - - -

mm L14 M12/16 C (9 se-dawn)

115

Germany PV GERMANY Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 BMW R35, NSU 251 OSL Motorcycle x 2 - A 60 23 1 - 8 BMW R75, Zundapp KS750 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 55 18 1 or 2 * - 7 NSU Kettengrad Lt Semi-Track ht A 40 25 1 A 7 VW Kubelwagen Typ 82 Light Car 4x2 B 55 18 1 - 10 VW Schwimmwagen Typ 166 Lt Amphibious Car 4x4 B 55 18 1 - 6 Mercedes 170V, BMW 303 Light Car 4x2 B 50 13 1 - 8 le E-Pkw (Stowewer 40) Jeep etc 4x4 4x4 B 55 20 1 A 7 Adler 3Gd, Mercedes 830 Medium Car 4x2 B 55 15 1 A 9 AU/Horch, Opel Efm Medium Car 4x4 B 55 20 1 A 13 Horch 40, Steyr 1500A Heavy Car 4x4 B 50 22 3 B 13 Krupp L2H43, Steyr 640 Light Truck 6x4 B 46 18 2 B 22 Opel Blitz, Ford G917T Medium Truck 4x2 C 50 13 7 C 24 Opel Blitz, Mercedes-Benz Medium Truck 4x4 C 50 18 7 C 28 Hnschel 33G1, Krpp L3H163 Medium Truck 6x4 D 45 16 9 C 31 Bussing-NAG, Saurer BT Heavy Truck 4x2 D 40 10 11 D 34 Bussing-NAG 4500A (4 ton) Heavy Truck 4x4 D 45 19 11 D 37 Tatra, Skoda (4 ton) Heavy Truck 6x6 D 40 19 12 D 18 Sdkfz 10 Demag (1t) Light Halftrack ht B 40 25 2 B 19 Sdkfz 11 Hanomag (3t) Light Halftrack ht C 37 23 3 C 20 Sdkfz 6 & 7 (5t & 8t) Medium Halftrack ht D 32 21 4 D 19 Sdkfz 8 & 9 (12t & 18t) Heavy Halftrack ht D 30 19 4 D 26 Mautlier Opel/Ford (2t) Light Halftrack ht C 24 15 7 C 16 Raupenscheppler-Ost Lt Tractor trk C 12 8 3 B * German motorcycle sidecar bases can carry either 2 LMG (belt) Teams, 1 LMG (belt) Team & 1 HQ Team, or

r type of team. 1 of any othe PV GERM Descri Drive Size Speed Armament Rd C/C

ANY Motorised Guns ption

26 Kfz4 (le E-Pkw) Light AA Car 4x4 B 50 20 2 x LMG 36 Sdkfz 10/4 Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 20mm L55 AA 41 Sdkfz 10/4 (armored) Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 20mm L55 AA 59 Sfkfz 7/1 Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 20mm L55 Quad 63 Sfkfz 7/1 (armored) Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 20mm L55 Quad 65 Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 37mm L60 AA 69 Sdkfz 7/2 & 6/2 (armored) Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 37mm L60 AA 53 3.7cm PaK35/36 auf Zgkw 1t Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 37mm L45 93 5cm PaK38 auf Zgkw 1t Lt AA H/track ht B 40 25 50mm L60 147 7.62cm FK36(r) Sf Zgkw 5t Md AA H/track ht D 32 21 76mm L51 29 2cm FlaK30 auf m E-Pkw Light AA Car 4x4 B 50 22 20mm L55 AA 55 2cm Flakveirling s Lkw 4.5t Md AA Truck 4x4 D 45 19 20mm L55 Quad 150 7.5cm PaK40/4 Rpenschpplr Md AT tractor trk C 12 8 75mm L46 169 8.8cm FlaK 18(Sf) Zgkw 12t Heavy AT h/track ht D 30 19 88mm L56 GERMANY Armor PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 49 Pz I 2 LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 25 12 B 4 90 Pz I Ausf C HMG,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 50 25 C 4 123 Pz I Ausf F 2 LMG 9 5 5 9 5 5 15 8 C 4 50 Pz Bef Wg I LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 25 12 C 3 80 Pz II Ausf A-C 20 L55,LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 25 14 C 5 85 Pz II Ausf D-E 20 L55,LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 34 16 C 5 95 Pz II Ausf F 20 L55,LMG 4 2 2 3 2 2 25 14 C 5 141 Pz II Ausf J 20 L55,LMG 8 5 5 9 5 5 19 9 C 4 82 Pz II (Flamm) 2*F/Thr,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 35 15 C 5 95 Pz II Ausf L 'Lynx' 20 L55,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 37 24 C 4 137 Pz II Ausf L (Late) 50 L60,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 35 22 C 7 102 Pz 35(t) 37 L45,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 22 13 C 6 103 Pz 38(t) Ausf A-D 37 L45,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 26 14 C 6 115 Pz 38(t) Ausf E-G 37 L45,2LMG 5 2 2 5 2 2 25 12 C 6 101 Pz III Ausf A-D 37 L45,3LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 25 13 C 5 113 Pz III Ausf E-F 37 L45,3LMG 3 3 2 3 3 3 25 14 C 5 125 Pz III Ausf G 50 L42,2LMG 3 3 3 4 3 3 25 14 C 6 141 Pz III Ausf H-J 50 L42,2LMG 5 3 5 6 3 3 25 14 C 6 163 Pz III Ausf J/1 50 L60,2LMG 5 3 5 6 3 3 25 14 C 6 173 Pz III Ausf L-M 50 L60,2LMG 6 3 5 8 3 3 25 14 C 6 148 Pz III Ausf N 75 L24,2LMG 6 3 5 7 3 3 25 14 C 7 98 Pz III (Flamm) F/Thr,LMG 7 3 5 8 3 3 25 14 C 4 114 Pz IV Ausf A-D 75 L24,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 25 12 C 7 134 Pz IV Ausf E-F 75 L24,2LMG 5 3 2 5 3 3 25 14 C 7 198 Pz IV Ausf F2 75 L43,2LMG 5 3 2 5 3 3 25 14 C 7 216 Pz IV Ausf G-J 75 L48,2LMG 8 3 3 5 3 3 24 13 C 7 330 Pz V `Panther' 75 L70,2LMG 13 6 5 12 5 5 29 16 D 7 299 Pz VI `Tiger' 88 L56,2LMG 11 8 8 11 8 8 24 10 D 8 465 Tiger II (Henschel) 88 L71,2LMG 21 9 9 18 9 9 22 10 D 8 450 Tiger II (Porsche) 88 L71,2LMG 21 9 9 13 9 9 22 10 D 8 722 Maus (2xLMG) 128 L55,75L36 30 17 20 26 24 21 12 8 D 11 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 109 StuG III A-E 75 L24 5 3 3 5 3 3 25 15 C 7 183 StuG III F 75 L43,LMG 5 3 3 5 3 3 25 15 C 7 211 StuG III G 75 L48, LMG 9 3 5 8 3 3 25 14 C 7 167 StuH 42 105 L28,LMG 9 3 5 8 3 3 24 14 C 9 190 StuPz IV 'Brummbar' 150 L12 11 3 2 13 5 3 25 12 D 9 80 PzJg I 47 L43 2 1 1 2 1 - 24 12 C 4 102 PzJg 35R(f) 47 L43 4 4 4 3 2 2 13 8 C 5 167 Marder I 75 L46 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 10 C 6 180 Marder II 75 L46 4 2 2 1 1 - 25 14 C 6 156 Marder II(r) 76 L51 3 1 1 2 2 - 34 16 C 6 169 Marder III(t)(r) 76 L51,LMG 5 2 2 1 1 - 26 14 C 6 192 Marder III(t)H 75 L46,LMG 5 2 2 2 2 - 22 12 C 6 178 Marder III(t)M 75 L46 2 2 1 1 1 1 26 16 C 6 263 PzJg III/IV `Nashorn' 88 L71 3 2 2 1 1 1 26 14 D 8 217 JgdPz 38(t) `Hetzer' 75 L48,LMG 11 2 2 12 3 2 24 12 C 7 116 JgdPz 38(t) (Flamm) F/Thr,LMG 11 2 2 12 3 2 24 12 C 3 210 JdPz IV/48 75 L48, LMG 9 3 2 10 3 2 25 14 C 6 268 JdPz IV/70 `Lang' 75 L70, LMG 10 3 2 12 5 2 22 12 C 6 392 JdgPz V/JagdPanther 88 L71,LMG 13 5 4 14 6 5 26 16 D 8 491 JgdPz VI/JagdTiger 128 L55,LMG 21 8 9 25 8 8 22 10 D 9 412 PzJg `Elephant' 88 L71,LMG 20 8 8 22 8 8 12 6 D 7 111 sIG I B 150 L12 2 1 1 1 1 - 22 10 C 10 130 sIG II 150 L12 3 2 2 3 2 - 24 12 C 10 146 sIG 38(t)H `Grille' 150 L12,LMG 5 2 2 2 2 2 22 12 C 10 125 sIG 38(t)M `Grille' 150 L12 2 2 1 1 1 1 24 15 C 10 165 sIG 33 Hetzer 150 L12 10 2 2 7 3 1 20 10 C 10 112 PzA II `Wespe' 105 L28 3 2 2 1 1 1 25 14 C 8 152 PzA III/IV `Hummel' 150 L30 3 2 2 1 1 1 26 14 D 10 199 Sturm Tiger 380 Rkt,LMG 12 8 8 21 9 4 22 10 D 12 116 PzA LrS(f) 150 L12 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 8 C 10 178 StuIG 33B 150 L12,LMG 9 3 5 8 5 2 13 6 C 10 63 FlaK Pz 38(t) 20 L55 2 2 1 1 1 1 26 16 C 3 117 FlaK Pz IV `Mobelwagen' 37 L60,LMG 8 3 3 3 3 3 25 14 C 4 112 FlaK Pz IV `Wirbelwind' 20 Quad,LMG 8 3 3 2 2 2 25 14 C 4 122 FlaK Pz IV 'Ostwind' 37 L60,LMG 8 3 3 4 3 3 25 14 C 4 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 46 Sdkfz 250/1 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C 2 1 85 Sdkfz 250/7 81mm Mortar 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C - 81 Sdkfz 250/8 75 L24 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C 5

77 Sdkfz 250/9 20 L55,LMG 2 1 1 4 1 1 38 18 C 3 70 Sdkfz 250/10 37 L45 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 18 C 3 1 102 Sdkfz 250/PaK38 50 L60 2 1 1 1 1 1 38 16 C 4 50 Sdkfz 251/1 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 2 3 84 Sdkfz 251/2 81mm Mortar 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C - 60 Sdkfz 251 `MMG' MMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 2 2 82 Sdkfz 251/9 75 L24 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 5 1 72 Sdkfz 251/10 37 L45 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 3 68 Sdkfz 251/16 2*F/Thr 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 2 59 Sdkfz 251/17 20 L55 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 1 74 Sdkfz 251/21 (a) 20L55 Triple 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 78 Sdkfz 251/21 (b) HMG Triple 2 1 1 1 1 1 33 16 C 3 174 Sdkfz 251/22 75 L46 2 1 1 1 1 1 30 14 C 5 76 Sdkfz 251/23 20 L55,LMG 2 1 1 4 1 1 33 16 C 3 33 Kfz 13/14 4x2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 43 10 B 2 46 Sdkfz 221/223 4x4 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 56 16 C 3 62 Sdkfz 221/PzB41 4x4 28 PzB41 1 1 1 1 1 1 56 16 C 5 72 Sdkfz 222 4x4 20 L55,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 53 15 C 3 88 Sdkfz 222 Late 4x4 20 L55,LMG 3 1 1 3 3 3 50 14 C 3 37 Sdkfz 247 4x4 none 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 14 C - 72 Sdkfz 231/232 6x4 20 L55,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 46 14 C 4 84 Sdkfz 231/232 8x8 20 L55,LMG 3 1 1 2 1 1 53 18 C 4 51 Sdkfz 263 8x8 LMG 1 1 1 2 1 1 60 20 C 3 93 Sdkfz 233 8x8 75 L24 3 1 1 2 1 1 53 18 C 5 85 Sdkfz 234/1 `Tatra' 8x8 20 L55,LMG 4 1 1 4 1 1 59 19 C 3 131 Sdkfz 234/2 `Puma' 8x8 50 L60,LMG 4 1 1 6 1 1 50 19 C 7 91 Sdkfz 234/3 8x8 75 L24 4 1 1 2 2 2 50 19 C 5 185 Sdkfz 234/4 8x8 75 L46 4 1 1 2 2 - 50 19 C 5 88 Aufkl Pz 38(t) 20 L55,LMG 5 2 2 4 1 1 26 16 C 3 Smoke Dischargers; PzI, PzII, PzIII, PzIV, Panther, Tiger I & II, Pz 35(t) & 38(t), all StuG III, JgPz IV/V/VI, Sdkfz 221 & 222, Sdkfz 231/232(8 rad) series, Sdkfz 234 series. Radios; All AFVs, except - sIG I B, Sdkfz 13/14 AC (only platoon/company command cars were radio equipped.) One Man Turrets; Pz I, Pz II (Flamm) & Pz III (Flamm). GERMANY range in cm PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 23 28mm L61 sPzB 41 A (11) (10) (9) (8) to-hit base 2 7 6 5 3 penetration 30 37mm L45 PaK 35/36 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 4 4 3 3 +22pp StGt 41 (HEAT) 1941+ (10) (6) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 48 42mm L56 PaK 41 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 No HE 9 8 8 7 5 4 3 44 47m 1) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) m L43 PaK 36(t) A (1 3 8 7 6 6 5 4 4 +16pp StGt 41 (HEAT) 1942+ (10) (7) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 42 50m 1) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 7 6 6 5 5 4 4

m L42 KwK 38 * (1 *

62 50mm L60 PaK 38 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 9 8 8 7 6 5 5 4 3 +18pp APCR PzGr40 (11) (11) (9) (8) (7) (6) 4 14 12 11 9 8 6 +10pp StGt 42 (HEAT) 1942+ (10) (9) (6) 7 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 18 42 75mm L24 KwK 37 (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) 5 Smk 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 +18pg -> 75mm L24 KwK 37 HEAT ‘42 (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 101 75mm L43 KwK 40 * (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) * Smk 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 7 5 106 75mm L48 KwK 41 * (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) * Smk 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 6 13 75 11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 1 mm L46 PaK 40 B ( 5 Smk 14 14 13 13 12 11 10 10 9 7 +13pp APCR PzGr40 (11) (12) (11) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 5 17 16 15 14 13 12 12 10 182 75mm L58 PaK 41 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 5 No HE 22 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 11 9 15 75 11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 1 mm L70 KwK 42 * ( * 16 16 15 15 14 13 12 11 11 10 111 76mm L51 PaK 36(r) B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk 13 12 11 11 10 10 9 8 7 6 103 80mm L37 PAW 600 (HEAT) B (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 5 No HE 14 14 14 14 14 14 49 88mm RPzBGr (HEAT) A (11) (10) (9) (6) 6 No HE 11 11 11 11 126 88mm L56 FlaK 18/36 D (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 6 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 209 88mm L71 PaK 43/41 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) 6 22 21 20 20 19 18 17 17 16 15 25 12 11) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) 8 6 8mm L55 PaK 44 D ( 28 26 24 23 23 23 22 21 20 18 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 36 75mm L10 LG40 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - +15pg -> 75 8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 8 8 8 8 8

mm L10 LG40 HEAT 1942+ (

36 75mm L12 IG 18 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - +14pg -> 75mm L12 IG 18 HEAT ‘42+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 58 75mm L22 IG 37 A (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - - ->75mm L22 IG 37 HEAT (9) (9 (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 43 75mm L26 FK 18 B (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 +18pg ->75mm L26 FK 18 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 45 75mm L36 FK 16nA B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 - - - - - - - - - +21pg ->7 10) (9) (9) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

5mm L36 FK 16nA HEAT ‘42+ (

79 105mm L13 LG40 B (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk - - - - - - - - -> 1 (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) (5) 05mm L13 LG40 HEAT 10 10 10 10 10 10 67 105mm L28 FH 18 C (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk 8 7 7 6 6 6 5 4 4 3 +32pg ->105mm L28 FH 18 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 136 105mm L52 K18 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 12 11 11 10 +29pg -> 105mm L52 K18 HEAT ‘42+ (10) (11) (11) (10) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 83 150mm L12 sIG 33 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 Smk - - - - - - - +21pg ->150mm L12 sIG 33 HEAT ‘42+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 16 16 16 16 16 104 150mm L30 FH 18/36 D (10) (10) (9) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 9 - - - - - - - - - +37pg -> 150mm L30 FH 18/36 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

116

46 380mm L5 Rkt-Launcher * (10) (8) (6) * - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L55 AA FlaK 30/38 A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 48 20mm L55 AA Flakvierling 38 Quad B (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 36 20mm L55 AA MG151 Triple * (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) * 3 2 2 2 2 42 37mm L60 AA FlaK 18/36/37 B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 2 6 5 5 4 4 3 +22pp ->StGt 41 HEAT ‘42+ (10) (6) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18

France PV FRANCE Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Rhone 14R Motorcycle x 3 - A 55 19 1 - 8 Gnome & Rhone AX2 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 50 13 1 - 7 Peugeot 202 Light Car 4x2 B 60 16 1 - 13 Citroen 23, Renault ADK Light Truck 4x2 C 42 11 4 A 12 Laffly V15, Latil M7T1 Light Truck 4x4 C 45 19 2 A 14 Laffly W15T & S35TL Light Truck 6x6 C 40 23 2 B 17 Laffly S20TL, Lorraine 28 Light Truck 6x6 C 50 24 4 B 21 Citroen 45, Renault AGR Medium Truck 4x2 C 36 9 7 B 28 Renault AGK Heavy Truck 4x2 D 37 9 10 C 21 Laffly S45TL Heavy Truck 6x4 D 31 14 5 D 14 Unic TU1 Light Halftrack ht B 32 20 1 - 13 Citroen/Kegresse P17 Light Halftrack ht B 22 14 1 A 17 Citroen/Kegresse P19 Light Halftrack ht C 28 18 2 B 14 Unic P107 Medium Halftrack ht C 25 15 1 C 14 Somua MCG Heavy Halftrack ht D 20 13 2 D PV FRAN Descri Drive Size Speed Armam Rd C/C

CE Motorised Guns ption ent

40 CAJ mle30 Berliet AA SP/Lt Truck 6x6 C 36 18 2 x HMG 28 25mm mle 38 Berliet AA SP/Lt Truck 6x6 C 36 18 25mm L72 56 47mm SA Laffly CdC AT SP/Lt Truck 6x6 C 40 23 47mm L53 69 75mm mle 97 Citreon/Rnault AT SP/Md Truck 4x2 C 36 9 75mm L36 74 75mm mle 97 Conus AT SP/Md Truck 4x4 C 42 17 75mm L36 Ford 62 40mm Bofors GMC AA SP/Md Truck 6x6 C 45 22 40mm L48 AA FRANCE Armor PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 37 FT-17 LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 5 4 B 4 39 FT-17 SA 37 L22 2 1 1 2 2 2 5 4 B 7 41 AMR 33 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 40 22 B 4 54 AMR 35 I HMG,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 34 18 B 5 52 AMR 35 II 25 L72,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 34 18 B 6 85 AMC 35 I 47 L34,LMG 3 1 1 3 2 2 25 13 B 6 71 AMC 35 II 25 L72,LMG 3 1 1 3 2 2 25 13 B 5 72 R35 37 L22,LMG 4 4 4 5 5 5 13 6 B 7 82 R39 37 L33,LMG 4 4 4 5 5 5 13 6 B 7 86 AMX/R40 37 L33,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 14 9 C 7 76 FCM36 37 L22,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 15 9 C 7 77 H35 37 L22,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 17 10 C 7 87 H39 37 L33,LMG 5 4 4 5 5 5 17 10 C 7 107 S35 47 L34,LMG 4 4 4 7 5 5 25 14 C 7 96 D1 47 L28,LMG 4 4 4 6 5 5 12 6 C 6 95 D2 47 L28,LMG 4 2 2 7 5 5 14 7 C 6 152 Char B1 (has 2xLMG) 75L17,47L28 6 5 5 7 5 5 17 8 C 8 168 Char B1 bis (has 2xLMG) 75 L17,47L34 8 6 6 7 5 5 17 8 C 8 127 Char 2C 75 L36,4*LMG 3 2 2 3 3 3 8 4 D 8 41 AMC P16 37 L22,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 16 C 7 64 Panhard P-178(a) 25 L72,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 48 14 C 5 55 Panhard P-178(b) 2*LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 48 14 C 4 27 AMX/Renault UE none 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 10 B - 31 Lorraine 37L none 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 10 B - 2 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped Radios; All S35, D1, D2, Char B1 bis & Char 2C are equipped as standard. For Panhard P-178, only platoon and company command vehicles are radio equipped. One Man Turrets; All AFVs except Char 2C and AMC-35. FRANCE Range in cm PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 19 25mm L72 SA-L mle 34 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 2 4 3 3 2 2 11 37mm L22 mle 16 A (10) (9) (6) 3 3 2 2 23 37mm L33 SA mle 38 * (11) (10) (9) (7) (5) * 5 4 4 3 2 27 47mm L28 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) * 5 5 4 3 3 2 33 47mm L34 SA mle 34 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) * 6 5 5 4 4 4 48 47mm L53 SA mle 37 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 8 7 7 6 6 6 5 4 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 31 65mm L20 mle 06 A - - - - - - (No g/shield) 4 Horse-drawn - - - - - - 34 75mm L17 SA mle 32 * (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) * - - - - - - 36 75mm L19 mle 19S/28S B (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk,Horse dr - - - - - - - 62 75mm L36 mle 1897 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 8 8 7 7 6 5 4 4 3 67 105mm L19 mle 35B/34S C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk,Horse dr - - - - - - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L60 AA Madsen CMA A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 27 25mm L60 AA Hotchkiss A (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 38 37mm L60 mle 29 B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 3 5 5 4 4 3 3 Italy PV ITALY Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Moto Guzzi 'Alce' Motorcycle x 3 - A 56 19 1 - 8 Moto Gilera 'Marte' M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 50 13 1 - 7 Fiat 508 MC Light Car 4x2 B 55 15 1 - 10 Autocarretta OM 32,37 Light Truck 4x4 B 30 12 2 A 11 Fiat/Spa TL37, CL39 Light Truck 4x4 C 30 14 2 B 13 Fiat 618 CM, Ceirano 50C Light Truck 4x2 C 38 10 4 B 15 Fiat/Spa TM40 Medium Truck 4x4 C 33 14 4 C 20 Fiat 626, Fiat 38R Medium Truck 4x2 C 33 8 7 C 27 Lancia 3Ro, Fiat 633,634 Heavy Truck 4x2 D 27 8 10 D

15 Breda TP32, TP40, Fiat P4 Heavy Truck 4x4 C 22 10 4 D 28 Breda, Fiat/S Heavy Tru 6x4 D 20 10 10 D oa Dovunque ck 10 Fiat 708 OCI Lt Tractor trk A 12 6 0 B

Motorised Guns ption PV ITALY Descri Drive Size Speed Armament Rd C/C 26 Moto Guzzi'Trialce' MMG Motor-tricycle - A 46 12 MMG 24 Fiat 508C Mil Light AA Car 4x2 B 55 15 twin LMG 42 Camionette Desertica M43 Lt AA truck 4x4 C 30 14 20mm L65 AA, LMG 59 Autocannone 75/27 Md AA truck 4x2 C 38 10 75mm L30 160 Autocannone 90/53 Hvy AA truck 4x2 D 27 8 75mm L27 85 Autocannone 102/35 Hvy AA truck 4x2 D 27 8 102mm L35 48 AS 42 (HMG) Recon Car 4x4 C 55 26 HMG, LMG 46 AS 42 (20/65) Recon Car 4x4 C 55 26 20mm L65 AA, LMG 39 AS 42 (20mm s18) Recon Car 4x4 C 55 26 20mm L105, LMG ITAL mor PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP

Y Ar

45 L5/21 2 LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 8 B 4 52 L5/32 37 L40 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 8 B 7 47 L3/35 2 LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 26 12 B 3 58 L3 Flamethrower F/Thr,LMG 2 1 1 2 1 1 26 12 B 3 54 L3 (20mm) 20 L105 2 1 1 2 1 1 26 12 B 4 74 L6/40 20 L55,LMG 3 2 1 3 3 3 26 16 C 5 70 M11/39 37 L40,2LMG 3 2 1 3 3 3 20 12 C 6 116 M13/40 47 L32,3LMG 3 3 3 4 3 3 20 9 C 6 134 M15/42 47 L40,3LMG 4 3 3 5 3 3 25 14 C 6 193 P40 75 L34,LMG 8 5 5 7 5 5 26 15 C 8 PV Self Propelled Guns ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 75 Semovente L40 da 47/32 47 L32 3 2 2 3 2 2 26 17 B 6 93 Semovente M40 da 75/18 75 L20 3 2 1 3 2 1 20 10 C 7 109 Semovente M42 da 75/18 75 L20 4 3 3 5 3 3 26 12 C 7 136 Semovente M42M da 75/34 75 L34 4 3 3 5 3 3 26 12 C 7 177 Semovente M41M da 90/53 90 L53 3 3 1 4 1 - 23 12 C 8 164 Semovente M43 da 75/34 75 L34 7 3 3 8 3 3 25 14 C 7 208 Semovente M43 da 75/46 75 L46 7 4 3 10 5 3 24 14 C 7 171 Semovente M43 da 105/25 105 L25 7 4 3 10 5 3 24 14 C 9 74 Carro Commando M41 HMG 4 3 3 4 3 3 26 14 C 3 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 46 Lancia IZ`M' 4x2 3 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 40 12 C 3 63 AB611 6x4 37 L40,2LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 10 C 5 47 AB40 4x4 3 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 16 C 4 70 AB41 4x4 20 L65,2LMG 1 1 1 2 1 1 52 18 C 5 92 AB43 4x4 47 L40,2LMG 1 1 1 3 2 2 54 20 C 6 113 AB41/43 4x4 50 L60,2LMG 1 1 1 2 1 1 54 20 C 7 38 AS37 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 38 20 C 2 3 36 AB Lince Scout Car 4x4 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 54 20 B 2 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped! Radios; L6/40, M15/42, P40, Semovente M40/M41/M42/M43, Carro Commando M41, AB 40/41, AB Lince, AS37 were equipped as standard. For M13/40, radios were standard after late 1941, prior to which only platoon/company command tanks were radio equipped. One Man Turrets; L5/21, L5/32, L6/40, M11/39. ITALY PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 20 20mm L105 S18-1000 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 2 No gun shield 4 3 2 2 2 22 37mm L40 37/40 A (11) (10) (9) (7) (5) 3 4 4 3 3 2 33 37mm L45 37/45 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 4 4 3 3 32 47mm L32 47/32 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 No gun shield 5 5 4 4 3 3 +23pp -> StGt 41 HEAT ‘43+ (11) (7) 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18 39 47mm L40 47/40 * (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) * 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 46 75mm L20 75/18 B (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 3 +14pg ->75mm L20 75/18 HEAT ‘42+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 71 75mm L34 75/32 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 84 75mm L42 75/39 C (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 5 No gun shield 9 9 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 103 75mm L46 75/46 C (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 6 126 90mm L53 90/53 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 6 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 PV Howitzers/Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 42 65mm L17 65/17 No gnshld A (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 4 Hrse drawn - - - - - - +0pg -> 65mm L17 65/17 HEAT ‘42+ A (8) (8) (7) (6) 5 5 5 5 55 75mm L30 75/27 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 3 3 +17pg 75mm L30 75/27 HEAT ‘42+ (10) (9) (9) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 62 100mm L19 vs 14 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - +15pg -> 100mm L19 vs 14 HEAT ‘42+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 70 100mm L24 vs 14/19 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - - +16pg ->100mm L24 vs 14/19 HEAT 1942+ (9) (8) (8) (8) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 71 102mm L35 102/35 C (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - - - 70 105mm L25 105/25 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 +16pg ->105mm L25 105/25 HEAT ‘43 + (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L65 AA 20/65 A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 No gun shield 3 2 2 2 2 Japan PV JAPAN Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Type 97 Sankyo Motorcycle x 3 - A 44 15 1 - 8 Type 97 Iwasaki M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 40 11 1 - 8 Type 95 Kurogane Light Car 4x4 B 44 16 1 - 13 Nissan 180 Isuzu Typ 94 Light Truck 4x2 C 42 11 4 B 24 Isuzu Type 94 A/B Medium Truck 6x4 C 40 15 7 C 27 Isuzu Type 2 (7 ton) Heavy Truck 4x2 D 32 8 10 D 21 Toyota SUKI Amphib Truck 4x4 D 30 12 5 - 20 Isuzu Type 98 KO-HI Halftrack ht C 28 16 4 C 16 Type 94,92,98 (4-6 ton) Medium Tractor trk C 25 13 2 C 11 Type 92, 95 (8-13 ton) Heavy Tractor trk C 20 8 0 D

117

JAPAN Armor PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 36 Combat Car Type 92 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 12 B 3 34 Light Type 94 TK LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 25 12 B 3 60 Light Type 95 `HA-GO' 37 L45,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 17 C 5 52 Light Type 97 `TE-KE'(a) 37 L45 2 1 1 1 1 1 26 14 C 5 35 Light Type 97 `TE-KE'(b) LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 26 14 C 3 69 Light Type 98 `KE-NI' 37 L50,2*LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 34 19 C 5 66 Light Type 04 `KE-NU' 57 L26,2*LMG 1 1 1 3 3 3 24 16 C 6 76 Medium Type 89B `CHI-RO' 57 L22,2*LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 8 C 6 92 Medium Type 97 `CHI-HA' 57 L26,2*LMG 3 2 2 3 3 3 25 18 C 6 132 Medium Type 97 Special 47 L54,2*LMG 3 2 2 5 3 3 25 18 C 5 149 Medium Type 01 `CHI-HE' 47 L54,2*LMG 6 3 3 5 3 3 27 19 C 5 179 Medium Type 03 `CHI-NU' 75 L38,2*LMG 6 3 3 5 3 3 27 19 C 7 75 Amphibious Type 02 `KA-MI 37 L50,2*LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 23 14 C 5 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 124 Type 01 `HO-NI I' 75 L38 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 7 119 Type 01 `HO-NI II' 105 L24 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 9 136 Type 03 `HO-NI III' 75 L44 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 7 133 Type 04 `HO-RO' 150 L11 3 2 2 3 3 - 25 18 C 11 58 Type 97 `SA-TO' 20 L73 AA 2 2 2 1 1 1 25 18 C 4 62 Type 02 `SO-KI' 20 L73 Dble AA 2 2 2 1 - - 25 18 C 4 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 28 `HO-KI' - 2 1 1 1 1 1 25 18 B - 37 Type 91 `Sumida' 6x4 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 39 8 C 3 1 48 Type 92 `Naval' 6x4 4*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 10 C 3 52 Type 92 `Osaka' 4x2 MMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 5 C 3 Smoke Dischargers; Medium Type 97 CHI-HA, Type 97 Special, Type 01 CHI-HE & Type 03 CHI-NU. From 1944+, Light Type 95`HA-GO'. Radios; All Med Type 97 Specials, Med Type 01 CHI-HE, Med Type 03 CHI-NU, SP Type 01/03 HO-NI I,II & III, SP Type 04 HO-RO were equipped with radios as standard. For Med Type 97 CHI-HA & Light Type 95 HA-GO, only company command tanks were radio equipped. One Man Turrets; All `Light' tanks, except Type 02 KA-MI. JAPAN PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 11 37mm L22 Type 11 A (10) (9) (6) to-hit chance 3 No gun shield 3 2 2 penetration 28 37mm L45 Type 94/97 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 Horse-drawn 6 5 4 4 3 3 29 37mm L50 Type 00/01 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 48 47mm L54 Type 01 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 23 57mm L22 Type 90 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) * 4 4 3 3 2 26 57mm L26 Type 97 * (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) * 5 4 4 3 3 74 75m B 1) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 4

m L38 Type 90 (1 5 WP

85 75mm L44 Type 88 C (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 No gun shield 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 4

s Siz 1 50 F ES PV Howitzers/ Field Gun e 20 40 60 80 00 125 150 175 200 2 O NOT 23 70mm L9 Type 92 A (9) (9) (8) (6) (Horse-drawn) 4 WP - - - - +0pg -> 70mm L9 Type 92 HEAT ’45 (8) (8) (7) (5) 4 4 4 4 40 75mm L19 Type 41 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 WP - - - - - - - +0pg -> 75mm L19 Type 41 HEAT ‘44+ (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 5 5 5 5 5 45 75mm L21 Type 94 A (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 WP - - - - - - - - +0pg -> 75mm L21 Type 94 HEAT ‘44+ (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (5) 5 5 5 5 5 5 55 75mm L31 Type 38/95 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Hrse-dr, WP 7 6 6 6 5 5 4 3 3 69 105mm L24 Type 91 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 - - - - - - - - - 82 150mm L11 Type 38 C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 Horse dr, WP 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 93 150m C 0) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) WP - - - - - - - -

m L23 Type 96 (1 9

PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L73 Type 98 A (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) (No g/shield) 1 Horse drawn 3 2 2 2 2 32 20mm L73 Dual Type 98 A (12) (11) (10) (8) (6) 1 Horse drawn 3 2 2 2 2 27 25mm L60 Type 96 B (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 Static mount 3 3 2 2 2 2 36 25mm L60 Dual Type 96 B (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 Static mount 3 3 2 2 2 2

Soviet

PV SOVIET Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 IZ-12 solo Motorcycle x 3 - A 60 21 1 - 8 AM-600; M-72 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 68 16 1 - 6 GAZ-M Field Car 4x2 B 30 8 1 10 GAZ-61, 64, 67B Light Car 4x4 B 55 20 2 15 GAZ-AA, GAZ-MM, GAZ-42 Light Truck 4x2 C 44 12 5 B 20 GAZ-AAA (2 ton) Medium Truck 6x4 C 40 17 5 C 21 ZIS-5 (2 ton) Medium Truck 4x2 C 40 10 7 C 26 ZIS-6 Heavy Truck 6x4 D 37 16 7 D 25 YAG-6 Heavy Truck 4x2 D 25 6 9 C 29 YAG-10 Heavy Truck 6x4 D 25 11 10 D 24 ZIS-33 Medium Halftrack ht C 24 14 7 C 20 Stalin, Komintern Heavy Tractor trk D 16 7 5 D

Tracto 8 15 STZ-5 Medium r trk C 16 2 C PV SOVIET escri Drive Size Speed Armament Rd C/C

Motorised Guns D ption

46 SU-12 (GAZ-AAA) Md SP Truck 6x4 C 40 17 76mm L16 56 GAZ-4M-AA Md AA Truck 4x2 C 44 12 quad HMG 131 YaG-10-AA Hv AA Truck 6x4 D 25 11 76mm L51 45 ZIS-42-AA Md AA Truck 4x2 C 40 10 25mm L91 AA SOVIET Armor PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 188 T-34/76 m1940 76 L30,2LMG 9 6 7 7 5 6 33 25 C 8 224 T-34/76 m1941 76 L41,2LMG 9 6 7 8 6 7 33 25 C 8 222 T-34/76 m1942 76 L41,2LMG 9 6 7 7 7 7 33 25 C 8 233 T-34/76 m1942 Modified 76 L41,2LMG 12 6 7 7 7 7 32 24 C 8 246 OT-34/76 m1942 76 L41,FThr,LMG12 6 7 7 7 7 32 24 C 8 238 T-34/76 m1943 76 L41,2LMG 9 7 7 8 6 7 34 25 C 7 249 T-34/76 m1943 Modified 76 L41,2LMG 12 7 7 8 6 7 34 25 C 7 261 OT-34/76 m1943 76 L41,FThr,LMG12 7 7 8 6 7 34 25 C 7

293 T-34/85 (Early) 85 L51,2LMG 9 7 7 11 8 6 31 22 C 8 303 T-34/85 (Late) 85 L55,2LMG 12 6 7 11 8 6 31 22 C 8 315 OT-34/85 85 L55,FThr,LMG12 6 7 11 8 6 31 22 C 8 196 KV 1 m1939 76 L30,3LMG 9 8 8 8 8 8 22 11 D 8 238 KV-1 m1941 76 L41,3LMG 11 8 8 10 8 8 22 11 D 8 249 KV-1 m1942 76 L41,3LMG 12 8 8 11 10 10 22 11 D 7 267 KV-1E 76 L41,3LMG 13 8 8 13 11 11 19 8 D 8 223 KV-1s 76 L41,3LMG 9 6 6 8 6 6 25 12 D 7 230 KV-2 (Early) 122 L22,2LMG 9 8 8 12 8 8 16 8 D 10 244 KV-2 152 L24,2LMG 9 8 8 12 8 8 16 8 D 11 295 KV-85 85 L51,3LMG 9 6 6 13 10 10 25 14 D 9 217 KV-8 Fthr,45L46,2LMG12 8 8 11 8 8 22 11 D 4 371 IS-2 122 L43,2LMG 14 9 8 13 8 8 23 12 D 10 401 IS-2m 122 L43,2LMG 18 9 8 15 11 10 23 12 D 10 439 IS-3 122 L43,2LMG 20 10 9 23 11 10 25 12 D 10 345 T-44 85 L55,LMG 18 9 6 12 9 6 33 20 C 8 45 T-26 m1931 2 LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 10 C 4 82 T-26TU m1931 37 L45,LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 10 C 7 98 T-26 m1933 45 L46,2LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 17 9 C 6 99 T-26S m1937 45 L46,1LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 17 9 C 6 104 T-26S m1939 45 L46,2LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 17 9 C 6 121 T-26E m1937 45 L46,1LMG 6 3 2 6 4 2 15 6 C 6 121 T-26A 76 L16,2LMG 6 3 2 6 4 2 15 6 C 7 63 OT-130 F/thrower,LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 17 9 C 4 69 OT-133 F/thrower,LMG 3 2 2 3 2 2 17 9 C 4 100 T-28 m1934 76 L16,3*LMG 4 2 2 2 2 2 25 13 D 8 114 T-28 m1938 76 L24,3*LMG 4 2 2 2 2 2 25 13 D 8 162 T-28E 76 L24,3*LMG 8 5 4 8 4 4 25 13 D 8 190 T-35 m1933 5xLMG 76L16,2*37L45 3 2 2 2 2 2 18 9 D 8 212 T-35 m1935 4xLMG 76L16,2*45L46 4 2 2 2 2 2 18 9 D 8 40 T-27A LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 26 14 B 3 32 T-37 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 B 4 32 T-38 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 13 B 4 45 T-38M 20 L55 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 13 B 5 50 T-40A HMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 14 B 4 109 T-50A 45 L46,LMG 6 4 4 4 4 4 32 18 B 7 76 T-60 20 L55,LMG 6 2 2 3 2 2 27 14 B 5 111 T-70A 45 L46,LMG 7 2 2 8 4 4 28 14 C 7 79 BT-2 37 L45,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 45 26 C 6 91 BT-5 45 L46,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 45 26 C 6 96 BT-5A 76 L16,2*LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 45 26 C 7 99 BT-7 45 L46,LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 33 24 C 6 99 BT-7A 76 L16,2*LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 33 24 C 7 105 BT-8 45 L46,2*LMG 3 1 1 2 2 2 33 24 C 6 PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 89 SU-37 37 L74 AA 5 2 2 1 1 1 28 15 C 2 72 SU-45 45 L46 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 15 C 4 127 SU-57 57 L73 1 1 1 1 - - 24 12 C 4 128 SU-76 76 L42 5 2 2 3 1 1 28 17 C 5 132 SU-76i 76 L41 3 3 2 4 2 2 30 20 C 6 223 SU-85 85 L51 7 5 5 7 5 5 33 20 C 7 335 SU-100 100 L54 11 5 5 11 5 5 33 20 C 8 176 SU-122 (T-34) 122 L22 7 5 5 7 5 5 28 15 C 9 283 SU-122 122 L46 9 6 6 9 6 6 25 10 D 9 243 SU-152 152 L29 9 6 6 9 6 6 25 10 D 10 319 ISU-122 (Late) 122 L43 12 9 8 11 9 8 23 14 D 9 278 ISU-152 152 L29 12 9 8 11 9 8 23 14 D 10 143 SU-57(a) 57 L73 1 1 1 1 1 1 42 18 C 4 PV APC/RECON ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 35 BA-20 4x2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 53 8 B 4 87 BA-6 6x4 45 L46,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 39 12 C 6 94 BA 10 6x4 45 L46,2*LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 34 10 C 6 64 BA 64 4x4 HMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 50 14 C 3 36 Komsomolet LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 24 12 B 3 2 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; Prior to 1943, only company/battalion command AFVs were radio equipped except for BT-5A, BT-7A & T-26A which were equipped as standard. All AFVs entering service from 1943 onwards are radio equipped as standard. One Man Turrets; T-37, T-38, T-40, T50, T-60, T-70, T-26m1931. SOVIET PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 33 37mm L45 M30 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) to-hit chance 3 6 5 4 4 3 3 penetration 44 45mm L46 M32 & M37 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 60 45mm L66 M42 A (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) 3 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 102 57mm L73 M41 & M43 B (11) (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) 4 12 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 7 5 +18pp -> 57mm L73 APCR (11) (11) (11) (10) (9) (7) (7) (6) 4 15 14 14 13 11 10 9 7 45 76mm L24 * (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 78 76mm L41/42 M1940-42 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) 5 Smk 9 9 8 7 7 7 6 6 5 4 +11pp -> 76mm L41/42 APCR (1942+) (11) (11) (10) (10) (8) (7) (6) (6) 5 11 10 10 9 8 6 4 3 110 76mm L51 M36 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk 12 11 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 7 119 85mm L51/55 M43/M44 C/B (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 6 Smk 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 194 100mm L54 M44 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 7 21 20 20 19 19 18 16 15 13 12 168 122mm L43/46 M43/M31 D (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (9) (8) 8 Smk 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 13 12 10 PV Howitzers/ Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 29 76mm L16 M27/M43 B/A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 Smk 5 4 3 3 3 2 2 53 76mm L30 M02/30 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 (Horsedrawn) 7 7 6 6 5 4 3 3 3 91 107mm L43 M1910/30r C (10) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) (6) 7 Smk - - - - - - - - - - 82 122mm L22 M38 C (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 8 Smk - - - - - - - - - +48pg -> 122mm L22 M38 HEAT ‘43 (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) (6) (5) 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 94 152mm L24 M1938 D (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 9 12 11 10 10 9 8 8 7 6 132 152mm L29 M1937 D (10) (10) (9) (9) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 9 16 15 14 14 13 12 11 11 10 PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L55 AA M40 A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 3 2 2 2 2 29 25mm L91 AA M40 B (12) (12) (11) (9) (7) (5) 1 4 3 3 2 2 2 45 37mm L74 AA M39 B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 2

6 6 5 5 4 4

118

U.S.

PV USA So Descri Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams

ftskins ption

7 Harley-Davidson WLA Motorcycle x 3 - A 60 23 1 - 9 Jeep (wpns extra) Light car 4x4 B 55 24 1 A 10 Ford GPA Amphibious Car 4x4 B 55 20 1 - 12 Weapons Carrier 'Beep' Light Truck 4x4 B 50 20 2 A 15 Dodge (1 ton) Light Truck 4x4 C 50 18 4 B 19 Dodge (2 ton) Light Truck 6x6 C 50 24 5 B 26 GMC (2 ton) Medium Truck 6x6 C 45 22 7 C 27 GMC DUKW (2 ton) 'Duck' Amphib Truck 6x6 C 45 20 6 - 11 Diamond T (4 ton) Heavy Truck 6x6 D 40 21 0 D 20 Mack (7 ton) Heavy Truck 6x6 D 31 15 5 D 18 M5 (13 ton) High Speed Heavy Tractor trk C 35 15 3 D U.S Armor PV TANKS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 134 M2A4 37 L54,4*LMG 4 3 3 4 3 3 26 12 C 6 144 M3 37 L54,4*LMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 36 20 C 6 132 M3A1 37 L54,2*LMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 36 20 C 6 119 M3A1 'Satan' F/thrower,2*LMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 36 20 C 4 136 M5A1 37 L54,2*LMG 6 3 3 5 3 3 36 24 C 6 198 M24 'Chaffee' 75 L40,2*LMG 5 3 3 5 3 3 35 25 C 8 249 M3 `Lee' (Early) 4xLMG 75 L31,37L54 7 4 4 7 5 5 26 16 C 7 266 M3 `Lee' (Late) 4xLMG 75 L40,37L54 7 4 4 7 5 5 26 16 C 7 240 M3 `Grant' (Early) 3xLMG 75 L31,37L54 7 4 4 6 5 5 26 16 C 7 258 M3 `Grant' (Late) 3xLMG 75 L40,37L54 7 4 4 6 5 5 26 16 C 7 223 M4 75 L40,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 24 15 C 7 240 M4 (105mm) 105 L22,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 24 16 C 9 230 M4A1 75 L40,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 24 15 C 7 262 M4A1 (76mm) 76 L52,2*LMG 9 5 4 10 7 7 24 15 C 7 274 M4A1 (76mm) Modified 76 L52,2*LMG 12 5 4 10 7 7 24 15 C 7 226 M4A2 75 L40,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 29 17 C 7 233 M4A2 (Late) 75 L40,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 29 17 C 7 225 M4A3/M4A4 75 L40,2*LMG 8 4 4 9 6 6 26 16 C 7 232 M4A3 (Late) 75 L40,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 26 16 C 7 263 M4A3 (76mm) 76 L52,2*LMG 9 5 4 10 7 7 26 16 C 7 276 M4A3 (76mm) Modified 76 L52,2*LMG 12 5 4 10 7 7 26 16 C 7 269 M4A3E8 (76mm) HVSS 76 L52,2*LMG 9 5 4 10 7 7 28 20 C 7 253 M4A3 (105mm) HVSS 105 L22,2*LMG 9 5 4 9 6 6 28 20 C 10 155 M4 POA-CWS 75-HI F/Thr,2*LMG 8 5 4 9 6 6 26 16 C 3 304 M4A3E2 (75mm) 'Jumbo' 75 L40,2*LMG 16 7 3 18 15 15 22 12 C 7 332 M4A3E2 (76mm) 'Jum 76 L52,2*LMG 16 7 3 18 15 15 22 12 C 7 354 M26 'Pershing' 90 L53,2*LMG 16 8 5 13 9 9 20 12 D 8

bo'

PV SELF PROPELLED GUNS ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 154 M8 HMG `Scott' 75 L16,HMG 5 3 3 4 3 3 40 20 C 7 202 M7 HMG `Priest' 105 L22,HMG 7 2 2 6 2 2 25 15 C 7 241 M10 GMC `Wolverine' 76 L52,HMG 6 3 3 8 3 3 30 20 C 6 215 M18 GMC `Hellcat' 76 L52,HMG 2 2 2 3 2 2 50 24 C 6 314 M36 GMC `Jackson' 90 L53,HMG 6 3 3 8 3 3 30 18 C 7 337 M36B2 GMC `Jackson' 90L53,HMG,LMG 9 5 4 8 3 3 26 16 C 7 123 M3 GMC 75 L40 1 1 1 1 - - 40 16 C 5 92 T30 HMC 75 L16 1 1 1 1 - - 44 17 C 5 138 T19 HMC 105 L22 1 1 1 1 - - 40 16 C 7 104 T15 MGMC 37 L54,2*HMG 1 1 1 1 1 - 40 16 C 3 88 M16 MGMC 4 HMG (Quad) 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 3 82 M4A1 & M21 Mtr Carrier 81mm Mortar 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C - 102 LVT(A)1 37 L54,3*LMG 1 1 1 5 3 3 20 12 D 6 136 LVT(A)4 75 L16,HMG 1 1 1 4 3 3 20 12 D 7 PV APC/RECONNAISSANCE ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 94 M8 `Greyhound' 6x6 37 L54,LMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 55 20 C 5 60 M3A1 Sct Car 4x4 HMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 14 C 2 2 89 M20 Scout Car 6x6 HMG 2 2 2 2 2 2 55 22 C 2 1 97 M5A1 Recce HMG 6 3 3 6 3 3 40 25 B 2 70 M2 Half-trk HMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 3 47 M3 Half-trk LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 4 71 M3A1 Half-trk HMG,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 4 76 M3A1 `LMG' Half-trk HMG,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 3 107 M3A1 `MMG' Half-trk HMG,2*MMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 45 19 C 2 78 LVT(A)2 HMG,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 14 D 2 5 83 LVT4 `Buffalo' HMG,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 14 D 2 9 Smoke Dischargers; From 1944 onwards, M24 Chaffee, Medium M4 series, M10, M18, M36, M36B2, M20 & M8 AC were equipped with smoke pots or mortars. (No AFVs equipped prior to 1944.) Radios; All AFVs equipped as standard. One Man Turrets; none USA PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 38 37mm L54 M3A1 US Canister ‘42+ A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 73 57mm L50 M1 B (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) 4 (HE 1944+) 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 5 5 +10pp -> 57 11) (11) (10) (10) (8) (6) (6) (5) mm L50 APDS ( 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 74 75mm L31 M2 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 5 Smk,WP ‘44+ 9 9 8 7 7 6 5 5 4 3 90 75mm L40 M3 * (11) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (5) * Smk,WP ‘44+ 10 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 6 6 113 76mm L52 3” M5 B (11) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (6) 5 Smk ‘45+ 13 12 12 11 10 9 9 8 8 6 +14pp -> 76mm L52 HVAP (11) (12) (11) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) 16 15 14 13 12 10 9 7 151 90mm L53 M1A1, M2 C (11) (12) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 8 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 11 10 +4 -> 11) (12) (12) (11) (9) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 3pp 90mm L53 HVAP ( 23 21 19 18 17 15 13 12 10 8 PV Howitzers/ Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 40 57mm L27 M18 Recoilless A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 4 No gun shield - - - - - -> 57mm L27 M18 Recoilless HEAT (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 7 7 7 7 7 55 75mm L28 M20 Recoilless A (11) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) No Gnshld 5 WP - - - - - - - -> 75mm L28 M20 Recoilless HEAT (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 9 9 9 9 9 51 75mm L16 M1A1 Pack A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) No Gnshld 5 WP,Canistr - - - - - - - -> 75mm L16 M1A1 Pack HEAT (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) 8 8 8 8 8 68 75mm L34 M1917 B (11) (10) (10) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 WP 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 4 4 3 93 105mm L16 M3 No Gun Shield C (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk, WP - - - - - - - - -> 105mm L16 M3 HEAT (8) (8) (7) (7) (5) (5) 11 11 11 11 11 11 92 105mm L22 M2A1 C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk, WP

- - - - - - - - - -> (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 105mm L22 M2A1 HEAT C 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 39 37m 12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) (No g/sh eld) 2 5 5 4 4 3 3

m L54 AA M1A1 B ( i

Hungary PV HUNGARY/RUMANIA Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Softskins Rd C/C in teams 13 Daimler ADGR, Tatra T92 Light Truck 6x4 B 40 15 2 B 14 Botund 38M Light Truck 6x4 B 40 17 3 B 28 Raba Medium Truck 6x4 C 45 16 9 C

HUNGARY Armor PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP

61 38M Toldi I-II 20 L105,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 31 16 C 5 88 38M Toldi IIa 40 L51,LMG 4 1 1 2 1 1 31 16 C 7 116 42M Toldi III 40 L51,LMG 6 2 1 4 3 1 31 16 C 7 131 40M Turan I 40 L51,2*LMG 6 3 2 5 3 2 29 17 C 5 141 43M Turan II 75 L21,2*LMG 6 3 2 5 3 2 29 17 C 7 144 40/43M Zrinyl II 105 L20 9 3 2 8 3 2 27 15 C 8 85 40M Nimrod 40 L56 AA 3 1 1 1 1 1 32 18 C 4 50 39M Csaba 20 L105,LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 50 15 C 5 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped. Radios; Turan I & II, 42M Toldi, 40/43M Zrinyi & 40M Nimrod were equipped as standard. For 38M Toldi & 39M Csaba, only platoon & company commands were radio equipped. (+10 PV in this case) One Man Turrets; 39M Csaba. HUNGARY PV Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 20 20mm L105 S18-1000 A (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) 2 No gun shield 4 3 2 2 2 35 40mm L51 Skoda * (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) * 6 6 5 5 4 3 44 75mm L21 41M * (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) * Smk 7 6 6 5 4 4 3 58 105mm L20 40M C (10) (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (7) (6) (5) 7 Smk 8 7 7 6 5 4 4 4 3 +28pg -> 105mm L20 40M HEAT ‘43+ (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) (5) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 44 40mm L56 AA Bofors B (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 2 6 5 5 4 4 3 +22pp StGt 41 HEAT ‘42 5 (Muzzle-loaded Spigot Grenade) 18 18

(10) (6)

Poland PV POLISH/FINNISH Softskins Description Drive Size Speed Capacity Tow Rd C/C in teams 7 Sokol 200 & 600 Motorcycle x 3 - A 50 17 1 - 8 Sokol 1000 M/cycle Sidecar x 2 - A 45 12 1 - 7 Poski-Fiat 508/518 Light Car 4x4 B 38 10 1 - 12 Ursus A Light Truck 4x2 C 35 9 4 B 18 Poski-Fiat 621 Medium Truck 4x2 C 33 8 6 B 10 C2P Lt Tractor trk B 30 16 0 B 12 C7P Medium Tractor trk C 22 11 0 D POLISH Armor PV AFV NAME ARMAMENT HF HS HR TF TS TR Rd CC Sz FO CAP 33 TK/TKS LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 14 B 3 39 TK/TKSz 20 L55 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 14 B 4 36 VAU 33 dw 2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 C 4 50 VAU 33 jw 47 L12,LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 12 C 6 39 7TP dw 2 LMG 2 1 1 1 1 1 20 12 C 4 78 7TP jw 37 L45,LMG 2 1 1 2 2 2 20 12 C 6 51 Ursus wz 29 4x2 37 L22,2*LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 22 8 C 6 31 Ursus wz 34 (a) 4x2 LMG 1 1 1 1 1 1 34 10 C 4 33 Ursus wz 34 (b) 4x2 37 L22 1 1 1 1 1 1 34 10 C 7 Smoke Dischargers; No AFVs equipped Radios; No AFVs equipped One Man Turrets; VAU 33 dw, 7TP dw, Ursus 34. POL PV AT/Tank Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES

AND

13 20mm L55 FK * (11) (10) (8) (6) to-hti chance * 3 2 2 2 penetration 11 37mm L22 SA mle 16 * (10) (9) (6) * 3 2 2 33 37mm L45 Bofors A (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) (5) 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 14 47m (11) (9) (7) (5) * m L12 QF * 3 3 2 2 PV Howitzers/ Field Guns Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 31 65mm L20 mle 06 A (9) (9) (8) (7) (6) (5) (No g/shield) 4 (Horsedrawn) - - - - - - 36 75mm L15 vz 15 A (9) (9) (8) (8) (7) (6) (5) 5 (Horsedrawn) - - - - - - - PV AA/Automatic Cannon Size 20 40 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 FO NOTES 24 20mm L62 AA Madsen CHM A (12) (11) (10) (7) (5) 1 No gun shield 3 2 2 2 2 44 40m 12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (7) 3 No g m L56 AA Bofors B ( un shield 6 5 5 4 4 3

119

Anti-Tank Fire Variations (page 30) Add to or deduct from the gun's base to-hit chance; -1 Target just came into sight. -1 Target seen for less than half of turn -1 Target moving over 15cm to or from firer, OR -1 Target moving upto 15cm across LOS (line of sight), OR -2 Target moving 15cm+ across LOS, Turreted guns only

(all guns capable of traversing 360º) OR -3 Target moving 15cm+ across LOS, Non-turreted guns

(ie. SPs, AT guns, field guns, howitzers, infantry guns) -2 Target is partially concealed (33-66%) by hard cover -4 Target is hull-down or concealed 66%+ by hard cover +1 Target is Size `D' -1 Target is Size `B' -2 Target is Size `A' +1 Second & subsequent shots at moving target (accumulative, max of +3) Lost if firer

moves or changes target. +2

When AFV target has been penetrated by AP, APCR, APDS, HVAP, HEAT or been hit with an HE round, roll 3D6, add/deduct variations according to calibre, ammunition, target type and refer to table

Second & subsequent shots at stationary target (accumulative, max of + 6) Lost if firer moves, engages another target.

+1 If firing a HEAT shell (see page 30 for * notes on this) -1 Firer's turret/hull traversed over half maximum this turn -4 Firing at a Muzzle-flash -2 Firer moved over 5cm +1 For each additional barrel of an AA/automatic cannon -2 If AFV's commander has been killed +1 Firer is Veteran -1 Firer is Conscript Note - AFVs cannot fire if they have expended over half their movement during a turn. Penetration Effects Table; (page 31)

for a damage result; Penetration Effects Table; Result Effect On Target 14 or more Destroyed 11-13 Hull/Gun Damaged 9-10 Stunned 2 Moves 7-8 Stunned 16 or less No Effect

Move

Destroyed - AFV is completely knocked out of action. Hull/Gun Damaged - if hull is hit, AFV is immobilized. - if turret/superstructure is hit, all main armament (and traversing) is disabled. Stunned 2 Moves - AFV cannot move, fire or observe for 2 moves Stunned 1 Move - AFV cannot move, fire or observe for 1 moves No Effect - shell inflicts negligible damage Same Result Received Second Time in the Same or Subsequent Turn – take the next result up. Penetration Effects Table Variations for AP, AP, APCR, APDS, HVAP, HEAT ammunition +6 140-155mm gun (except HEAT) +5 122-130mm gun (except HEAT) +3 94-115 gun (except HEAT) +2 84-90mm gun (except HEAT) +0 65-76mm gun (except HEAT) -1 50-57mm gun (except HEAT) -3 37-47mm gun (except HEAT) -4 0-35mm gun (except HEAT) -4 HEAT ammunition & all Infantry AT weapons +3 penetrated 3-5 over target's armor level +6 penetrated 6+ over target's armor level Penetration Effects Table Variations for High Explosive (HE) rounds +2 160mm+ gun +0 140-155mm gun -1 122-130mm gun -3 94-115 gun -5 84-90mm gun -7 65-76mm gun * +2 Target is Light AFV +2 Target AFV has Open Top, Sides or Rear (PLUS below +1 if relevant) +1

Target AFV has open Sides or Rear and firing at it from its open side or rear arc

Guns below 65mm calibre have no effect. * Direct Area Fire (page 32) Beaten Zone Radii Gun/Howitzer Calibre Beaten Zone Radius * 156mm+ Gun 12cm 140-155mm Gun 10cm 122-130mm Gun 9cm 94-115 Gun 8cm 84-90mm Gun 7cm 65-76mm Gun 6cm 57mm Gun 5cm 45-50mm Gun 4cm 30-42mm Gun 3cm * Note this is the radius, so the diameter is double this.

Direct Area Fire Variations (page 32) Add to or deduct from the gun's base to-hit chance; +5 156mm+ Gun firing +4 140-155mm Gun firing +3 122-130mm Gun firing +2 94-115 Gun firing +1 84-90mm Gun firing +0 65-76mm Gun firing -1 57mm Gun firing -2 45-50mm Gun firing -3 30-42mm Gun firing +1 Firer is Veteran -1 Firer is Conscript +2 Target is Size `D' +1 Target is Size `C' -2 Target is within Partial or Soft cover (includes AFVs with

open sides, back & top, and ‘tank riders’) -4 Target is within/behind Hard-cover (includes AFVs with

open back & top) -5 Target is Dug-in/Entrenched (includes AFVs with open

top) -6 Target is in Fortifications -1 Target moving upto 10cm across LOS or over 10cm -1 Target observed for half turn or less -2 Speculative Fire; Target unobserved

-2 Firer moved over 5cm -1 Firing Smoke -2 Firing White Phosphorous +1 2nd & subsequent turns firing at same POA (max +3)# (#) Second & subsequent turn bonuses are lost if firer moves or engages another target POA. ARTILLERY BEATEN ZONES (page 35)

GUNS-HOWITZERS TABLE PV per Size BZR 2 Guns * Range Light: 60-80mm 7cm 80 800cm

85-90mm 9cm 120 950cm

m

Medium: 95-120mm 12cm 180 1000cm 122-135mm 14cm 240 1200cm Heavy: 140-155mm 16cm 300 1400cm 160-199m 18cm 350 2100cm 200mm+ 20cm 400 2800cm MORTARS TABLE PV per Range Size BZR mortar Min Max Crew 45 - 60mm # 3cm 15 15cm 55cm 1 team 76 - 82mm # 6cm 45 30cm 150cm 1 team 90 - 107mm 9cm 70 60cm 250cm 2 teams 120mm 15cm 100 120cm 350cm 2 t150 - 160mm 18cm 180 160cm 300cm 3 teams

eams

DICING FOR UNITS WITHIN A BEATEN ZONE (page 37) The base chance for an artillery/mortar battery or individual mortar to hit a target within a Beaten Zone is ‘8’. Subtract the relevant variations to the base to-hit chance to get the adjusted to-hit chance, and then roll 3D6. If number rolled is equal to or under the adjusted number’, the target has been hit. Indirect Fire To-Hit Variations: A base of 8, minus these variations: - 2 if target is AFV - 1 if target was within BZR for less than whole move, due to it moving; or target is not completely within BZR - 1 if firer is mortar firing at target first time - 1 if target in hard cover, or wooden building (does not count if firing gun is 122mm+) +1 if battery/platoon has 2 pairs of guns, or 2 mortars +2 if battery/platoon has 3 pairs of guns, or 3 mortars +3 if battery/platoon has 4 or more pairs of guns, or 4 or more mortars If target or is entrenched, dug-in, or in fox hole, or in a brick/stone building and - 1 if firing gun/mortar is 122mm+ - 2 if firing gun/mortar is 85mm – 120mm - 3 if firing gun/mortar is 80mm or below If target is in a pillbox, bunker, dugout and - 2 and if firing gun/mortar is 140mm+ - 3 if firing gun/mortar is 85mm – 135mm No effect! if firing gun/mortar is 65 - 80mm No effect! if firing gun/mortar is 47 - 60mm Note: Hard cover is defined here as being sandbags, gully, ditch, wooden buildings, infantry/guns in woods, etc. and provides some form of all round (or almost all round) protection. Command Radius to Parent HQ is (page 7) no radios * 20cm out of sight or 40cm insight ** radios 100cm for German/Allied or 60cm for Soviet/Axis/others ** Halve this range if measuring range from infantry platoon HQs to their squads/sections, or, when measuring range from ‘closed-down’ AFVs to their platoon/battery HQ AFV

Company HQ Movement Pips (page 7) During Phase B ‘Determine Company HQ movement pips’ players throw 1D6 per Company HQ, and then modify that dice roll according to what troop class that company is. See below table. Co. HQ Movement Pips Modification Table (1D6) Veteran Regular Conscript Die roll of 1 - re-roll * Die roll as is Die roll of 1 as is Die roll of 2 - re-roll * Die roll as is Die roll of 2 as is Die roll of 3 as is Die roll as is Die roll of 3 as is Die roll of 4 as is Die roll as is Die roll of 4 as is Die roll of 5 as is Die roll as is Die roll of 5 – re-roll * Di

e roll of 6 as is Die roll as is Die roll of 6 – re-roll *

The infantry weapons of this table are provided here for vehicle mounted weapons, and, so that you can make your own squads should there be some that we have not covered in the army lists. The army lists provide fire

rs infantry unit’s antry

Infantry Teams/Weapons Fire Factors Table (page 15)

facto for all inf weapons. Range in cm PV Weapon CQC 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160 7 Rifle Team 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 10 US Rifle/Carbine Team 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 13 Assault Rifle Team 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 10 SMG Team 6 6 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 23 Platoon HQ Team 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - 34 Company + HQ Team 5 4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 30 FAO/FAC Team 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - * Open Topped AFV Crew 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 13 LMG Team (mag) 2 3 4 5 4 4 3 2 1 - - - - 14 US LMG Team (mag) 4 4 5 6 5 5 4 2 1 - - - - 15 LMG Team (belt) ** 2 4 5 7 6 5 4 3 1 1 1 - - 3 + AT Weapon Team *** 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - 26 MMG 2 8 14 16 14 12 9 6 5 4 2 2 1 30 HMG 3 6 10 12 12 12 11 10 8 6 5 4 2 8 AFV LMG (mag) - 3 4 4 4 4 3 2 1 - - - - 12 AFV LMG (belt) - 4 5 7 6 5 4 3 1 1 1 - - **** 20/25mm AA Cannon - 5 7 9 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 -

V Flamethrowers CQC 5 10 15 P

26 Flame Thrower (AFV) - 50 27 8 (UK/USA)

15 Flame Thrower Team (Man) 16 16 - - Engineers only 15 Flame Thrower (AFV) - 30 16 - (Soviet/Axis)

Figures in the above table are fire factors for each team/weapon. (adding a radio to an HQ costs + 20 PV) * PV not applicable, cannot be purchased separately. Applies to AFVs with open tops, sides or rear. ** LMG Team (belt) on foot cannot fire if it moved. (Does not apply to vehicle mounted belt fed LMGs.) *** AT Weapon Teams cost 3 points plus the point value of the AT weapon. **** Refer to Gun Charts for PV

120

Infantry Casualty Table (page 16)

Final Fire Factors Variation 1+ 3+ 5+ 7+ 10+ 15+ 20+ 30+ 40+ 50+ 60+ 70+ 80+ 100+ +7 2 2 3 5 6 9 12 18 24 30 35 41 47 59 +6 1 2 3 4 6 8 11 16 21 27 32 37 42 53 +5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 14 19 23 28 33 37 46 +4 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 40 +3 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 11 14 17 21 24 28 34 +2 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 9 12 15 18 21 23 29 +1 0 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 16 -1 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 16 -2 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 13 -3 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 -4 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 8 -5 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 -6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 -7 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 -8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 -9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Variables over +7 treat as +7. Variables under –9 treat as –9. Cross reference Final Variation total with fire factors to find out how many teams are casualties. Infantry Weapons Direct Fire Variations: (row shifts, ie, up or down) (page 16) Target Unit/s Variations Firing Unit/s Variations -2 Target behind soft/partial cover -3 Firer moved up to half -6 Target behind Hard Cover -2 Firer under covering fire -8 Target in fortifications +2 Firer is veteran -1 Target moving over 5cm -2 Firer is conscript -2 Target moving over 10cm -5 Firer doing speculative or covering fire -2 Target is prone infantry -3 Firing at muzzleflash +1 Target is in softskin vehicle +2 Each extra barrel firing -3 for each ‘team’ firing crew has lost as casualties -3 Firer is AFV firing from a One Man Turret Chance Factor: Throw 1D6 1,2 = -1 3,4 = 0 5,6 = +1

Close Quarters Combat Variations: (row shifts, ie, up or down) (page 18) et

Targ Unit/s Variations Your nit/s Variations U -1 Enemy unit in/behind Soft-cover +4 if unit attacks enemy from entirely behind its rear edge -5 Enemy unit in/behind hardcover/buildings -3 if unit pinned or covered in smoke -7 Enemy in fortifications -2 if unit riding AFV or vehicle -1 Enemy charged into CQC this turn +2 if unit is Veteran +1 Enemy unit disengaging -2 if unit is Conscript +1 unit is Assault Engineer +1 unit is mounted/cavalry -3 f

or each ‘team’ attacking crew has lost as casualties

Chance Factor: Throw 1D6 1,2 = -1 3,4 = 0 5,6 = +1

Infantry AT Weapons Table (page 20)

Range in Cm Crew Sz Country

ams PV Anti-Tank Rifles 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 In Te Of Origin

D 41 1 Soviet

97 1 Japan

s

8 7.9mm wz35 (%) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) 1 Poland Pen 3 3 3 2 2 2 13 7.9mm PzB 38/39 (%) (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) 1 Germany Pen 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 16 14.5mm PTR (%) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (9) (8) (6) Pen 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 20 20mm S18-1000 (%) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (10) (8) (7) 1 Various Pen 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 18 20mm Type (%) (13) (12) (12) (11) (11) (10) (9) (8) Pen 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 13 20mm Lathl (%) (12) (11) (10) (10) (9) (9) (8) (7) 1 Finland Pen 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 10 13.9mm Boy (%) (12) (12) (11) (10) (9) (8) (7) 1 UK Pen 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

y Range in Cm Crew Sz CountrPV HEAT 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 In Teams Of Origin 6 PIAT 11) (7) ** UK (Apr 8 8

( ‘43+)

10 10 10 ( (1944+)

17 2.36” Bazooka (12) (10) (8) 1 USA (Nov ‘42+)

36 Panzerschreck 12) (11) (9) (7) 1 Germany 16 16 16 16 8 Panzerfaust 30/60 (10) * Germany (Aug ‘43+) 18 16 Panzerfaust 100 (10) (7) * Germany(June ‘44+) 18 18 24 Panzerfaust 150 10) (9) (7) * Germany 18 18 18

( (Jan ‘45+)

3 Molotov Cocktail (9) Hand Thrown * Soviet/Finnish See Molotov Cocktail Rules # FlamethrowerSee Flamethrower Rules * Various 3 AT Grenade Early (9) Hand Thrown * Various 3

Various

-HE hrown ious

6 AT Grenade Late (9) Hand Thrown * 8 3 AT Grenade (9) Hand T * Var Use Penetration Table as 75mm HE 8 AT Magnetic Mine (%) (10) Range is 0cm. Base must contact AFV * Germany Pen 12 Engineers only

4 AT Rifle Grnde 9) (7) * Early 3 3

( Various (‘40+)

( Various (‘43+)

Rifl ious

9 AT Rifle Grnde 10) (9) (7) * Late 7 7 7 6 AP e Grnde (10) (8) (6) * Var Use Direct HE Fire rules: BZR = 3cm (per lists) Note: Panzerschreck, Panzerfaust, Bazooka, PIAT, ATMM, AT-HE all have a 75mm HE equivalent. OBSERVATION TABLE: (all Ranges are in ‘cm’) (page 8) Terrain That Target is in or behind Target Size A B C D

ush, Long Grass Open terrain or desert 100 160 240 300 Low or Scattered Br 30 80 200 270 Hedge, Wall, Ruins 20 40 140 200 Thick Woods – in outer 5cm 10 20 60 90

b erved f outside “ “ - over 5cm inside cannot e obs rom wood “ “ - observer & target inside 10 15 30 40 Thin Woods – in outer 10cm 20 30 100 160 “ “ - over 10cm inside cannot e obs rom wood “ “ - observer & target inside 15 25 40 80

b erved f outside

Orchard – in outer 15cm 30 40 140 180 “ - over 15cm inside cannot e obs rom ch “ - observer & target inside 25 30 70 90

b erved f outside or ard

Thick Treeline or Bocage 20 40 100 140 Thin Treeline 40 60 180 240

SIDE Building, House, Shed 10 20 60 80 IN Modifiers: x ½ if target is camoflaged, or is prone infantry in the open, brush, woods, treeline, orchard x ½ if target is dug-in or hull-down x ½ if observer is a closed-down AFV x 2/3 if observer is moving over 5cm this turn x 2 if target fired or moved over 5cm this turn x 1.5 if obverser has height advantage (3+ floors up) x ½ if target is within/behind artillery BZR

If observer is over 5cm inside a thick wood, over 10cm inside a thin wood, or over 15cm inside an orchard, it cannot see out at all. Muzzle-Flash Observation Ranges: (all Ranges are in ‘cm’) (page 9) Weapon Calibre Exact General Location Location

Infantry Weapons 30 60 Bazooka/Pzfst/Pzrschreck 40 80 20mm – 47mm 60 100 50mm – 82mm 90 150 85mm – 122mm 120 200

250 122mm+ 150

V

oll 2D6 and add/subtract the following;

2 Unit is "Poor" status

2 For each sub-unit * disabled/destroyed or Retreating.

-6 AFV disabled or damaged. -1 AFV/s in a `built up' area, that is, actually amongst buildings.

Platoon out of CR of parent HQ) *** -2 Unit under flame or aircraft attack. -2 Unit subjected to indirect fire (-1 for Mortars) -2 Unit is pinned or has lost CQC this move.

cm) and have no effective AT weapons.

+2 Unit defending from Pill box or Bunkers Morale Reaction Table; (page 24)

Note: a PIAT has no muzzle flash! Modifiers: x ½ if observer is in closed-down AFx ½ if observer is moving over 5cm x 1/3 if firing weapon is a mortar x ½ if target’s position is camouflaged. See camouflage rules. Morale Test Variations: (page 23) R +2 Unit is "Elite" status - -3 for each ‘team’ of a squad/section/crew lost as casualties (only used when testing the morale of a squad/section/crew) -1 For each sub-unit * Shaken result - +1 AFV Crew/Unit ** -2 AFV’s head-up commander has been killed.

-1 Visibility is low due to poor weather or in smoke -3 Unit outside Command Radius of parent HQ. (unless Recon

-2 Infantry Unit faced with AFVs (within 20-2 Unit's HQ is Destroyed or Retreating. +1 Unit defending hill or woods +1 Unit defending is dug-in or within buildings

Modified Dice Roll Result +3 or higher OK +2 Shaken +1 Shaken 0 or below Retreat Morale Status; OK; Unit morale good. Continue to follow orders. Shaken; Give the unit a Shaken counter. Its affects are: • The unit will defend the position it currently occupies, or • The unit has the option to withdraw from its defended position at any time. • If enemy AFVs approach to within 40cm of the unit's position (or 20cm if enemy infantry), on its

next turn the unit must evacuate the position and withdraw towards a safer location. No movement pips are re

• Movement towards enemy forces is not permitted.

`Safe Position' - refers to any position which a unit can occupy without threat of being observed or ected to fire from enemy units.

• Unit evacuates its current position immediately (during the movement phase) and moves directly towards its own rear board edge if no enemy forces intervening, or otherwise, directly away from threat

• No firing is permitted by unit while retreating.

Vehicle Movement Restrictions Table (

quired. • Any withdrawal by the unit must be conducted away from enemy forces with return fire only until a

new safe position is reached.

`Return fire only' - means the effected unit is restricted to firing upon enemy forces which have directly fire upon the unit itself!

subj Retreat; Give the unit a Retreat counter. Its affects are:

ening enemy forces. • Unit continues to retreat unless rallied by its own HQ, even if this takes it off the board. If it leaves

the board, it is considered lost as casualties. • If a unit with this morale result is within, or comes within, 20cm of enemy forces, it will surrender

immediately. If it takes further casualties from enemy forces within 60cm, it also surrenders immediately. Remove surrendered forces from the board.

• Gun crews with guns too heavy to be manhandled are simply removed as casualties upon receiving a retreat result.

page 25)

Vehicle Type Terrain Fully Semi 6 & 8 4 x 4 4 x 2 Motor

TrackedTracked Wheeled Wheeled Wheeled Cycle Towing Off-Road x1 x1 x2/3 x1/2 x1/4 - Thick Woods x2/3 x1/2 x1/3 x1/4 - - Thin Woods x1 x1 x2/3 x1/2 x1/4 x1/4 Orchards x1 x3/4 x2/3 x2/3 x1/2 x1/3 Low brush/Scrub x1 x1 x1 x2/3 x1/2 x1/3 Mud/Sand * x2/3 x1/2 x1/3 x1/4 x1/5 x1/5 Rubble x1/3 x1/4 - - - - Marsh * x1/3 - - - - - * Bogging (1D6) 7+ 6+ 5+ 4+ 3+ 2+ Add to bogging die roll: +1 if Size D AFVs or vehicles # +1 if traversing Marsh -1 if amphibious AFV or veh -1 crossing fordable river

icle

# For T-34, KV, IS, Panther, and Pz VI chasis vehicles, if a 7+ is thrown, throw 1D6 again. If 1, 2 or 3 is thrown, the vehicle is not bogged. Spec al Note: * Vehicle types which enter terrain marked as "-" (not traversable) become automatically bogged.

i

AFV/Gun Crew/Passenger Casualties Table (page 30)

• Horse teams are treated as 4x2 vehicles.

AFV/Gun Crew/Passenger Casualties Table Gun Size Firing 2D6

PzFaust, Pzschreck 7 AT, Bazooka 6

122mm+ 11 84 - 115mm 10 65 - 76mm 8 45 – 57mm 7 30 – 42mm 6 0 – 28mm, grenades 5

PI

121

(Photocopy & Cut-Out) Morale Shaken 1 Turn

Morale Shaken 1 Turn

Morale Shaken 1 Turn

Morale Shaken 2 Turns

Morale Shaken 2 Turns

Morale Shaken 2 Turns

Morale Shaken 3 Turns

Morale Shaken 3 Turns

Morale Shaken 4 Turns

Morale Shaken 4 Turns

Morale Shaken 5 Turns

Morale Shaken 5 Turns

Morale Shaken 6 Turns

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Morale Retreat

Covering Fire 7

Covering

Fire 1

Covering

Fire 1

Covering

Fire 2

Covering

Fire 2

Covering

Fire 3

Covering

Fire 3

Covering

Fire 4

Covering

Fire 4

Covering

Fire 5

Covering

Fire 5

Covering

Fire 6

Covering

Fire 6

Covering

Fire 7

POA

1

POA

1

POA

2

POA

2

POA

3

POA

3

POA

4

POA

4

POA

5

POA

5

POA

6

POA

6

Morale Shaken

POA

7

POA

7

POA

8

POA

8

POA

9

POA

9

POA 10

POA 10

POA 11

POA 11

POA 12

POA 12

Morale Shaken

POA 13

POA 13

POA 14

POA 14

POA 15

POA 15

POA 16

POA 16

POA 17

POA 17

POA 18

POA 18

Morale Shaken

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Gun

Damage

Immob.

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Immob

Dug-in

Dug-in.

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 1 Move

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Stunned 2 Moves

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Pinned

Dug-in

Dug-in

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

1 Team

Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

2 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

3 Teams Casaulty

Dug-in

Dug-in

122

Errata This version of Panzerfaust Armored First 4th Edition is 1.02, and it contains a few changes from the previous 1.01 version. For those with 1.01 those changes are:

2. The following Direct Fire Variation has been added:

3. The following is an addition to the rules. You will find it on page 32.

1. The following Direct Fire Variations have been removed: -1 Firing HE ammunition -1 Firing Recoilless Gun

+1 If firing a HEAT shell (fixes an error in HEAT to-hit chances)* * Except for the German 80mm L37 PAW 600 and 88mm RPzBGr guns, which don’t include the error.

Direct Area Fire Minimum Range No gun can fire Direct Area Fire at targets within its Beaten Zone Radius. (ie, it could shell itself that way!) This represents the guns inability to depress low enough to shoot at infantry targets that are too close. 4. Rules for infantry digging-in: The following is an addition to the rules. You will find it on page 39. Infantry and infantry heavy weapons teams can dig-in during a game, making fox holes or simple slit trenches. (AFVs or guns cannot be dug-in during during the game, it would take too long. These must be purchased as defenses before the game.) You cannot dig-in on roads, in buildings, in rubble, or on any other concrete surface. It takes 1 team 3 turns to dig itself in. It cannot doing anything else while doing so, and counts as moving. A whole squad or heavy weapons section must dig-in at the same time. Once dug-in, just place a counter that says 'dug-in' next to the team/squad.

-1 if unit moved under half to enter CQC

5. Change to ‘Penetration Effects Table - Variations for High Explosive (HE) rounds -5 84-90mm gun (was -4) -7 65-76mm gun (was -5) 6. The following bullets from “Your Unit Variations” in the Close Quarters Combat Variations on page 18 were removed

-3 if unit moved over half to enter CQC the descriptions for them on page 19 were also removed 7. Clarification on Moving Units and Groups Normally if a single order is given to a whole platoon or a whole company, the whole platoon or company must follow this order. However, please note that this obviously does not include support weapons (or support weapon units) that have been setup, these being MMGs, HMGs, mortars, AT or field guns, AT rifles, Panzerschreks, bazookas, and piats. (unless you want the order to include them, of course! But in which case they have to start packing up their weapon.)

Some Questions and Answers 1. What happens if AFVs overrun an infantry position? AFVs can try to over run any infantry unit if during their movement, the infantry unit is within range to 'drive' over, and is not in terrain inaccessible to the AFV. (The infantry should move out of the way in their own movement phase if worried!) However, presuming the infantry unit has AT weapons, it will fire first if it did not move or moved less than the AFV. If the AFVs survive the firing and subsequent morale, they can drive over the infantry position. If the infantry teams are one base width apart from

each other however, it is unlikely that an AFV can catch more than 1 team, 2 at the most. If the infantry are in the open, they would simply be removed as casualties. However, if dug in, the infantry simply put their heads down and let the AFVs pass over the top.

Note that you cannot do CQC with AFVs unless they have an open top, sides or rear.

4. If an AFV has a hole put in it which stuns it, is it classed as damaged for morale purposes?

5. When calling down artillery on a POA, is the +1 variation for a creeping barrage cumulative?

No, you do not count the one-over-armor. 11 pen vs 8 armor = penetration by 3.

If the AFV is open topped, side or rear, yes. If not, then no, AT weapons would have to be used.

A new rule presented here is that if the infantry movement is higher in the terrain they are in, than the AFV's movement in that terrain, then the infantry simply move aside and let the AFV pass. eg, 10cm Cross Country speed AFV in rubble has its movement reduced to 3cm, whereas infantry are 5cm.

2. Can AFV's drive through smoke screens? Yes, all things can move through smoke screens. 3. Once an AFV is destroyed, does it block line of sight to another vehicle? Yes, the same as before destroyed.

A stunned AFV is not necessarily penetrated, maybe the shell was a dud, hit at a bad angle, or was deflected. But it still shook up the crew. So the AFV does not count as damaged.

No, not accumulative. 6. When you penetrate an AFV do you count the one over armour to prenetrate before you add the bonus for penetration? ie Armour of 8, penetration of 11, do you get the bonus then or does it have to be 12 penetration?

7. Do bonuses for shooting at a target (like veteran or second and subsequent shot) give you the edge over your opponent, or is it just the straight fire order every time? Bonuses are not specifically relevant, however troop classes are. (which are what the bonuses kinda relate to anyway.) See page 6 under G: Resolve Infantry Fire & Direct Fire. eg If two units have the same FO and same situation, the one with a better troop class fires first. eg veterans fire before regulars. If two units with the same troop class and same FO fire at each other, conduct their firing simultaneously, with simultaneous results. Remember that units which do less always fire before those which do more. eg a stationary unit always fires before a unit which has moved. 8. If you’re in a thin wood over 10cm in can you see out as normal? If observer is over 5cm inside a thick wood, over 10cm inside a thin wood, or over 15cm inside an orchard, it cannot see out at all. 9. Can infantry assault an AFV in hand to hand using whatever is at hand (bayonet, hand grenades etc) to destroy or damage it?

10. Do you do a morale check as soon as damage or casualities are taken, or do you wait until the end of that turn? Morale tests are done as soon as a situation is completed, eg, when a platoon of 5 tanks is fired at during a particular phase of the turn, perhaps the beginning, and it takes damage/losses, test its morale. It may be fired at again at the end of the turn. You may have to test it again.

A 3,000 Point 1943 Soviet Force, designed for an encounter game. Consists of four companies, all Reliable Conscripts. Large, clumsy, inaccurate, but with OK morale, it relies upon numbers to win a game. Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Edition is a set of tactical World War Two Miniatures Wargames rules, for use with 1:76th, 1:72nd or 15mm scale models, for two or more players. The rules also include a conversion to use them with 1:300th scale.

All AFVs, vehicles, guns, and infantry heavy weapons are represented by single models.

These are the troop classes and morale ratings that we used in our Second Edition of these rules, which worked better than the rigid ones in the Third Edition.

Note that the army lists provide strict organisational lists which players must follow when purchasing these platoons and companies, and there are strict guidelines governing how to purchase regimental, battalion and company support units.

Panzerfaust Armored Fist has been developed since 1982 with the strict policy of playability and simplicity without loss of detail. Tactical Scale:

For infantry we took our queue from German Panzer Grenadiers and US Marines. The Panzer Grenadiers operated their squads in two halves, fire teams in effect, each half built around an MG34/42 LMG. The US Marines organised their squads into three fire teams, the core of each team being their BAR LMG. Hence in Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Ed, all infantry squads are based and operate as fire teams, which greatly speeds up movement, and simplifies casualty removal.

The rules include a simple and effective command control system

Where each company HQ receives a movement dice per turn. Veteran troops receive bonuses while conscripts are penalised.

This results in veteran German formations out manoeuvring slow, clumsy conscript Soviet formations.

Veterans will frequently give orders to individual tanks or platoons, while conscripts will often be forced to give a single order to an entire company.

Troop Classes and Morale Ratings

All units in Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Ed are classified into one of three classes according to training, experience, and quality of equipment, and one of three morale ratings, which reflects their motivation to fight.

However, all nations are given compulsory troop classes and morale ratings, which gives each nation the correct historical flavor.

Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Ed also features a simple yet brutal morale system.

Once units start losing sub-units due to casualties or poor morale results, their own morale tends to collapse quickly.

However elite troops can withstand the loss of a few sub-units, while poor troops often break upon receiving their first losses.

Detailed AFV charts list almost every AFV and variant that saw action during the war

Each AFV is rated for armor thicknesses on turret and hull, for frontal, rear and side arcs.

Also rated for road and cross country speed and fire order according to crew size and gun calibre.

Detailed gun charts

Include normal and special ammunition types such as AP, HE, HVAP and HEAT.

Plus individual to-hit chances for each weapon and ammunition type.

As well as detailed penetration figures for ranges from 200m to 2,500m.

Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Ed has

44 pages of rules. 67 pages of army lists for thirteen WW2 belligerents,

including Belgium, Britain, Finland, France, Germany, Hungary, Italy, Japan, Poland, Rumania, Soviet, USA Europe and USA Pacific.

Each nation has detailed Equipment lists stating all arms and equipment that they used, including dates of service and point values, Softskin charts, Motorised Gun charts, Armor charts, and Gun charts.

Each weapon or vehicle also has notes with historical background and relevant game information.

Players purchase and field companies:

Though these can be ‘ad-hoc’ companies made up of platoons from different sources. Eg two infantry platoons plus an armored platoon combine to form an ‘ad-hoc’ company.

All units are also rated for their frequency on the battlefield, and you are limited to the number of rarer units you can purchase.

Panzerfaust Armored Fist 4th Ed is a complete set of rules, no other supplements are needed to play. Rules cover infantry weapons, infantry AT weapons, artillery, smoke, observation, muzzle flashes, engineers, cavalry and horse teams, molotov cocktails, Japanese lunge mines, skirt and spaced armor, tank riders, spigot grenades, canister rounds, bore sighting, en portee, artillery forward observers, counter-battery fire, rockets, mines, fortifications, bridges and bridge laying, aircraft, airborne and glider operations, and more! Thankfully, not all the rules are needed each game, only those that are relevant for the game you are playing.

123